WAR DEPARTMENT. - - ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE. No. XX. MILITARY NOTES THE PHILIPPINES /^36y the China Sea and the Indo-Chinese Peninsula. Toward the east is the Pacific. On the north a number of small islands stretch out toward Formosa ; on the south, while (1) THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. GENERAL. The Philippine Ishiiuls form a great part of the vast arclii- pehigo lying southeast of Asia. They were discovered hy Magellan in 1521, but it was not until 156-1 that the group received its present name, in honor of Philip II. In many respects these islands are Spain's best possessions, due to the abundance and variety of products, numerous and good ports, character of inhabitants, and on account of the vicinity of certain countries of eastern Asia, which are now entering upon a stage of civilization and commerce. The group is composed of some 2,000 islands. Many of them are very small, but others are important on account of their size, resources, and population. From the year of discovery until 1542 several expeditions from Si)ain attempted to gain possession of these islands, but all failed. In 1564 another expedition, commanded by Miguel de Legaspi, was dispatched and a footing established in Cebii; the headquarters were later transferred to Luzon, and in 1581 the city of Manila was founded. Various attempts to drive out the Spaniards Avere made during the following years by the Portuguese, Dutch, and Chinese, but all failed. In 1702 Manila was taken and held Ijy the English for a ransom of 1,000,000 pounds sterling. This, however, was never paid, and the islands Avere finally returned to Sx)ain. EXTENT. The archipelago extends from 5° 32' to 19° 38', north lati- tude, and from 117° to 126°, east longitude. It thus covers about 1,000 miles north and south and 600 east and west. (See index map, opposite page 1.) BOUNDARIES. On the north and northwest the islands are separated from China Ijy the China Sea and the Indo-Chinese Peninsula. ToAvard the east is the Pacific. On the north a number of small islands stretch out toward Formosa ; on the south, Avhile (1) 2 NUMBERS AND AREA. a double connection is formed Avitli Borneo by tlie lines of the Palawan, Balabac, and Suln islands, the basin of the Celebes Sea extends for a distance of 300 miles between its sonthern- most island, Mindanao, and the Celebes. Though forming ({uite a distinct group from Indonesia, from which they are sejiarated by two marine abysses (one nearly 2,500 fathoms deep and the other over 2,500 deep), the Philippines are con- nected with the southern lands by three long ridges, partially covered by water. Of these the northwestern is the most reg- ular and best developed. From Mindoro to the northwest point of Borneo, the deepest part of the sill (between Balabac and Bangney) does not exceed 25 fathoms. Balabac Strait, between Paragua and Borneo, is filled with reefs formed by the marine current, which, under the influence of the south- west monsoon, sets strongly toward the Sulu Sea. The second isthmus is formed by the Sulu Archipelago connecting the northeast point of Borneo with the western extremity of Mindanao; Here the shallow channel, through which there is communication from the Sulu to the deeper Celebes Sea, is trav- ersed by a system of alternating currents, over 250 fathoms deep. East of the trough of the Celebes Sea, the peninsula of Minahassa with the Sanguir Archipelago and other islands form a third isthmus, sweeping around to the southernmost l)oint of Mindanao. This ridge is broken by many open- ings, the broadest and deepest of which lies off the coast of Mindanao. NUMBERS AND AREA. The number of islands is not definitely known, but is vari- ously estimated at from 1,200 to 2,000. New ones are being continually added to the maps. Some meml)ers of the vast archipelago, as well as the more remote districts in the larger islands lying beyond the direct control of the Spanish, have remained unexplored. Even the regions governed l)y the Europeans are still but imperfectly known, no methodical and detailed study of the Philippines having yet been made. Present maps and charts are extremely defective, except for the seaboard, in the survey of which the leading maritime nations have cooperated. The principal islands are Luzon, Mindanao, Palawan (Para- gua), Samar, Panay, Mindoro, Leyte, Negros, Cebii, Masbate, Bohol, Catanduanes, Polillo, Marinduque, Tablas, Burias, and Ticao. COAST l.INE, TOPOGKAl'HV, ETC. 3 Luzon, tlie largest, has an area of about -41,000 square miles; Mindanao, the next, about 37,500 square miles; and the five next in size have an area of over 10,000 square miles each. The most reliable estimate places the aggregate land area of the group at 11-4,350 square miles, or equal to the area of Ari- zona. Luzon, upon which the city of Manila is located, is equal in area to the State of Virginia. (OAST LINE. The coast line of all the islands is very irregular and broken, the ocean cutting in and forming many gulfs, bays, isthmuses, and peninsulas. There are long stretches of canals and passages between the islands, but these are not always navigable. Although situated in the region adapted to the growth of corals, the scarcity of this formation is accounted for by the presence of volcanic fires and the occasional deluge of hot water, which prevents the growth of the polyps. TOPOGRAPHY AND OROGRAPHY. The whole surface of the Philippines is essentially moun- tainous, the only plains that occur being alluvial districts at the river mouths and the spaces left by the intersection of the ranges. The principal ranges have a tendency to run north and south, with a certain amount of deflection east and west, as the case may be, so that the orograi:)hic diagram of the archipelago, as a whole, has a similarity to a fan, with north- ern Luzon as its center of radiation. The three lines of par- tially submerged ridges, before mentioned, stretching from Indonesia tow^ard the Philippines, running north and south, continue their main axis, and strike the southern part of the same region at the Saragani Volcano. East of this range is found a broad chain, occupying all the eastern section of Mindanao, which borders on the Pacific. A general survey of the entire orographic system shows that, from the southern point of Mindanao to the northern extremity of Luzon, the relief of all the islands is either in a line with the southern isthmuses or parallel to them. On the other hand the islands of Bohol, Cebii, Negros, and Panay are disposed in a line with, or parallel to, the Sulu Archipelago, while Mindoro and the main section of Luzon form the northeast extension of Paragua and Borneo. Most 4: TOPOGRAPHY AND OROGRAPHY. of the surface appears to he forined of old rocks, especially schists, and, in the north of Luzon, granite. While none of the mountain peaks greatly exceed 8,000 feet in height, Apo, in Mindanao, is over 9,000 feet; Halson, in Mindoro, is over 8,000 feet; and Mayon, in Luzon, over S,-20(). The latter is an active volcano, which has been the scene of several eruptions during the present century. Extinct or active craters are relatively as numerous in the Philippines as in the eastern arcliipelago, and as a consequence of these subterraneous forces earthquakes are frequent and violent. In 1627 one of the most elevated mountains of Cagayan dis- appeared, and on the island of Mindanao, in 1675, a passage was opened to the sea and a vast plain emerged. The more recent of the convulsions occurred in 1863 and in isso. The destruction of property was great, especially in Manila. The island of Luzon is traversed by the great ridge of the Caraballos Mountains, the principal points of which are Lag- sig and Cabalesian. The ridge is divided into tlyee branches. The first, denominated Caraballo Central, or del IVorte, sep- arates the provinces of Nueva Vizcaya and Ilocos Norte from those Ojl' Cagayan and Abra, and terminates at the Cliina Sea. To this branch belong the mountains Alipapu, Alumbubunig, a:Ml Posdey. The second, beginning at Caraballo de Baler, running in a northeasterly direction and terminating at Cape Engaiio, is the most important ridge of the whole archipelago. The volcano Cagua, with an altitude of 2jyo'2 feet, belongs to this ridge. The third branch is the western one. It runs toward the south, separating the ijrovinces of Nueva Ecija and Laguna from the districts del Principe and Infanta, and it stops at the strait of San Bernardino after having traversed the territoi'ies of Tayabas, Camarines Norte, Camarines Sur, and Albay. The volcar -es Mayon and Bulasan are the most important of this ridge. Among the ridges of lesser importance, situated in the island of Luzon, the following merit notice : The Sierra de Zambales, ending in the north at the cape of Bolinao and in the south at Mount Maribeles; and the Sierras Sungay and Ma(|uilin, the most important peaks of which are Batulao. Mapait, Ulila, and San Cristobal. On the island of Mindanao there is a ridge running from north to south, beginning between Surigao and Butuan and reaching its highest altitude in ]\tount Catalan ; there is Tt)P()(iRAPHV AND UKOGKAPHV. another beginning at the Hingog Mountains, running par- allel to the former during the first two-thirds of its course and terminating at the cape of Sarangani, reaching its highest altitude in Mount Pantadon; a third ridge beginning at the volcano Apo, running in a northwesterly direction and ejuling on the isthmus of Misamis orPanguil; and the fourth and last, the most important of all, a ridge beginning at Point Cauit, runs toward the west, joins the last-mentioned ridge at the isthmus of Misamis, forms the peaks of Randaya, and then branches off in different directions. To this ridge be- long the mountains Cabigan; Tulangatura, Tinuba, Tarlin, and Malandi. As to the less important islands very little can be said about them. Paragua is traversed by a mountain ridge running from north to south. Samar possesses a ridge running also from north to south, and having a large number of ramifica- tions, as well as the. following peaks: Curao, Capotaan, Pa- lapa, and Matuguinao. The island of Panay has a large ridge beginning in the northwest, terminating in the vicinity of the city of Dumarao, its culminating j^oint being Mount Opao. On the island of Mindoro there are three ridges, one running from the northwest to the southeast, while the two others are parallel to the eastern and western coasts. The most important mountains are Calavite, Abra de Hog, and Bacoo. The island of Leyte has a very broken terrain, with a large ridge running from the northwest to the southeast, with the following i^eaks : Calasi, Mandivin, Aslum, and Sil)ugay. Negros Island has a high ridge traversing it from north to south, with various branches: one of its highest peaks is the volcano Canlaon. The island of Cebil is likewise traversed by a low ridge running from north to south. The island of Masbate has numerous tortuous ridges and the mountains of Cavanan and Bagala""" i'. That of Bohol has the following mountains: Bunucan, Mohangin, Carohabol, Campusa, and others of less importance. The island of Catanduanes has three ridges starting from one central nucleus. Marinduque has a principal ridge running from Mount Malindig to San Antonio, and has various ramifica- tions. The i-sland of Tablas has the Palaopao Mountains; Burias, the peak named Engafiosa ; and a line of mountains crosses the island of Ticao. GEOLOGY. The general belief is that the Philippines once fovmed a part of an enormous continent from which it was sejjarated by some cataclysm. This continent probably extended from Celebes to the farthest Polinesian islands on the east, to New Zealand on the south, and the Mariana and Sandwich islands on the north. These islands, according to Ramon Jordana, are divided into two volcanic regions, the eastern and the Avestern. The principal point is the volcano Taal, located in the northeastern portion of the province of Batangas. It is situated on a small island in the center of the Bombon laguna, and has an altitude of 550 feet above sea level. Its form is conical, and the rock is composed of basalt feldspar with a small quantity of augite. The crater is supposed to be 232 feet deep. Its sides are almost vertical, and there are two steaming lagunas at its bottom. Mount Maquilin is situated to the northeast of Taal. It is an extinct volcano, w^liose crater is fully 824 feet deep. It is also of conical form and covered with vegetation. Round stones of augite with crystals of hornblende are found on the brow of the mountain. To the east of Maquilin rises the volcano Banajao, also extinct. The soil toward the north is formed of lava. Close to the city of Porac, near the province of Pam- panga, the soil abounds in feldspar sand, alternating with layers of clay. Tophus and loam are frequently seen, espe- cially in the province of Zambales. Around Santa Cruz, in the direction of Pangasinan, are to be found rocks composed of white feldspar with crystals of augite. In the region embra- cing the provinces of Manila, Bulacan, Pampanga, Tarlac, and Pangasinan the soil is mostly composed of clay containing remnants of sea shells, a circumstance which gives rise to the belief that the coast of Manila has risen from the sea in not so remote an epoch. Smooth, dark-gray tophus predominates ; it forms the bed of the Rio Pasig, and rising forms hillocks in the vicinity of the city of Binangonan. Farther on, tra- chyte and banks of conchiferous sand predominate. The vast plain of Pampanga extends to the north of Manila Bay, to the south of which is situated Mount Arayat, of dol- eritic nature. Feldspar sand abounds around this mountain. The Cara- ballo Ridge is composed in various sections of andesite rock, succeeded by another, resembling greatly the diabase. At the junction of Rio Magat and Rio Pinqniang there is a hill, at the foot of which is an abundance of gypsum loam, inter- mingled with feldspar rocks of volcanic origin. There are also hills composed of trachyte and soil abounding in gabbro. Tophus and loam containing fossil plants are abundant in the vicinity of Galiano ; coral lime enters principally into the com- position of the mountains surrounding the valley in which the city of Trinidad is situated. Along the Rio Agno no rocks but diorite are to be met with. According to Doctor Drasche, there are five different kinds of rocks in the northern part of Luzon : 1. Coral reefs and banks of coral lime with rocks of recent volcanic origin. 2. Tophus and tophic gravel containing deposits formed by banks of coral lime and loam with remnants of plants. o. Rocks of modern volcanic origin. •i. Rocks formed of coarse gravel proceeding from adjoin- ing layers of arsenite of copper and diabasic rocks. 5. Diorite, protogenetic gneiss, and chloric slate. According to the judgment of Senor Jordana, the coral lime rock is of recent formation, as it contains in abundance rem- nants of coral and organic remains belonging to species that live at present in the Indian Ocean. The tophus and tophic gravel are of more ancient origin than the coral reef. The fundamental rocks are the diabase, gabbro, sienite, diorite, arsenite of copper, and protogenetic gneiss. It is supposed that the western part of Luzon was prima- rily composed of a ridge of crystalline slate, which was subse- quently di-splaced by violent eruptions of sienite and diabase, the fragments of which constitute the basis of a formation of sti-ata of gravel and rock. A long period of time will proba- l)ly pass before the volcanoes renew their activity. However late or early this may occur, great masses of tophus will have to form on the western coast, as it will require a long period of submersion before such enormous sediments can be depos- ited. During this period of rest the corals may develop their activity in small spaces and will form, with the remains of the floating vegetation of the continent, loam containing vege- table fossils. Before the end of the period of submersion, the volcanic activity must cease and the corals form on the sub- marine tophus reefs parallel to the coast. It is probable that the western V(jlcanic region is jn'olonged toward the south in 8 GEOLOGY. order to join the eastern. The information to be had on the geological composition of these islands is very incomplete. Eastern Volcanic Region. — The principal point is the volcano Maj^on, still in activity, of a conic form, and having, according to Jagor, an altitude of 8,980 feet. In the northeast rises Monnt Mazaraga, composed of dolerite. Along the bed of the Rio Vicol there extend toward the north highly devel- oi^cd volcanic formations, while toward the south the soil is composed of limy loam, containing a large amount of fossils. The volcanic zone is prolonged by Mount Malinao, the Iriga, and the Isarog. The first is composed of dolerite rock, the second of dolerite and olivenite, and the third of andesite and hornblende. The eastern volcanic region is prolonged in the province of Camarines Norte by the Sierra Colasi and Mount Lab(5o. Conchiferous lime, andesite, and trachyte are most abundant in this region. A mountain ridge extends from the western frontier of the ]3rovinces of Camarines Norte and Camarines Sur to the Banajao Mountain, which is an extinct volcano. Tophus, yellow lime, banks of hornblende, andesite, and coral lime, as well as coral reefs, abound in this part of the country. From Isarog toward the north-northwest the volcanic zone gradually disappears and dips into the waters of the Pacific Ocean. In the extreme east of the northern coast of Luzon is situated the volcano Cagua, to the north of which rises the Camiguin volcano, situated on an island bear- ing the same name. To tlie southeast of Mayon runs the Sierra Pocdol, also of volcanic origin. In the same direction is situated Mount Bulusan, which from time to time ejects sulj)hurous and watery vapor. In the south the volcanic re- gion dips under the waters of the sea to reapj^ear in the Dagami ridge. In the west are situated the islands of Cebu and Bohol, surrounded by reefs of living madrepores. In the interior of the island of Cebu is found an azure-colored lime, in which are embedded layers of clayish slate and gravel alter- nating with layers of coal. In the island of Samar are found beds of ferruginous clay. On that of Majaba appears volcanic tophus, and in the vicinity of Loquilocum there are deposits of coal. The eastern vol- canic region traverses the island of Camiguin, situated to the north of Mindanao. There is a volcano in this island, which appeared in 1871. The formation of which the island of Mindanao is composed is not well known, but there are many HVL)K()(iKAPHY. 9 iiiclicatioiis of a volcanic origin. Williin tlie eastern volcanic region are two volcanoes — tlie Apo, having an altitude of 10,832 feet, and still in activity, and the Saraugani, which is extinct. HVDKCXJRAPHY. The disposition of the mountain ranges in parallel chains affords space for the development of streams both in Luzon and Mindanao. The larger islands contain inland seas, into which pour countless small streams from the inland hills. Many of them open out into broad estuaries, and in numer- ous instances coasting vessels of light draft can sail to the very foot of the mountains. Rivers and inland lakes swarm witli varieties of fish and shellfish. By reason of Spanish restrictions, but little can be said as to the character of the stream banks and beds. Four of the rivers are navigable, and, by the statements of those who have spent some little time on the islands, most are fordable. Drinking water is obtained by many of the towns from the rivers at points just above tide limits, and the water is said to be good. Bridges are few and crude, but are generally built to Avithstand heavy strain. The island of Luzon abounds in rivers and streams. The following are the principal water courses : Rio Grande de Cagaydn, the source of which is in the northern slope of the Caraballo Norte. It has numerous affluents, among others the Magat and Bangag, and, after a course of about 200 miles, falls into the China Sea in the vicinity of Aparri. Agno Grande starts in the north, in the neighl^orhood of the ranch of Loo, receives the affluents Tarlag and Camiling, as well as many others, has a course of about 112 miles, and falls into the Gulf of Lingayen. Abra has its origin on the opposite slope to that where Agno Grande takes its rise ; runs for about 87 miles, and, after re- ceiving the affluent Suyoc, divides into three arms and falls into the China Sea over the sand bars of Butao, Nioig, and Dile. Rio Grande de la Pampaiiga is called Rio Chico up to the lake of Canasen, near Arayat, where it changes its name after its junction with Rio Gapan. Its course is a little over 38 miles; it receives the Rio de San Jos^ and divides into a multi- tude of arms as it falls into the sea to the north of Manila Bay. 10 HYDROGRAPHY. V Rio Pasig has its source in the Bay Lagoon, and falls after a course of 19 miles into Manila Bay. Rio Vicol starts in the province of Camarines Sur and divides into two arms, one of which falls into the lake of Bato and the other into the spacious bay of San Miguel. The island of Mindanao has : ^ Rio Agusan or Buhkm, almost as important a river as Rio Grande de Cagayan with regard to its volume and length — 236 luiles. It starts near the gulf of Davao and falls into that of Buluan. Polangui, beginning at the foot of the volcano of Apo, runs toward the peak of Randaya and falls into the bay of Illana, after a course of 87 miles. Ltibungan, falling into the gulf of Dapitan. Iligan, falling into the bay of the same name. The island of Paragua has many streams, but all of them have but a short course. The island of Samar has the following : Oras, having a course of 24 miles and falling into the gulf of Uguis on the Pacific. Suribao, falling into the Pacific near Borongan. Biiruhdn, having a course of 19 miles. Bato-Lagudn, Basey, Calayog, Timonini, Antiyao, and many others. The island of Panay has the following : Rio Panay, starting in the eastern branches of the Tapas Mountains, runs for o8 miles and terminates its course near Capiz. Rio Acldn starts at the foot of Mount Opao and terminates at the city of Calivo, a course of 45 miles. Rio Taland, with the affluents Lambunao and Passi, rises on the southern slope of the Tapas Mountains and terminates in the vicinity of Dumangas. Rio Salog, which rises in the mountains of Maasim, receives the affluents Tigum and Ayuman and disappears in the vicin- ity of Iloilo. Rio Dalands, rising in the ridge dividing the district of Antique from that of Iloilo, has a rapid course of 24 miles and falls into the sea between Barbara and Tibiao. Sabalon has an impetuous course of 08 miles. HYDROGRAPHY. - 11 The island of Mindoro possesses a nniltitude of streams, but they are of small im])(n"tance. Among them are the following- : Navulunn, traversing the island from north to south. Pula, in the district of Pola. Manjao, between Tiding and Bulalacao. In the island of Leyte are the following : Maya, beginning in the lake of Bito and falling into the Pacific Ocean, after a course of 31 miles. Barauen, rising to the south of the Dagami Mountains, runs as far as the city of the same name, Bito, starting from the lake of the same name, terminates near Abayog. Leyte, starting from a lake in the west of Jaro, falls into the sea in the Yicinity of the city of the same name. Maasi, having a course of more than 28 miles, has its origin in the mountain of the extreme south of the island and terminates at GigantigJin. Rio Cantiling, Tananau, Amilao, and others. On the Negros island : ' Eio Danao, of great depth and breadth. Marianas, with a wide arm named Tanao, which falls into the sea on the northern coast. Hinigaran, Himamaildn, and Hog, falling on the western coast. San Enrique, Cadiz Nuevo, and several others. In the island of Cebu are the following : BaJumhan, Gim, Mananga, Naga, and Sampandn. On the island of Masbate are : Rio Asit and Laudn, having their origin in the Bagasim- bahan Mountains. The island of Bohol has a multitude of streams, the greater part of which are very short. Among others are the fol- lowing : Manaba, Masin, Calidian, and Napo. The island of Catanduanes has very small rivers. The most important of them are : Bato, Himoto, and Tinago. On the island of Polillo are : Monleo, Upata, and others. J 2 HARBORS — ROADS — CLIM ATE. HARBORS. The immense coast line of the islands contains a great num- ber of good harbors, but as a consequence of the exclusive policy of the Spanish Government in closing them to foreign commerce, very little is known except to coastwise naviga- tors. Trade is confined chiefly to Manila, Iloilo, Cebil, and Sual. Zamboanga, on the island of Mindanao, is also an open port. The Bay of Manila, one of the finest in the world, is about 120 miles in circumference, with very few dangers to naviga- tion. (See plan of Manila on separate map.) There are two long piers running out from the mouth of the Pasig River, one terminating iii a light-house and the other in a small fort. In stormy weather safe anchorage is found off Cavite some S miles to the southwest by water. At that point is found the naval establishment, including a. marine railway, capable of taking from the water vessels of 2,000 tons displacement, and a dock for small -vessels. Iloilo, the second port in importance, is on the island of Panay, near its southeastern extremity and about 250 miles in a direct line from Manila. Well-protected and naturally good anchorage for large vessels is found outside the mouth of the Iloilo River, but small vessels enter it and discharge cargoes at the town wharves. Of the interior roads little can be said, and of those run- ning along the coast positive information is not available. Roadbeds are generally fair and easy during the dry sea- son and average about 25 feet in width. Some are ditched and graded, but very little metal has been placed upon them, and in the wet season road transportation is almost impossi- ble. During the latter season transportation by roads is car- ried on by means of rude sledges drawn by buffalo — a sort of sleighing on mud. CLIMATE. The extreme length of the Philippine group being from north to south, their northern extremitj^ reaching to the northern limit of the tropical zone, causes a considerable variety of climate. However, the general characteristics are tropical. CLIMATE. 13 In the region of Manila the hottest season is from Mart-h to June, the greatest heat being felt in May before the rains set in, when the maximum temperature ranges from 80° to 100° in the shade. The coolest weather occurs in December and January, when the temperature falls at night to 60° or 65° and seldom rises in the day above 75°. From November to February the sky is bright, the atmosphere cool and dry, and the weather in every way delightful. Observations made at the Observatorio Meteorologico do Manila have been compiled by the U.S. Weather Bureau, covering a record of from sev- enteen to thirty-two years, from which the following is an extract : Temperature, degrees F. : Mean annual 80° Warmest month. 82 Coolest montli _- 70 Highest 11)0 Lowest - - GO Humidity : Relative per cent 78 Absolute grains per cubic foot 8.75 Wind movements in miles : Daily mean -__ -__ 134 Greatest daily. 204 Least daily 95 Prevailing wind direction— NE. , November to April; SW., May to October. Cloudiness, annual per cent 58 Days with rain 135 Rainfall ni inches : Mean annual 75. 43 Greatest monthly 120.98 Least monthly _ - - 55. 65 The following is the mean temperature for the three seasons, at points specified : Cold. Hot. Wet. Manila 72' 87' 84 Cebu .- 75 86' 75° Davao. 86' 88' 87' Sulu 81' 82' 83° Seasons vary with the prevailing winds (monsoons or trade winds) and are classed as "wet" and "dry." There is no abrupt change from one to the other, and between periods there are intervals of variable weather. The Spanish description of seasons is as follows: Seis meses de lodo — six months of mud. 14 GALES. Seis meses de polvo — six months of dust. Seis iiieses de todo — six months of everything. The northern islands lie in the track of the tj'phoons wliich, developing in the Pacific, sweep over the China Sea from NE. to SW. during the southwest monsoon. They may be looked for at any time between May and November, but it is during the months of July, August, and September that they are most frequent. Early in the season the northern region feels the greatest force, but as the season advances the typhoon gradually works southward and the dangerous time at Manila is about the end of October and the beginning of November. Typhoons rarely, if ever, pass south of 9° N. latitude. Some- times the typhoon is of large diameter and travels slowly, so far as progressive motion is concerned ; at others it is of smaller dimensions, and both the circular and progressive motions are more rapid. However, they are always storms of terrific energy and frequently cause terrible destruction of crops and property on shore and of shipping at sea. Thunderstorms, often of great violence, are frequent in May and June, before the commencement of the rainy season. During July, August, September, and October the rains are very heavy. The rivers and lakes are swollen and frequently overflow, flooding large tracts of low country. At Manila the average rainfall is stated to he from 75 to 120 inches per annum, and there the difference between the longest and shortest day is only 1 hour 47 minutes and 12 seconds. This rainfall, immense though it be, is small as compared with that of other parts of the archipelago ; e. g., in Liano, NE. of Mindanao, the average yearly downpour is 142 inches. GALES. The gales of the Philippines may be divided into three classes, known by the local names of Colla, Nortada, and Bagnio. The Colla is a gale in which the wind blows con- stantly from one quarter, but with varying force and with alternations of violent squalls, calms, and heavy rains, usu- ally lasting at least three days ; these gales occur during the southwest monsoon and their direction is from the southwest quarter. The Nortada is distinguished from the Colla, in that the direction is constant and the force steady, without the alternations of passing squalls and calms. The Nortada is generally indicative that a tyi")lioon is passing not very far TYPHOONS. 15 off. These gales occur cliieiiy in 11m' iioilliri-n islands, and their direction, as the name implies, is from the northward. Baguio is the local name for the revolving storm known as the typhoon, which, heing the more familiar term, will he nsed in these notes. TVPHOOXS. These storms have their origin to the east or to the south- east of the Philippines, whence their course is westward, with a slight divergence to the north or south, the average direction appearing to be west by north. They occur in all months of the year, but the greater number take place about the time of the equinoxes. The most violent ones occur at the autumnal equinox, and on an average, two or three occur every year, and sometimes one follows another at a very short interval. It is believed that when one of these typhoons passes in a high latitude in September there will be another in r)ctol)er of that year, and one maybe looked for in Novem- ber in a lower latitude. These tempests are not encountered in latitudes below 9° N. The rate of progress of these storms is about 13 miles an hour; in none of those observed has it exceeded 14 miles nor fallen below 11 miles. The diameter of the exterior revolving circle of the storm varies from 40 to 130 miles, and the diameter of the inner circle, or calm region, may be estimated at from 8 to 15 miles. The duration of the true typhoon at any one place is never longer than ten hours and generally much less. These storms are always accompanied by abundant rain, with low, dense clouds, which at times limit the horizon to a few yards distance, and are generally accompanied by electrical discharges. The barom- eter falls slowly for some days before the typhoon, then falls rapidly on its near approach, and reaches its lowest when the vortex is but a little way off. It then rises rapidly as the vortex passes away, and then slowly when it has gained some distance. Near the vortex there are usually marked oscilla- tions. The typhoon generally begins with a northerly wind, light drizzling rain, weather squally and threatening, a fall- ing barometer and the wind veering to the eastward, when the observer is to the northward of the path of the storm, and backing to the westward when he is to the southward of it ; the wind and rain increase as the wind shifts, and the storm generally ends with a southerly wind after abating gradually. 10 TYPHOONS. Tlie following warnings of tlie approach, of a typhoon, and directions for avoiding the most daugerons part of it, are taken from tlie China Sea Directory : The earliest signs of a typhoon are clouds of a cirrus type, looking like fine hair, feathers, or small white tufts of wool, traveling from east or north, a slight rise in the barometer, clear and dry weather, and light winds. These signs are followed by the usual ugly and threatening appearance of the weather which forebodes most storms, and the increasing number and severity of the gusts with the rising of the wind. In some cases one of the earliest signs is a long heavy swell and confused sea, which comes from the direction in which the storm is approaching, and travels more rapidly than the storm's center. The best and surest of all warnings, however, will be found in the barometer. In every case there is great barometric disturb- ance. Accordingly, if the barometer falls rapidly, or even if the regularity of its diurnal variation be interrupted, dan- ger may be apprehended. No positive rule can be given as to the amount of depression to be expected, but at the center of some of the storms the barometer is said to stand fully 2 inches lower than outside the storm field. The average barometric gradient, near the vortex of the most violent of these storms, is said to be rather more than 1 inch in 50 nautical miles. As the center of the storm is approached the more rapid become the changes of wind, until at length, instead of its direction altering gradually, as is the case on first entering the storm field, the wind flies around at once to the opposite point, the sea meanwhile breaking into mountainous and confused heaps. There are many instances on record of the wind suddenly fall- ing in the vortex and the clouds dispersing for a short inter- val, though the wind soon blows again with renewed fury. In the northern hemisphere when the falling barometer and other signs create suspicion that a typhoon is approaching, facing the wind and taking 10 or 12 points to the right of it, will give the approximate bearing of its center. Thus, with the wind NE., the center will probably be from S. to SSE. of the observer's position. However, it is difficult to estimate the center of the vortex from any given point. This j)artly arises from the uncertainty as to the relation between the bearing of the center and the direction of tlie wind, and greatly from there being no means of knowing whether the storm be of large or small dimensions. If the barometer falls slowly, and CUKKENTS. 17 the weather grows worse only grcidiially, it is reasonable to suppose that the storm center is distant; and conversely, with a rapidly falling barometer and increasing bad weather the center may be supposed to be approaching dangerously near. Practical Rules. — When in the region and in the season of revolving storms, be on the watch for premonitory signs. Constantly observe and carefully record the barometer. When on sea and there are indications of a typhoon being near, heave to and carefully observe and record the changes of the barometer and w^ind, so as to find the bearing of the center, and ascertain by the shift of the wind in which semi- circle the vessel is situated. Much will often depend upon heaving to in time. When, after careful observation, there is reason to believe that the center of the typhoon is approach- ing, the following rules should be followed in determining whether to remain hove to or not, and the tack on which to remain hove to : In the northern hemisphere, if in the right-hand semicircle, heave to on the starboard tack. If in the left-hand semicircle, run, keeping the wind if possil)le, on the starboard quarter, and when the barometer rises, if necessary to keep the ship from going too far from the proper course, heave to on the ]3ort tack. When the vessel lies in the direct line of advance of the storm — which position is, as previously observed, the most dangerous of all — run with the wind on the starboard quarter. In all cases increase as soon as possible the distance from the center, bearing in mind that the whole storm field is advancing. In receding from the center of a typhoon the barometer will rise and the wind and sea subside. It should be remarked that in some cases a vessel may, if the storm be traveling slowly, sail from the dangerous semicircle across the front of the storm, and thus out of its influence. But as the rate at which the storm is traveling is quite uncertain, this is a hazardous proceeding, and before attempting to cross the sea- man should hesitate and carefully consider all the circum- stances of the case, observing particularly the rate at which the barometer is falling. CURRENTS. The waters of the Pacific Ocean between the parallels of 26° S. and 24^ N. have a regular motion from east to >vest, which is known as the equatorial current. This, at a little 18 CURRENTS. to the nortliward of tlie Equator, a])pears to be divided into the north and south equatorial currents by the equatorial countercurrent, a stream flowing from west to east through- out tlie Pacific Ocean. The currents in the western part of the Pacific, to the nortliward of the Equator, are affected by the monsoons, and to the southward of the Equator they are deflected by the coast of Australia. The trade drift, which flows to the westward between the parallels of 9° and 20° N., on reaching the eastern shores of the Philippine Islands again turns to the northward, forming near the northern limit of that group the commencement of the Japan stream. The main body of the current then flows along the east coast of Formosa, and from that island pur- sues a northeasterly course through the chain of islands lying between Formosa and Japan ; and sweeping along the south- eastern coast of Japan in the same general direction, it is known to reach the parallel of 50° N". The limits and velocity of "the Japan stream are considerably influenced by the mon- soons in the China Sea, and by the prevailing winds in the corresponding seasons in the Yellow and Japan seas; also by the various drift currents which these periodic winds produce. Current East of Mindanao. — Alternate currents, depend- ent upon the prevailing monsoon, exist between the Equator and the southern limit of the northern equatorial current, and from the meridian of 142° E. to the Philippine Islands. These are sometimes called the currents of the Caroline monsoons, because the maximum speed of this current toward the NE. and ENE. is observed a little to the westward of the Caro- line Islands during the southwest monsoon (from June to October) ; but during the NE. monsoon (October to May) the current sets to SW. and WSW., and forms a prolongation of the northern equatorial current. Equatorial Countercurrent. — This countercurrent is an irregular stream, setting toward the east. It is about 300 miles wide and lies between the northern and southern equa- torial currents. Though the limits of the countercurrent are imperfectly defined, it appears to be comprised between the Ec[uator and the parallel 0° N. ; the greatest width of its bed is never more than 5° of latitude. In the eastern part of the Pacific it generally keeps between 5° and 8° N"., while in the Central Pacific it is generally nearer the Equator. It sets toward the east with a speed of sometimes 24- miles an hour, TIDES. 19 but its rate is ordinarily nuu-li less, the mean speed being about half a mile. China Sea Currents. — The currents of the China Sea appear to be caused by the wind ; during the NE. monsoon they trend generally to the SW., and during the SW. mon- soon to the NE. During the NE. monsoon a counter current often flows to the NE., and north on the northwest coast of Borneo. The countercurrent can often be utilized while beat- ing up the China Sea against the monsoon. SuLU Sea. — During the northeast monsoon in the Sulu Sea the current runs regularly in the direction of the wind, and varies in force according to the strength of the wind. In the early months of this monsoon, when the wind blows strongest, the current runs with the velocity of a mile an hour, decreas- ing to about half a mile an hour in May. In June the current reverses with the wind. TIDES. Among the Philippine Islands, when the sun has north decli- nation, the higher tides about spring occur during the day, and when it has south declination, during the night. The mean tide level on the different coasts varies during the year; on the coast of Luzon it is lowest in February and highest in August. On the coast of Luzon, on the island of Palawan, and on the northern part of Borneo, it is high water, full and change, between '.) hours and 30 minutes and 11 hours ; rises 3 to 6 feet. In the northern part of the Sulu Sea, Iloilo, and Cebil, and on the NE. coast of Borneo, it is between 11 hours and 30 minutes and 12 hours. In the straits of San Bernardino and Surigao, on the south coast of Mindanao, and in the Sulu Archipelago, the tidal wave arrives from 6 hours to 8 hours ; in the Celebes Sea, from 5 hours to 6 hours ; rise (J to 7 feet. At Manila, Iloilo, Surigao Straits, and Balabac, two or three days after the moon has crossed the Equator, two high and two low tides are observed in the twenty-four hours, of nearly equal amplitude ; during the following days one tide increases in amplitude and the other decreases, until but one occurs in twenty-four hours. Two or three days after the moon has attained its greatest declination, either north or south, the single tide that exists attains its maximum. It then decreases in amplitude with 20 POPULATION AND INHABITANTS. the declination of the moon ; soon a second tide appears, the amplitude of which increases as the other lessens, and the two tides are equal two or three days after the moon has recrossed the Equator; then the first continues to lessen while the second increases until again there is but one tide in the twenty- four hours. There can hardly be said to be a regular "estab- lishment," as it varies daily for each of the two diurnal tides according to the positions of sun and moon. The tides on the south coast of Mindanao present tlie fol- lowing peculiarities: The diurnal wave is propagated more slowly than the semidiurnal, and increases in amplitude on advancing from Davao to Basilan Strait, whilst the semidiur- nal wave decreases in amplitude. The diurnal inequality makes itself very apparent in the heights of the flood tides, and in the hours of low tides, and is but little apparent in the height of the low tides and the hours of the flood tide. As a result of these laws and of the values of the diurnal inequalities, there are at Davao and Palak always two tides daily, except at the time of certain equinoctial quarters when the moon has a maximum declination. At Zamboanga there will generally be two tides a day, but one only at every equi- noctial quarter. At Isabela the difference is more marked; there are some years in which the number of days ha^'ing but one tide in twenty-four hours exceeds the number of days having two tides. In all cases, however, there are always two equal tides in twenty-four hours, one or two days after the mo6n has passed the Equator. In the course of one day the higher tide, when there are two, and the single high tide, when there is only one in the day, is that which immediately follows the hour of the moon's supe- rior, or inferior, transit, according as her declination is south or north. POPULATION AND INHABITANTS. Spanish statistics are notoriously unreliable, and no accu- rate census has ever been taken, but the jDopulation has been estimated at about 8,000,000, of which the bulk is of Malay origin. On first arrival the Spaniards found a part of the natives somewhat civilized; but while they had a Avritten language, of which some specimens have been preserved, it was of no value in throwing light upon their early history, and their traditions are very few. As in Mexico and Central America, the Spanish priests have been only too successful in POPULATION AND INHABITANTS. 21 their efforts to extirpate all mytliological and other lore. The treatment of the inhabitants has been more merciful, how- ever, than in the western possessions. The Philippine Malays are a superior race to many other Asiatic peoples; orderly, amiable, courteous, honest, and exceedingly^ superstitious, they are easilj'' influenced upon profession of Christianity. Like most tropical people, tlieir efforts are intermittent rather than steady ; their wants are readily provided for, and they take life easy. The inhabi- tants of the island are composed of the most diverse mixtures of races, including Malays, Aetas, Negritos, pure blacks, Chi- nese, Japanese, Indios, Moors, Europeans, and mixtures of each with the others. There are nearly as many different tribes as there are islands, and it is said that 500 languages and dialects are spoken in the islands at the present day. The inhabitants are generally tractable and amenable to gov- ernment, and generally not hostile to foreigners. In the inac- cessible parts of the island there are still tribes of unsubdued savages, whose number is estimated at about 602,000. Fond of music, dancing, and amusements of all kinds, they are born gamblers, and cock fighting is their greatest passion. Every town has its cockpit, and in the largest the spectators may be numbered by thousands. This amusement is heavily taxed liy the Spaniards, and advantage is taken of the taste for gambling b}' running a lottery for the benefit of the gov- ernment. Probably not more than fifteen or twenty thousand Span- iards, or people of pure Spanish blood, are permanent resi- dents, and the number of other foreigners is not large. The majority of these are at Manila, where the English have established a club in the suburbs, which has become the cen- ter of foreign social intercourse. Without doubt, the most primitive of the Philippine peo- ples are the Aetas, or Negritos, a race of blacks of almost dwarfish stature. They are believed to be, and with good reason, the true aborigines of the islands, who, even at the time of the early SiDanish conquest, had begun to go to the wall under the fierce struggle for existence with the encroach- ing Malay tribes. At present they are well nigh extinct, and promise to become entirelj^ so. These people are confined to the higher mountain ranges in Luzon and Negros, although a few are found in Mindanao. 22 AC4KI('ULTURE — VEGETABLES — ANIMALS. AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURE, AND TRADE. The soil i.s most fertile, but agriculture almost wholly un- developed. The people are skillful weavers of cotton and silk; they tan leather, excel in sliipljuilding, and make good wagons and carts, VEGETABLE KINGDOM. The Philippines are very rich in woods ; ebony, cedar, iron- wood, sapan wood, logwood, and gum trees abound. Gutta- percha is found in certain localities. Cocos nucifera is of great value, trunk, branches, leaves, fruit, shell, and husk being used. Bamboo and areca palm are abundant and of great utility. Two woods, the "banava" and the "malave," resist the destructive action of water for centuries. Many plants have medicinal value, others (the "camansi" and the "tabuyog") are poisonous. Mangoes, plantains, jack fruits, and the Malayan fruits are met with. Rice is the staple food, but often not enough is raised to supply the demand. Pota- toes, peas, and even wheat are raised in the higher localities. ANIMAL KINGDOM. Deer abound in the thickets of all the islands ; flesh very nutritious. There are also many buffalo ("caravaos") and wild horses. The buffalo, called "karbo" by the Malays, is the great beast of burden. It is very strong, and docile if domesticated, but dangerous in the wild state. The Philip- pine horse is small and of poor appearance, but it is a strong and sturdy animal. Fine specimens sell for $100 to $150; $15 or $20 will buy a pair for draft purposes. The bull (of Spanish origin) has propagated his species very numerously, and is found wild. There are various kinds of monkeys, mountain cats, and the "nasigan," a small quadruped that is death to rats. Among reptiles are found the "l)oa" or "culebra casera," the python, and the terrible "dehenpalay." The bite of the latter is almost instantly fatal ; it is a short and slender snake, similar in appearance to a rice leaf. Of birds there are infinite species. Fish abound in the seas, lakes, and rivers ; sharks and alligators are found in the seas. Swampy and damp localities swarm with insects, the mosquito being conspicuous. The "anay,"asort of ant, destroys all wood except the "molane" with astonishing rapidity. MINERLAS — TRADE. 23 MINERALS. From what is known of the niinerah)gy of the islands, there is no doubt that a scientitic geological survey would prove that they are rich in ore deposits of many kinds. ( Jold is found, especially in the mountainous districts of Luzon and on the islands of Mindanao and Mindoro. In spite of promising fields, the Spaniards have neither taken measures to i)rosecute a search for it, nor attempted the application of modern scientific means to obtain profitable results from the present workings. It is not believed that true coal is to be found in large deposits.' The beds that have been worked on the islands of Cebii and Masbate consist of lignite of very good quality. The Masbate beds are near the beach; are tilted so as to form about TO" with the horizon, and, roughly estimated, will yield about 20,000 tons to the acre. Iron ore of excellent quality is abundant, but from lack of means of transportation and machinery, it has, so far, been found cheaper to depend upon importation. Rich deposits of copper exist, and galena and zinc blendes have been found. Sulphur is found in the vicinity of many of the ancient volcanoes, and in quantities that would prove profitable, could transportation facilities be obtained. TRADE. Early commerce with the world was greatly restricted by the efforts of Spain to secure a monopoly of her subjects. It was not until 1809 that the first English firm obtained per- mission to establish a business house in Manila. In 1814 this permission was more general. It is, however, only since 1834 that greater freedom of intercourse and larger introduction of foreign capital and methods have materially affected the development of natural resources. Internal commerce, as well as foreign trade, suffers from lack of facilities for transportation. This is marked during the rainy season, when coasting is dangerous and land car- riage impeded by bad roads and the swollen condition of the streams. But one railroad has been built, running from Manila to Pangasinan (123 miles). A single track road, it is of substantial construction, and connects the capital with the rice-growing; districts. 34 EXPORTS. The principal staples of export are tobacco (manufactured and raw), manila hemp, sugar cane, coffee, and cocoa. The principal manufactures consist of a variety of textile fabrics, hats, mats, baskets, ropes, furniture, coarse pottery, carriages, and musical instruments. Extracts from the Consular Reports (June, 1808). — During the quarter ending December 31, 1897, there were exported from these islands to the United States and Great Britain 216,8it8 bales of hemp (280 pounds per bale), of which 138,792 bales went to the United States and 78,106 bales to Great Britain. Du^ring the year 1897 there was an increase in the export of hemp from the Philippines to continental Europe of 19,741 bales; to Australia, 2,192 bales; to China, 28 bales; to Japan, 2,028 bales, and to the United States 133,896 bales — a total increase of 158,4:85 bales, while to Great Britain, there was a decrease of 22,348 bales. Thus, of increased shipments from the Philippines, those to the United States were 544 per cent greater than to all other countries combined. Of the total exj)orts of hemp from the Philippines for the ten years ended 1897, amounting to 6,528,965 bales (914,055 tons), 41 per cent went to the United States. During the same years the Philippine Islands exported to the United States and to Europe 1,582,904 tons of sugar, of which 875,150 tons went to the United States, 066,391 tons to Great Britain, and 41,362 tons to continental Europe; show- ing that of the total exports more than 55 per cent went to the United States. At the current values, in New York, of hemp (4 cents per pound) and of raw sugar (3| cents per pound), the exports of these two products alone from these islands to the United States during the ten years under review amounted to $89,263,722.80, or an average of nearly $8,926,372 per year. Data as to cigars, tobacco, copra, woods, hides, shells, indigo, coffee, etc., are not now obtainable, but a conservative esti- mate would so raise the above figures as to show United States imports from these islands to average about $1,000,000 per month. To-day there are authenticated invoices for exporl^ to the United States amounting to $138,066.12. IMPORTS — REVENUE — (( ).MMUNIC'ATI()NS. 25 Tlie following statement of the general trade of tlie Philip- pine Islands is taken from the "Review of the World's Com- merce," 180G-'97, soon to be published by the Bureau of For- eign Commerce. According to a British Foreign Office report (No. 103-^, annual series, 1897), the total imports into the islands in 1890 were valued at -SIO, 031,250, and the exports at $20,175,000. The trade "with several of the most important countries, compiled from the respective official statistics, was: Country. | Imports. Exports Great Britain §2,467,090 $7,467,500 Germany-- I 744,928' 223.700 France-- I 1,794,900 1 1,987.900 Belgium I 272,240! 45.660 United States-.- ' 162,446 4,982,857 China 103,680 13.770 Japan*--- ! 98,782 1,387,909 *In 1897. The chief imports are rice, flour, dress goods, wines, coal, and petroleum. REVENUE. The public revenue is about 812,000,000 per annum, of which the larger part is raised from direct taxation, customs, monop- olies, and lotteries. For the imposition and collection of taxes Spanish ingenuit}^ has been exercised to the utmost, but the basis of the financial system in the Philippines is the poll tax, which every adult under sixty years of age, male or female, has to pay. There is no export duty on tobacco, but almost every article of import is heavily taxed. On muslin and petroleum the duty is about 100 per cent of cost. COMMUNICATIONS. Manila is connected with Hongkong l:>y cable and Ity line of steamers. There is a line running from Manila to Liver- pool, known as the Compaiiia Transatlantica, which has three large steamers averaging 4,500 tons and about 4,000 horsepower each. The average speed is about 12 knots. This line maintains a monthly service to Europe, calling at Singapore, Colombo, Aden, Suez, Port Said, and Barcelona. 26 COMMUNICATIONS. It is reported that another line has been formed in Spain to compete with the above line. Also fonr lines of steamers between Manila and Hongkong (names not given.) Many local lines of steamers ply between Manila and the provinces, the largest being the Compaiiia Maritima, which has 28 steamers with a total of 25,000 tons, (In northeast monsoon leave about 10 a. m. ; southwest monsoon, 4 p. m.) Ynchansta & Co. have two small steamers of 1,000 tons; S. P. Yanger, one small steamer of 500 tons; De la Rama & Bros. , three small steamers (coasters) of 500 tons ; and Arm- strong & Sloan, three small coasters of 400 tons. The usual points touched by these steamers include all the ports in the Philippine group; also the Caroline and Mariana Islands. Nearly all ships were built in England and are strong and well adapted to the trade. They are not fast, seldom exceeding 12 knots per hour, but are fitted with latest im- provements. Philippine Line. — Compaiiia Transatlantica de Barcelona line of the Philippines extension, Iloilo, Cebii, and combina- tions to Gulf of Persia, east coast of Africa, India, China, Japan, and Australia, makes thirteen trips annually, leaving Barcelona every fourth Saturday, beginning January 1, 1898, and from Manila every fourth Thursday, beginning January 20, 1898. The Spanish mail steamers in the Philippines prior to the naval battle of Manila were the following : The Spanish steamer Elcano, or another boat belonging to the Compania Maritima, leaves Manila for Singaj)ore every twenty-eight days, in connection with French mail steamers returning homeward with mails after arrival of outward steamer. The Spanish Royal Mail Line from Manila direct to Barce- lona, calling at Singapore, Colombo, Aden, and Port Said, also leaves Manila every twenty-eight days. During the southwest monsoon the boats do not always call at Colombo. The North Luzon Line is from Manila to Subic, OlangajDO (the north arsenal, and where the large floating dock is to be erected), Bolinao, San Fernando, Croayan, and Currimas (all these on the west coast of Luzon and Aparri, entrance to Rio Grande in the extreme north of Luzon). The South Luzon Line runs from Manila to Batangas, Calapan, Laguimanos, Passacao, Donsol, Sorsogon, Legaspi, and Tabaco. ADMINISTRATION. 37 The Soutlieast Line runs from Manila to Romolon, Cri)!!, Cabolian, Surigao, Camiguin, Cagayan de Misaniis, Iligan, Hariholioe, Bais, Duniaguete. and Iloilo. The Southwest Line runs from Manihi to Iloilo, Zamboanga, Isabela de Baslin, lolo (Sula) Siassi, Tataan, Bongao, Parang Parang, Cottabato, Glan, Sarangani, Dayas, Matti, Lebak, and St. Maria. These steamers return to Manila from eight to ten days after leaving ; local steamers for the neighboring islands leave nearly every day. Manila is 7,050 nautical miles from San Francisco, and 9,465 nautical miles from Cadiz. ADMINISTRATION. In Madrid there is a council of state for the Philippines, which has in charge the interests of the colony and acts as an advisory board to the Minister of the Colonies. At Manila the administration of the government has for its head and chief a Governor General, who is at the same time Captain General, Director and Inspector General of all arms and in- stitutes; this authority is also delegated Superintendent of Finances, President of the Administrative Council of the Ayuntamiento, Protector of the Spanish Bank and of the Economical Society of the Friends of the Country, Subdele- gate of Postal Service, "Vice-Real Patrono," etc. Next to the captain generalship of Cuba, this is the most important and lucrative post at the disposal of the home Government. This jurisdiction also extends over the Mariana or Ladrone Islands, the Carolines, and the Pelew Islands. There is also a Lieutenant-Governor, who takes the place of the Captain-General in case of his death, and a council in Manila, which has a voice in all questions concerning the in- ternal affairs of the island. The archbishop also exerts con- siderable power, and the ecclesiastical authority is interwoven in all tlie machinery of government. The islands are divided into four jn'ovinces and four mili- tary districts, and are governed by i)olitico-military com- manders. The first exercise governmental jurisdiction, ordinary juris- diction in first instance falling to the charge of the mayor alcaldes, who must be educated men ; the second exercise by themselves governmental and legal jurisdiction in first in- stance, and all are captains in Avar. The province of Manila 28 MILITARY AND POLITICAL DIVISKJNS. has a different organization. Tliere have been created for Visayas and Mindanao two politico-military, central govern- ments of the brigadier class, by royal decree of July 30, 1860. Each province is subdivided into pueblos (towns) more or less numerous, and each one has a petty governor (gobernador- cillo), with othei' ministers of justice, whose number is not fixed and who discharge various duties. In some pueblos, when permitted by the government, a separate society or gaild is formed with goberuadorcillos and officers of justice selected from the same. The goberuadorcillos have in their jDueblo the entire municipal charge belonging to the authority conferred upon them by their appointment, with the special obligation of aiding the parish jjriests in every- thing relating to worship and the observance of religious pre- cepts; in civil cases they have priority over judges up to the value of 3 taels, or 44 pesos ; in criminal cases they proceed to the formation of a summary court, with which they ac- count to the chief of the province ; they are obliged to attend to collections on the royal account and others dictated by the ordinances of a good government, and they are i^ermitted to collect certain duties which are fixed in their own titles. In each pueblo there are also other officials called Cabezas de Barangay. Each Cabeza is charged with the collection of 45 or 50 tributes from the same number of families ; he must reside in the same ward or street with them, look after the good order and harmony of the i^eople under him, distribute among them the duties which are to be shared in common, set- tle their differences and collect their tribute, which he after- wards delivers to the gobernadorcillo, or to the administrator of the province through the proper channels. The Cabezas, by virtue of their office, are attorneys of their "barangais" (families under them) in all business affairs that occur in the community. A counter admiral of the national navy is chief of all the naval forces of the archipelago. Ecclesiastical matters depend upon the Archbishop of Manila. MILITARY AND POLITICAL DIVISIONS. The following table, published in Manila by the Governor General, in 18T3, will show the territorial division of the islands into politico-military governments, alcaldias mayores, and politico-military commands: MILITAKY AND POLITICAL DIVISIONS. 29 North of Mauila: Manila Bulacaii NiievaEcija - District of Principe. Nneva Vizcaya Lalsabela--- Rio Saltan .. Cagayan Pampanga District of Porac.-- District of Tariac . . . Zanibales Pangasiuan Union Benguet Abra Ilocos Sur Lepanto Bontoc . . - Tiagan Ilocos Norte Islas Batanes Classificatiou of .authorities goveruing tlieni. Civil governor ■. Alcalde mayor Alcalde mayor Military commander. . . Politico-military governor . - . ...do [ Politico-military commander . Alcalde mayor .-.do * Military commander -...do.'. Alcalde mayor. ....do \ Politico-military governor . _ . Politico-military commander _ Politico-military governor _ . ^ Alcalde mayor Politico-military commander _ ....do -. . — do Alcalde mayor Politico-military governor. . . Pueblos of residence of the chief of the province or distri< t. South of ManUa: Cavite Morong Laguna Distritode la Infanta. Politico-military governor. _ _ Politico-military commander . Alcalde mayor Politico-militarv commander. Batangas Tayabas . . Camarines Sur . . . Camarines Norte. Albay Corregidor Island Mindoro Island ; Alcalde mayor Calamianes Island ... Politico-military governor Alcalde mayor ....do ". ..-.do . — do -...do Politico-militarv governor. Balabac Islands Romblon Burias .- Masbate and Ticao. do Politico-military commander — do . ...do Manila. Bulacan. San Isidro. Valer. Bayombong. Turnauini. Saltan. Tnguegarao. Bacolor. Porac. Tariac. Iba. Lingayen. San Fernando. Benguet. Bangued. Vigan. Cayan. Bontoc. Tiagan. Laoag. Santo Domingo de Vasco. Cavite. Morong. Santa Cruz. Binangonan de Lampon. Batangas. Tayabas. Nuevas Caceres. Daet. Albay. Corregidor Island. Calapan. Taytay. Balabac. Romblon. Burias. Masbate. 30 RELKilOX AND EDUCATION. VISAYA ISLANDS. Name of province or district. Classification of authorities governing them. Pueblos of residence of the chief of the province or district. Politico-military governor of the islands. Politico-military governor.- . . — do --- ----- -..^do -.-.do .-- -.-do - Politico-military commander- Cebii Samar Leyte - Bohol- - Cebri -- Isla de Negros Escalante Catbalongan. Tacloban. Tagbilaran. Cebii. Bacolod. Escalante. ISLAND OF PAN-A.Y. Iloilo Politico-military governor ( Iloilo. Concepcion Politico-military commander.; Concepcion. Capiz - - - j Politico-militarj' governor- - _ Capiz. Antique do ' Vista. Zamboanga Misamis Politico-military governor of ! the island. Politico-military governor. . . -.-.do Dapitan Politico-military commander. Surigao Politico-military governor. - - j Bislig Politico -military commander. Davao i Politico-military governor _ - _ Cottabato i do ' Isla de Basilan do Islas Marianas do Cottabato. Zamboanga. Cagayan de Oro. Dapitan. Snrigao. Bislig. Davao. Cottabato. Isabela. S. Ignaciode Agaiia. RELIGION AND EDUCATION. The Roman Catholic is the established church in the Phil- ippines, which contains one archiepiscopal see and three bishoprics. Most of the ecclesiastical authority is in the hands of the various religious orders — Dominicans, Agus- tines, Franciscans, etc. — who are the real rulers of the coun- try, as their power among the natives far exceeds that of the various civil and military authorities. This power causes a great deal of jealousy, as is evidenced by the long record in the history of the islands of bitter controversies between the church and civil authorities. The religious affairs on the PROVINCES — POPULATION AND CAPITALS. islauds are far l)eliiiid the age, and it would 1)e of great he\ to the people, who are naturally devout, if they were infust with more modern ideas and methods. The Spanish priests, friars of strict orders, come to the islands to stay, and, with scarcely an exception, do their duties faithfully and devotedly. Many of these Spanish curas have done much good work in the way of making roads and bridges and the building of churches, acting frequently as their own engineers and architects with far less unsightly I'esults than one might expect from persons who are supposed to be more conversant with breviary and rosary than with rule and compass. Priests of native extraction do not (luite come up to the high standard of their Spanish confreres. They can not all live up to the severity of monastic rules. These native curas, moreover, suffer under the proverbial disadvantage which affects the prophet in his own country, and, lacking the strength of mind and tenacity of vow of the Spanish priests, sometimes seek consolation in diversions of not quite a clerical or monastic character. Education is much neglected, and both the institutions for higher and primary instruction are antiquated in their meth- ods and far behind the times. Although in nearly every town and village that is under the control of the government a school may be found, neither the quality nor quantity of the instruction given is satisfactory. TABLE SHOWING PROVINCES, WITH THEIR POPULATIONS AND CAPITALS. ISLAND OF LUZON. Population. Capitals. Abra Albay Amburayan Apayaos Bataan Batangas Benguet .-- Binatangan Bontoc Bulacan Cabugaoan . ivan --. 49. 702 296, 850 30. 150 6, 000 52. 000 212, 192 15. 932 24, 502 230. 000 112.357 Bangued. Albay. Alilem. Bagubagu. Balanga. Batangas. La Trinidad. Binatangan. ' Bontoc. Bnlacan. Cabugaoan. Tnguegarao. 32 PKOVINCES— POPULATION AND CAPITALS. ISLAND OF LUZON— continued. Provinces. Population. CapitiilB. Camarines Cavite Cayapas Ilocos Norte Ilocos Siir Infanta Isabc'la (le Luzon Itavfs Laguna _ Lepanto- -- Manila - - Morong - . NuevaEcija Nneva Vizcaya . - Pampanga Pangasinan Principe Quiangan Tarlac Tayabas .-. Tiagan Union (La) Zambales 185, 878 133, 926 156,900 172.836 10, 200 46. 846 15, 208 177, 000 19.422 400, 238 42, 748 155, 000 23, 520 250, 000 295. 105 5, 000 29, 800 97. 947 105, 576 3. 041 119.421 87, 641 Nneva Caceres. Cavite. Cayapa. Laoag. Vigan. Binan.i llagan. Macogao. Santa Cruz. Cervantes. Manila. Morong. San Isidro. Bayonibong. Bacolor. Lingayen. Baler. Quiangan. Tarlac. Tayabas San Eniilio. San Fernando. Iba. 1 de Lampon. ISLAND DF MINDANAC Basilan Cottabato Dapitan Davao Matti Misamis 12, 000 3.000 12,653 8, 000 9,764 113,695 95, 775 21.300 Isabela de Basilan. Cottabato. Dapitan. Davao. Matti. Cagayan. Surigao. Zamboanga. Surigao _- Zamboanga.- .. - ADJACENT ISLANDS. Balabac--- Batanes Islands . Burias Calamianes Corregidor .> Marianas Lslands . Masbate and Ticar Mindoro Paragua (La) 1.100 Balabac. 475 Santo Domingo de Basco, 1,600 San Pascual. 16,380 Cuyo. 569 San Jose. 9.770 Agafia. 26.497 Masbate. 106. 170 Calapan. 45, 000 Puerto Princesa. PROVINCES — POPULATION AND CAPITALS. CAROLINE AND PALAOS ISLANDS. 33 Provinces. Population. Capitals. Car< )linas Occideutalf s 600 4, 500 Santa Cristina Carolinas Orientales Santiago de la A.scens-iim. Antique .-. Bohol Capiz Cebii Concepciun Iloilo Leyte Negros Occiilentales. Negi-os Orientales - . . Romblon ^ .. Samar VISAYA ISLANDS. 119, 356 247, 745 189, 171 504, 076 19, 343 472, 798 270, 491 226, 995 94, 782 38, 633 200, 753 San Jose de Buenavista. Tagbilaran. Capiz. Cebu. Concepcion. Iloilo. Tacloban. Bacolod. Dumaguete. Romblon. Catbalogan. SULTANSHIP OF JULO Jolo . 17,112 ! Jolo. ^^jj5S==r=- "^ "^"^ • yf!^ , > J>p UU«f,f,', ,.,. ^ / ''"""/ ; -^ * '' ' ^ / /. '^ ^' ' ^ " f-^ J iy 1 ' ^ •» * ■» •* ff'i - ■* \ W^ 30 • ' ■; V 8 7 « « ;■ 7 5 lo « 9ffii,.10n. :>* '"■''•'"• " "^.•- / ) ' J-INGAYBK Gl-LF v PORT SUAL V ^ \ ; Lat.l6?6:if. Long.l80?6:29'.E. \ «p.ri.e6ft , \ ISLAND OF LUZON. This island, accordiug to Crawford, is tlie most i)rivilogod one of the tropical zone, on acconnt of its fertility, its abun- dant and wide rivers, its many large bays, and all its natural conditions. Its longitude from NE, to SE. is about 480 miles and its area about -41,000 square miles, to which may be added about 3,500 square miles, as the total area of different islands belonging to it. ITINERARY OF COAST OP LUZON — WEST COAST, Cape Bojeador, which forms the northwestern extreme of Luzon, is a low point with a reef of breakers projecting from it. To the southward of the cape the coast is cliffy and fringed by a reef as far as 2 miles south of Dirikwi Creek ; it then becomes low, with a sandy shore as far as Mount Kauit, which lies IG miles south of the cape, the country in the interior being very high. In case of necessity anchorage can be got along this coast during the northeast monsoon. The chain of high mountains inland, which commences near St. Fabian, in the Gulf of Lingayen (ch. 1, p. 35), extends parallel to the coast, gradually diminishing in height, and stretching more inland about 24 miles to the southward of Cape Bojeador, leaves a spacious plain fronting the sea. An- other chain of hills begins about 7 or 8 miles from the shore, and stretches northward, parallel to the coast line. Mount Kauit, on the crest of which are some trees, forms a conspicuous mark on this low coast. The river Laoag dis- embogues to the southward of the mount ; its mouth is closed by a bar forming a bank, which extends some distance sea- ward ; the town of Laoag stands near the bank of the river, about 4 miles inland. The coast from Mount Kauit trends S. by W. for 8 miles, to Kulili Point, which is high, with a sandy shore, and thence continues S. by W. for another 8 miles, as far as Solot Point, oft* which is Badog Island. Midway between Kulili Point and Badog Island is Gan Bay, with reefs extending 1^ miles (35) No 30 Poi-tiiquese Pf 7 9 J. 2 Mdela.Jii' ISLAND OF LUZON. Tills island, according to Crawford, is the most privileged one of the tropical zone, on account of its fertility, its abun- dant and wide rivers, its many large bays, and all its natural conditions. Its longitude from NE. to SE. is abont 480 miles and its area about 41,000 square miles, to which may be added abont 3,500 square miles, as the total area of different islands belonging to it. ITINERARY OF COAST OF LUZON — WEST COAST. Cape Bojeador, which forms the northwestern extreme of Luzon, is a low j^oint with a reef of breakers projecting from it. To the southward of the cape the coast is cliffy and fringed by a reef as far as 2 miles south of Dirikwi Creek ; it then becomes low, with a sandy shore as far as Mount Kauit, which lies 16 miles south of the cape, the country in the interior being A^ery high. In case of necessity anchorage can be got along this coast during the northeast monsoon. The chain of high mountains inland, which commences near St. Fabian, in the Gulf of Lingayen (ch, 1, p. 35), extends parallel to the coast, gradually diminishing in height, and stretching more inland about 24 miles to the southward of Cape Bojeador, leaves a spacious plain fronting the sea. An- other chain of hills begins about 7 or 8 miles from the shore, and stretches northward, parallel to the coast line. Mount Kauit, on the crest of which are some trees, forms a conspicuous mark on this low coast. The river Laoag dis- embogues to the southward of the mount; its mouth is closed by a bar forming a bank, which extends some distance sea- ward ; the town of Laoag stands near the bank of the river, about 4 miles inland. The coast from Mount Kauit trends S. by W. for 8 miles, to Kulili Point, which is high, with a sandy shore, and thence continues S. by W. for another 8 miles, as far as Solot Point, oft' which is Badog Island. Midv/ay between Kulili Point and Badog Island is Gan Bay, with reefs extending H miles (85) 36 LUZON— WEST COAST. to seaward, and immediately north of Gan Bay is Port Kur- rimao, a small circular bay, offering anchorage in 4 fathoms, sand. Coasting steamers call at Port Kurrimao monthly. Badog Island, is low, thickly wooded, and surrounded by a reef. A passage, ^ mile wide, with 11 to IG fathoms water in it, separates Badog from the mainland, off Solot Point. The coast interv^ening between Badog and Salomague Island, 9 miles to the southward, is rocky, with breakers projecting from it. Anchorage may be found in front of the river Kabugao, in C to 7 fathoms, sand, between the reefs of the coast. Shoals. — A shoal, with If fathoms on it, lies 2^ miles NE. ^ N. from the north point of Salomague Island. Another bank of rock, with 7 and 8 fathoms on it, is situated 2^ miles SW. by S. of Badog Island and 2i miles from the shore. Port Salomague is sheltered from all winds but those that blow between SW. and WNW. The north point is encomi)assed by a reef which stretches along the northern side of the port ; and Salomague Island, of moderate height, lies about three-quarters of a mile from the point, with a reef projecting off it about a cable to the southwest. The south point, which separates Lapug Bay from Port Salomague, is also surrounded by shoals. West from this point, from 1^ to 2 miles distant, are rocky banks, with 3| and 4^ fathoms on the two nearest, and 1 fathom on the outer. The port may be known from the offing by a gap in some high mountains which overtop the rest of the chain on this coast. Salomague Gap resembles the Gap of Vigan, but is not so large, and does not approach as near the sea as that gap, which may also be seen bearing about SE. when a vessel is 12 or 13 miles west of Salomague Bay. When the Gap of Salomague bears about E. ^ S., an east course will lead direct towards Salo- mague Island at the north point of the port, which should be approached in a large vessel bearing about east ; and the reef off its southwest point ought to be passed close in 19 or 22 fathoms, mud, to avoid the rocky banks that lie to the west- ward of the south point of the port ; she may then steer for the middle of the port, rather inclining toward the northern shore, and anchor in 8 fathoms. Farther in there is a shoal spot, Avhich will be perceived in clear weather by the dis- colored water on it. The best berth to moor is in 6 or 7 fath- oms, mud, opposite some rice magazines on the north shoal. Coast steamers call monthlv at Port Salomague. Nn.2. 16 14 ai 8 9 XL ^"^ '{ Si S'.Ffynaadt By Lie\it.Cla\ii3io Mantax>. One SeaMle _ ,, ,^ 5 ' Cables lO LUZON — WEST COAST. 37 Lapug Bay (Salut-Salut Bay of the old chart, and Solon- Solon Bay of Horsburgh), immediately to the southward of Port Salomague, is sheltered from the same winds, but is not so capacious nor so deep. There are 5^ to 7 fathoms, sand, in it until near the shore. In front of the bay are two rocky shoals Avhich will be seen in clear weather. One, with 1 to 2 fathoms on it, bears WSW. 2 miles from the north point of the bay, and has a passage on each side of 9 or 10 fathoms water; but that to the northward, between it and the north point of the T^ay, is too contracted. The other rocky shoal is in the middle of the entrance to the bay in front of the anchorage, which it shelters somewhat from the sea. The position of the bay will be recognized by Mount Bulagao, 3,629 feet high, situated to the southeast. PiNGET Island is very low, covered with trees, and situ- ated nearly a mile to the NW. of a iDrojecting point; it has sandy shores and is surrounded bj^ reefs which are steep-to on the western side. A rocky shoal lies south of Pinget Island and a mile from the coast. From abreast of the island the coast is low and sandy to Point Dile. Point Dile, in latitude 17° 34^' N., is the most prominent point of this part of the coast, projecting far to the westward. Between it and San Fernajido Point (ch. 2, p. 37) there are several towns along the coast which should not be aj)proached within a distance of 3 miles; the country is formed of high double mountains, with low woody points to seaward in some places. Vigan Road is sheltered from northerly winds by Dile Point, but exj)osed to the southward and westward. A patch of 3|- fathoms lies about 1^ miles offshore. The anchorage is in 10 or 12 fathoms, near the shore, with the river bearing about east; the bank shelves suddenly. About 9 miles inland to the ENE. of the road there is a chasm between two moun- tains, named Abra de Vigan, or Gap of Vigan, which is very conspicuous when viewed from the offing, and is a good mark to know this part of the coast. The city of Vigan is situated about 2i miles to the NE. of the anchorage, on an eminence. Solvet Bay lies 10 miles from Dile Point. The eastern shore of the bay is encircled by a reef which extends out a consider- able distance. Small vessels can anchor in front of the town sheltered from all except southwest winds. San Estevan Point lies 6^ miles from Solvet Bay, and 2^ miles farther south is the small port of Santiago, 1 cable wide. 38 LUZON — WEST COAST. Kaiidou Point is cliffy and surronndf^d l)y reefs. Vessels can anclior in the bay to the southward. The land in the vi- cinity is high and extends to the edge of the shore, terminat- ing to the north, at San Est<'van Point, in a slope ending perpendicularly. The coast from Kandon Point trends south for I'j miles, then for 7 miles SW. to Diarigayos Point, which is low, cov- ered w4th trees, and surrounded by reefs ; thence it trends south- ward again for 13 miles to San Fernando Point (ch. 2, p. 37). Cauiion. — During the northeast monsoon a strong current has sometimes been experienced, setting to the NNE., along this coast. Vessels proceeding southward should be prepared for this current, or they may find themselves embayed in Lingayen Gulf (ch. 1, p. 35). Port San Fernando (ch. 2, p. 37). — San Fernando Point is a small low peninsula surrounded by reefs, and forms, with the adjacent coast, two small anchorages; in the southern there are 6 to 6i fathoms, rocky bottom ; the northern is the l)ort of San Fernando, where anchorage can be obtained in 5i to 7 fathoms, fine sand, but it is exjwsed to winds from the northward. The town is situated on the east side of the port on high land, and maintains frequent communication with Manila. Supplies. — Game and fish are procurable. Water is obtained from w^ells. Lights. — A fixed red light, elevated 29 feet above the sea, is exhibited from a light-house erected on San Fernando Point, south side of the entrance to Port San Fernando, and should be visible in clear weather from a distance of 10 miles. The light-house, which is 20 feet high, consists of two iron supports above a small iron building on a base of masonry. A fixed red light, to be elevated 13 feet, and bear S. 7-iV E. from the light-house of San Fernando Point, is to be exhibited near the mole at Port San Fernando, and will be visible in clear weather from a distance of 4 miles. Vessels entering the port should steer for the anchorage with this light bearing SSE. | E., which will lead in the fair- way of the entrance. Fag Reef (San Fernando Shoal), composed of sand and rock, 1 cable in extent, with a least depth of -4^ fathoms, lies 2 miles NW. | N. of San Fernando Point. From it, the church of San Juan bears E. by N. ^ X. and the church of San Fernando SE. by E. f E. LUZON — WEST COAST. 39 LiXGAYEN Gulf (cli. 1, p. 35) is about 30 miles deep, and about 20 miles wide across the entrance, from Santiago Island to San Fernando Point; on tlie east coast are the lofty mountains of Ilocos, with the peak of St. Thomas, 7,418 feet high; the west coast is of moderate height and tolerably- level, gradually rising to the southward to a compact moun- tain mass. From the island of Santiago, for 1 2 miles to the SE., the west coast of the gulf is fringed by an almost con- tinuous chain of islands and islets. The islands are, as a rule, low and wooded, and have shallow channels between them, only used by coasters. Winds. — The prevailing wind during the greater part of the year is from SE. During the northeast monsoon, land and sea breezes become regular, and blow freshly, with clear atmosphere, but are interrupted by strong north and north- easterly gales; a bank of cloud seen in the north, with a clear sky and high barometer, is a certain sign of the com- mencement of a gale. In June the wind blows from SE. in the morning, with squalls off St. Thomas and San Isidro mounts ; toward the evening it dies away with heavy rain and thunder, and clearing toward midnight leaves a light wind from the south, which sets in from the SE. with the dawn. From July to October there are usually gales from the SW. and west, lasting from three to fifteen days, accom- panied by torrents of rain. The worst period in the gulf is from the middle- of September until the end of October, when typhoons occur. Port St. Thomas is formed by a bank which runs about 2 miles to the southward of the point, and has 1 to 5 fathoms on it. If intending to j^roceed to this port, steer to the south- ward until St. Thomas Mount bears nearly NE., then alter course for it, and as soon as the soundings decrease to G and 7 fathoms, turn to the northward for the anchorage. To the north of Port St. Thomas the coast of the gulf is high and steep-to. The coast. — From St. Thomas the coast trends SSE., and is high and mountainous as far as St. Fabian, where two rivers disembogue. Thence the coast line runs WSW. for 4 miles to Binlok River, and then 2 miles farther to Dagupan or Binmalei River, both arms of the river Agno. The country is low and fertile, and produces rice, maize, indigo, sugar cane, cotton, and nipa wine. 40 LUZON — WEST COAST. Dagupan, or Biiimalei River, has 7 to 8 feet on the bar at springs, and a town of the same name situated close to its mouth. Small vessels from the town of Lingayen pass out b}'- this mouth. The town of Lingayen(ch. 1, p. 35) is near the coast, and the tower of its church forms a consi^icuous mark on this shore. There is frequent communication between Dagupan and Manila. From Dagupan the coast trends WSW., and then W. by N., forming the head of the gulf. Light. — A fixed red light, elevated 29 feet above the sea, is exhibited on the northeast side of Dagupan Harbor entrance, and should be visible in clear weather from a distance of 5 miles. Port Sual (ch. 1, p. 35), situated 2 miles to the southward of the high islet Kabalitian, has good anchorage, muddy bottom, at its entrance ; a sailing vessel might be warped into the port, should circumstances render it necessary. The port is a little over a mile long, north and south, and nearly a mile broad, with depths of 4 to 8 fathoms j the entrance, however, is narrowed by rocks and reefs to the breadth of about 2^ cables, while an extensive coral bank, with G to 18 feet water over it, fills up a large portion of the port. The eastern edge of this bank is marked by three beacons. The land about Portuguese Point, the northern point of entrance of the port, appears like an island when viewed from a distance of 7 or 8 miles ; the point may be recognized by a small round tower on its bluff, and between it and Kabalitian Island the ground is foul with rocks just awash. A reef extends 2 cables from Portuguese Point ; it is always covered, and the sea breaks upon it only when the wind sets in. There is a beacon near the south edge of this reef. Mangas Point, the southern point of entrance, has rocks extending nearly 3 cables from it, but they are always uncovered, and may be approached to half a cable. In the southwest part of the port is the -village which has a church and a small landing jetty. Adela Rock, with 12 feet water and 6 fathoms close around, lies i mile east of Mangas Point. This rock is marked by a beacon. Tides. — Springs rise G feet. Light. — A fixed red light, elevated 79 feet above the sea, visible through an arc of 240° or between the bearings S. 10^° E. and N. 49^° E., is exhibited from a light-house erected on Portuguese Point, at the entrance to Port Sual, and should be seen in clear weather from a distance of 10 miles. Nn.3 < lA ^Mmm^m \ \ C3McIioTise.\ \ ^ POUT boli:n^ao % iff C. J.Hall.Tel.S.S. CalaJ>riou,lSQ6i .l(f.S. r«i.i«Ho/Lat.l6?24'. Scale tSf* Cables LUZON — WEST COAST. 41 The light-house, 20 feet high, is constructed of iron, and jjaiuted light gray ; a watch tower in ruins is near it. Supplies. — Coal is brought from Lingayen to Sual at $18 per ton. Water can be procured from a stream in southwest part of the port. Directions. — When approaching the port, keep about 1^ or 2 miles from Kabalitian Island, steering for Mangas Point (ch. 1, p. 35) ; pass the outer rock off that point at the dis- tance of half a cable, and then steer for the church, taking care to avoid the large coral patch, the southern edge of which lies between the northeast j)oint of the port and the church ; anchor in 5 or 4^ fathoms. A British vice-consul resides at Sual, and there is frequent communication with Manila. Kabarruyax Island, the southeastern of the large islands on the west side of the gulf, is G miles long, NNE. and SSW., moderately high, and covered with wood. These islands are surrounded by reefs which extend as much as 3 miles from land ; therefore a berth of at least 4 miles should be given to this coast. Between Kabarruyan Island and Port Sual the coast is intersected by bays with sandy shores, and there are some islands off it. Port Bolinao (ch. 3, p. 41) is a narrow channel between Cape Bolinao and the low wooded island of Santiago. The shore end of the telegraph cable is landed here, near a small building situated close to the west shore ; it is thence laid in a direction NE. by E. \ E. nearly 2 cables to a red buoy moored in 10 fathoms water, thence to seaward in a N". by W. ^ W. direction. Mariners are cautioned not to anchor northward of this buoy when it bears between SE. and S. i W., nor west- ward or southward of the buoy when it bears between east and NE. i N. As the coast of Santiago Island and also the islets which lie off it is fronted by shoals projecting about 2^ miles, vessels ought to give the north side of the island a good berth in the northeast monsoon, for a southerly current may be liable at times to drift them into Lingayen Gulf (ch. 1, p. 35) or near the shoals on its western side. Silakwi Islet, NNW. of Santiago Island, appears wedge- shaped when seen from the westward, and to the southeast of it are several small rocky islets. A reef of coral extends 2 miles round this group. • 42 LUZON— WEST COAST. A shoal with 8 fathoms on it lies 4 miles NE. of Silakwi Islet, and another with 7 fathoms on it lies 64- miles NE. by E. I E. Cape Bolinao is the name given to the northwest extremity of the part of Luzon Island which forms the west coast of the Gnlf of Lingayen. It is of moderate height, thickly wooded, and may he seen in clear weather about '24 miles ; it slopes gently toward the sea, and has Piedra Point on its M^est side. Piedra Point (Cape Bolinao of the old charts) is moderately high, steep-to, and sterile in appearance ; it is the most west- ern point of Cape Bolinao. A semaphore station has been established on the point. From Piedra Point the coast fringes with shoals and reefs, trends NE. by E. for 7 miles to Cape Balinhasay, near which stands the town of Bolinao. The coast from Piedra Point to Caiman Point is level, of moderate height, and sterile aspect, with a steep beach front- ing tli.e sea, and may be seen in clear weather about 24 miles. This part of the coast is bold to approach, having no bottom at 50 fathoms within a mile of it in many places ; there are soundings near the beach in some of the small bays, where a small vessel might anchor occasionally, but there is no safe place of shelter for large vessels. Caiman Point has a reef projecting to the SSW., but the channel is safe between it and Culebra Island. The coast for 30 miles to the southward of this point, as far as Point Palauig, is indented with several deep bays filled with shoals, projecting beyond the points that form their respec- tive entran'ces. Dazol Bay, extending between Santa Cruz and Caiman Points, has several shoals situated about 1^ miles from shore. The channel between Culebra Island and Caiman Point leads to Tambove Roads and also to the port of Santa Cruz. The latter port is only used by coasters, and is approached from the northward between Hermana Major and a small islet 3| miles east of it. The passage between the two Hermanas, although wide, is reported to be dangerous. Tambove Road. — East of Caiman Point is a small bay, and east of this is Tambove Road, extending 4 miles east and west, 2| miles deep, and open only to southerly winds. At the bottom of the bay is Dauli Point, and 2 miles SE. of Dauli Point is a l)aiih with 6^ feet of -water over it. LL'ZON— WEST COA.ST. 43 The depth at tlie entrance of the bay is 18 fathoms, with I'i and 6 fathoms at the anchorage. After passing between Caiman Point and Cnlebra Ishmd steer to the east, giving a berth to the reefs off the next point; when the bay is well open steer to the northward for Danli Point, but until in soft mud it will be improper to anchor, for rocks are scattered over the bottom where it consists of sand. Wood and good water may be obtained here. CuLEBRA AND Hermana ISLANDS. — Culebra, or Adder Island, is small, with trees on it, and a sandy beach; on the south side there is a reef. The passage between the island and Caiman Point is If miles broad, clear of dangers, and w4th GO fathoms water in it. Hermana (Sisters) Islands are low and woody, with conspicuous sandy beaches. Hermana Major lies about 5^ miles southward of Culebra, and is sur- rounded by reefs. To the north of it is a reef 3 miles long NNW. and SSE., with rocks above water, between which and the island there is a channel with 44- fathoms in it. Her- mana Menor (Makalira) lies 3 miles SSE. of Hermana Major and W. of Santa Cruz Point, with which it forms a channel, having 8 fathoms water in it ; it is about 1 mile in diameter, with reefs on its west and south sides and a patch of sand on its north side. The coast. — Santa Cruz Point is low and covered by man- groves; a reef projects 1^ miles from it toward Hermana Menor. Between Santa Cruz Point and Arenas Point, (3^ miles to the southward, the coast recedes, forming a bay into which three rivers discharge ; it then runs south for 4 miles to Bani Point. All this part of the coast is fronted by shoals extending 5 miles offshore. Sabalai Bank, 3 miles long, north' and south, and 2 miles broad, is situated l^ miles to the NW. of Arenas Point; it is a rocky shoal awash at its eastern edge, with from 1| to 5^ fathoms water over it in other jmrts. Between Sabalai Bank and Arenas Point are several pinnacles with 2f and 4 fathoms on them. Tortuga Bank, about 2 miles south of Sabalai Bank, is 2 miles in extent east and west, with a least depth of 2f fathoms. Ports Masinglok and Matalvi, situated between Bani Point and Makalaba Island, are separated by San Salvador Island and the reef which extends to the east of it. Bani Point is 44 LUZON — WEST COAST. ]o-x and sandy, witli patclies of mangroves on it; a reef pro- jects 1 mile SSW. from it, and nearly joins the slioals awash, which form the northern side . of the entrance to Port Masinglok. Salvador Island is of moderate elevation, tliickly wooded, and has reefs extending f of a mile to the NW. The channel between Salvador Island and the reefs, extending from Bani Point, is 4 cables broad, with depths of 27 to 15 fathoms, and a depth of 16 to 14 fathoms is maintained to before the town of Masiiiglok. The channel south of the island is about 3i cables broad in the narrowest part; it has a depth of 25 to 15 fathoms in it, and leads to Port Matalvi. Port Masinglok. — The anchorage in front of the town is bad, as it is open to the NW., and the channel leading to it is narrow and lined with reefs. The space southeast of Salvador Island is foul and strewn with rocks, but anchorage can be obtained in a bay on the east side of the island, in 5| to 6^ fathoms, protected from northerly winds. North of Port Masinglok and east of Bani Point is Oyon Bay, which runs in 2 miles ENE., with depths of G to 8 fathoms, mud; the entrance is blocked by a circular reef. Port Matalvi, which is well protected, is formed between Matalvi Island and the coast to the southward ; it extends 2 miles east and west, and has a mean breadth of i mile. The best anchorage is in 8 fathoms, mud, in the middle of the port. Water can be obtained from a spring south of Luan Island. Makalaba Island, at the entrance of the channel lead- ing to Port Matalvi, is circular in form, with a sandy shore on its east side, and reefs which extend f of a mile from its north and south points. The coast — From the southern point of Matalvi Port the coast trends sonth to Palauig Bay, and is very low, sandy, and bordered by reefs. Palauig Bay is 2f miles wide at its mouth, 1 mile deep, and open to the NW. The town of Palauig is situated on the south shore. Palauig Point is bordered to the northward by islets, rocks, and shoals, which make this point dangerous to approach. Palauig Reefs consist of various shoals extending 4^ miles offshore between Iba and Palauig Point. The southern reef, named Kinabakbagan, with 1^ fathoms water over it, extends li miles; the northern and largest, with very little water over it, lies off Palauig Point. Between these two are sev- eral shoal patches, the outer one having only 2i fathoms on LUZON — WEST COAST. 45 it. It will be prudent to give this part of the coast a herth of 6 or 7 miles. Iba Point, lying G miles from Batalan Point, is surrounded by a coral reef extending northwest to Point Palauig. Sonth- east of Iba Point is the town of Iba, capital of the Province of Zambales, situated 2^ miles from the month of the river of the same name. Anchorage can be obtained south of the H- fathom shoal which fronts the mouth of this river. Batalan, or Guai Point, 6 miles SSE. of Iba Point, is sur- rounded by a reef which extends out 3 cables. Mount Batalan, formed by two hills, the highest of which is 1,847 feet, domi- nates the point, and is an excellent mark for this coast. Inland a double range of high mountains runs nearly north and south, and between these and the coast there is an exten- sive flat plain named Playa Honda. Of the inner range, Mount Pinatubo reaches a height of 6,040 feet. Shoals. — At oi miles south of Batalan Point and 2 miles from the coast is a pinnacle rock with 4^ fathoms on it, and at 9 and 11^ miles S. i W. of the same point are two other shoals with 9 fathoms over them. The coast from Batalan Point trends about S. by E. for 21 miles to Kabangan Bay, and then turns to the SW. to Point Kapones. Barranca Colorada is a very slightly salient point formed by a flat-toj^ped, reddish-colored hill situated on the sand. Between Batalan and Barranca Colorada shoal ground extends in places 5 cables from the shore. Between this point and Kapones the coast is bordered by a sand beach, near which there are little plateaus of shoal water, very steep-to. Point Kapones is the most western point of this part of Luzon, and therefore important to vessels proceeding to and from China, and passing close to this coast. It bears north, distant 60 miles, from Cabra, or Goat Island, and is high, l)are land, of reddish aspect, having three islands to the N W. of it ; the largest of these. Great Kapones, lying with its outer point 2i miles WNW. from Point Kapones, is 8 cables long WNW. and ESE., and has rocks around it; the other two islands, extending 4 cables north and south, lie 7 cables NE. by E. from Great Kapones, nearly mid-distance between it and the coast. Light. — On Great Kapones Island, at 328 yards N. 59 "" E. from the western point of the island, there is exhibited a flash- ing white light, showing a flash every thirty seconds ; it is 46 LUZON — WfiST COAST. visible tlirougli an arc of 300", or between the bearings of S. 02° W., tlirough east, and N. (i4' W. The light is elevated 228 feet above high water, and shonld be seen in clear weather from a distance of 23 miles. The light-house, 53 feet high and constructed of brick, is square in shape, and the keeper's dwelling stands at the south- west corner of it. Soundings. — About a mile outside Point Kapones the depth is 42 or 44 fathoms ; from 40 to 35 fathoms will be found within a mile of the shore, between this part of the coast and the north point of Port Subig, and generally 45 to 50 fathoms about 3 or 4 miles off. The coast from Kapones Point trends S. by E. ^ E. 8 miles to Port Silanguin ; it is high, rocky, indented by three small bays fronted by islets, and backed by a range of high moun- tains extending NE. and SW. Port Silanguin (ch. 4, p. 46) is about half a mile wide at its entrance, and 2 miles deep, having tolerable shelter from all winds, except from west and SW. The southern point is formed by a high, round, bare island, joined to the mainland by a narrow reef of rocks. The depth in the entrance is 18 fathoms, decreasing gradually to the anchorage, a little inside, near the beach on the south shore, which is the best berth. About a mile SW. of the south entrance point of Port Silan- guin are six islets, called Farallon on the chart, adjoining each other, and surrounded by rocks ; the outer one lies about 1 mile SW. \ W. from Point Silanguin. Rocks are reported to extend 1 to 1^ miles to the westward of these islands. Water. — There are two streams of fresh water at the head of Port Silanguin, and a spring of good drinking water. The coast between Port Silanguin and Port Subig is high and moderately steep-to. Port Subig (ch. 4, p. 40) has Grande Island at its entrance, to the westward of which is the safe passage into the port ; for the passage to the eastward is intricate and lined by reefs. This port stretches 7 miles inland, and forms two excellent har- bors, one on the east side, named Port Olongapo, and the other at the northern extremity, opposite the village of Subig ; here vessels may be sheltered from all winds in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud. The islands in the port are surrounded by reefs, which ex- tend one to two cables; and a rocky shoal, with 2f fathoms on it, is situated at the head of the port, 4 cables SSW. from E'riffrofvd try Ed>i*WelUr 931 mral"W: J.L:.Vhartan,CB,i:R.S. ^^<^nif^ Ery StrtetXoKerBH. J ^^^L :^< ?/;-"■ ^^ PORTS sub; AND SILANGUII^ . i3 H LUZON — WEST COAST. 47 Point Kabangan. In jDroceeding to the inner part of the port, steer along the western shore, which is clear of danger. The extreme of the reef extending off Point Kubi, at the entrance to Port Olongapd, is marked by two white beacons and a buoy surmounted by a ball. Caiman Shoal, within the port, is also marked by a white beacon and a buoy surmounted by a ball. A black beacon marks the part of this shoal which is awash at low water. There is frequent steam communication between Port Subig and Manila. Port Binanga, or Minangas (ch. 4, p. 40), is the first bight to the southward of the entrance of Port Subig. Small ves- sels may anchor in 5 fathoms sheltered from all winds, ex- cepting those from west and WSW. The course into it is east and E. by N"., about mid-channel between the points, to avoid the shoals projecting from them, and there are 4 fath- oms, fine sandy bottom, inside, within a short distance from the shore. The coast. — From Port Binanga the coast trends south for 4 miles and is low, wooded, and bordered by a reef which, NW. of the town of Moron, extends as far as a mile out from the shore. Thence the coast runs SE. for 4 miles to JSTapo Point, off which there is an islet joined to the point by a reef. From Napo Point the coast trends ESE. for 4 miles, and then nearly south for 7 miles to Luzon Point ; thus forming a bight, named Bagak Bay, at the head of which is the town of Bagak. The shore of this entire bay is very low. Anchorage may be had off the town of Bagak, near the mole, in 5^ to 11 fathoms. Luzon Point is rocky and peaked, of moderate height, and bordered by a reef which extends out 1 cable. The coast from this point trends in a general direction nearly SE. by E. ^ E. for about 7 miles to Los Cochinos, and is indented with several small bays. Guai Bay, the largest of these, affords good anchorage during the northeast monsoon, and is frequented by vessels waiting for a fair wind to enter Manila Bay. Reefs extend from the entrance points of the bay ; the depth between the reefs is b^ to 11 fathoms, and 4 fathoms farther in, but it is not necessary to enter the bay to be well sheltered. Los Cochinos, or Lechones, are five low rocks above water which extend ^ mile south of the southwest point of Mariveles Port ; they are steep-to, with the exception of one rock cov- ered by 5 feet of water, which rock lies 1 cable S. 9° W. of LUZON — WEST COAST. 47 Point Kabangau. In proceeding to the inner part of the port, steer along the western shore, which is clear of clanger. The extreme of the reef extending off Point Knbi, at the entrance to Port Olongapd, is marked by two white beacons and a buoy surmounted by a ball. Caiman Shoal, within the port, is also marked by a white beacon and a buoy surmounted by a ball. A black beacon marks the part of this shoal which is awash at low water. There is frequent steam communication between Port Subig and Manila. Port Binanga, or Minangas (ch. 4, p. 4(3), is the first bight to the southward of the entrance of Port Subig. Small ves- sels may anchor in 5 fathoms sheltered from all winds, ex- cepting those from west and WSW. The course into it is east and E. by N., about mid-channel between the points, to avoid the shoals jn-ojecting from them, and there are 4 fath- oms, fine sandy bottom, inside, within a short distance from the shore. The coast. — From Port Binanga the coast trends south for 4 miles and is low, wooded, and bordered by a reef which, NW. of the town of Moron, extends as far as a, mile out from the shore. Thence the coast runs SE. for 4 miles to Napo Point, off which there is an islet joined to the point by a reef. From Napo Point the coast trends ESE. for 4 miles, and then nearly south for 7 miles to Luzon Point ; thus forming a bight, named Bagak Bay, at the head of which is the town of Bagak. The shore of this entire bay is very low. Anchorage may be had off the town of Bagak, near the mole, in 5^ to 11 fathoms. Luzon Point is rocky and peaked, of moderate height, and bordered by a reef which extends out 1 cable. The coast from this point trends in a general direction nearly SE. by E. ^ E. for about 7 miles to Los Cochinos, and is indented with several small bays. Guai Bay, the largest of these, affords good anchorage during the northeast monsoon, and is frequented by vessels waiting for a fair wind to enter Manila Bay. Reefs extend from the entrance points of the bay; the depth between the reefs is 5^ to 11 fathoms, and 4 fathoms farther in, but it is not necessary to enter the bay to be well sheltered. Los Cochinos, or Lechones, are five low rocks above water which extend i mile south of the southwest point of Mariveles Port ; they are steep-to, with the exception of one rock cov- ered by 5 feet of water, which rock lies 1 cable S. 9° W. of 48 LUZON — WEST COAST, the easternmost Coeliiiio, Monti Islet. Los Cocliinos Point is the SSE. extremity of a little peninsula conspicuous l)y two hills which command it. From Port Subig to Los Cochinos the coast is in general evenly steep, and may be approached within 1 or 3 miles in some parts ; but it will be prudent to give it a wide berth, as rocks or foul ground extend a considerable distance from some of the points. Supplies at Manila. — The quantity of coal for steaming purposes kept in stock varies considerably, but it can always be obtained, and is taken on board from lighters in the bay. In 1887 the price for Cardiff coal, placed on board, was about $10 per ton. Water can be x^urchased, and is brought alongside in steam water tanks. The water in Manila, excepting the rain j^re- served in tanks, is brackish and very hard. Fresh beef is very bad, it being spoiled in the killing. If much be required the bullocks should be purchased and killed on board. The price is about 10 cents per pound. Vegetables are very moderate in price, but not plentiful. Corregidor or Mariveles and Caballo are two islands divid- ing the entrance of Manila Bay into two channels, known respectively as the North and South channels. Corregidor, the principal island, 639 feet high, lies near the north shore and is 3^ miles in length east and west. On its 7iorth side is a small bay, protected by breakwaters, affording good anchor- age for coasting vessels ; and from Buri Point a reef extends to the southward toward Caballo Island. There is fresh water to be procured under a steep cliff at the western end of this island, but the landing is on a stony beach, and inconvenient. Caballo Island is a high bluff rock 420 feet high, of consid- erable size, partially covered with verdure, lying about f of a mile southward of Buri Point, the eastern extreme of Cor- regidor. A reef and shoal water extend about 5 cables from its western extreme. The channel between the two islands is about 4 cables wide and has a depth of 7^ fathoms in the middle ; the tides in it are strong. Lights. — On the summit of Corregidor stands a light-house 60 feet high, from which is exhibited, at an elevation of 639 feet above the sea, a white light, revolving once every ten or ■s-^r *^" ' ■■ u^: ■■ " 1 ■■ ■ .• ": "\^ « ,. '^-M //:. . X ARSKNAL DE CAVITK """^■^ P L A JV O n^EHTO DE CAVITE sus ensenadas de CANACAO v BACOOR • parte de !a bahla do Manila hasla Paranaque D. Manuel Villavioenoio. (^r. idj-id. 1874..' MARK AS #>• ~. [—>—'- .-^. r- I LUZON — WEST COAST. 49 twenty seconds, and visible in clear weather from a distance of 20 miles. A fixed white light is shown from the white tower on the West Mole Head, at the entrance to the bay on the north side of the island. A fixed white light is exhibited from low sjDur on the north- east part of Caballo Island, 27 feet above high-water mark, and is visible G miles. This light is concealed by high land to seaward between the bearings of NNE. and E. by N., and screened toward the north shore between the l)earings of S. by W. and ESE. A fixed white light, showing a sector of green light through an arc of 75° or between the bearings of N. 47° E. and N. 28° W., is exhibited from a light-house on Sangley Point (ch. 5, p. 49), the outer extreme of the low land at the entrance of Port Cavite. It is elevated 29 feet above high water, and is visible in clear weather from a distance of 6 miles. The light is shifted as the point extends. A fixed red light, elevated 51 feet above the level of the sea, is exhibited from a white circular tower, on the northern mole at the entrance of Pasig River, and should be visible in clear weather from a distance of 9 miles. A fixed green light is exhibited from an iron stand painted red, on the battery of the southern mole, entrance of Pasig River. This light is elevated 16 feet above high water, and should be seen from ofi^ the entrance of the river between the bearing of NW. and SE. at a distance of 1 mile ; it bears south from the red light on the north mole. Corregidor Island light, Manila Bay, has been replaced by a provisional light of the same character, but of less i^ower, pending the installation of a new permanent light to be exhibited on and after August 1, 1897. The new light will be a flashing white and red light show- ing white and red flashes alternately every ten seconds. The light will be 633 feet above the sea, 42 feet above the ground, and visible 36 miles in clear weather. Soundings from 50 to 40 fathoms will be obtained when within 7 or 6 miles of Corregidor, decreasing gradually to 27 or 26 fathoms about 2 miles to the westward of it. Between Corregidor and the north shore the depths are 50 to 48 fathoms within :^ of a mile of the island, 26 fathoms in mid-channel, decreasing quickly to 16 or 15 fathoms, stony ground, within | mile of the north shore. £soala eii ntf^trow PRECIO 1.5 PeKeias_En t;!.,.ar,,a LUZON— WEST COAST. 49 twenty seconds, and visible in clear weather from a distance of 20 miles. A fixed white light is shown from the white tower on the West Mole Head, at the entrance to the bay on the north side of the island. A fixed white light is exhibited from low spnr on the north- east part of Caballo Island, 27 feet above high- water mark, and is visible 6 miles. This light is concealed by high land to seaward between the bearings of NNE. and E. by N., and screened toward the north shore between the bearings of S. by W. and ESE. A fixed white light, showing a sector of green light through an arc of 75° or between the bearings of N. 47° E. and N. 28° W., is exhibited from a light-house on Sangley Point (cli. 5, p. 49), the outer extreme of the low land at the entrance of Port Cavite. It is elevated 29 feet above high water, and is visible in clear weather from a distance of miles. The light is shifted as the point extends. A fixed red light, elevated 51 feet above the level of the sea, is exhibited from a white circular tower, on the northern mole at the entrance of Pasig River, and should be visible in clear weather from a distance of 9 miles. A fixed green light is exhibited from an iron stand painted red, on the battery of the southern mole, entrance of Pasig River. This light is elevated 16 feet above high water, and should be seen from off the entrance of the river between the bearing of NW. and SE. at a distance of 1 mile ; it bears south from the red light on the north mole. Corregidor Island light, Manila Bay, has been replaced by a provisional light of the same character, but of less power, pending the installation of a new permanent light to be exhibited on and after August 1, 1897. The new light will be a flashing white and red light show- ing white and red flashes alternately every ten seconds. The light will be 633 feet above the sea, 42 feet above the ground, and visible 36 miles in clear weather. Soundings from 50 to 40 fathoms will be obtained when within 7 or 6 miles of Corregidor, decreasing gradually to 27 or 26 fathoms about 2 miles to the westward of it. Between Corregidor and the north shore the dej^ths are 50 to 48 fathoms within ^ of a mile of the island, 26 fathoms in mid-channel, decreasing quickly to 16 or 15 fathoms, stony ground, within ^ mile of the north shore. 50 LUZON— WEST COAST. La Monja, the Nun, or Maycot-k, is a higli rock, bearing from Corregidor light W. f S., distant 3 miles, with 27 fath- oms water within ^ of a mile of it all round. The soundings from it decrease regularly to 20 fathoms within -| mile of the north shore and deepen to 29 or 30 fathoms near the north- west part of Corregidor, close to which there are two rocks, one of which is perforated. El Fraile (the Friar) Rock or Islet, which appears like a sail, lies 3f miles S. i E. from Caballo light, and nearly 2 miles from the south shore of the bay. Close around it are depths of 10 and 11 fathoms, increasing to 17 and 23 fathoms at a short distance to the westward. Port Mariveles, on the north side of the entrance to Manila Bay, is about a mile wide and 1^ miles deep ; with good an- chorage, sheltered from all but southeast winds. Vessels of any size may moor here, and procure excellent water. Some rocky islets, Los Cochinos, with a rock awash just outside them, project -i- mile otf the southwest point of entrance. Vessels may anchor in 17 fathoms, with the village bearing NW. by W., or they may run farther into the bay if neces- sary, the bottom being good holding ground and the anchorage safe. This is a convenient place for vessels to touch at when in want of wood and water, the former being an expensive article at Manila. From Port Mariveles the coast trends east to Point Lasisi, then NE. to Point Limai; between the two latter points the shore is fronted by foul ground, and between San Jose and Real points, fishing stakes extend 2 miles from the land. Shoal. — A shoal of 12 feet water, on which the American ship Sea Witch grounded in 1884, is reported to lie with Kau- kauve Point bearing west, distant 6 cables. Limbones and Karabao islets are two rocky islets on the south side of the entrance ; between them is Patungan Cove, which runs in 2 miles to the SSE. From Limbones Islet the coast is high and cliif y as far as Marigondon River, which forms the boundary of the highlands of the Sierra de Pico de Loro. A semaphore station has been established on Point Restinga, 1 mile east of Karabao Island. St. Nicholas Banks are two shoals lying midway between Caballo Island and Port Cavite (ch. 5, p. 49). The outer shoal, nearly a mile in extent, is the larger of the two, and has but 5 feet water on its shoalest iiart. From its outer or northern LUZON— SOUTHWEST COAST. 51 edge, in 11 feet water, Corregitlor light bears W. by S. f S., and Cavite churcli E. by N. ^ N. Within a ship's length to the northwestward there are 13 and 15 fathoms water, the soundings being no guide in approaching it because the bank is so steep. La Monja Island, in line with the northwest point of Corregider Island bearing W. by S. | S., leads north of the St. Nicholas Banks. A beacon has been constructed on the northwest head of the northwestern of the two shoals forming St. Nicholas Banks in Manila Bay. The beacon stands in 13 feet of water at low water and consists of a base of concrete showing 12 feet above low water, in the form of a truncated cone, and surmounted by an iron tower 23 feet high, on which will be placed the lantern for the light which is to be established. SOUTHWEST COAST. Although this coast is out of the ordinary track of vessels passing up and down the China Sea, yet it is of importance when proceeding to or from Manila, inside the Lubang Islands. Vessels navigating along it should keep near the shore, in order to escape the tides which run from the entrance of Manila Bay to the southwestward. From Limbones Island the coast trends S. by W. about 7 miles to Point Fuego, and is intersected by various bays. It is elevated, rocky, and very steep-to, with several islets in its vicinity. Port Jamilo, situated about 44- miles to the southward of Limbones Island, is on the southeast side of the bay of the same name, and runs in about 1^ miles to the eastward ; the entrance is about 4 to 5 cables in breadth, with depths of 16 and 14 fathoms, decreasing gradually toward the interior, where the soundings are 5i to G| fathoms, sand and mud. The best anchorage is on the north side, in (3^ and 7^ fath- oms. Mangroves grow near the mouth of the river, which discharges at the head of the port, the shore of which is low. Soundings. — The soundings off this part of Luzon are deep ai'id irregular, 30 to 110 fathoms, and afford but little or no warning when approaching the dangers, close to which are 17 to GO fathoms; consequently the navigator will have to approach the coast with proper care and caution. The coast. — Point Fuego is moderately high and rocky, with an islet off its north side. Two other islets, connected 52 LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. by a reef, lie 1^ miles SSE. of the point, and have a pinnacle rock, awash at low water, on their eastern side. Nasngbu Bay, about 5 miles to the southwestward of Fuego Point, is formed by low land, with a dark, sandy shore, which is steep-to and wooded. About the middle of this bay the river Lian discharges ; on the bar is a depth of 2 feet at low water. The town of Nasugbu, containing 3,000 inhabitants, is situated on the right bank of the river. Anchorage during the northeast monsoon can be obtained in front of the bar of the river Lian, in 5^ to 7i fathoms, sand. Shoal. — A rocky shoal, 1 cable long, east and west, and i of a cable broad, with 4^ feet water over it at the eastern extrem- ity, lies 4 cables from Nasugbu Point ; from the shoalest part, Fortune Island bears W. i N., Point Talin S. i W., and Point Fuego NNW. f W. Talin Bay, lying to the north of Talin Point, is 3| miles wide and about 1^ miles deep, but open to the NW., and foul. Its shore is composed of alternate rocky cliffs and sandy beaches. Talin Point is of moderate height, of rocks and short sand beaches which serve as a base to several pyramidal hills very slightly wooded ; it is surrounded by a reef to the distance of one cable. The coast. — Two miles to the south of Point Talin is a little bay (Matabukai) ; from here the coast trends south for 8 miles to Point Kalatayan, and is very low, with sandy shores and mangB.ves; it is also intersected by several estuaries, and is fronted by a reef which extends 2 miles to seaward. Sound- ings of 14 and 17 fathoms will be obtained ^ mile from the edge of the reef. Cape Santiago. — The southwest extremity of Luzon Island is moderately high, wooded, and surrounded by a reef which extends about a cable from the shore, and dries. The sound- ings at the edge of the reef are 4 to 5 fathoms, deepening abruptly to 44 and 55 fathoms at a distance of half a mile. Light. — There is a semaphore station on Cape Santiago, in connection with Manila, and a light-house will shortly be com- menced. Minerva Rock. — Vessels passing eastward of the Lubang group and apj)roaching Cape Santiago, or St. Jago, the south- west point of Luzon, should be careful to avoid the Minerva Rock, which seems not to have been noticed by navigators LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. 53 until the Minerva, of Alloa, Captain Robertson, bound from Sydney to Manila, struck on it at 2 a. m. September 10, 1834, although an American shij) had been wrecked on it several years previously. It is said to be a coral rock, having 17 fathoms water near it, and bearing from Cape Santiago SE. ^ E., distant 4 or 5 miles. The channel eastward of the Lubang Islands, and also between them and Mindoro, is frequented by the Spanish ves- sels when going to or coming from Manila. The Samarang worked through this channel easterly, and Sir Edward Belcher remarks : " It is important to remind seamen that from about 4 to (j a. m. those who frequent this coast state that sudden heavy squalls may be expected offshore, and as vessels are compelled to carry a press of sail to mpke j)rogress, they should shorten before they round Kalavite; and this especially applies to close working to get through the channel between it and Lubang. Even Avith caution a flurry took two jib booms in succession between G and 10 a. m. The advantage gained by this channel, which is free from danger as to pilotage, was manifest, as it enabled us, having cleared the channel at 3 p. m., to reach the entrance of Manila Bay with a free wind at 10 p. m." Fortune Island, situated 6i miles SW. of Point Fuego, is about a mile in extent, bare, and steep-to, with some rocks off its southeastern side. Sir E. Belcher observes: "The island is safe to, and, like Cabra, requires but the seaman's attention." Simo Banks, about 14 or 15 miles northward of the Lubang group, consist of two banks, with a least depth of 8 fathoms on them. The western bank extends 2 miles north and south, and lies 12 miles W. ^ N. from Fortune Island. The eastern bank extends NE. and SW., and bears W. by N. 8 miles from Fortune Island. There are irregular souiidings, 21 to 109 fathoms, near these banks. Lubang Islands are a detached group of six islands that front the southwest end of Luzon and the northwest end of Mindoro. They are uninhabited, with the exception of Lu- bang Island, which in 1879 had a population of about 3,000. The only safe anchorage for vessels during all seasons is the port of Tilig, situated on the northeast coast of Lubang Island. Cabra, or Goat Island, the outer or westernmost island of the Lubang group, extends 2 miles from NW. to SE., and is a 54 LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. low, flat, wooded island, with a reef projecting -i- cable from its north and northeast sides. Sir E. Belcher remarks: "Some doubt existing as to the true position of the dangers reported to extend off this island, a day was devoted to establish this turning point of the navi- gation of these seas." The Samarang grazed the island on its eastern side, round- ing to and anchoring off" its southern face. The distance usually observed in passing land is the only question to be noticed here. No dangers requiring express caution exist. It has also been passed by the Samarang very close on the west side, much within the range that any merchant vessel could try without the appearance of danger. In the voyage of H. M. S. Snlpliur it is observed: "Both the Starling and Sulphur shaved the surf line of Cabra without obtaining soundings ; therefore, the dangers reported to lie to the north- ward of this island are incorrectly stated." The channel between this island and Lubang is about 1\ miles broad, and may be navigated without fear, as the reefs on the north side of Lubang always show. In this channel the flood sets to the north and the ebb to the south. Light. — Near the western extreme of Cabra Island is exhib- ited a group flashing white light every minute, the duration of each flash being eight seconds, the interval between each two flashes of the same group seven seconds, and the interval between the groups thirty-seven seconds. It is visible sea- ward through an arc of 268°, or from the bearing of S. 49° W. to N. 39° W. The light is elevated 217 feet above the sea, and should be seen in clear weather from a distance of 22 miles. The light-house, 67 feet high, and constructed of brick, is square in shape, with sloping base, and keeper's dwelling at- tached on its eastern side. Lubang Island, extending about 16 miles nearly NW. and SE., is the largest and most important island of the group; it is high in the middle, but low at each extreme. Its coasts are protected by a reef which extends about i of a mile from the shore; the southwest coast is rocky. On the eastern and northeastern sides are several bays, more or less protected, but diflicult to make, owing to the shoals and reefs by which they are inclosed. Port Tilig, on the northeast coast of Lubang, is the only safe anchorage for vessels in all seasons ; it is sheltered from LUBAN ISLAND LOOC BAT ^^/ S«tlis of 14 to 5^ fathoms in low water, in mid-channel, and the western shore can be approached until the anchorage in front of the bastion is reached, in 5^ to 3f fathoms, mud and sand. The bottom of the bay is occupied by a shoal in the shape of a half moon, showing at Ioav water, which divides the port into two dis- tinct anchorages. The San Vicente bastion is situated on the western point of the entrance; it is a square tower of rough stone, upon the parapet of which a wooden house has been erected. Ingress and egress, unless in very favorable weather, owing to its being on a lee shore, is questionable for a sailing vessel. Cattle, pigs, and poultry can be obtained at moderate prices, also a fair supply of water. There are no vegetables, and fruit is very scarce. Tides. — The tides are complicated. It is high water, full and change, in Port Tilig at 9h. 30m. ; springs rise 5 feet. Luk (Looc) Bay (ch. 6, p. 55), on the east side of Lubang, is thus described by Sir E. Belcher: "On the eastern end of Lubang Island, and covered by Ambil Island, is the very snug port of Luk, which affords safe retreat in the event of accident in passing Kalavite or during the navigation of Verde Island Passage. It is pretty free from dangers at the mouth, and good holding ground will be found in depths between 10 and 20 fathoms. Within the former depth it suddenly shoals, and several lines of coral ledge bar the inner depths of the bay from direct access, although excellent shelter would be found by a vessel moored between these barriers to which they might easily be conducted. At the village a brisk rivulet supplies most excellent water, but boats can not fill except at high water." In approaching the bay caution must be observed, as a 3^ fathoms patch is marked on the chart about 2^ miles to the eastward of the southern horn of the bay. Water, as well as wood, is easily procured, but bullocks, stock, vegetables, etc., are at the same (or higher) prices as Manila. From Luk Bay the coast trends to the NW. about 7 miles to Port Tilig, and -is generally fringed with reefs. There are No.G LUBAN ISLAND \ LOOC BA' Surveyed, by CATT" SIH.E ■ HE I A : HF.H, RJf. C J. 1846 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS J Jfatural Sca2e M.ioo San Rafael ."i i\ Scale at 10 CaUes or 1 Sea i LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. 55 all winds and completely protected from the sea. The hold- ing ground is excellent. The entrance faces the NNW. and is beaconed by the reefs on which the sea breaks during rough weather. In the entrance there are depths of 14 to 5^ fathoms in low water, in mid-channel, and the western shore can be approached until the anchorage in front of the bastion is reached, in 5^ to of fathoms, mud and sand. The bottom of the bay is occupied by a shoal in the shape of a half moon, showing at low water, which divides the i><-*i't into two dis- tinct anchorages. The San Vicente bastion is situated on the western point of the entrance; it is a square tower of rough stone, upon the parapet of which a wooden house has been erected. Ingress and egress, unless in very favorable weather, owing to its being on a lee shore, is questionable for a sailing vessel. Cattle, pigs, and poultry can be obtained at moderate prices, also a fair supply of water. There are no vegetables, and fruit is very scarce. Tides. — The tides are complicated. It is high water, full and change, in Port Tilig at 9h. 30m. ; springs rise 5 feet. Luk (Looc) Bay (cli. 6, p. 55), on the east side of Lubang, is thus described by Sir E. Belcher: "On the eastern end of Lubang Island, and covered by Ambil Island, is the very snug port of Luk, which affords safe retreat in the event of accident in passing Kalavite or during the navigation of Verde Island Passage. It is pretty free from dangers at the mouth, and good holding ground will be found in depths between 10 and 20 fathoms. Within the former depth it suddenly shoals, and several lines of coral ledge bar the inner depths of the bay from direct access, although excellent shelter would be found by a vessel moored between these barriers to which they might easily be conducted. At the village a brisk rivulet supplies most excellent water, but boats can not fill excei)t at high water." In approaching the bay caution must be observed, as a 3^ fathoms patch is marked on the chart about 2|- miles to the eastward of the southern horn of the bay. Water, as well as wood, is easily procured, but bullocks, stock, vegetables, etc., are at the same (or higher) prices as Manila. From Luk Bay the coast trends to the NW. about 7 miles to Port Tilig, and -is generally fringed with reefs. There are 5() T.I'ZON — SOITTHWEST (OAST. suiiu' small l);iys on this coast, l)ut tlu-y only afford protection among the I'et^fs for small vessels with local knowledge. Amhil, or Amul Island,, lying to the east of Lnbang, is about 4^ miles east and west, and is formed by a conical mountain about 2,500 feet high with a plain on its western side. The northeast coast is high and rocky, with an open bay, in which are depths of 10 to 11 fathoms ; on the west side is a bay ^ mile broad in which anchorage can be obtained in 4 fathoms, mud; a reef extends 2 cables from the shores of this bay. The passage between Ambil and Lubang is clear, but caution is necessary on account of the reefs, which contract the chan- nel to one-half its apparent breadth. The flood tide sets to the south and the ebb to the north through this channel. Afuera Bank, to the north of Lubang Island and 2^ miles from Port Tilig, extends 1| miles from east to west and is f of a mile broad, with deptlis of 2 to 4 fathoms over it. From the bastion of Tilig the shoalest part bears between N. f W. and N. by W. i W. Ambil Bank, a crescent-shaped shoal, is 2 miles in extent, with depths of 4 to 5^ fathoms on it, and a patch of rock in the center, with 2 fathoms water over it. It lies NW. of Ambil Island and close to it, the channel between the edge of the bank and the NW. point of the island being 4 cables broad. Malavatuan Island, 3 miles to the north of Ambil, is about 3 cables in extent NE. and SW., and covered with brushwood. It is steep-to, and has a passage 1^ miles broad between it and Mandani Island, with depths in it of 5| to 7 fathoms. To the north and northwestward of this island are shoal patches on which the least water appears to be G fathoms, the soundings round about being 36 to 50 and 90 fathoms. ■ Mandani Island, 1 mile north of Ambil, is rather more than ^ mile in extent, and composed of two small hills of unequal height. On the southwest side is a shoal a cable from the shore ; the other sides are steep-to. Golo Island, a high but long narrow strip of land, 8 miles WNW. and ESE., with reefs off its northeast, east, and south- east points, adjoins the southeastern extreme of Lubang. The south side of Golo Island must be approached with caution ; coral reefs extend about 1 cable from the shore. H. M. S. Teazer, 1872, anchored in 13 fathoms, mud, oft' this part of the LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. 57 island, with Cape Kalavite bearing S. | W., and tlie south- east extreme of Golo Island SE. by E. f E. About i of a cable nearer the shore 4 and 5 fathoms, coral, were obtained. The channel between this island and Lubang is 4 cables broad, with a rock nearly awash in its center. The flood tide runs to the south, and the ebb to the north through this channel. Flying Cloud Rock. — The ship Flying Cloud, on the Ttli of April, 1854, is reported to have struck on a sunken rock, Avith (') to 12 feet water on it, and about 30 or 35 feet in diam- eter; it is said to lie in latitude 13° 28' N., longitude 110° 34' E. (approximate). Cape Santiago is moderately high, wooded, and surrounded by a reef which extends about a cable from the shore, and dries. The soundings at the edge of the reef are 4 to 5 fathoms, deepening abruptly to 44 and 55 fathoms at the distance of ^ mile. Light. — There is a semaphore station on Cape Santiago in connection with Manila, and a light-house will shortly be com- menced. Minerva Rock, on which the Minerva, of Alloa, is reported to have struck at 2 a.m., September 10, 1834, is said to be a coral rock, having 17 fathoms water near it, and bearing from Cape Santiago SE. ^ E., distant 4 or 5 miles. The rock was searched for unsuccessfully by the Spanish Hydrographic Commission under Capt. D. Claudio Montero, and has been erased from the Sj^anish charts. . Pagapas Bay, between Cape Santiago and Point San Pedrino to the northward, is very deep ; the shore is fringed by a nar- row reef with soundings of 7 fathoms near its edge. Anchor- age may be found on the eastern side of the bay in 7 fathoms ; the western part is rocky. At the bottom of the bay is the little port, Kalaboso, formed by a break in the reef ; the en- trance is difficult and it is only frequented by coasters. Point San Pedrino is surmounted by a hillock; it is well wooded, and is encircled l)y a reef that extends to a cable's distance from the shore. Balayan Bay, the great bay between Cape Santiago and Point Benagalet or Kalumpan, is clear of danger, with bottom of sand and mud, but the shores are so steep that a vessel must approach very close to get within 12 fathoms depth. 58 LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. W^inds and tides. — The winds in this bay follow the mon- soo]is generally ; the land breeze blows nearly every evening. The Hood stream makes to the southward and the ebb to the northward. Balayan town, at the mouth of the river of the same name, is situated G miles to the northward of Point San Pedriho ; there is anchorage to the eastward of the river in 3 to G fathoms, sand and rock, sheltered from all winds but those from the southward ; only boats of light draft can enter the river, as the bar has only 3 feet of water over it at high water. Mount Balayan, which lies 3 miles NE. of the town, serves as a guide to the anchorage. The town consists of 25,000 in- habitants, and affords supplies of all kinds. Taal lies 11 miles ESE. of Balayan; the coast between these two towns is low and sandy, but steej)-to. This important town is at the entrance of the river Pansipit, into which ves- sels of 100 tons burden can enter. The best anchorage is to the north of the mouth of the river near the shore in 7 fath- oms, sand, with the fort of Taal in line with Mount Makalog; it is sheltered from all winds from north to south through east. There are 7 feet of water at high water on the bar of the river, which flows from the lake of Taal and enters the bay about a mile from the town. The inhabitants of Taal, like those of Balayan, are engaged chiefly in agriculture, care of cattle, and in fishing; provisions are plentiful, and there is active commerce with the Province of Manila. Point Benagalet, the western point of Kalumpan Peninsula, is a rocky bluff fringed by a narrow reef, which runs all around the southwest of the peninsula to near Point Cazador. This part of the coast is clean, with soundings of 25 fathoms close to ; it is of regular height and covered with wood. Point Cazador is the southern end of Kalumpan Peninsula, which separates the bays of Balayan and Batangas. It is formed by a tongue of land of regular height, covered with trees; off the point, and joined to it, are some rocks, and on its eastern side a narrow reef, with soundings of 3 to 11 fath- oms at ^ cable distance, which soundings deepen abruptly to 65 fathoms at 2 cables from the southern part. Batangas Bay, contained between Point Cazador and Point Matoko, 9 miles to the ESE., penetrates 9 miles to the north- ward ; it is clear and deep, with steep coasts. From Point Cazador the coast for 6 miles to the NNE. is steep, rocky, and LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. 59 wooded; it can be passed without danger at a distance of i of a mile. From thence the coast is low, with sand beaches cut into by the little rivers Balito, Buang, Batangas, and Kaluni- pan. Batangas River, whicli enters to the eastward and very near to the town of the same name, is so shallow that a canoe can hardly enter it at low water, and even at high water boats have a difficulty in going up it. There is a watering place up the river at a little distance from the mouth, and farther up the river divides it into two branches ; one branch is directed to the eastward, and with some windings passes close to the town of Batangas, at f of a mile from the mouth ; the other branch is to the southeast, and joins the river Kalumpan. To the west of the mouth there is a sand bank, which is mostly uncovered at low water. Kalumpan River enters f of a mile from the Batangas River. The bank which forms its bar is 2 cables wide, and uncovers at low water, so that it is difficult even for the light- est canoes to enter. The river brings down volcanic ashes and pieces of pumice stone, which together form both its banks and the bar, and cover part of the bottom in the neigh- borhood. Coast. — From the river Kalumpan the coast trends to the southward, forming a small bay with a beach of sand and mangroves ending in a little point at 1+ miles from the river. The bank of sand which commences at the mouth of the river Batangas and borders all this part of the coast at a dis- tance of 2 to 3 cables terminates here. This bank dries in places at low water; the depth near its northern edge is 12^ fathoms, mud; off its southwest extreme, 11 fathoms; and at its southern end 7 to 30 fathoms, whicli depth increases to 82 fathoms at less than 2 miles from the Batangas coast. Pinamukan Point lies SSW. 3 miles from the little point where the bank ends; the coast between these points is of regular height and well wooded, with soundings of 5 fath- oms close to the shore and -tO to 50 fathoms at the distance of 1 mile; to the eastward of Point Pinamukan it forms an angle, into which flows a small river of the same name as the point. Fresh water may be obtained from this river, but with difficulty, as it is necessary to go some distance up for it, and the river is very shallow. From Point Pinamukan the coast trends about SSW. for 3 miles to Point Matoko, and 00 LUZON — SOUTHWEST COAST. is of regukir licight and wooded, with detaclied rocks close to tlie shore. Anchorage. — From Point Buaiig to Point Pinamukan the whole coast is formed of sand beaches, and vessels of all sizes can anchor off it, but necessarily very close to the shore on account of the great depth of water. Between Buang and Batangas a depth of 14 fathoms, mud, will be found at less than 2 cables from the shore, and this anchorage is preferred by the vessels that frequent the coast, on account of its good holding ground and its proximity to those two towns. In case of necessity, anchorage can be had on the coast east and west of the above road, but very close to the shore, and on bottom of gravel and rock. Point Matoko, which forms the eastern extremity of Batangas Bay, is high, wooded, and precipitous, with one low point to the southwest. The coast to the eastward is rocky for 1^ miles, as far as a sloping point (Ilijan) ; it then forms a slight indentation, ending to the eastward in Point Arenas. In this bay small coasters find anchorage during the northeast monsoon, to avoid the ebb stream. The shores of this part of the coast are covered with the Palo Maria, a tree of the natural order Outtifenv , which yields a valuable gum. Point Arenas, the second point from Matoko, consists of sand and stones, which serves to distinguish it ; it is low and clean, and the tidal streams rush past it with great force. Point Taliji, li miles ENE. of Point Arenas, is not very prominent; it is rocky and wooded; to the westward of the point good water can be obtained, which comes from a valley of Mount Taliji. From here to Point Rosario, 2^ miles ENE., the coast is covered with trees, and shows a sandy beach fringed by rocks close to. Rosario River debouches at 2| miles from the point of the same name; it is ^ cable wide at the mouth, and the two points which form the entrance are both prolonged by a spit of sand ^ cable in length. The bar is 1 cable in width, and composed of sand and gravel with rocky patches on it ; the entrance channel, which is between the bar and the north- west entrance point, is hardly ^ cable wide and only 3 or 4- feet deep at low water and 6 feet at high water, which depth diminishes farther up the stream. The river divides into two branches ; fresh water can be obtained from the northern LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 01 one, but canoes must be used to get it. From Kosario River to Malabrigo Point the shore is sandy, wooded, and of regular height. Anchorage can be found in northerly winds for v^essels of all sizes between Points Matoko and Malabrigo, but the shore is very steep, and at less than 2 cables from it the depth is from 8 to 13 fathoms. Bottom, coarse sand and gravel. Punas or Lobo Point is the central point of the broad head- land formed by the spurs of the Sierras de Lobo ; Malabrigo Point is the western, and Malagundi (or Galban) the eastern point of this headland. The coast comprised between them is of moderate height and well wooded, rocky between Mala- brigo and Punas, and bordered with sand beach and rock from here to Malagundi, off which point lies a little islet sur- rounded by rocks. Punas Point is remarkable by some red patches at a short distance from the beach, and the Sierras de Lobo, 3,363 feet high, serve to indicate the i^osition from the southeast. SiGAYAN OR LoKOLOKO PoiNT. — From Malagundi Point the coast shows the same sand beach for 4 miles to the little river Sigayan, where the high land of the Sierras behind Punas Point terminates. The river is narrow and shallow, and fresh water can be obtained at a little distance from the mouth. No description of Sigayan Point itself is to be found in the Spanish Derrotero. AncJwrage. — Vessels of all sizes can anchor between Mala- gundi and Sigayan, but close to the shore, which is very steep. The bottom is generally of coarse sand mixed with gravel. SOUTH COAST. Tayabas Bay. — From Point Sigayan or Lokoloko the shore is of the same nature for 4 miles ENE. to Point Ban- tiki, which is surrounded by rocks to the distance of 3 cables. The land behind these headlands is low and thickly wooded, and appears almost entirely sunk when seen from the neigh- borhood of the south point of Marinduque. KoLOKONTO Bay. — At 1^ miles NW, of Point Bantiki is the southeast point of an inlet named Kolokonto Bay, the entrance of which is f of a mile wide, and which runs 1 mile inland; there is a small islet within it covered with trees, and in front of the entrance several rocks which mostly dry 0:2 i.rzox — south coast. at low water. This inlet serves as shelter to small craft in soutliwest gales. Coast. — From the northwest point of Kolokonto Bay the coast trends round to the northward ; it is of regular height, wooded, and bordered by a sand beach. The River Nayun enters the sea at 6 miles from the last point. Its mouth is only ^ cable wide and 1| fathoms deep at low water inside the bar, which itself is 2 cables wide with 3 feet least depth. At \ mile up the stream from the entrance are several wooded islets, and here the river divides into two arms, both of salt water. The river Nayun offers shelter to small coasters, for at its mouth there are from 2 to 4 fathoms, lessening toward the islets. Anchorage. — Vessels of all sizes can anchor off the coast between the mouth of the river and Kolokonto Bay, at \ of a mile from the shore, in 12 fathoms, mud. Tayabas River. — The coast from the river Naj^un is low, and bordered with sand beach as far as the river Tayabas, which is f of a cable wide at the entrance ; its bar is 2 cables wide, and in the entrance channel the depth is 1 fathom at high water, increasing within 2 fathoms. Native craft, called parados and karakoas, frequent this river, and armed launches sometimes go up as far as a place named Kota, at 1 mile from the mouth. The channel is easy to recognize by the stakes ])laced every year by the natives. Fresh water can be ob- tained at some distance from the mouth. Reef. — A small shoal which uncovers at spring tides lies i mile SW. by S. of the mouth of the river; from this shoal a reef extends G^ miles ESE., fronting the coast to a distance of Gi- miles from Bantiki Point, the eastern point of Pagbilao Bay, and nearly closing up the mouth of that bay. The soundings off the edge of this reef are irregular, from 3 to 11 fathoms. Pagbilao Bay, which lies between Bantiki Point and Pag- bilao Island, is of wide extent, but the available part of it is reduced by reefs to a circular space of about 1| miles diameter. A pilot is needed to enter this bay, on account of the reefs which border the entrance near the southwest point of Pag- bilao Grande ; the depth of the channel is from 8 to 10 fathoms ; and of the space within, from 3 to 5 fathoms, mud. . Pagbilao Grande Island is of triangular form and nearly joined to the main land, forming with it the bays of Pagbilao LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 63 to the west, and Languinmaiiok to the east. Mount Mitraon the northeast part is 285 feet high. The southern point is steep-to, having a depth of 13 fathoms, mud, at 2 cables from it. This is the point to make for to enter the Bay of Paghila< >. Pagbilao Chica is united to the larger island by a stri]) of sand ; it is crescent-shaped, forming to the westward the little bay of Kapaluan, at the mouth of which is 15 fathoms, sand, diminishing to oj fathoms, rock, at the edge of the shoal water that fills the upper part of the bay. Languinmanok Port is reduced by reefs from the coasts on both sides to a channel 7 cables wide and 3 luiles long, in which the soundings gradually lessen from 11 fathoms to 2^, sand and mud. Great care must be taken to keep clear of the reefs, which advance from both sides of the entry, nar- rowing the channel considerably, and of two shoals which lie in line with Languinmanok Vantay, and a rock 3 cables S. ^ W. of it. These shoals are situated respectively S. 50" W., and S. 30° W. of Point Tublig Mangayao. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at 1 :30; springs rise oi feet. Coast. — The eastern shore of Tayabas Bay, from Languin- manok Port to Point Tuguian, is of moderate height, and fringed with reefs, which extend to 2 miles from shore in some places ; on the edge of these reefs the soundings are from 3^ to 12 fathoms, and from 15 to 18 at a little distance. There is anchorage in 4 or 5 fathoms, sand and mud, off the mouth of a little river which enters near a bay north of Silankapo Point, 12 miles from Languinmanok. The town of Kalailayan is near this river. SJioal. — There is a rocky shoal 2 miles NW. of Silankai:»o Point, extending 1 mile from NE. to SW., with 10 fathoms, coral, outside of it, and 8 fathoms in the narrow passage be- tween it and the shore reef. PiTOGO. — At 5 miles ESE. of Silankapo Point is Mabio Point ; and 2 miles ENE. of Mabio is the small town of Pitogo, with anchorage before it in 4 fathoms. When making for this anchorage, vessels must keep close to the western shore, as the coast to the eastward is very foul, with rocks at a short distance from it. Tuguian Point. — The coast reef projects only 4- mile off this point, and anchorage can be found under the j^oint in 9 fathoms, mud. 64 LUZON— SOUTH COAST. Shoal. — At 3i miles NW. ^ N. of Point Tuguian there is a rocky shoal of small extent, with 3^ fathoms otf its southern edge, and 10 fathoms off the northeast side; there is a passage between it and the coast from which it is separated 1|- miles. Caution. — In navigating this coast, it should not be a])- proached within 3 or 4 miles. In the passage between Tuguian Point and the island Mompog the flood tide sets to the SE. and the ebb to the NW. Katanauan Bay, 5 miles ESE. of Point Tuguian, is clean and off'ers shelter from northerly and easterly winds in 3-j to 7 fathoms, sand and mud. A river flows into it, and on the left bank is the town of Katanauan. The west point of the entrance is of sand, and the other mangroves. Both points send out reefs, the western to a distance of 1 mile, and the eastern to 2 miles. Between Katanauan and Malanai, a distance of 6 miles, the depth is 9 fathoms, sand, at 1 mile from the coast. Malanai Anchorage is in a bight of the coast ESE. of Point Ajus. A river enters the sea at the l)ottom of the bight, having on its left bank the town of Malanai (or Yendo), in front of which there is anchorage in 5 fathoms, mud. Point Lipata is hilly and covered with mangroves and sand patches; a ridge of rocks extends some distance to the north- ward of it. The coast between Malanai Bay and Bondog Point is fringed with rocks which extend to i mile from the shore to the northward of Ayoni Bay. Shoal. — A rocky shoal, 1 mile in extent, with 3 fathoms water at the edge and 7 to 13 fathoms around it, lies about 2 miles NW. of Subunguin Point, and 3 miles from the coast. The channel between this shoal and the coast reef is 2 miles wide, clear of danger, and 17 to 24 fathoms deep. PiNAMUNTANGAN PoiNT. — Aguasa Bay, to the northward of Point Pinamuntangan, has rocks • before its entrance. Pinamuntangan Bay, between Aguasa Bay and Point Pina- muntangan, is small and open to the west. It is bordered on its northern and southern sides by a beach of sand and man- groves; to the northward of the point is a depth of 11 fath- oms, shoaling gradually to the shore. The coast from Pinamuntangan Point runs 7^ miles to the SE. to Bondog Point, ending in a sandy beach with detached rocks near it. LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 65 BoNDOG Head (Cabezo de Bondog) is a mountain 1,250 feet high, visible in clear weather at a distance of 30 miles. Point Bondog is the southern extremity of the i^eninsula between Tayabas Bay and Ragai Gulf; the vicinity is rocky, as is also the part of the coast to the NE. ; but the lowland soon reappears, and continues as far as Point Arena. The face of the coast here presents several open bays with sandy beaches, offering good anchorages of sandy bottom; the depths in them decrease gradually to 8 fathoms at a short distance from the shore ; the heights are wooded, and the plains afford good pasturage. There are several herds of buffaloes ; and ante- lopes abound, which may be hunted without difficulty. Shoals. — At 3 miles ENE. of Point Bondog, and 4 miles S. G0° W. of Point Arena, there is a rocky shoal ; the anchorage NE. of it is good. Marinduque Island, situated before the eastern entrance of Verde Island, is nearly circular, with its greatest diameter 24 miles. It is mountainous and elevated, having a range of hills on its eastern side running north and south, consisting of the mountains Tapian, San Antonio, and Marlanga. The soil is fertile, but it offers few resources, the principal produc- tion being rice. There are two ports, of no gi'eat importance — that of San Andres, to the NW., and of Santa Cruz, to the NE. — and several small bays which offer shelter, according to the sea- sons, on the east, south, and west sides, but these anchorages are not very good, and the coast towns are very poor. Port Banalakan, or San Andres, is surrounded by high wooded land, and vessels can lie inside in all security. The anchorage is confined, but the depth is good, 10 to 12 fath- oms, mud. There is an inner harbor which can be entered by towing or warping through the narrow passage, hardly a cable wide, and obstructed by an islet in the middle of the channel. This inner basin is of f of a mile extent, and of 5^ to 8 fathoms depth, muddy bottom, A large vessel would find herself not only sheltered in it from all winds, but com- pletely hidden, for it is entirely closed in, and its existence would not be suspected without previous knowledge. Directions. — On entering or leaving Port Banalakan, the southern shore must be kept, at 1 cable length from which are 10 to 18 fathoms, in order to avoid a rocky patch of great extent off the north side of the entrance ; this patch has \ of 66 LUZON — SOUTH COAST. a fathom on it, and lies SE. of two islets surrounded by rocks that are before the entrance. The entire northwest headland of the island is foul. Water is difficult to obtain, as it is necessary to go well up the river to obtain it fresh, and when there it takes a long- time to fill the casks. San Andres Islets are two islets which stretch rather more than a mile to the west of the northwest point of the island Marinduque. The distance between them is 1 cable, and the same between the nearest of them and the shore. These pas- sages are foul, but the sea fronts are clear. Point San Andres, the northern point of the island, is mountainous and very steep. North coast. — Between Point San Andres and Point Santa Cruz, 8^ miles to the eastward, the coast is formed into two bays by Trapichihan Point. That to the westward, though lined with rocks, is deep, having 22 fathoms in the middle; that to the eastward is closed by a reef which projects between the islets off Point Trapichihan and continues as far as Santa Cruz, with soundings of 10 fathoms at its edge. Point Santa Cruz is low and covered with mangroves. A reef, with large rocks awash at low water, advances from its point a mile to the ESE. and forms, together with another reef that projects from the island Santa Cruz (Anibaya), the northern mouth of Port Santa Cruz. Santa Cruz Port is only fit for small craft, but larger ves- sels can find anchorage, with sandy bottom, in the channels formed by the islands at the entrance, or, in case of need, they can penetrate farther by warping, but great care is required to avoid the detached rocks. The town affords but few resources. Directions. — To enter by the north channel, bring the island Santa Cruz to bear SE., give sufficient berth to the reef that extends from it, and follow the chamiel to the south by sound- ings until the port is opened; the soundings are from 6 to IG fathoms in the passage and 5 toward the anchorage, slioaling to 3 fathoms, mud, off the baluarte. To enter by the east channel, pass the island Santa Cruz at one-third of the distance between it and Marinduque, which will give the deepest water ; this channel is less tortuous than the northern one, and the soundings are more regular; the width is 1 mile from side to side. nOMBLOX ISLAXD PORT ROMBLON Jahirol SaUt itf3B> LUZON — SOUTH COAST. (J7 Anibayas. — This is the name of the .2:roup of three islands before the port Santa Cruz, Maniuayan, and Mompog. The two first are low to the westward, of regular height in the middle, and hilly to the eastward. All three are surrounded by reefs, which narrow the channel between them. These channels are only used by coasters. A vessel leaving Santa Cruz Port by the northern channel in order to go southward should keep all these islands on the starboard hand, giving them a berth of a mile, to clear their reefs, which project thus far, and she should not trust a smooth appearance of the water. If driven to take the passage between Maniuayan and Mompog, she should keep near to the latter island, for the reefs from Maniuayan approach to within ^ mile of Mompog. Salomague Point, 8^ miles SE. of Santa Cruz, is the east- ernmost point of the island ; it is low and covered with man- groves. The coast between these points is fringed with rocks to a distance of 4- mile out from it ; the soundings at the edge are 6 to 11 fathoms, rock, increasing to 54, mud, at 2 miles from it. Between Salomague and Point Marlanga there is a bay, in the southern part of which, between points Kabuyok and Paniki, there is a good anchorage near the shore, in 12 fathoms, mud. Marlanga Point is dominated by a high mountain, the northwest shoulder of which marks the commencement of the anchorage. The coast is safe from Point Marlanga to Point Saban (ch. 7, p. 67), and may be approached to within 2 cables, at which distance the soundings will be 20 fathoms. These two points are spurs of the above-named mountain. Elephant Islet, about | mile south of Point Saban, is a steep sugar-loaf rock, with a few trees upon it. On the northeast side there is a little creek with a sand beach and 4|- fathoms depth. Between the islet and Marinduque there is 12 fathoms, sand. The French chart gives a little reef off Saban, but it must be small. Tres Reyes are three islands of moderate height, peaked and clean, except the easternmost, Gaspar, which has rocks on its east side. Between these islets and Marinduque there is a safe passage if care be taken to avoid a shoal of 2^ fathoms nearer the coast of Marinduque than the middle of the passage. Point Banod, or Gazan, is fronted by a reef which extends i mile to the SE., and joins the shore again off the town of Ban^odl' LUZON — SOUTH COAST. (j7 AxiBAYAS. — This is the name of the .^roup of three islands before the port Santa Cruz, Maniuayan, and Mompog. The two first are low to the westward, of regular height in the middle, and hilly to the eastward. All three are surrounded by reefs, which narrow the channel between them. These channels are only used by coasters. A vessel leaving Santa Cruz Port by the northern channel in order to go southward should keep all these islands on the starboard hand, giving them a berth of a mile, to clear their reefs, which project thus far, and she should not trust a smooth appearance of the water. If driven to take the passage between Maniuayan and Mompog, she should keep near to the latter island, for the reefs from Maniuayan approach to within | mile of Mompog. Salomague Point, 8^ miles SE. of Santa Cruz, is the east- ernmost point of the island ; it is low and covered with man- groves. The coast between these j)oints is fringed with rocks to a distance of ^ mile out from it ; the soundings at the edge are 6 to 11 fathoms, rock, increasing to 54, mud, at 2 miles from it. Between Salomague and Point Marlanga there is a bay, in the southern part of which, between points Kabuyok and Paniki, there is a good anchorage near the shore, in 12 fathoms, mud. Marlanga Point is dominated by a high mountain, the northwest shoulder of which marks the commencement of the anchorage. The coast is safe from Point Marlanga to Point Saban (ch. 7, p. G7), and may be approached to within 2 cables, at which distance the soundings will be 20 fathoms. These two points are spurs of the above-named mountain. Elephant Islet, about | mile south of Point Saban, is a steep sugar-loaf rock, with a few trees upon it. On the northeast side there is a little creek with a sand beach and 4^ fathoms depth. Between the islet and Marinduque there is 12 fathoms, sand. The French chart gives a little reef off Saban, but it must be small. Tres Reyes are three islands of moderate height, peaked and clean, except the easternmost, Gaspar, which has rocks on its east side. Between these islets and Marinduque there is a safe passage if care be taken to avoid a shoal of 2^ fathoms nearer the coast of Marinduque than the middle of the passage. Point Banod, or Gazan, is fronted by a reef which extends ■J mile to the SE., and joins the shore again off tlie town of C.R • LUZON — SOUTH COAST. Gazau; the 2^ fatlionis slioal just mentioned seems to be a ])art of this reef, detached to tlie south. The town Gazan is 2 miles north of the point. Tlic anchorage is on the ojX'n coast, at a distance from the Ix^ach, and quite exposed. Point Kauit is low and sandy ; a reef runs from it to the 8SE. as far as Gazan Reef, but to the northward the coast, which is of sand beach, is clean as far as Point Datinuana, and to 3 miles beyond, and may T)e apj^roached with safety; from here a sand bank with 7 fathoms at its outer edge stretches along at ^ mile from the shore as far as the south- east point of Port Banalakan. " BuAK River and Town. — The town is situated on the left bank at 1^ miles from the mouth of the river, which enters the sea to the southward of Point Datinuana. It carries on a fair trade with Manila. Steamers call here about once in a week or ten days. Anchorage. — The anchorage is SW. of a stone fort at the mouth of the river, at 2 cables from the shore, in 5 to 1 2 fath- oms, coarse sand. Tidal streams. — In the part of the sea between Masbate Island and Mindoro the currents are not strong except off Point Arena, the southeastern extreme of Bondog Peninsula, wdiere they acquire some force from the quantity of water that enters and leaves the Gulf of Ragai ; but in Verde Island Pas- sage the tidal streams reach a velocity of 3 to 4 knots, and the branches which pass on either side of Verde Island cause strong eddies at their meeting again, and at Point Escarceo even a partial reversal of the stream. The flood streams from the China Sea through Verde Island Passage, and from the Pacific through San Bernardino Strait, meet and neutralize each other nearly in the meridian of Point Bondog, or in the line between Point Bondog and Romblon Island (ch. 7, p. 07). The ebb streams set in the reverse di- rection, i. e., from Bondog Peninsula outward, and it has been observed that on coming to Point Bondog with a fair tide a reverse has been experienced on passing its meridian. The tidal hour of this point has not been determined. Winds on the south coast of Luzon. — In Tayabas Bay and the Gulf of Ragai the land breeze which sets in during the night in both monsoons is generally feeble, but sometimes S(iually, thereby compelling a sailing vessel to anchor in order to avoid being driven off the coast. LUZON -SOUTH COAST. 69 Gulf of Ragai. — The Gulf of Ragai, included between Point Bondog to the west and Point Kadburauan (Panganiran) to the east, 43 miles apart, runs 65 miles inland to the NW., and, along with the River Vinas, which enters the gulf at its head, almost severs the island of Luzon in two at this part, separating the Province of Tayabas and Camarines Norte. The Gulf of Ragai is generally clear and deep. The port of Pusgo or Mayasas on the west coast and Pasakao Bay on the east coast are its most frequented anchorages. The entrance of the gulf is divided into two channels by Burias Island, with the islands and shoals off its no^'thern end. West coast of Ragai Oulf. — The coast between Point Aiena and Port Pusgo is moderately high and steep-to, with sound- ings from 7 to 14 fathoms off it, except at the part opposite Alibi jaban Island, where a reef extends along the coast for 3 miles; anchorage can be had oft' the coast generally, but not close in, as there are rocks close to the shore. Sombokobon Bay, 5|- miles NNE. of Point Arena, is much frequented by native coasters. In the middle of the bay there is a rocky shoal, with a narrow channel between it and the shore. The north point of the bay ends in a reef, which pro- jects to the SE. and forms a semicircle, offering shelter and anchorage in 3|- fathoms, fine sand. The town of Sombokobon is on the northwest side of the bay. Alibijaban Island, 3-2^ miles north of Sombokobon Bay, is 2^ miles long, north and south, and f of a mile wide ; low, wooded, and surrounded by a reef which extends 1 mile to the southward and i mile out from the other sides, with irregular soundings near its edges ; in the northern part of this reef is a little bay with a depth of 4 fathoms, and off the southern end there is a small anchorage with a depth of 14 fathoms. The channel between the island and the reef on the main coast opposite is 1^ miles wide and 23 fathoms deep. From the most salient point of the reef Point Arena bears S. 8° E. and Point Gorda, north of Pusgo, N. 21° W. Palad Bank, 5 miles north of Alibijaban Island, is a bank of sand 1 mile long, 10 feet above water, and surrounded by rocks. It can be seen in daylight from a good distance, and at a sufficient distance to avoid it on a clear night. The channel between the bank and the main coast is 2 miles wide and 12 fathoms deep. Port Pusgo is a narrow inlet which penetrates 5 miles to the NW. The width between the southern entrance points TO LUZON — SOUTH COAST. is 1^ miles, but the navigable space is considerably reduced by a shoal which extends along the main shore, and half way up the inlet there is only 1 cable width. The depth in mid- channel is 4^ to 5 fathoms from the entrance to as far as 1 mile past the narrowest part, but in the inner harbor gener- ally it is less than If fathoms deep. The town of San Narcisso stands at the extreme head of the inlet. ShoaJ. — In the middle of the entrance, at 1^ miles S. 25° E. of Point Pusgo, there is a rocky bank 14^ cables in extent, covered by 10 feet of water. Point Gordalies 1^ miles N. by W. of Point Pusgo, and is high and steep, with a flat crown. The reef, which from the interior of Port Pusgo fringes the coast, continues round Point Gorda to the northwest, at a distance of 2 to 4 cables from the shore. A shoal covered by If fathoms water lies 5 miles noi^thwest of Point Gorda, and 1 mile from the shore. Piris Bay, 13i miles NW. by N. of Point Gorda, is bor- dered by a shoal of mud covered by If fathoms water, which considerably reduces the available space ; anchorage can be had in the northwest part of the bay in 5^ fathoms. Point Lian, the northern point of the bay, Is of moderate height and skirted by a reef which projects ^ mile from it to seaward. Point Kapuluan, 5 miles north of Point Lian, is surrounded by the reef which borders the coast for 2^ miles to the north- ward. Kapuluan Rocks, 2:^ miles east of the point of the same name, form a shoal ^ of a mile in extent, on which there are several rocks awash, with 4^ to 14 fathoms near it. Acha Shoal, 5 miles N. by W. of Point Kapuluan, is a rocky shoal 2 cables long, north and south, covered by 1 fathom water at its edge. It lies 2f miles from the coast and 1:^ miles from Sipalon Island, a low peaked island separated from the reef of the north coast. Vinas River, which enters the gulf at the extreme head of it, is shallow, the depth at the mouth being only 5^ feet. East coast of Eagai Gulf. — Talkauayan Bay is 1^ miles wide and runs 2^ miles to the northward; the depth of water in it decreases gradually from 7 fathoms at the mouth to 3 fathoms at the head. Katabanga Bay, 3 miles SE. of Talkauayan Bay, is nearly 4 miles wide between Points Guilbai and Bagutayok, and is lined with rocks. The depth toward the northern part is 11 fathoms. There is anchorage in the southern part near the little river Katabanga. LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 71 Rag-ai Bay, between Point Omon to the north and Point Oktok and Sahan Island to the south, offers good anchorage, sheltered in both monsoons, in depths of 17 to 1| fathoms, mnd. Sabun Island, 1 mile long, east and west, is almost nnited to Point Oktok at low water; its northern side is steep-to, but a reef projects 1 mile to seaward from the west- ern point. The southern shore is foul. Kaima Bay, included between Sabun Island and Point Bantuin or Galvanei, 8 miles to the SE., is bordered by a reef. There is an anchorage near this reef off the town of Bangon in 8 to 12 fathoms, and also in places nearer Point Bantuin, in 7 fathoms. Point Bantuin is high and steep, and only connected with the main coast by a strip of low land | cable wide. The two islets Galvanei are respectively w mile and 1 mile NW. of the point. Coast. — From Point Bantuin (Galvanei) the coast trends SE. for 13 miles to Point Tanuan and is mountainous and bold. ■ The river Tinagbud enters about midway between the two points ; anchorage may be had off the mouth in 4 fath- oms. A sharp peaked rock lies 2 cables from Point Buri, south of Tinagbud. Point Tanuan is steep, with a flat crown, and from this point the coast trends E. by S. for 5 miles, high, and fronted by sand beaches as far as Pasakao An- chorage. Pasakao Anchorage is situated between two little flat-topped hills, the westernmost of which terminates in a mangrove- covered point and a reef which projects | mile to the SE. The best anchorage is in 3 to 4 fathoms, in front of the town, and north of the high flat islet Refugio, which lies h- mile from the southern point. This little islet is surrounded by a reef 1 cable wide and steep-to, with soundings of 37 fathoms at a short distance to the southward. The channel between the islet and the coast has a depth of 11 fathoms. In taking this passage the islet should be kept closer than the mainland. Steamers call here fortnightly. Coast. — From Pasakao Anchorage to Point Makoto the coast is high, steep-to, and bordered by sand beaches between the intermediate points. Anchorage may be had very close to the shore north of Point Sibono, 7 miles SE. by E. of Pa- sakao, in Jamuaron Bay, north of the point of the same name, in 6 fathoms ; vessels can also anchor in the elbow which the 72 LUZON — SOUTH COAST. coast makes at the town of Pantao, north of Point Kauanha- han. A shoal surrounds this point to a distance of 1 cahle, and lines the coast to the bottom of the elbow. Ajjud Shoal is a rocky shoal which uncovers in parts at low water and extends 1 mile W. and 2 miles NNW. of Point Apud. Point Makoto is of moderate height, steep, with a flat crown, and is surrounded by a reef. A rocky shoal i mile in diame- ter, and covered by 3f fathoms, lies 1 mile NW. of the point. This shoal may generally be distinguished by the green and white color of the water above it. There is an islet southeast of the j)oint, united to it by a reef. The bay to the eastward of Point Makoto offers anchorage sheltered from the north and west. Care must be taken in entering it to avoid a reef which projects from Point Badian, the south point of the bay. Point Kadburauan, or Panguiran, is low, wooded, and sur- rounded by rocks to a short distance, with a depth of 4| fathoms near them. Tides. — In the Gulf of Ragai the flood stream sets to the north and the ebb to the south. The range of tides at springs is og- feet. Burias Island, at the entrance of the Gulf of Ragai, is a narrow island, 37 miles long, NW. and SE., and about 6 miles wide in the middle. It is roughly mountainous and thinly wooded ; it is commanded by the lofty mountain Enga- noso, situated nearly in the center of the island, and showing a cleft that divides the high land of the northern part of the island from the very low laud of the southern ])art. Tlie coasts are in general steep, and bordered in places by sand beaches. The island has two sheltered ports : Busin, at the northwest end, formed by Busin Island lying in front of a bay in the coast, and Busainga on the northeast coast of the island. Burias Island and the islets and reefs in its vicinity have not yet been thoroughly surveyed. The main productions are rice, maize, and abaca (manila hemp). There are several small islets and reefs off the northern part : Templo, 2^ miles NW. of Point Cueva, the northwest point of Burias, is 3 miles long, NW. and SE., and 1^ miles Avide. There are detached rocks on its south side, and its north point is surrounded by a reef of \ mile width. Som- brero, li miles west of Templo, consists of two islets close LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 78 together on a reef which extends a mile to the northwest and southeast of them. Arena, 7 miles SE. 4- E, of Point Arena, on Bondog Peninsula, is surrounded by a reef which grows out f of a mile to the northward. A shoal, separated from this last-named islet by a channel f of a mile wide and 12 fathoms deep, lies 1^ miles to the north of it. Busin Island is 2^ miles long and 1 mile wide. A shoal projects from its northwest end to the islets Tinalisayan, and united with the reef that surrounds the little island Tangui- gui 4 miles north of Point Cueva. Detached shoals. — One mile north of Tanguigui theTe is a rocky head covered by 3^ fathoms of water, with 75 fathoms immediately north of it; and about 2 miles north of the northern end of Burias there is a rocky shoal ^ mile in extent, having less than a fathom over it. Anima Sola is an islet 4^- miles N. -40° E. of the northeast point of Burias, surrounded by rocks. Port Busin is formed by the channel 3^ miles long and 1| cables wide that separates the island Busin from Burias. The western entrance of this channel is narrow and tortuous, and very dangerous for a sailing vessel; the northern entrance is preferable, as, though narrow, it is more direct, and its sides are steep-to. In a working breeze a vessel can keep well in mid-channel. The northern entrance may be easily recog- nized by the north cape of Burias, Point Colorada, which is higher than Busin Island, and shows yellow patches among the trees that cover it. The i)art of the coast also near the entrance may be recognized by the massive bluffs about it. Lights. — In the Spanish list of lights a fixed white light is shown on Point Colorada, and another on the northwest point of the channel; but these lights are not maintained by the government, and are therefore not to be depended upon. Anchorage. — The best anchorage is west of Fort San Pas- cual, at the entrance to the bay that opens to the south, on the coast of Burias. The depth at the entrance of this bay is 11 fathoms, lessening to 2|- fathoms, at |- mile within the bay. Fresh water can be obtained here. Coast. — Between Port Busin and Port Busainga, o^ miles to the SE., the coast forms a bay, from the western point of which a reef projects to the northward for 1 mile with 9 fath- oms near its northern edge, narrowing into the coast again at the northern point of Port Busainga. 74 LUZON — SOUTH COAST. Port Busainga is an inlet 1 mile long and 1 cable \vide, in- cluding some bays wliicli afford good holding ground in depths of 8 fathoms, sheltered from wind and sea. The wide space at the bottom of the port is shallow. Lights.— The Spanish list of lights gives a fixed blue light on Point Piedras, the northwestern entrance of the inlet, but it is not mentioned in the Spanish Derrotero, and as it is not an official light it must not be depended upon. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Oh. 30m. Springs rise 5^ feet. Easf coast of Burias. — The bay, 5 miles long, SE. by S. of Port Busainga, ajDpears to be filled with shoals ; the remain- der of the coast to the southward presents beaches off which there is anchorage on the open ccast. West coast of Burias. — Point Cueva, the northwest point of the island, is surrounded by a shoal 2 cables wide, from which a reef extends to Point Guinduianan 6 miles to the southward, advancing in some places to a mile from the coast. The remainder of the west coast is sandy, with shoals at no great distance from it, especially in the bend of the coast called Boca Engaiiosa, which is the highest hill in the island. The little islet Gorion is in this bend. Caution. — When approaching Burias Island from the west- ward in thick weather, such as occurs in the southwest mon- soon, the southern part of the island, which is low, may be hidden, and the slope of Mount Engaiiosa may be mistaken for it, and Boca Engaiiosa for the passage between Burias and Masbate, a mistake Avhich has caused the loss of many ves- sels, and has given rise to the name "False." This error may be avoided by bearing in mind that the middle of the low part of the southern land of Burias is in line with Albai Volcano in Luzon on the bearing N. 38° E. From Point Kadburauan the coast trends ENE. for 6 miles and is foul ; the islet Lanuyan, distant 1 mile from the coast, is united to it by a reef which dries at low water. The coast then bends round to the SE., and becomes lower toward Mari- godon, which is rocky and steep, with a flat top. There is anchorage betAveen Point Marigodon and the town of the same name to the northward. From this point the coast trends SE*. by E. for 8 miles to Point Putiao, and is low with shelv- ing sand beaches affording good anchorage off it. LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 75 DoNSOL River and Town. —The river mouth is fronted by wide sand banks which extend to 1 mile from the shore, with soundings of 13 fathoms at the edge and 68 fathoms at ^ mile distance. The bar of the river has only 3 feet of water over it at low water; within the bar a depth of 5 to 11 feet is car- ried for a mile up the stream. The town of Donsol, on the left bank of the river, near its month, carries on a brisk trade with Manila, principally in abaca (manila hemp), palm mats, and cocoanut oil. Steamers call about fortnightly. Port Putiao is a large but shallow inlet which can be en- tered by coasters only and at high water ; sand banks on both sides reduce the available width to one-half, and at 2 miles from the mouth these banks unite, thus leaving only a depth of 3 feet here for communication with the inner port. The entrance points are 1 mile apart and are both surrounded by reefs, the reef round the western point extending 1 mile to the SE. The depth at the entrance is 2f fathoms, and at 1 mile farther in it is 1-g- fathoms. Palatuan Bay, to the eastward of Port Putiao, is shallow, the reefs on either side leaving only a narrow inlet 2^ fath- oms deep. At the outer edge of the reefs the depth is 3 to 5i fathoms. Point Bantiki, the western point of the large port Sorsogon, is rounded, low, rocky, and wooded, with a shore composed of gravel and clayey cliffs. On the southern extremity there is a vantay. The rocky shoal that surrounds the point is very narrow, except on the side of Palatuan Bay. Port Sorsogon is the largest and best harbor in the strait of San Bernardino, and is a good refuge in case of a typhoon or a colla, and for effecting repairs. The entrance is divided into three channels by the islands Malumahuan and Bagatao. The channel between these two islands is the only one practi- cable for vessels, the others between the islands and the coast being narrow and shoal. A narrow shoal stretches from Malumahuan Island almost to the north coast of the port. Bagatao Island.- — ^A bank of tine black sand, with sound- ings over it of 12 to 14 fathoms, stretches 2 miles SW. of Bagatao Island, and offers anchorage to a vessel caught Ijy bad weather and unable to reach the port. The Boca Grande, or principal entrance, is 1^ miles wide and irregular in dei^th, from to 20 fathoms. The west coast of Bagatao Island is clean ; the bottom on the Malumahuan 70 . LUZON — SOUTH COAST. side is shelving, with a depth of 4 fathoms at a distance of 2 cables to the east of that island. The channel is nearly G miles long, NE. by E., with irregular depths from 8 to 20 fathoms as far as Point Makugil, on the southern shore. A rocky shoal, covered by 1 fathom, ^jrojects off this point 1^ cables N. by E. The coasts and islands on both sides of this channel are clean, and the sea faces of the islets on the north side are steep-to, so that a vessel keeping in mid-channel is clear of all danger. The inner port of Sorsogon is spacious, extending miles ENE. toward the town of Sorsogon, with depths diminishing gradually from 9 to 2^ fathoms. Anchorage. — Once past Bagatao Island a vessel can choose the anchorage suitable to her draft, but if she draws much water it is best not to make for the town of Sorsogon, as a depth of 3i fathoms is reached at 4 miles from it. H. M. S. Sphinx, in 18G1, anchored north of Bagatao Island in 8 fath- oms, with Tinakos Island bearing S. 83° E. and Tumalaitai Fort N. 16° W. Siqj2)lies.—Th.eve are many towns on the shores of Port Sorsogon, and beef, poultry, rice, and vegetables are all procurable. Horsburgh says that water is to be had on the eastern side of the harbor. Steamers from Manila visit the port about twice a fortnight. Coast. — From the southern point of entrance to Port Sor- sogon the coast trends S. by E. for 13 miles to Point Bulak, and shoAvs broken ground in some places, though in general the shore shelves gradually into the sea by sandy beaches, before which vessels can find good anchorage. At 5 miles from Bagatao Island, according to the Spanish Derrotero, a scarjjed hill can be distinguished, which indicates a place where a bank covered by 5 feet of water projects to 1 mile from the shore. All this coast shelves out to 2 or 3 miles, with soundings of 15 fathoms at 14- miles, and 30 fathoms at 3 miles. BuLAN River AND Town.— The town of Bulan (formerly known as Gata) is situated on the right bank of the river which debouches south of Point Bulak. A vantay is erected on the sandy point of Bulak. The depth on the bar of the river is 4^ feet at low water, and greater upstream. Coasting steamers call here. LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 77 Angas Point, 24- miles SE. of Point Bulak, is high; Otake Baj^, included bet^Yeen the two, shows a sandy beach and is 2i to 10 fathoms deep. Butag Bay, east of Point Angas, is about a mile wide, and runs 1 mile in to NE. ; reefs extend from the points on both sides. The depth of water at the entrance is 14 to 16 fathoms, and in the middle of the bay 14 fathoms. The shores are wooded and in some places of considerable height. Marinap Bay, the next bay to the eastward of Butag, is capable of containing vessels of good draft. The shores are sandy in some places, and covered with mangroves in others. Between the southern point of Marinap Bay and Point Tagiran the coast is slightly indented with little bays, clean and deep, but not running far inland and offering but little shelter, with soundings of 25 fathoms near the intermediate points. Tagiran Point, 9^ miles from Point Bulak, is a remarkable little hill, apai-t from high mountain range behind it, with a flat top on which is a jjlot of green clearer than the rest of the hill, and which can be seen at a great distance. There are three or four detached rocks about 40 yards from the point, with 5 fathoms of water close to them, and 13 fathoms at a short distance. A rivulet falls into the sandy creek on the east side of the point. Tides. — In the channel between this coast and Tikao Island the tidal streams run with a velocity of not less than 4 knots. Tikao Island is 23 miles long, NW. and SE., and 6 miles wide at its northern end, narrowing toward the extreme south point, San Rafael, from which a chain of islets and rocks extends toward Point Vigia in Masbate. The island is mountainous, and but thinly populated. It possesses two ports, San Miguel and San Jacinto, neither of them very good. Port San Miguel is 1 mile wide at the entrance, and open to the NW. ; the depth of water is 50 fathoms at the entrance and 45 to 25 fathoms within, but the plan shows very few soundings. The shores of the port are very steep, but a reef with three islets on it extends from the middle of the western shore to 3 cables NE. of the eastern islet; the reef is hidden below water and a part of it fringes the southern part of the bav. 78 LUZON — SOUTH COAST. This port offers convenient anchorage in tliick or Ijad weather, or to a vessel embayed under the islands San Miguel, and unable to reach Port San Jacinto, or the anchorages oft' Masbate. The three islets which form a prolongation of Point San Miguel are very steep-to, but must be kept at a distance, as vessels are liable to be drawn toward them by the tides. Tragdugan Bay, 7^ miles SE. of Point San Miguel, is open to the NE. and is skirted by a narrow reef which extends 2 miles to the NW. and fringes the coast to Port San Jacinto, 8 miles SSE. Port San Jacinto is small and open to the east, but has good holding ground ; the entrance may be recognized by a fort with rounded bastions on the southern point, with some con- ical hills behind it. The narrow bank that fringes the coast continues round the inside of the port, and the 3^ fathoms line of soundings passes within 3 cables of the northern point (named San Antonio on the plan and San Francisco in Span- ish Derrotero), and within 1^ cables of the southern point (San Jose), reducing the actual width of the available harbor to about 3 cables. The depth of water lessens gradually from 16 fathoms at the entrance to 3 fathoms, mud, at the edge of the shoal of sand and mud at the bottom of the port. The town is on the point near the fort. Anchorage. — The best anchorage is on the southern side in 9 fathoms, with Point Cosme bearing NNE. and the church and fort of San Jos(^ SE. by E. f E. Vessels arriving off the port at night, and not caring to venture in, may anchor before the port in 10 to 24 fathoms, but the anchor should be let go as soon as soundings show 2-4 fathoms, as the bank is very steep-to. Water can be obtained at the wells and also at a river near. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Gh. 30m. ; springs rise G feet ; the tidal stream is very weak. Coasts. — The east coast of Tikao presents many little bays open to the east, in which anchorage can be had, as well as on the sand bank that borders the coast and which extends out about a mile from Biton Bay to Point San Rafael. The west coast is steep and rugged and has no good anchorage ; a depth of 5^ to 7 fathoms is found along the entire coast at a short distance from it. LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 79 Passages Between Tikao and Masbate. — A eliain of islets and rocks, with channels between them, extends from San Rafael, the south point of Tikao, to Point Vigia in Mas- hate, 8^ miles SW. The most practicable of these channels (named in the Spanish Derrotero, Negrito Head passages,) are one between the islet Matabao, next to Tikao, and Black Rock, and one between Black and Makaragui. The first of these is 1 mile wide and 36 fathoms deep ; the second is much wider and 27 fathoms deep. Matabao. — From the east coast of this island a bank of sand extends 1^ miles to the NE., with If fathoms least water over it and 8 fathoms near the edges. The narrow channel between this islet and Tikao has a depth of 8 to 11 fathoms. Black Rock, or Cabeza de Negrito, is a cluster of rocks which covers at high water; it is steep-to, with 14 fathoms water alongside. The channels between Makaragui and Deagan and the inter- mediate islets are of no importance; the channel between Deagan and Point Vigia, in Masbate, is 4 or 5 cables wide and 4^ fathoms dee]3. The tidal streams run very strong through these channels, reaching a velocity of 3 to 5 knots at springs, with violent eddies. South Point of Luzon. — From Tagiran P(jint the coast trends eastward for 6 miles, forming a succession of sandy bays of no great indentation, with small rivers emptying themselves into them. The depth of water in these bays is very great. The little port Bunut, east of Point Langao, is the outlet of a river which flows from a ravine between two high mountains. The depth at the mouth is 15 fathoms, and 4 fathoms farther in; over the bar of the river the water is so shallow that boats can only enter at high tide. Point Bunut, on the eastern side of the port, is not so high as the adjacent land, but is distinguished by a table top with a cogonal upon it ; the other points are covered with trees to the water's edge. From Point Bunut to Point Babatgun the coast is rocky. Babatgun Anchorage is a semicircular bay included between Point Babatgun to the'west and Point Kulasi to the east; on the western side of the bay there is a small sheltered creek with very steep shores, a depth of 4| fathoms being found at less than 12 yards from the shore. The west point of the bay is rocky, with a reef j^rojecting to some distance from it. Care 80 LUZON — SOUTH COAST. mi\st be taken to avoid tliis reef, as tlie flood tide from the Tiklin Channel sets directly on to it. The depth of water be- tween the two entrance points varies from 18 to 4 fathoms, while from the center of the bay toward the above-mentioned creek the soundings are 1? fathoms to 14 not far from the .shore. Kalantas Bank, bearing S. 4- W. 2 jniles from Point Kulasi, is formed of large black rocks and coral. The northern head is a flat rock 5 feet above water, with 8 fathoms water near it ; the depth increases at a short distance to the northward. The shoal extends SE. from the flat rock, and at a distance of 1 mile the depth is 8 fathoms ; from here it augments rapidly to the southward. The tidal streams cause heavy breakers on the bank, giving it the appearance of a white sandy islet. Tiklin Strait is the channel between the coast of Luzon and the islands Kalintan, Juak, and Tiklin. Although the channel is sufficiently deep, it is not safe for a large vessel to pass through on account of the tidal streams and eddies in it. The western shore of the strait, between points Kulasi and Pandan, is comjjosed of broken coral covered with mangroves, and fronted by a reef i mile wide, with 3| fathoms depth at the edge of it. Shelter may be found, if required, in Kulasi Bay, which lies between Kulasi Point and the island to the north- ward of it. Magnok Bay is a small bay open to the eastward, fringed by a narrow reef, with 3 to 4 fathoms water near the edge ; the plan shows a depth of 8 fathoms in the middle of the bay. On entering, care must be taken to avoid a rocky shoal cov- ered by li feet at low water, which extends to i mile NNE. of the southern point of the bay. During easterly winds the bay is not safe, as a heavy reef breaks within it. The town Magnok on the north side of the bay is poor, and offers few resources. Islands in San Bernardino Strait— Tiklin Islands.— Kalintan, the southernmost of the group, lies | mile SE. of Point Kulasi, in Luzon, and is 1 mile in length, NE. and SW. ; Juak, ISTE. of Kalintan and only separated from it by a nar- now channel, is 2^ miles long, north and south ; both islands are rugged and covered by ebony trees. There is a small detached rock about 1^ cables distant from the southeast shore of Kalintan. Tiklin, which gives the name to the group, lies f of a mile SE. of Point Pandan in Luzon, but the available LUZON — SOUTH COAST. 81 channel between them is reduced by reefs on either side to a width of 2 cables. The island itself is i mile in length, north and sonth, but a shoal projects from the south point halfway toward the island Juak, which ends in a rock awash, with -U fathoms water near it, leaving between it and Juak a narrow channel fit only for small coasters. Good anchorage may be had at a distance- of 2 miles SW. of Tiklin. Naranjos Islands are a group of six, lying close together, about 7 miles to the southward of the south point of Luzon ; they are named respectively San Andres, Rasa, Medio, Dar- sena, Aguada, and Escarpada ; a seventh island, named Desta- cado (" detached ") lies 3^ miles SE. of Aguada. These islands are mostly of moderate height and rocky; their shores are rugged, with occasional sand beaches ; the channels between them are clear and practicable for vessels of all sizes ; but it is not safe for a sailing vessel to use them on account of the variability and strength of the currents and the shifts of wind experienced along them ; besides which, each island is sur- rounded by a narrow reef projecitng farther from the salient point of the islands. The soundings between the islands vary between 9 and 27 fathoms, so that a vessel could anchor in case of need, but the bottom is rocky. The channel between Naranjos grouj) and Kaspul Island has not been surveyed. There are no dangers visible in it. Kapul Island, lying 3 miles SE. of Kalintan Island, is about 7 miles long, IsTW. and SE., and 2^ miles wide, moderatelj^ high, the highest land being on the eastern side near the town Abak. On this part there are sand beaches, but the remain- der of the coast is rugged and steep, and it is not prudent to anchor near the shore. Anchorage. — At about the southern extremity of the island there is a little bay called Juban Bay, with dej^ths of 17 to 7 fathoms, whicli is probably the only place offering safe anchorage. On the west point of entrance there is a remark- able pyramidal rock which is useful as a guide. Diamante Rock, lying 2 miles SE. of the south i)oint of Kapul, is small and very steep-sided. It is covered by 24- fathoms least water, with 17 fathoms at its edge. Clearing mark. — A vessel compelled to pass between Kapul and Dalumpiri islands may clear Diamante Rock to the west- ward by keeping the southwest tangent of Kapul in line with the highest part of the Sierra of Gata on Bulan, bearing X. 82 LUZON — SOUTHEAST COAST. 38° W., and, by taking care not to open the channel between the islands Aguada and Escarpada, she will clear Diamante Rock to the northward. Dalnmpiri or Puercos Island is low, wooded, and bordered by sand beaches, with rocks close to them. A rocky shoal projects from the southern j^oint more than a mile to the SE., covered by 4^ to 9 fathoms water, with 17 fathoms at a short distance. There is no danger in the way of anchoring off the island, but the water is deep and the bottom rocky. The channel between Dalumpiri and Kapul is 2 to 3 miles Avide and clear of danger. Game is abundant, esi)ecially wild hogs (puercos). In the middle of the island there is a large lake swarming with alligators. SOUTHEAST COAST. Bulusan town, 10 miles north of Point Paiidan, is situated on the shore on the right bank of a river which takes its rise on the eastern slopes of Bulusan Volcano. The shore is fringed by a reef to the distance of i mile in places, with 2^ to 7 fathoms on the edge. Bulusan Volcano, 5 miles distant from the coast, is a re- markable active volcano, visible at a distance of GO miles and forming an excellent mark for making the strait. From the eastward it shows a single peak, but seen from the SSW. it shows two peaks. San Bernardino Islet, from which the strait takes its name, lies 7 miles from the coast of Bulusan. It is 150 feet high and covered with trees, many of which belong to the ebony tribe. There is a smaller islet close to it to the NNE., and rocks and foul ground extend ^ mile SE. from the island. On either side there is a channel 5 miles wide, with soundings of 30 to 60 fathoms. The chart shows a rock, position doubtful, about 1 mile NW. of the island. Gubat Bay, 12 miles north of Bulusan, is bordered by reefs, and great reefs project some 2 miles out from the north and south points of the bay. The coast between Bulusan and Gubat is fringed with a wide reef, shown on the chart to extend 2 miles out from the shore in one place. The town of Gubat is on the NW, side of the bay near a tongue of land which divides the bay into two. Steamers from Manila call here about twice a week, but we have no information about the anchorage. LUZON — NORTH COAST. 83 Moiitugan Reef is tlie great reef that fringes the shore from Biilusaii to Point Montugan. Its most salient part projects 3 miles to the eastward about 5 miles north of Gubat. The channels in the reef are used by coasters Avorking their way to the Gulf of Albai. Point Montugan, the southern point of the Gulf of Albai and 9i miles from Gubat, is very low and sunken and sur- rounded by shoals. A reef projects 1^ miles out from it to the NE., with 5 to 11 fathoms at its edge. NORTH COAST. Cape Bojeador, which forms the northwestern extreme of Luzon, is a low point with a reef of breakers projecting from it. Thence the coast trends in a northeast direction 6 miles to Point Fegra, on the east side of which anchorage may be obtained during southerly winds. The deep bay between this point and Dialao Point, 9 miles to the NE., has much foul ground on its eastern shore. There is anchorage at the head of this bay, near the small port of Bangui, which is said to have been long shut up by an earthquake. Mairaira Point, distant about 20 miles NE. of Cape Bojea- dor, has a reef projecting about a mile out. Point Kabikun- gan, bearing about E. by S. 13 miles from Mairaira Point, is a bluff steep point of white cliffs, having a mass of high mountains, called Patapa Mountains, contiguous to it. To the eastward of Point Kabikungan there is a round hill of middling height, named Point Pata. The whole of the coast from Cape Bojeador to this place is steep, without any sound- ings until near the shore; the land is of moderate height, and in some parts rather low close to the sea, with several rivers ; but the country inland is high and mountainous. A light-house will shortly be erected on Cape Bojeador. From Pata Point the coast trends southeastward for 43 miles and then northeastward for 27 miles to Cape Engano, the northeast extreme of Luzon, forming an immense bay. Fronting the sea is a considerable space intersected by rivers. On the western side is the Abulug; a chain of mountains parallel to the coast and about 6 miles inland. There is a continous beach along this coast with regular soundings, gen- erally 5 to 10 fathoms at a mile or two off on the western part, and the same depths at 3 to 6 miles offshore in the bight of the haj, deepening again near the eastern shore. 84 LUZON — NORTH COAST. At 14- and 15^ miles SE. by E. from Pata Point are tlie entrances of the San Juan Pamplona and the Abulug, two small rivers, with a low island between them. A sand bank, the only known danger on the coast, and on which the sea breaks in bad weather, lies about 2 miles N. by E. of the bar of the Abulug, and fronting the point to the westward of the river. It extends ESE. and WSW. 2 miles, and about a mile outside it there are 35 and 40 fathoms, fine black sand. The entrance of the Kagayai, Rio Grande de Kagayan, 14 miles southeastward of the Abulug, has good anchorage in 10 or 11 fathoms about 1^ miles NNE. from its mouth. The point on the east side is known by the church and convent of the town of Aparri built upon it ; abreast of which, or north from the church, is the best anchorage. The river is about ■J- of a mile at the entrance, with 2 and 2^ fathoms on the bar, deepening to 5 and G fathoms, mud, within the bar. The coast to the eastward of the river is flat, with soundings of 20 fathoms, black sand, about 6 miles off shore. Steamers from Manila call fortnightly at Aparri. Palaui Island, 5 miles in extent and moderately elevated, lies contiguous to the northwestern point of the large jjrom- ontory which forms the northeastern extremity of Luzon ; and the port of San Vincente is formed between Palaui and the coast. The western shore of the island appears bold, but a reef projects from its eastern side to 1^ miles out, the edge of it being about ^ mile from, and around the small islet Escuacha. CapeEngaiio (ch. 8, p. 84), E. ^ S., 54 miles from Pata Point, is the north point of Palaui Island. The two Hermauos islets lie off this cape, and there are some rocks oft" the northeast point ; a mile to the east of the cape, and at a distance of ^ mile off, lies the islet Gran Laja, a square, steep mass of lava, about ^ mile in extent, which may be seen at a distance of about 27 miles. Port San Vincente (ch. 8, p. 84), 30 miles E. by N. f N. of Aparri, is formed by a small island of the same name lying between the northeast end of Luzon, and the adjacent island of Palaui. There is room in this port for three or four ships, sheltered from all winds; but the entrance is narrow and intricate, being formed between shoals on either side which project from the southeast part of Palaui and from San Vin- cente Island; a vessel is therefore obliged to warp in. V *- Henuano! y.wpfi PalauiJ^.L Q - Ueitiianos I CAI'E CNCANO Ih- J jcul . Claudio MoiiJero 1859. LUZON — NORTH COAST. 85 Trneiio Shoal, wliieli lies f of a mile south of San Vincente Island, does not uncover; the Spanish Derrotero does not state the depth of water on it. The southeast point of Palaui Island kept open to the eastward of the south point of San Vincente Island will clear Trueno to the SE. The currents in this locality are rather strong. There is good anchorage in 5 fathoms opposite the mouth of the port on the SW., sheltered from all winds but those be- tween W. and SW. There is also anchorage along the coast between Aparri Road and this place, in 15 or 30 fathoms water within 2 miles of the shore ; the soundings are pretty regular, excepting at a depression in the bank about 10 miles to the SW. of Vincente, where the depths are 70 to 80 fathoms water about 2^ miles off the shore, having close to the edge of it 30 fathoms, black sand. There is no description of the eastern entrance to this port, but the survey shows a channel of 5 fathoms between the reefs off the Luzon shore and Rona Islet, in the center of the narrows. The approach is from the eastward, and it is a mile wide between the reefs round Escucha Islet and those bordering the main. Bank. — One mile to the northward of Escarpada Point, and in a direct line between that point and the northwest point of Gran Laja Islet, there is a rocky bank of small extent, covered by 7 to 15 fathoms. RepoHed shoal. — According to the statement of M. Denier, master of the French bark Douquay Trouin, a shoal was passed on the 28th of May, 1875, XE. of Luzon Island. When sighted it was awash. It extended in a SW. and XE. direction, thence running NW. for about 100 yards. The vessel passed within a distance of 2 miles, going 6 knots an hour. M. Denier places the shoal in latitude 19° 5' N. and longitude 124° 43' E. Clare of Anson Beef. — Information is wanting about this danger, which is shown on the charts as lying 87 miles S. 73° E. of Cape Engano; in latitude 17° 49' X., longitude 124° 40' E. Directions. — The channel between Cape Engano and Kami- guin Island to the NXW. is 20 miles wide, and clear of dan- ger. As the currents set strongly to the northward in the southwest monsoon, it will be prudent for vessels proceeding to the eastward from this coast with light winds to keep on the south side of the channel to prevent their being drifted to the northward near the Guinapak and Didikas rocks,' which lie to the northeastward of Kamiguin. LUZON — NORTH COAST. 85 Trueno Shoal, wliieli lies f of a mile south of San Vineeiite Island, does not nncover; the Si)anish Derrotero does not state the depth of water on it. The southeast point of Palaui Island kept open to the eastward of the south point of San Vincente Island will clear Trueno to the SE. The currents in this locality are rather strong. There is good anchorage in 5 fathoms opposite the mouth of the port on the SW., sheltered from all winds but those be- tween W. and SW. There is also anchorage along the coast between Aparri Road and this place, in 15 or 20 fathoms water within 2 miles of the shore ; the soundings are pretty regular, excepting at a depression in the bank about 10 miles to the SW. of Yincente, where the depths are 70 to 80 fathoms water about 2^ miles off the shore, having close to the edge of it 30 fathoms, black sand. There is no description of the eastern entrance to this port, but the survey shows a channel of 5 fathoms between the reefs off the Luzon shore and Rona Islet, in the center of the narrows. The approach is from the eastward, and it is a mile wide between the reefs round Escucha Islet and those bordering the main. Baiik. — One mile to the northward of Escarj)ada Point, and in a direct line between that point and the northwest point of Gran Laja Islet, there is a rocky bank of small extent, covered by 7 to 15 fathoms. Reported shoal. — According to the statement of M. Denier, master of the French bark Douquay Trouin, a shoal was passed on the 28th of May, 1875, NE. of Luzon Island. When sighted it was awash. It extended in a SW. and NE. direction, thence running NW. for about 100 yards. The vessel passed within a distance of 2 miles, going 6 knots an hour. M. Denier places the shoal in latitude 19° 5' N. and longitude 124° 43' E. Clare of Anson Reef. — Information is wanting about this danger, which is shown on the charts as lying 87 miles S. 73° E. of Cape Engano; in latitude 17° 49' N., longitude 124° 40' E. Directions. — The channel between Cape Engano and Kami- guin Island to the NNW. is 20 miles wide, and clear of dan- ger. As the currents set strongly to the northward in the southwest monsoon, it will be prudent for vessels proceeding to the eastward from this coast with light winds to keej) on the south side of the channel to prevent their being drifted to the northward near the Guinapak and Didikas rocks,' which lie to the northeastward of Kamioruin. 86 LUZON — NORTHEAST AND EAST COASTS. NORTHEAST COAST. From San Vincente (cli. s, p. 8-4) the coast runs east for 5 miles, bordered by a narrow reef with detached rocks, to Escarpada Point, the northeast point of Luzon, which has been usually distinguished, both in charts and sailing direc- tions, as Cape Engano. Here the coast turns abruptly to the southeastward for 12 miles to Iligan Point. From Point Iligan the coast again turns abruptly to the SSW., and then curves gradually round to the eastward to the headland of Moises, which bears S. by E., distant 64 miles from Point Iligan, and is formed by the eastern slopes of Mount Moises. The coast in this wide bight is high and clean, but offers no shelter. Three mountains, the resj^ectivo heights of which are 2,086, 3,451, and 3,995 feet, rise to the southward of Cape Engano, at the distances of 11, 16, and 22 miles, and must be fine land- marks in clear weather. Mount Moises, another one of the range of mountains which traverse the northeast part of Luzon parallel to the coast, is 4,085 feet high, and is a good mark for the ports in its vicinity. Divilakan Bay, north of Mount Moises, is open to the north- ward ; the shores are fringed with reefs, and there is a depth from 7 to 9 fathoms in the bay. The little port Dimalansan (ch. 9, p. 86), SE. of Divilakan Bay, penetrates 2 miles to the south, but is only 1 cable wide and only 2^ fathoms deep. Port Bikobian (ch. 10, p. 86), south of Dimalansan, penetrates 2 miles to the north, and is 2-^ cables wide and 9 to 11 fath- oms deep. Paranan Bay, ESE. of Mount Moises, is semicircular in form, has great depth of water in it, and is free of dan- gers; but it is quite exposed to the northeast wind. A long sand beach borders the bottom of the bay, into which several small rivers flow. The Spanish survey ends here. EAST COAST. The coast between Paranan Bay and Inaguikan Point, 250 miles farther south, has not been surveyed, and is very differ- ently drawn on the English and Spanish charts. Some of the positions, as, for example, Ca]3e Ildefonso, 80 miles from Paranan Bay, is given on the Spanish chart 10 miles SE. by E. of the position given for it on the English chart. Nu.Q, PORT OF BIMALANSAN From, a Spaouh. Governmaix Sxnrve-v 1859. ^ Md-ia PORT OF BIKOBIAN From a Spanish GovBnuoaent Sv»rveyl859. LUZON — EAST COAST. 87 The general trend of the ccjast is SSW., and it is stated in the Derrotero to l)e clean and very steep-to, and with tlio exception of Prnelm Shoal, to present no off -lying dangers. The bays Tumango (Dilasak of the Spanish chart), Kasigu- ran. Baler, and Dibut (Dingalan on the Spanish chart) are little known; they offer bad anchorages, exposed to all tlio winds and sea of the Pacific Ocean. Prueba Shoal, 3 miles from the main coast, nearly west of the northern point of Polillo Island, is the only off-lying dan- ger between Cape Engaho (cli. 8, p. 84) and Point Inagnikan. Dingala Bay is clean, with a depth of 22 fathoms in the middle of it, and 2^ fathoms at 2 cables from the shore. There are rocks close-to off the sonth point. In the northern part of the bay there is a creek sheltered from the northerly winds, with anchorage in 7 fathoms at G cables from the shore. A round point projects from the bottom of the bay, with ten islets off it on a reef which extends 2^ miles north and south; this reef has several rocks awash npoii it, and a depth of 4 fathoms at the edge. The river Dumangas, which enters the southern part of the bay, has 5 feet of water on its bar; and Umirei River, 1 mile farther south, has 6 feet of water on its bar. Lamon Bay, comprised between two points, Inaguikan to the NW. and the land of Mambulao to the SE., is protected from northerly winds by the islands Polillo and Jomalig. The little island Balesin lies in the middle of the bay, and farther in, the islands Cabalete and Alabat; these two last- named islands form with the coast a well-sheltered port, with good holding ground. The passage on the eastern side of Alabat is free of danger, but that on the western side is shal- low and foul. It must be remembered that the coast hero is not well known, and the bays along it have not been sounded out. Polillo Island rises in the center to a mountain of moderate height with wooded slopes. The north coast is clean and steep ; the east coast is bordered with islands and dangerous reefs, but the west coast is clean, except before the jiort of Polillo, where a great reef runs NW. parallel to the coast, leaving a narrow channel some 14 fathoms deep leading to the port. Soundings show 9 to 18 fathoms water at a distance of 4 mile from this shore. 88 LUZON — KAST COAST. Port Lain[)()n, in the iiortlnvosleru part of Lamon Bay, is a small but well-sheltered povt, of a depth of 5 to 12 fathoms over a bottom of sand and mud. The shores are covered by- dense vegetation, and commanded by the remarkable moun- tain by name Binangonan; several rivers flow into the port, and good water may be obtained. This port is celebrated in the history of the Philippines by having been during a part of the Sixteenth Century the depot of the Spanisb galleons and the treasures of Manila, as being situated in a freer posi- tion for communication with New Spain than might have been any port in the then little known and difficult strait of San Bernardino. Mauban Anchorage lies about 20 miles south of Port Lampon. Information is lacking about this anchorage, but it must be a place of trade, as steamers call there. An out- line sketch of the port was made by the officers of Malaspina's Expedition in 1792. Alabat Harbor. — There is no information about this har- bor beyond Avhat is stated above from the Spanish Derrotero, viz, that the islands Alabat and Cabalete form with the main coast a sheltered harbor of good holding ground ; and there is an old record of the tides. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Alabat Harbor at lOh. ; springs rise 9 feet. Port Mambulao, between Pinandunguan Point and the Dajikan Islands, is safe, sheltered from all winds and easy of access. The depth of water diminishes gradually from 11 fathoms at the entrance of the bay to 2 fathoms before the mouth of the river at the head of the port. The number of fishing inclosures within the harbor considerably obstructs the navigation. The town of Mambulao, at the mouth of the river, is of slight importance. This town and the neighbor- ing one of Parakale are famous for red-lead ore found in the vicinity. Tanaos Islets are five low flat islets lying 3 miles NNW. of Pinandunguan Point. Another low flat island named Ta- busao, lies west of the same point. Kalaguas Islands are a group of eight islands and several small islets, the largest and most central of which is Tinagu ; they are mostly bordered by reefs, and are all low, except Makulabo, which can be seen in clear weather at a distance of 24 miles. Anchorage may be found eastward of Makulabo, LUZON — EAST COAST. 89 frcjin the soutliwest pai't of Tiiuigii to :> miles N. by E. of Parakale on the main coast. Water can l)e obtained on tlie east side of Makulabo. Matandumaten Islet is shown on the chart at 10 miles SE. of Kabalisai, the easternmost of the Kalagua Islands, and midway between these two another islet is shown, with a rock off its southern side. Information is wanting about these islets. Danger. — A great bank is shown on the charts as lying 23 miles NE. by E. of the Kalaguas, stretching 20 miles WNW. and ESE., with 3 to 5 fathoms of water over it. No sound- ings are given in the neighborhood of this bank, nor between it and the coast ; but it is believed that the channel between the bank and Kalaguas is deep. Coast. — Parakale is a town in a little bay T miles SE. of Pinandunguan Point. Parakale Point, the westernmost point of the bay, is low, covered by mangroves, and bordered by a reef. From Bakai Point, the eastern point of the bay, the coast trends south 62° E. as far as Indang Point (Jimdang), and is low and bordered by a beach, off which there is good anchorage. Indang Island (Kinamanokan), off Indang Point, is low, fiat, and bordered l^y sand beaches ; it is separated from the coast by a channel 5 to 10 feet deep. Daet River, which enters the sea 6 miles SSE. of Indang (Kinamanokan) Island, is 11 feet deep at the mouth and 16 feet deep farther ut). When entering the river the western shore, upon which stands a fort, must be kept aboard, as there is a reef off the eastern point, which is low and covered by mangroves. Steamers from Manila call here. Kanimo and Kanton islands, situated at a short distance SE. of Daet River, are of moderate height. Kanimo, Avhich is the larger of the two, is about 2 miles long, north and south ; its shores are mostly surrounded by rocks, but on the northeast side there is anchorage on sandy bottom. Five small islands, named Rasas, lie to the southward and south- westward of Kanton Island. The water in the neighborhood of these islands is shallow. Kolasi Point, formed by the slope of Kolasi Hill, is high ; there is a little bay, 3 fathoms deep, between the point and a peaked hill SW. of it. The town of Kolasi, which stands on the northern slope of the hill, must be a place of some trade, as steamers call there. 90 LUZON— EAST COAST. San Miguel Bay. — To the eastward uf Kolasi Point the coast forms a clean circular bay, some 20 miles in diameter, surrounded by high mountains, and capable of harboring, in safety, vessels of great draft. When entering from the eastward care must be taken to avoid the reefs off Siruma Island and Pinitan Point. Tlie depth of water in the middle of the bay is 7 to 8 fathoms, lessening gradually toward the sides. The western shore, between Kolasi Point and Kabusao Eiver, at the bottom of the bay, is very low, and edged by a sandy beach, with shallow water off it. Kabusao River, which discharges itself through a low, flat shore, is 1 cable wide and 3| fathoms deep at the mouth; farther iip it carries a depth of 2i fathoms throughout a length of 24 miles, as far as the town of Nueva Carceres. A bank of sand, covered by 3 feet water, projects 2 miles to the NE. from the mouth. There are two other shoals to the westward of the outer end of the bank. Kabusao is only a fishing village. Kabalanga River, 6 miles to the eastward of Kabusao, has a good depth of water. The town of the same name is built a little way up the stream. Siruma Point and Island. — From Kabalanga River the coast rises and continues of moderate height as far as Siruma Point. The depth of water off this coast is irregular, and some shoals and small islands lie near it. Siruma Point is connected with the small island close to it by a reef ; another reef extends 1^ miles WNW. of the island, and dries in places. The coast. — Siruma Bay, to the eastward of the point, has depths of 7 to 9 fathoms, sand. From the northern point of the bay a reef projects 2 miles to the ISTW. ; the breakers on this reef can be seen to some distance. Between Siruma Bay and Port Sisiran, the coast is bordered by islands and rocks. The several bays that it forms are foul, and accessible to fish- ing boats only. Botauanan, the northernmost island on this part of the coast, is high and surrounded by rocks. Kinalasag Island, which forms the northern side of Port Sisiran, is about 4 miles in length, moderately high, and clean on the side toward the port. Bagakai Island and several smaller islets lie off the northern point, and from the north- ern part of Bagakai a reef with rocks awash extends ^ mile out. A rock (Laja) on which the sea breaks lies 1^ miles off the northeast shore of Kinalasag, off the entrance to Port LUZON — EAST COAST. 91 Sisiraii. Of the two passages on either side of this rock, that to the westward is the best; soundings show depths of 14 to 23 fathoms at less than a mile from Kinalasag. Sisiran Port is clean and capacious, and has good anchorage sheltered by high ground. The entrance, open to the north, is 1^ miles wide and has a depth of 10 to 12 fathoms near the point of Kinalasag, and 7 fathoms near the edge of the reef which surrounds the eastern point to a distance of 2 cables. Within the port the depth of water decreases gradually from 10 fathoms at the mouth to 2f farther in; bottom sand and mud near the shore. Water can be obtained on the eastern shore, but no provisions are procurable. Tagun Bay, east of Port Sisiran, has not been explored. Lahui Island is -t miles long, NNE. and SSW. Its north- western extremity terminates in a remarkable sharp peak like a sugar loaf, higher than several islets Avhich lie near it. The northeastern jjoint is bordered by a reef to a distance of 3 cables. At a distance of 3 miles NW. of the Sugar Loaf there is a group of four islets, the largest of which is 3 cables in length, with a reef projecting 1 mile to the northward from it, and surrounding two still smaller islets. The southern islet of the group lies 7 cables SE. of the largest islet, and is clean and steep-to. The channel between these islets and Lahui Island is safe, and has a depth of 12 to 27 fathoms. Coast mark. — The Sugar Loaf above mentioned makes a good mark for the entrance of Port Sisiran when coming from the eastward. Kanamuan Port, situated at the foot of the highest moun- tain of this part of the coast, is very small, and has a depth of only 2i to 3^ fathoms. The town Kanamuan is 4 miles inland, on the left bank of the river. Kanamuan Point, 4 miles east of this port, is high and steep, as is also the coast, which runs SE. by S. for 5 miles from it, as far as Point Bungus. Katanaguan Islands, 2 miles east of Kanamuan Point, are small, low, and surrounded by reefs. Tacbun Channel, be- tween the above-named islands and point, is clear, with 17 to 8 fathoms of water. The two islets Palombon, east of Point Bungus, are separated from that point by a channel 1^ miles wide and 15 fathoms deep. Katanduanes Island, separated from Luzon by Maqueda Channel, is about 38 miles long, north and south, and 92 LUZON — EAST COAST. 22 miles broad, and traversed throughout its length by a chain of mountains. It is abundantly supplied with small rivers, from the sands of which the natives obtain gold dust. The soil is fertile and produces rice, maize, sesame, indigo, cotton, and abaca (manilahemp), and there are good pastures for rearing horses and oxen. The west coast is in general safe and steep ; the east coast, bordered by little islets, presents some bays with bad anchor- ages ; and off the north coast there are various islets and shoals detached from the shore to a distance of 10 miles. lot Point, the northern extremity of the island, is of mod- erate height and steep-to. Matulin Island, 3 miles ENE. of lot Point, is the center of a circular reef about 2 miles in diameter and awash throughout its entire extent. Horadaba Islets are three rocks, the northernmost of which bears N. 31° W. distant 3 miles from lot Point. Abriop Bank, 1 mile NW. of Horadaba Islets, has not been surveyed. It is shown on the chart as extending 3 miles from east to west and 1 mile from north to south. The Palumbanes Islands are a little group of three islets 4 miles west of Karao Bay. A shoal upon which breakers were seen is reported to be situated about 4 miles northward of Palumbanes Islands. A rocky bank, 1 cable in extent, lies in the channel between the Palumbanes Islands and Karao Bay. Karao Bay, on the northwest part of Katanduanes Island, offers fair anchorage over a rocky bottom ; there is no other anchorage on the west coast of the island. Sialat Point, on the southwest part of Katanduanes, is high. Agajo Point, 5 miles south of Sialat, is low and covered by mangroves ; from this point the coast trends SE. by E. for 7 miles to Tuguntun Point, and is high, with little bays in it, which do not afford anchorage. The town of Kalolbong lies midway between the two points; the chart shows two shoals off Kalolbong. Kabugao Bay, on the south side of the island, is 11 miles wide between the points Tuguntun and Nagumbuayan, and 18 fathoms deep, shoaling gradually to 4 fathoms near the shore. Tuguntun Point, the southern point of the island, is low and bordered by rocks, and 2 miles NE. of the point there are two rocky shoals. Farther north, on the left bank of a little river, stands the town of Birak, the most important on the island. LUZUN — EAST COAST. 93 Kabugao River, on the eastern side of the bay, is fronted by two islets, and has a bar whieli nearly dries at low water. The towns of Cabngao and Bato stand on the banks of the river. The western shore of Kabugao Bay is bordered by banks and rocks. East coast of Katanduanes . — Port Baras has a depth of 3 to 7 fathoms, but is obstructed by reefs which make the en- trance difficult. Port Bagamanok, on the northeast coast, offers two anchorages. The southern anchorage is between the island Panai and Anajao Point ; the entrance which runs east and west leads into a little semicircular bay, between two islets, having a depth of 4^ to T fathoms. The northern an- chorage is situated at the southern extremity of the narrow channel between the reef off Minigil Point and off Panai Island, and it has a depth of 17 fathoms, lessening to 7 fath- oms, sand, opposite the town of Bagamanok. Winds on the east coast of Luzon. — From Cape Engaiio to the Bay of San Miguel, nortlieast winds prevail from October to March, the monsoon here beginning with north winds which are of short duration and soon pass into the northeast ; in January and February the east winds begin, and terminate the monsoon. The heaviest rains fall from October to Janu- ary, and in October typhoons sometimes occur. In March and April, and sometimes in the beginning of May, variable winds blow, bringing in the southwest monsoon ; but the dry season, of which April and May are the driest months, is uninter- rupted by rain. Thunderstorms occur from June to November, most fre- quently in August. During the southwest monsoon the sea is very calm, but in the middle of the northeast monsoon all navigation ceases on the east coast. Tides. — The flood stream sets to the northward, both on the east and on the west side of Katanduanes Island, and to the westward along the part of the coast between Katanduanes and Polillo Island. There is no information as to the hours of high water. Lagonoi Gulf has not been sounded, nor are its coasts well known ; it appears, however, to be safe, and no dangers have been reported on the route between Maqiieda Channel and Tobako Bay in the southern part of tlie gulf. The part of the coast that runs NW. of Tobako for 8 miles, as far as Tibi town, is bordered by a sand beach with good depth of water off it. 94 lA'ZON — EAST COAST. Mount Isiii'o, which rises to a height oi (;,4G2 feet between San Miguel Bay and Lagonoi Gulf, is an extinct volcano of 3G miles in circumference. Its eastern slopes reach nearly to the waters of Lagonoi Gulf, while its western slopes are separated from San Miguel Bay by a wide strip of alluvial soil. Mount Iriga, between Mount Isaro and Albai Volcano, is 3,970 feet high. Tobako Bay, in the southern part of Lagonoi Gulf, is fronted by the islands San Miguel and Kakrarai, and is by them formed into an excellent and capacious harbor G miles long and 3i miles wide, with a depth near the shore of 9 to 5^ fathoms. These two islands are connected by a reef, and Kakrarai is only separated from Sula Point, the southern point of the bay, by a narrow, winding, and impracticable channel. The entrance to the harbor, between points Natu- naguan on the main coast of Luzon, and Guinamban on San Miguel Island, is 7i cables wide. The first of these two points is clean ; but a reef projects to theNW. from Point Guinamban, to a distance of 1 mile, and continues round the north coast of San Miguel. The town of Tobako, in the northwest ]iart of the bay, carries a brisk trade with Manila, steamers calling there three or four times a month. Fr(nn Tobako the coast is steep, with 4i fathoms close to it, as far as Bagakai, situated 4^ miles SSE. of Tobako. Anchorage may be had anywhere between these two places, but the best is off Tobako, in front of the church. From Bagakai a reef stretches across the southern part of the harbor to Kakrarai Island, inclosing the islet Bugias, which is round and fiat-topped, and closes the mouth of the Sula Channel. Pilis Bay is a lagoon some 7 fathoms deep, into which vessels of very light draft can enter at high water. Tides. — The flood stream sets to the north and the ebb to the south. The islands of San Miguel, Kakrarai, and Batan are sepa- rated from each other by channels full of rocks and shoals that dry at low water, rendering them impracticable; the north coast of San Miguel is bordered by reefs, the extent of which has not been determined ; it is, therefore, prudent to give the coast a berth of 2 miles at least. Rapurapu Island is high; it is separated from Batan by a channel 2 miles wide, but too much obstructed by rocks to be LUZOX — EAST COAST. 95 navigable; a reef stretclies about a mile out from the middle of the south shore and dries at low water, and a rock lies 1 mile WSW, of the western point of the island. Albai Gulf, south of the above-named islands and 23 miles long, east and west, is 4 miles wide between Rapuraj)U Island and Montugan Point in Bulusan, and of the same width between Kakrarai Island and Paron Point. The shores are in general steep, but the opening in the southern part, called Poliki Bay, is shallow and foul. The Spanish Derro- tero states that there are only two shoals in the inner part of the gulf, 2 miles from the shore at the head, but the Spanish chart of 1873 shows " varios bajos" (several shoals) in the middle of the inner part. Sula Port, formed by the southern part of the narrow chan- nel that separates Kakrarai Island from the mainland, is well sheltered and has good holding ground. It is 4 cables wide and 11 fathoms deep at the mouth, continuing the same width and depth for ^ mile to the northward. The channel then curves to the westward and narrows to ^ cable, so that only the lightest of coasters can enter Tobako Bay by it. Both of the entrance jjoints are bordered by reefs 1 cable wide. Livok, at tlie head of Albai Gulf, is a town on the left bank of a little river. A reef lines the shore near the town, and is shown on the chart to extend to f mile from the shore. Shoals. — SE. of Livok, at a distance of 2 miles, there are two rocky shoals, 1 cable in extent and covered by 3 feet of water. From the northern shoal Sula Point bears N. 56° E., and Livok town N. 30° W. From the southern, Sula Point bears I^. 56° E., and Livok town N. 22° W. This locality should be approached with caution. Albai River, about 6 miles south of Livok, is of no great importance, and has only 1 foot of water on the bar at low water. The new town of Albai, capital of the province, stands on level ground 1 mile WSW. of the old town of Albai, which was the capital before the eruption of the volcano in 1814. The new town is sheltered from the volcano by an isolated hill named Linguin, which, as also a low hill named Kapuntakan on the south point of the river, are good marks for making the ancliorage. Between Livok and the river Albai the shore is bordered by a sand beach, having depths of 9 to 11 fathoms near it. The town of Albai exports hemp to the value of 83,000 annually. 90 MANILA — PROVINCE AND CITY. Albai Volcano, situated on a great ])lain about 5 miles from the shore near Livok, is one of the most remarkable volcanoes of the Archipelago; it forms a perfect cone 8,374 feet high, always crowned by a great plume of vapor, and is a good mark for navigating the coast. Poliki Bay is obstructed by reefs, at the edge of which there are soundings of 5^ fathoms ; on the western side there are several little channels which do not afford good anchorage. Paron Point, the northeast point of the gulf, is high and steep ; there is a thermal spring near it, the vapor from which can be seen at a great distance. Jesus Point, 2 miles SE. of Paron Point, has on its western side a little beach, near which there is anchorage. From Point Gajo, 2 miles SE. of Point Jesus, a reef, which extends west- ward nearly a mile, fringes the shore as far as the head of Sugot Bay. Sugot Bay is li miles wide, and penetrates 2 miles to the southward ; the eastern shore only is accessible and is bordered by a sand beach with a depth of water of 5^ fathoms near it ; the western shore is fringed by a reef. The river and town of Sugot are at the head of the bay; vessels drawing 19 feet can approach the mole of the town. Coal. — A layer of coal, similar in quality to Australian coal, has been discovered at Gatbo, a village SE. of Sugot town. MoNTUGAN Point. — A line of reef, extending more than a mile out, fringes the shore from Point Pagjuriran to Point Montugan, and continues round the coast into San Bernardino Strait. PROVINCE OF MANILA. It is bounded on the north by the Province of Bulacan, on the east by the District of Morong and Laguna de Bay, on the south by the Province of Cavite, and on the west by the bay of the same name. The area is 264 square miles and the pop- ulation 400,000. Manila (see plan of Manila on separate map), capital of the Philippine Archipelago and the province of this name, has 110,000 inhabitants and was founded in 1571, on the left bank of the moutli of Rio Pasig at its junction with the Pacific Ocean. It is a fortified city, encircled by a wall with bastions and bulwarks and a ditch and outer ditch, where it does not front on the sea or river. The waters of the sea or river can be let MANILA— CITY. 97 in and thus isolate the city l)y opening the sluices constructed for this purpose. There are six gates — three to the north, on the road to the river Pasig, called Almacenes, Santo Domingo, and Isabel II. ; and three on the land side, called Parian, Real, and Santa Lucia. All are well defended by bastions, partic- ularly on the land side. Besides the gates, there is a bastion to the north-northwest of the gate of Santa Lucia, which is not always open. The gate Real formerly enfiladed the Plaza Mayor and the palace of the governor, but since the taking of the city by the English in 1762 it has been placed in front of the college of San Jose, where it is now situated, and public entrance is made through the gate of Parian. The land side is the most exposed and the best fortified, but for convenience the descrip- tion will begin at the most advanced point formed by the river and sea, which is to be found at the extreme northwest of the city and defended by the royal fort of Santiago. Thence it will follow the bank of the river to the extreme northeast, where the bastion to San Gabriel is situated, from which point, proceeding along the trace in an oblique direction, first to the northeast, then to the east, and finally to the south, the extremity of the part in the battery of San Gregorio and the bastion of San Diego is reached. From here one turns to the southwest along the coast, which leads to the before-mentioned fort of Santiago. This fort is a citadel, defending the entrance to the river and the northwest angle of the city. Originally built of wood, it assumed its present form by order of Gov- ernor Gomez, who surrounded the city with good fortifica- tions. The fort has a gate to the plaza and a false one to the river. In front, and on the other side from this, is found the fort of Fernando, which has no great strength. On the east of the royal fort of Santiago, and at a short distance from it on the same side of the river, is found the bastion Tenerias; next, in the same direction the gate of Almacenes; more to the east, the battery of the military hospital. Not far from this and on the same line, the gate of Santo Domingo with its strong battery ; next, the bastion of the customs house (Aduana) ; next, the gate of Isabel II., and lastly, the bastion of San Gabriel, which terminates the line of fortifications along the river. Joined to this bastion on the exterior side is found the Plaza Nueva. Still following the trace from the bastion of San Gabriel, one arrives at the g-ate 98 MANILA — CITY. of Parian, through which it is necessary to pass in a northerly- direction to reach the bridge of Pasig. Leading south from this gate, is a heantifully paved highway of great breadth, and to the southeast is the bastion Diablo. South of this point is the postern of Recoletos and just beyond, the bastion of San Andres. Thence, to the southwest, is situated the royal gate, and, as has been stated, the extreme southern point is defended by the bastion of San Diego protected by the battery of San Gregorio, which is built on the exterior line in the angle of the plaza. Many of these works have deteriorated with time, and the expenditure of a little money and labor, especially at the strategic points of Santiago Point, Restinga Point, and Cor- regidor, would be of great benefit. The streets are straight, well leaved, and illuminated. Prominent among its buildings are the governor's palace, the royal court of chancery, and the convent of San Agustin, with its handsome church; the church and convent of the Recollects of San Francisco, whose buildings occupy an immense space ; the royal college and pontifical university of St. Thomas, which is spacious, well constructed, and possesses a notable physical laboratory ; the municipal atheneum, in charge of the Jesuits, with a physical laboratory, natural history museum, and a magnif- icent apparatus for astronomical observations ; the military hospital, with room for 1,000 beds, and the spacious and well- attended hospital of San Juan de Dios. Among the buildings ruined in the earthquake of 1863, some of which are being re- constructed and others already so, are the large and well-con- structed cathedral, the customs building, etc. Within the fortified city reside, generally speaking, the authorities of the archipelago, who have the same mission and the same hierarchy as those of Cuba. The real nucleus of the population of Manila is in its suburbs. These comprise the pueblos called Binondo; San Jos^; Santa Cruz, with 15 wards; Quiapo, with 2 wards; San Miguel, with 7 wards; Sampaloc, with 39 wards; and Tondo, with 18 wards. The neighborhoods of these suburbs are de- lightful and picturesque, with their rivers, lagoons, creeks, islands, quarries, and little hamlets. Good bridges facilitate communication between Manila and its suburbs. The suburb of Binondo is the most mercantile of the archipelago; here are the central administration of revenues and monoiDolies, MANILA — CITY. 99 general tobacco warehouses, and the administration of finances of the province. Its streets are narrow and the houses tastefully and solidly built. On the breakwater of the jetty extending out into the bay is a third-class light- house, and the steamers which perform the service of the bay and make periodical trips to the provinces of Cavite, Batangas, Bulucan, and Pampanga, close in along the river. North of Binondo, separated by a river spanned by several bridges, is the suburb of Tondo, extending to the west of the bay, on flat, sandy ground. The houses are in general con- structed of cane and nipa (a species of palm with feathery leaves) ; the streets are narrow, and there is a handsome church, a small theater, and a good market place. North- east of Binondo is the suburb of Santa Cruz, with good buildings, a flower market, theater, public jail, leper hospital under the Franciscans, and a cemetery for Chinese or Sangley infieles (infidels). Northeast of Manila and at the extremity of the suburb of Santa Cruz is the suburb of Quiapo, Avith good houses, hand- some and well-aligned streets, and a pretty market place. There are the tribunal of the natives, an elegant and solid structure; the well-built suspension bridge over the Pasig, measuring 350 feet long by 23 feet wide; the magnificent market of the Quinta, and the spacious and pretty San Sebas- tian street, with elegant buildings and convenient porticos, at the end being the sanctuary of San Sebastian under the Agustin Recollects. The suburb of San Miguel is situated to the east of Manila on the opposite bank of the Pasig River, being connected with Quiapo by a good wooden bridge ; it has good buildings and a comfortable and well-ventilated barracks. Along the river are a number of villas, the last one being called Malacamang, the residence of the supreme authority of the archipelago. It consists of an elegant palace divided into two parts, sur- rounded by gardens, with good wharves on the river. On the island of San Andres^ situated in the center of the river Pasig, is the convalescent hospital, spacious and with good hygienic conditions, the San Jose poorhouse, and the insane asylum. To the east of the island are the San Andres and San Rafael batteries, the southern part serving as support to the bridge uniting the suburb of San Miguel with San Miguel Viejo. 100 .MAMl.A — CITY. To the iiortlieast of Manila, adjoining it and fronting on tlie river bank, is tlie jjlace known as arroceros (rice mills), a much frequented spot, where are located the tobacco factories, in one of which over 7,000 female laborers are constantly oc- cupied ; also the botanical garden, the barracks of the regi- ment of i^eninsular artillery, the Si^anish theater, the Kiosko, designed for public dances, and the slaughterhouse. A mile and three-quarters south of Manila, on the banks of the bay, is the pueblo of Malate. It is crossed by the highway from the capital to Cavite ; it has a fine church, an infantry barracks occupied by a regiment of that arm, and a cavalry barracks, quartering the lancer squadron of Luzon ; both are good and spacious. On the shores of the Pasig is the paseo (promenade) of Ma- gallanes, on which is erected an obelisk dedicated to the mem- ory of the illustrious mariner, Magellan. On the paseo del malecon (dike promenade) is another monument recalling the patriotism of the oidor (judge) Anda. There are cock pits and luxurious cafes, the Spanish recreation club, a military library founded by royal order of February 15, 1846, and out- side the town a riding school and race course. The garrison of Manila and its suburbs was composed of 3 regiments of infantry, a battalion of artillery, the squadron of cavalry, and a regiment of veteran gendarmery (guardia civil). The general postal service of the north comprises the pro- vinces of Bataan, Zambales, Pampanga, Tarlac, Pangasinan, Union, Ilocos Sur, Ilocos Norte, and the districts of Lepanto, Bontoc, Benguet, Tiagan, Porac, and Corregidor. The cross-country line comprises the provinces of Bulacan, Nueva Ecija, Nueva Vizcaya, Isabela, Cagayan, and the districts of Principe and Saltan. The general service of the south comj^rises the provinces of Laguna, Batangas, Mindoro, Tayabas, Camarines Norte, Camarines Sur, Albay, and the districts of Moring, Masbate, and Ticao, and Infanta and Burias. That of Cavite (two expeditions daily). That of Pampanga, Bataan, and El Corregidor. That of Bulacan, Pami)anga, and Nueva Ecija. That of La Laguna (by steamer). That of Laguna, Batangas, and Mindoro, river route. That of the interior of the provinces of Manila. That of the Batanes Islands. MANILA BAY. 101 That of Balabac, Laucan, Puerto-Princesa, Zamboanga, and Pollok. Ill the maritime provinces of the archipehigo the arrivals and departures are uncertain, the service being performed 1)y coast- ing vessels. MANILA BAY. The general map of the island of Luzon shows, in general outline, Manila Bay and Cavite, the port and marine arsenal of Manila, oif which the engagement of May 1 took place. Manila Bay is about 30 miles in extent each way. The land on both sides of the entrance is high and covered with vege- tation, while the shores at the head are low, marshy, and intersected by numerous small rivers, estuaries, and tide lakes. Fortifications were erected commanding the opening of the bay with the additional protection of submarine mines ; depth of water, from 16 to 17 fathoms. Corregidor, or Mariveles, and Pulo Caballo are islands dividing the entrance of Manila Bay into two channels. Cor- regidor, the principal island, 600 feet high, lies near the north shore, and is 3 miles in length, east to west. There is a light- house on its summit. On its north side is a small bay, pro- tected by breakwaters, affording anchorage for small vessels, and from Buri Point a reef juts to the southward toward Caballo Island, on a low spur of which is a fixed light. It is the channel between Caballo Island and the mainland which was used by the United States squadron, and which was apparently not defended at all. Manila is about 25 miles from the entrance of the bay. A telegraph connected Manila with Hongkong, the cable, which was originally landed at Cape Bolinao, having been shifted to the chief town. Manila's total export and import trade is worth about six and one-half millions sterling. The length of quayage in the river Pasig is 4,250 feet, but the river, the average breadth of which is 350 feet, is too narrow to allow vessels to turn. The longest vessel using the river regularly is 231 feet. Larger vessels lie at anchor in the bay. Pasig River, which is navigable for about 10 miles, is the principal channel of communication with the interior ; there is a depth of 11 feet on the bar at low water. It i^asses between the commercial districts and the fortress of Manila. At its mouth is a breakwater, and a battery is placed on the southern mole. 102 LUZON— CITIES AND TOWNS. Cavitc (cli. 5, p. 49), wliicli stands on a low point of land, is fortified, and more guns are said to have recently been placed in position. The Spanish troops were in garrison there. The whole number of officers and troops in the islands on November 1, 1897, was about 46,108, having been largely reenforced in 1896-97 to quell the revolution. At Cavite ves- sels are built and repaired, the port having excellent conven- iences. There is a slip with a cradle 270 feet broad, and hydraulic power capable of drawing 2,000 tons. Workshops contain appliances of all kinds. A dock for gunboats and a larger private dock for vessels of 1,500 tons have been con- structed. The harbor, or cove, is a good one, with shelter from west and southwest winds, and a depth of water of 3^ fathoms. From Cavite to Manila by water is 7 miles, but by road 15 miles. Large vessels generally anchor off Cavite Harbor, about a mile from the shore, in 5 fathoms. Here the Spanish flotilla was placed. CITIES AND TOWNS. Caloocan. — Population, 9,843; situated 7 miles from Manila. There are highroads to Manila, Novaliches, Mariquina, and Sampaloc. Dilao. — Population, 4,625; situated 3 miles from Manila. Ermita. — Population, 4,726 ; situated 1^ miles from Manila. Las Pinas. — Population, 4, 000 ; situated 8 miles from Ma- nila. Malate. — Population, 2,319; situated If miles from Manila. Malibay. — Population, 2,890; situated 4 miles from Manila. Mariquina. — Population, 10,313; situated 7 miles from Manila. It communicates with Caloocan by a highroad. Montalban. — Population, 3,055; situated 16 miles from Manila. Muntinlupa. — Population, 5,068; situated 21 miles from Manila. Navotas, — Population, 9,154; situated 6^ miles from Ma- nila. Novaliches. — Population, 1,871; situated 10 miles from Manila. It communicates with Caloocan and Manila by high- roads. Pandacan. — Population, 2,446; situated 2 miles from Ma- nila. ABRA PROVINCE. 103 Paranaque. — Population, 9,8<:;3; situated at a distance of G^- miles from Manila. Pasig. — Population, 2-2,000; situated 7 miles from Manila. Pateros. — Population, 2,842; situated 3 miles from Manila. Pineda. — Population, 9,825; situated 3^ miles from Manila. San Felipe Neri.— Population, 5,465. San Juan del Monte.— Population, 2,011. San Mateo. — Population, G,700; situated 17 miles from Manila. San Pedro Macati. — Population, 3,921; situated about 3 miles from Manila. Santa Ana. — Population, 2,194; situated about 3 miles from Manila. Taguig-. — Population, 9,6G2; situated 4 miles from Manila. Tambobong. — Population, 25,000; situated 3 miles from Manila. PROVINCE OF ABRA. Situated in the northern part of the island of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by the provinces of Ilocos Norte and Cagayan, on the east by Isabela and part of the district of Bontoc, on the south by the districts of Bontoc and Lepanto and part of Ilocos Sur, and on the west by Ilocos Sur. Its rugged and volcanic surface is covered with rich vegetation, the oak, pine, and strawberry tree abounding. Among the game are buffalo, deer, wild boars, monkeys, etc., and in the valleys are grown vegetables, maize, tobacco, and palay. The area is 3,280 square miles, and the population 49,702, distrib- uted among 9 pueblos and 40 rancherias. The capital is Bangued, with a population of 13,417. It is situated 236 miles from Manila. It has a telegraph station, and was the residence of the politico-military governor. CITIES AND TOWNS. Alfonso XII. — Population not known. Bacay. — Population, 2,4G1; situated 11 miles from Ban- gued. Dolores. — Population, 2,970; situated G^ miles from Ban- gued. There are highroads to Taynud. La Paz. — Population, 2,869; situated 8 miles from Ban- gued. 104 ALBAY PROVINCE. Pidigan. — Population, 2,142; .situated 3 miles from Ban- gued. Pilar. — Population, 4,107; situated 3 miles from Bangued. San Jose. — Population, 1,285; situated 17 miles from Ban- gued. San Gregorio.— Population, 1,429; situated 4 miles from Bangued. It lias a post office. San Quintin. — Population, 725 ; situated 8 miles from Ban- gued. It is on the liigliroad from Bangued to Vigan. Tayum. — Population, 3,436 ; situated 2 miles from Bangued. Villavieja. — Population, 859; situated 20 miles from Bangued. PROVINCE OF ALBAY. Situated in the extreme southeast of Luzon, it is bounded on the north and east by the Pacific, on the south by the Strait of San Bernardino and the Sea of Visayas, and on the west by Camarines Sur. It is a broken volcanic country; there are several extinct volcanoes and one in activity called Mayon or Albay, being high and of dangerous ascent. There are impenetrable forests of very rich timber, and much large and small game. Numerous rivers Avater delightful valleys, in which all products of the country are grown. There are good highways. The natives are very industrious, and on the coast there are many dockyards where good vessels are con- structed. The area is 2,262 square miles and the population 296,850. The capital is Albay, with a population of 14,000, the town- ship having 34,000. It is situated on the bay of the same name and at the foot of the Mayon volcano, and was the resi- dence of the alcalde mayor, the promoter fiscal, and a number of public functionaries. CITIES AND TOWNS. Bacacay. — Population, 1 0, 547 ; situated 1 1 miles from Albay, on the bay of the same name. Bacon. — Population, 13,013; situated G miles from Albay. Bagamanog.— Population, 1,209. Barcelona. — Population, 1,567; situated 62 miles from Albay. Bato. — Population not known ; situated 29 miles from Albay. Bulan. — Population, 11,000; situated 21 miles from Albay. Bulusan. — Population, 5,230 ; situated 82 miles from Albay. A I.BAY PROVINCE. 105 Cagsaua. — Population, 20,449 ; situated 2 miles from Albay. Calolbon. — Population, 4,382. Camalig-. — Population, 14,868 ; situated 7 miles from Albay. Caramoan. — Population, 908. Casig-uran. — Population, 8,662; situated 22 miles from Al- bay. Castilla. — Population, 2,353; situated 18 miles from Albay. Donsol. — Population, 5,500; situated 16 miles from Albay. Gubat. — Population, 13,359; situated 52 miles from Albay. Guinobatan. — Population, 20,500; situated 11 miles from Albay. Irocin. — Population, 5,224; situated 62 miles from Albay. Jovellar. — Population, 5,279 ; situated 10 miles from Albay. Juban.— Population, 6,000. Legaspi.— Population, 6,017; situated ^ mile from Albay. Libog. — Population, 6,569, the townsliip having 4,000. It is situated 8 miles from Albay. Liibon. — Population, 4,125; situated 22 miles from Albay. Ligao. — Population, 17,371; situated 19 miles from Albay. Magallanes. — Population, 2,377; situated 34 miles from Albay. Malilipot. — Population, 5,995; situated 12 miles from Al- bay. It has regular highroads, the means of transportation being 4 and 2 wheel carts. Malinao. — Population, 10,296. Manito. — Population, 1,515; situated 1-| miles from Albay. Matnog. — Population, 3,745; situated 53 miles from Albay. Oas. — Population, 10,357; situated 22 miles from Albay, Pandan. — Population, 2,143; situated 39 miles from Albay. Payo. — An island with 2,800 inhabitants, situated at a 3 days' sail from Albay. It is composed of 8 j^ueblos. Pilar. — Poi)ulation, 5,458; situated 21 miles from Albay. Polangui. — Population, 10,050; situated 22 miles from Albay. Sorsogon. — Population, 10,720; situated 14 miles from Albay. Tabaco.— Population, 17,436 ; situated 16 miles from Albay. It has a telegraph station and a post-office. Tivi. — Chief town of a district of 10,215 inhabitants; situ a ted 22 miles from Albay. Viga. — Poimlation, 2,896; situated 21 miles from Albay. Virac. — Population, 5,832. lOG tAMAKINES PROVINCE. PROVINCE OF THE CAMARINES (NORTH AND SOUTH). Situated to the southeast of Manila, it is bounded on the north by the Pacific Ocean, on the south by the Province of Albaj^, on the west by the District of Ragay and the Pacific Ocean, and on the east by the Pacific Ocean. The area is 3,829 square miles and the population 185,878. South Camarines. — It is bounded on the north by North Camarines, on the east by Albay, and on the south-southwest by the Sea of Mindoro, and is crossed from northeast to south- east by a great mountain chain, covered with impenetrable forests of good building timber and inhabited by infieles. Its lakes are Buhi, Bato, and Baaso ; in its extensive valleys are raised cacao, rice, maize, abaca, sugar cane, etc. Industry consists in the manufacture of fine clothes of simanay and guimara. It is divided into 35 pueblos and 268 barrios. North Camarines. — It is bounded on the north and north- west by the Pacific and the Bay of San Miguel, on the south by South Camarines, on the southwest by the Bay of Guin- ayangan, and on the west by the Province of Tayabas, and is covered with mountains and crossed by numerous rivers of great volume. In the interior are virgin forests inhabited by tribes of negritos, and there are unworked mines of gold, silver, iron, copper, and lead. The rivers abound in fish and there are good wagon roads. It is divided into 8 pueblos and 25 barrios. The capital is Nueva Caceres, with a population of 11,550. It is situated on the Naga River, navigable from the sea to the capital by vessels of from 150 to 200 tons, and it is 207 miles distant from Manila. It was the residence of the bishop of the diocese, of the alcalde mayor, and of the chief of the com- mand of gendarmery, and has a cathedral, a bishop's palace, seminary for clergymen of the country, normal school, a court-house, etc. There is a post office and a railroad and telegraph station. CITIES AND TOWNS. Baao. — Population, G,759; situated 17 miles from Nueva Caceres. Basud. — Population, 1,874; situated 11 miles from Nueva Caceres. Bato.— Population, 4,861. Bombon.— Population, 2,656. CAMAKIXES rKOVIXCE. 107 Buhi. — Population, 10,000; situated 34 miles froui Nueva Caeeres. Bula. — Population, 2,800; situated 10 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Calabanga. — Poi)ulation, 5,704:; situated 7 miles from Niieva Ciiceres. Calasagasan. — Population, 813; situated 49 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Camaligan. — Population, 5,049. There are highroads to Callejcui, Nueva Caeeres, and Camaman. Camaman.— Population, 5,959. Capalonga.— Population, 1,692. Caramoan.— Population, 6,697. Daet. — Population, 10,650; situated 50 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Gainza. — Population, 2,631. Goa. — Population, 7,748. Indan.— Population, 5,800; situated 55 miles from Nueva Cjtceres. Iriga. — Population, 17,094; situated 22 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Labo. — Population, 4,213. Lagonoy. — Population, 8,500. It is the capital of the dis- . triet of the same name. Libmanan. — Population, 14,512; situated 14 miles from Nueva Caeeres, to which it is connected by highroads. It has a post office and telegraph station. Liupi. — Population, 765; situated 13 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Mabatobato. — Population, 849. Magarao. — Population, 5,744; situated 3 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Mambulao.— Population, 1,182. Manguirin.— Population, 1,300; situated 9 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Milaor. — Population, 5,120; situated 2 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Minalabag.— PoiDulation, 3,869; situated 4 miles from Nueva Caeeres. Nabua. — Population, 17,789 ; situated 17 miles from Nueva Caeeres. 108 A.-MBUKAYAN, APAYOS, AND BATAAX. Pamplona-^Population, 3,G47; situated 5 miles from Nueva C;'ieeres. It lias a post office. Paracale. — Population, 3,211 ; situated 68 miles from NueYa Caccres. Pasacao. — Population, 1,548. Pili. — Population, 3,635; situated 9 miles from Nueva Cd,ceres. Quipayo. — Population, 1,703; situated 7 miles from Nueva Caceros. Ragay. — Population, 2,300; situated 38 miles from Nueva Caceres. It lias a telegraph station. Sagnay. — Population, 3,1)85; situated 13 miles from Nueva Caceres. San Fernando. — Population, 3,271. It has a highway to the capital and one to Puscacao. San Jose. — Population, 9,000 ; situated 24 miles from Nueva Cficeres. San Vincente.— Population, 1,325. Sipocot. — Population, 1,066; situated 22 miles from Nueva Caceres. Siroma. — Population, 679; situated 14 miles from Nueva Caceres. Talisay. — Population, 3,507; situated 52 miles from Nueva Cficeres. Tigaon. — Population, 4,100; situated 5 miles from Nueva Caceres. Tinambag. — Population, 2,497; situated 19 miles from Caceres. DISTRICT OF AMBURAYAN. This district is confined to the slopes of the Malaya Ridge, and is bounded on the north by Tiagaii and Ilocos Sur, on the east by Lepanto, on the south by La Union, and on the west by Bengued. The population is 30,150. The capital is Alilem, with a population of 8,014. DISTRICT OF APAYOS. This district is situated north of Cagayan de Luzon, and consists of some forty ranches. The population is 6,000. The capital is Bugabagu. PROVINCE OF BATAAN. . Situated in the center of the island of Luzon, it is bounded on the north l)y Pampanga, on the south by the Bay of Manila, BATAXGAS PROVINCE. 109 Oil the east by Zambales, aud on the west by the China Sea. The area is 1,023 square miles, and the popuhition 52,000. The capital is Balanga, with a population of 9,000. It is situated 31 miles from Manila, and has highroads to the neighboring towns. There is a post office and telegraph station. CITIES AND TOWNS. Abucay. — Population, 7,185 ; situated 3 miles from Balanga. Bag-ac. — Population, 1,655; situated 8 miles from Balanga. Dinalupijan. — Population, 738 ; situated 15 miles from Ba- langa. Hermosa.— Population, 2,649; situated 11 miles from Ba- langa. Mabatan.— Population, 1,766; situated 2 miles from Ba- langa, to which there is a railway. Mariveles. — Population, 1,429; situated 30 miles from Ba- langa. Moron. — Population, 2,622 ; situated 25 miles from Balanga. Orani. — Population, 6,400; situated 7 miles from Balanga. Orion. — Population, 10,373; situated 6 miles from Balanga. Pilar. — Population, 3,471 ; situated 3 miles from Balanga. Samal. — Population, 5,233; situated 6 miles from Balanga. PROVINCE OF BATANGAS. Batangas is an important province owing to its geographical position, being situated south of Luzon and oj^posite Mindoro ; its close proximity to the capital, and its easy communication by land and sea. Within its boundaries is Lake Bingabon, in the center of which rises the isolated cone of the Taal Volcano, over 1,200 feet high. It is noted for its high moun- tains, thick woods, and fertile valleys, over which roam droves of buffalo, horses, etc. The principal industries of the province are the manufacture of silk, abaca, and cotton fabrics, and dyestutfs. The province is divided into 24 pueblos and 471 barrios. The area is 1,153 square miles and the popula- tion 212,000. The capital is Batangas, with a population of 39,358. It is situated 72 miles from Manila, in a cove of its name, on the Calumpang River, and has a spacious and convenient harbor. During the month of February there are held a number of agricultural and industrial fairs and expositions in this city. 110 BATANGAS PROVINCE. wliich are mucli patronized by tlie populace of tlie province, and where labor and progress are stimulated by the awarding of prizes. There are some 4,000 houses of simple and elegant construction, among which may be mentioned the royal palace, parish convent, and tribunal. The city was the resi- dence of the alcalde mayor and a number of public function- aries. CITIES AND TOWNS. Balayang.— Population, 24,747; situated 30 miles from Batangas. Bauang.— Population, 39,659; situated 4 miles from Ba- tangas. It has many highroads. Calaca. — Population, 8, 288 ; situated 23 miles from Batangas, Calatagan. — Population, 904; situated 41 miles from Ba- tangas. Cuenca. — Population, 6,735; situated 8 miles from Batangas, with which it communicates by a highroad. Ibaan. — Population, 8,900; situated 5 miles from Batangas. It has two highroads. Lemery.— Population, 2,890, its township having 14,000; situated 15 miles from Batangas. Lian. — Poj)ulation, 5,889; situated 36 miles from Batangas. It has highroads to Tuy and Nasugbu. Lipa. — Population, 40,733 ; situated 18 miles from Batangas. Lobi. — Population, 6,472; situated 20 miles from Batangas. Nasugbu.— Population, 8,627; situated 44 miles from Ba- tangas. It has a highroad to Lian. Prosario.— Population, 12,435; situated 16 miles from Ba- tangas. It is connected by highroads with Tiaon, Lipa, Ibaan, San Juan, and Taisan. San Jose.— Population, 10,000; situated 9 miles from Ba- tangas. San Juan. — Population, 14,017; situated 48 miles from Ba- tangas. It has a highroad to Rosario. San Luis. — Population, 5,201; situated 16 miles from Ba- tangas. Santo Tomas. — Population, 10,709; situated 33 miles from Batangas. Taal. — Population, 33,378 ; situated 13 miles from Batangas. Taisan. — Population, 6,971. Talisay. — Population, 8,111; situated 37 miles from Ba- tano-as. BENGUET DISTRICT. Ill Tanauan.— Population, 20,038; situated 27 miles from Ba- tangas on the principal liigliroad from Manila to Batangas. Tuy. — Population, 10,150; situated 24 miles from Batangas. Tliere are higliways to Balayan, Sian, Nasugbu, and Alfonso. DISTRICT OF BENGUET. Situated in the land of the Igorrotes, it is bounded on the north by the District of Lepanto, on the east by the Province of Nueva Vizcaya, on the south by Pangasan, and on the west by La Union. It is a volcanic and very irregular country, covered with lofty pines of good quality and crossed by numer- ous streams and rivers in which small quantities of gold are found. The area is 328 square miles and the population 15,932, divided among two pueblos, 25 visitas, and 128 ranch- erias of subdued infieles. The capital is La Trinidad, with a population of 2,000. It was the residence of the political-military commander, lieu- tenant of the gendarmery, and parish priest. CITIES AND TOWNS. Adavang.— Population, 312. Ambuclao. — Population, 145. Amlimay.— Population, 336; situated 23 miles from La Trinidad. Atoc— Population, 1,317. Azual. — Population, 615; situated 16 miles from La Trin- idad. Baguio. — Population, 661 ; situated 26 miles from La Trin- idad. Balacbac. — Population, 688. Baningan. — Poi^ulation, 379 ; situated 6 miles from La Trinidad. Benneng. — Population, 500. Bojod. — Population, 448; situated 18 miles from La Trin- idad. Bubon. — Population, 169 ; situated 32 miles from La Trin- idad. Buguias. — Population, 650. Cabayan.— Population, 844; situated 19 miles from La Trinidad. Capangan. — Population, 583; situated 7 miles from La Trinidad. 112 BINATANGAN AND BOXTOC. Carao. — Poi)ulation, 502. Daclan.— Population, 907 ; situated 13^ miles from La Trin- idad. Galiano. — Population, 1,330; situated 11 miles from La Trinidad. Ibatanes. — Population, 480. Loo. — Population, 724; situated 29 miles from La Trinidad. Lutab. — Population, 415; situated 16 miles from La Trin- idad. Magangan. — Population, 301; situated 13 miles from La Trinidad. Paiquet.— Population, G22; situated 13 miles from La Trin- idad. Palina. — Population, 704. Palintaang. — Population, 900. Quibungan. — Poi^ulation, 519; situated 20 miles from La Trinidad. Salipaang. — Population, 300. Sapuan. — Population, 214; situated 7 miles from La Trin- idad. Tacquian. — Population, 386. Tavio. — Population, 537; situated 8 miles from La Trin- idad. Tinec— Population, 229. TivalbaL — Population, 376; situated 7 miles from La Trin- idad. Tublay.— Population, 996. Vac—Population, 1,000. DISTRICT OF BINATANGAN. Situated on the eastern coast of Luzon, it is bounded on tlie north by Isabela, on the east by the Pacific Ocean, on the south by the District of Principe, and on the west by the dis- tricts of Nueva Vizcaya and Nueva Ecija. The capital is Binatangan. PROVINCE OF BONTOC. It is situated northeast of the Province of Lepanto' in a mountainous country, and has a population of 24,502, divided among two pueblos and a number of rancherias. The climate is temperate and moist ; there are a number of mineral springs as well as much iron j^y rites and beds of silver-bearing galena. "BONTOr PROVIN'CE. 113 The capital is Bontoc, witli a i)()pulation of 5,774. It is situated 253 miles from Manila, and was tlie home of the governor. CITIES AND TOWNS. Aga-oa. — Population, 400 ; situated 22 miles from Bontoc. Alap. — Population, 713, the township having 849 ; situated 10 miles from Bontoc. Ang-Baiong. — Population, 163; situated 13 miles from Bontoc. Anquien. — Population, 090, the township having 1,115; situated 16 miles from Bontoc. Antadao. — Population, 328; situated 11 miles from Bontoc. Balili.— Population^ 297; situated 10 miles from Bontoc. , Balioang. — Population, 504; situated 13 miles from Bontoc. Balugang. — Population, 1,312; situated 18 miles from Bontoc. Banaue. — Population, 638, the township having 872 ; situ- ated 27 miles from Bontoc. Bang-Inang.— Population, 144; situated 30 miles from Bontoc. Barligt. — Population, 439; situated 17 miles from Bontoc. Betuagan. — Population, 285, the township having 366 ; sit- uated 14 miles from Bontoc. Cang-Co. — Population, 398 ; situated 9 miles from Bontoc. Dalican. — Population, 457, the township having 587; situ- ated 7 miles from Bontoc. Fidelisan. — Population, 478, the township having 531 ; sit- Tiated 16 miles from Bontoc. Guina-Ang. — Population, 1,071; situated 9 miles from Bontoc. Gung-TJgong. — Population, 716; situated 12 miles from Bontoc. Inapuy. — Population, 417; situated 17 miles from Bontoc. Mainit. — Population, 417, the township having 547 ; situ- ated 9 miles from Bontoc. Malitcong. — -Population, 651, the township having 777; situated 8 miles from Bontoc. Paquigang. — Population, 304, the township having 319; situated 12 miles from Bontoc. Pok-Itang. — Population, 543 ; situated 28 miles from Bon- toc. Quing-Aquing. — Population, 512. 114 BULACAN PROVINCE. Sacasacan. — Popuhition, Gito; situated 10 miles from Bon- toc. Sadanga. — Population, 519, the township having 048; situ- ated 20 miles from Bontoc. Sagada. — Population, 1,000; situated 20 miles from Bontoc. Samuqui. — Population, 545; situated | mile from Bontoc. Tac-Cong. — Poi^ulation, 645 ; situated 14 miles from Bontoc. Tanolo. — Population, 385 ; situated 13 miles from Bontoc. Talubin.— Population, 632; situated 8 miles from Bontoc. Tanulon. — Population, 492; situated 17 miles from Bontoc. Tetapan. — Population, 1,340; situated 9 miles from Bontoc. Tugtucang. — Population, 407, the township having 657; situated 7 miles from Bontoc. PROVINCE OF BULACAN. This is one of the smallest, but richest provinces of the archipelago. It is bounded on the east by Nueva Ecija, on the south by Manila, on the west by the Bay and Province of Pampanga, and on the north by the Province of Pampanga. The area is 965 square miles, and the population 230,000. It is crossed by several ramifications of the Caraballo Moun- tains and by the great Pampanga River, which empties into Manila Bay by several mouths, some of which are navigable. The land is fairly cultivated; there are sugar mills, and cacao, rice, indigo, sesame, and fruits are grown. There are mines of iron and magnetite, and quarries of stone, alabaster, etc. Industry is confined to the manufacture of striped cloths of silk and cotton, to fishing, to washing the sandy bottoms of rivers for a few particles of gold, and to the mak- ing of hats and cigar cases. The ijrovince is divided into 25 pueblos and 464 barrios or visitas. The capital is Bulacan, with a population of 13,186. It is situated 22 miles from Manila, has a church, a town hall, about 2,000 stone houses, and was the residence of the provincial authorities. CITIES AND TOWNS. Angat. — Population, 8,050; situated 19 miles from Bulacan. Baliuag. — Population, 14,122; situated 13 miles from Bulacan. Barasoain. — Population, 9,675; situated 6 miles from Bulacan. CABUGAOAN DISTRICT. 115 Big-aa. — Population, 8,120; situated 3^ miles from Bulacan. Bocaue. — Population, 10,345; situated 4^ miles from Bulacan. Bustos. — Population, 7,0-25; situated 2 miles from Bulacan. Calumpit. — Population, 15,072; situated 12 miles from Bulacan. Guiguinto. — Population, 5,115; situated 2 miles from Bulacan. Hagonoy. — Population, 20,120; situated 13 miles from Bulacan. Malolos. — Population, 14,590; situated 6 miles from Bula- can. Marilao. — Population, 5,075; situated 8 miles from Bula- can. Meicauayan, — Population, 8,110; situated 11 miles from Bulacan. Norzag-aray. — Population, 5,305; situated IG miles from Bulacan. Obando. — Population, 7,948 ; situated 7 miles from Bulacan. Paombong. — Population, 10,297; situated 8 miles from Bulacan. Polo. — Population, 7,549; situated 7 miles from Bulacan. Pulilan. — Population, 10,058; situated 8 miles from Bula- can. Quingua. — Population, 8,854; situated 7 miles from Bula- can. San Ildefonso. — Population, G,G01; situated 19 miles from Bulacan. San Jose. — Population, 2,397 ; situated IG miles from Bula- can. San Miguel de Mayumo. — Population, 20,460; situated 25 miles from Bulacan. San Rafael. — Population, 8,4G9; situated 12 miles from Bulacan. There is a railroad to Balinag, Angat, and San Miguel. Santa Isabel. — Population, 8,125; situated 6 miles from Bulacan. Santa Maria de Pandi. — Population, 10,508; situated 8 miles from Bulacan. DISTRICT OF CABUGAOAN. Situated north of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by the Province of Cagayan, on the east by the command of Apayaos, 116 CAGAYAN PROVIXCE. on the south by the Province of Abra, and on the west by Ilocos Norte. The capital is Cubagaoan. PROVINCE OF CAGAYAN. Situated nortli of the Province of Isabela, it is bounded on tlie north by the China Sea, and on the east and west by the Sierra Madre Mountains and the Cordillera of the north (an extension of the central cordillera). It is the coldest territory in the archipelago, so that in January and February the body must be given additional protection. In other seasons the air lacks purity, on account of the excessive humidity maintained by the thick forests and more than fifty rivers and creeks. Owing to the good quality of the soil, the fruits common to the country are raised, the tobacco of its plantations being specially celebrated. Stock is owned to the extent of some 31,000 carabaos (buffalo), 30,000 head of cattle, 14,000 swine, and 15,000 horses. The area is 6,587 square miles, and the population 112,357. The capital is Tuguegarao, with a population of 10,826. It is situated on the right bank of the Rio Grande de Cagayan (cli. 11, p. 116). Among the principal buildings are the government house (of rubble masonry and elegant architec- ture), the court-house, church, and town hall. The authori- ties residing here were the mayor and judge and a number of treasury, justice, and fomento officials. CITIES AND TOWNS. Abulug. — Population, 5,880; situated 79 miles from Tu- guegarao. Alcala. — Population, 5,471; situated 21 miles from Tugue- garao. It has a telegraph station. Aparri. — Population, 11,262; situated 54 miles from Tu- guegarao. There is a telegraph station. The captain of the port resided here. Buguey.— Population, 1,120; situated 58 miles from Tu- guegarao. Camanaliugan. — Population, 4,198 ; situated 53 miles from Tuguegarao. Claveria. — Population, 4,641; situated 171 miles from Tu- guegarao, with which it is connected by a highroad. ^iu., X ..-<-' ..„ ...J^ n,'. CAVITE PROVINCE. 117 Enrile.— Population, 7,000; situated 3 miles from Tugue- giarao. Gattaran. — Population, 805 ; situated 3 miles from Tugue- garao. Iguig. — Population, 4,000; situated 11 miles from Tugue- garao. Lalloc. — Population, 6,4:75; situated (33 miles from Tugue- garao. It has a post office and telegraph station. Malaueg. — Population, 3,819; situated '>S miles from Tuguegarao. Nasiping.— Population, 1,023; situated 34 miles from Tuguegarao. Pamplona. — Population, 2,404; situated 79 miles from Tuguegarao. Piat. — Population, 2,716; situated 24 miles from Tugue- garao. Santo Nino.— Population, 2,891. Solana. — Population, 5,578; situated 4 miles from Tugue- garao. Tabang. — Population, 2,897 ; situated 14 miles from Tugue- garao. Tuao. — Population, 4,986; situated 26 miles from Tugue- garao. PROVINCE OF CAVITE. An important province on account of its special situation between Manila Province and Bay Lake, its fertile and hand- some coasts, and the military arsenal of the archipelago located here. It has many mountains grown over with fine timber, the valleys being watered by numerous streams. The area is 488 square miles and the population 133,926. The capital is Cavite, with a population of 1,497. It is sit- uated to the north on a peninsula in Manila Bay, and is con- nected with Manila by a good road. It has a telegraph station communicating with the whole island of Luzon. It is a for- tified place, has an arsenal, and is one of the prettiest of towns. All its buildings are of stone, among them being- several churches, an extensive tobacco factory, a theater, casino, and several government offices. Here resided the gov- ernor, judge, attorney, and a number of treasury, adminis- tration, and f omento officials, besides the regular garrison and the employees of the arsenal. Some 3 miles to the south is CAVITE PROVINCE. 117 Enrile.— Population, 7,000; situated 3 miles from Tugue- giarao. Gattaran. — Population, 805 ; situated 3 miles from Tugue- garao. Iguig.— Population, 4,000; situated 11 miles from Tugue- garao. Lalloc. — Population, 6,4:75; situated 03 miles from Tugue- garao. It has a post office and telegraph station. Malaueg. — Population, 3,819; situated "^8 miles from Tuguegarao. Nasiping.— Population, 1,023; situated 34 miles from Tuguegarao. Pamplona. — Population, 2,404; situated 79 miles from Tuguegarao. Piat. — Population, 2,716; situated 24 miles from Tugue- garao. Santo Nino.— Population, 2,891. Solana. — Population, 5,578; situated 4 miles from Tugue- garao. Tabang. — Population, 2,897 ; situated 14 miles from Tugue- garao. Tuao. — Population, 4,986; situated 26 miles from Tugue- garao, PROVINCE OF CAVITE. An important province on account of its special situation between Manila Province and Bay Lake, its fertile and hand- some coasts, and the military arsenal of the archipelago located here. It has many mountains grown over with fine timber, the valleys being watered by numerous streams. The area is 488 square miles and the population 133,926. The capital is Cavite, with a population of 1,497. It is sit- uated to the north on a peninsula in Manila Bay, and is con- nected with Manila by a good road. It has a telegraph station communicating with the whole island of Luzon. It is a for- tified place, has an arsenal, and is one of the prettiest of towns. All its buildings are of stone, among them being- several churches, an extensive tobacco factory, a theater, casino, and several government offices. Here resided the gov- ernor, judge, attorney, and a number of treasury, adminis- tration, and f omento officials, besides the regular garrison and the employees of the arsenal. Some 3 miles to the south is 118 CAYAPAS DISTRICT. tlie region known as Tierra Alta (high countrj^) ; here are many viUas and country houses, being a good phice for foreigners to recuperate. CITIES AND TOWNS. Alfonso. — Population, 7,GG0 ; situated 25 miles from Cavite. Amadeo. — Population, 3,873 ; situated 19 miles from Cavite. Bacoor. — Population, 13,113 ; situated 10 miles from Cavite. Bailen. — Population, 4,239; situated 26 miles from Cavite. Caridad (La). — Population, 1,258; situated 1| miles from Cavite. Carmona. — Poi^ulation, 3,959; situated 17 miles from Cavite. Cavite el Viejo (ch. 5, p. 49).— Population, 9,484; situated 10 miles from Cavite. Imus. — PojDulation, 14,076; situated 18 miles from Cavite. Indang. — Population, 1,500, the township having 13,344; situated 24 miles from Cavite. Magallanes. — Population, 1,200; situated 43 miles from Cavite. Maragondon. — Population, 8,313; situated 43 miles from Cavite. Mendez Nunez. — Population, 3,745; situated 29 miles from Cavite. Naic. — Population, 9,215; situated 17 miles from Cavite. Noveleta. — Population, 2,804 ; situated 7 miles from Cavite. Perez Dasmarinas. — Population, 4,696; situated 15 miles from Cavite. There is a wagon road to Silan and Imus. Rosario. — Population, 6,385 ; situated 10 miles from Cavite. San Francisco de Malabon. — Population, 9,055; situated 12 miles from Cavite. San Roque (ch. 5, p. 49). — Population, 3,182; situated 1 mile from Cavite. Santa Cruz. — Population, 8,546; situated 49 miles from Cavite. Silang. — Population, 7,411; situated 34 miles from Cavite. Ternate. — Population, 1,828 ; situated 32 miles from Cavite. DISTRICT OF CAYAPAS. Situated at the source of the Rio Amburayang, it is bounded on the north by the District of Quiangan, on the south by ILOCOS NORTE PROVINCE. 119 Nueva Vizcaya, on tlie east by the peak of Salesas, and on tlie west by Benguet. It consists of 9 ranches. The capital is Cayapa. PROVINCE OF ILOCOS NORTE. Situated in the northwest of Luzon, it is one of the most industrious provinces in the island. The soil, in general rug- ged, yields all kinds of fruit. Live stock of fine quality is one of the chief sources of wealth ; the valleys are fertilized by many rivers descending from the great sierra. There is a good pike communicating with Manila and running through several provinces. The pueblos of the interior are also con- nected by good roads. The climate is agreeable, especially to foreigners, as in certain seasons and certain regions the Reamur thermometer descends to 80°; it would be a good place for the establishment of acclimating colonies, which would be of great benefit to jjersons unable to stand the heat of other parts of the country, and to those attacked by dys- entery. In Lice Mountain is a grotto of about 39 acres in area. The province is divided into 16 pueblos, 120 barrios, and 5G rancherias of subdued infieles. The area is 1,873 square miles and the population 150,900. The capital is Laoag, with a population of 37,094. It was the residence of the alcalde mayor and a number of public functionaries. CITIES AND TOWNS. Bacarra. — -Population, 13,735 ; situated 3 miles from Laoag. Badoc. — Population, 10,861; situated 22 miles from Laoag. Bangui.— Population, 5,649; it is situated 38 miles from Cavite and is connected with the capital by a highroad. Banna. — Population, 2,587; situated 19 miles from Laoag. Batac, — Population, 17,625; situated 10 miles from Laoag. Dingras.— Population, 12,600; situated 11 miles from Laoag. Nagpartian.— Population, 1,985; situated 28 miles from Laoag. Paoay. — Population, 11,848; situated 15 miles from Laoag. Pasuquin.— Population, 5,616; situated 9 miles from Laoag. Piddig. — Population, 10,841; situated 8 miles from Laoag, There is a wagon road to Solsona and San Miguel. 1-^0 ILOCOS SUR PROVINCE. San Miguel Sarrat. — Population, 9,015; situated 3 miles from L;ioa,n'. San Nicolas. — Population, 0,578; situated l.V miles from Laoa--. Solsona. — Population, 3,091 ; situated 15 miles from Laoag. Vintar. — Population, 11,803; situated 4 miles from Laoag. PROVINCE OF ILOCOS SUR. Situated in tlie northwest of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by Ilocos Norte, on the south by La Union, on the east by Abra, and on the west by the China Sea. It is a rather flat country, watered by several rivers, among them being the Abra, a river of great volume. The soil is excel- lent in quality, producing in abundance all kinds of vegeta- bles. Many medicinal plants grow in the mountains. One of the chief sources of wealth is stock raising, the number of cattle and swine being very large. The area is 644 square miles and the population 172,836, The capital is Vigan, with a population of 10,000. It is situated 238 miles from Manila and has a post ofhce and tele- graph station. It is also the capital of the bishopric of Nueva Segovia. It has good buildings, among which may be mentioned the cathedral, episcopal palace, casa real, court-house, administration building, and council seminary. It was the residence of the mayor, judge, and a number of fomento, justice, and treasury ofhcials, besides the cathedral dignitaries, the rector, and the professor of the seminary. CITIES AND TOWNS. Bantay. — Population, 6,449; situated ^ mile from V'lgan. Cabugao. — Population, 8,259; situated 17 miles from Vi- gan. There is a wagon road to Ilocos Sur and Ilocos Norte and to Vigan. Candon. — Population, 15,797; situated 29 miles from Vigan. It has a telegraph station. Caoayan. — -Population, 6,050 ; situated 3 miles from Vigan, with a port called Pandan for merchant and mail steamers. It has three highroads. Lapo. — Population, 6,000; situated 13 miles from Vigan. Magsingal. — Population, 8,446; situated 6 miles from Vigan. LA INFANTA PROVINCE. 121 Narbacan. — Population, 10,500; situated 15| miles from Vigaii. Nueva Coveta. — Population, 789. Salcedo. — Population, 914; situated 41 miles from Vigan. San Esteban. — Population, 2,132; situated 23 miles from Yig-an. San Ildefonso. — Population, 2,033; situated 3 miles from Vigan. San Vicente. — Population, 5,237; situated l-j miles from Vigan. Santa. — Population, 8,532; situated 4 miles from Vigan. Santa Catalina. — Population, 5,100; situated 1 mile from Vigan. Santa Cruz. — Population, 5,870; situated 42 miles from Vigan and 08 miles from the station of Dagupan. Santa Lucia. — Population, 7,113; situated 40 miles from Vigan. Santa Maria. — Population, 10,030; situated 19 miles from Vigan. Santiago. — Population, 4,087; situated 20 miles from A'igan. Santo Domingo. — Population, 8,931 ; situated 4 miles from Vigan. Sevilla. — Population, 1,133; situated 45 miles from Vigan. Sinait. — Population, 7,936; situated 22 miles from Vigan. Tagudin. — Population, 4,055; situated 52 miles from Vigan. It lias a telegraph station. PROVINCE OF LA INFANTA. It is bounded on the north by Principe, on the south by Tayabas and Laguna, on the east by the Pacific Ocean, and on the west by Nueva Ecija. The area is 3,773 square miles and the population 10,200. The capital is Binangonan de Lampon, with a population of 7,557. It is situated 758 miles from Manila, and commii- nication across the Province of Laguna is difficult and laborious. CITIES AND TOWNS. Polillo. — Population, 1,400; situated 19 miles from Binan- gonan. It has a post office. 122 ISABELA DE LUZON AND ITAVES. PROVINCE OF ISABELA DE LUZON. It is situated north of Manila, between the Sierra Madre and the Cordillera Central or Caraballos mountains. It is covered with thick forests which are peopled by infieles and abound in timber for building purposes. The ground is much broken and is watered by several rivers. Maize, fruits, palay, and good tobacco are grown, and a great amount of live stock of all kinds is raised. There are in the province 9 pueblos, 5 barrios, and 40 rancherias of subdued infieles. The area is 4,467 square miles and the population 40,846. The capital is Ilagan, with a population of 13,811. It is situated 329 miles from Manila. A detachment of exiles was located here, employed in pressing tobacco. The city was also the residence of the commander of the presidio. CITIES AND TOW^NS. Angadanan. — Population, 2,739; situated 41 miles from Ilagan. Cabagan Nuevo. — Population, 6,240. Cabagan Viejo.— Population, 3,633 ; situated 26 miles from Ilagan. It has a telegraph station. Carig. — Population, 2,447; situated 39 miles from Ilagan. It has a telegraph station. Cauayan. — Population, 2,115; situated 16 miles from Ilagan. Echague. — Population, 5,700; situated 34 miles from Ilagan. Gamu. — Population, 6,101; situated 7 miles from Ilagan. Palanan. — Population, 1,137; situated ^ mile from Ilagan. Reina Mercedes.— Population, 3,286; situated 12 miles from Ilagan. Santa Maria de Luzon. — Population, 2,607; situated 19 miles from Ilagan. Tumauini. — Population, 4,814; situated 14 miles from Ilagan. DISTRICT OF ITAVES. It is bounded on the north by Apayaos, on the south by Ambabuy, Dinaguangan, and the Mayoyas mountains, on the east by Isabela, and on the west by Abra, Bontoc, and Quian- gan. The population is 15,208. The capital in Magogao. LAGUNA PROVINCE. 123 PROVINCE OF LAGUNA. It is bounded on the iiortli by Morong, on tlie south by Batangas and Tayabas, on the east by the sea, and on the west by Cavite and Manila. The area is 684 square miles and the population 177,000. It is a very broken country, covered with mountains ; the valleys are watered by rivers and streams, in one of which is the cascade of Batacan, 500 feet high by 90 wide. Though the climate is very salubrious, fevers prevail during the rainy season, owing to the swamps formed by the rivers when unusually high. The principal peaks are Bana- jao, about 6,000 feet, and Maquilin, about 3,500 feet. The Bay lagoon (laguna), from which the province takes its name, is a small fresh-water sea from 105 to 108 miles in circumfer- ence, with the island of Talin in the middle. The coast towns communicate with Manila by means of sail and steam boats, which facilitate the exportation of its rich products. The ter- ritory is divided into 28 pueblos and 404 barrios. The capital is Santa Cruz, with a population of 13,141. It is situated 48 miles from Manila and is celebrated for its markets. Highroads lead to Batangas, Cavite, Manila, and the Province of Tayabas. It has fine buildings and was the residence of the alcalde mayor, prOmotor fiscal, the chief of the command of the gendarmery, and a number of public functionaries. CITIES AND TOWNS. Alaminos.— Population, 4, GOO; situated 17 miles from Santa Cruz. Bauos (Los). — Population, 2,750; situated 65 miles from Santa Cruz. Bay. — Population, 1,796; situated 15 miles from Santa Cruz. Binan.— Population, 19,786; situated 41 miles from Santa Cruz. It has highroads leading to Manila via Santa Cruz, to Cavite, and to the neighboring cities. Cab uyao.— Population, 8,888 ; situated 34 miles from Santa Cruz. Calamba.— Population, 11,476; situated 27 miles from Santa Cruz. It has highroads to Batangas, Cabuyao, and Los Baiios, and a telegraj)h station. Calauang.— Population, 3,107; situated 15 miles from Santa Cruz. 124 LAGUNA PROVINCE. Cavinti. — Population, 5,515; situated 9 miles from Santa Cruz. Lilio. — Population, 5,000; situated 13 miles from Santa Cruz. Liongos.^ — Population, 1,413; situated 4| miles from Santa Cruz. Luisiana. — Population, 3,802; situated 13 miles from Santa Cruz. Liumbang.— Population, 4,293; situated 1 mile from Santa Cruz. Magdalena. — Population, 2,352; situated 7 miles from Santa Cruz. . It lias highroads leading to Santa Cruz, Majay- jay, Lilio, and Nagcarlan. Majayjay. — Population, 0,528. Mavitac. — Population, 1,431 ; situated 25 miles from Santa Cruz. Nagcarlang. — Population, 12,976; situated 9 miles from Santa Cruz. Paete. — Population, 2,887; situated 5 miles from Santa Cruz. It has a highroad to the capital. Pagsajan. — Population, 6,327 ; situated 4 miles from Santa Cruz. It has highroads leading to Santa Cruz, Magdalena, and Lumban. Panjil. — Population, 2,459; situated 10 miles from Santa Cruz. Paquil. — Pojjulation, 1,719; situated 9 miles from Santa Cruz. It has highroads leading to Paete and Panjil. Pila. — Population, 5,987; situated 6 miles from Santa Cruz. San Antonio. — Population, 1,649; situated 9 miles from Santa Cruz. San Pablo. — Population, 19,537; situated 10 miles froln Santa Cruz. It has a number of highroads. San Pedro Tunasan. — Population, 3,700; situated 43 miles from Santa Cruz. Santa Maria. — Population, 840; situated 24 miles from Santa Cruz. Santa Rosa. — Population, 9,434; situated 29 miles from Santa Cruz. Siniloan. — Population, 5,659; situated 15 miles from Santa Cruz. LEPANTO PROVINCE. 125 PROVINCE OF LEPANTO. Situated in the district of tlie Igorrotes, it is bounded on the east by Bontoc, on tlie iiortli by Abra, on the west by Tiagan, and on the south by Benguet. The area is 835 square miles and the popuhition 10,422. The capital is Cervantes, with a poi)ulation of '.148. It is also the capital of tlie district of Cayan, and is situated 261 miles from Manila. CITIES AND TOWNS. Augaqui. — Pojjulation, 01)7; situated 13 miles from Cer- vantes. Baguen. — Population, 352. Balagua. — Population, 299; situated 9 miles from Cer- vantes. Banaas. — Population, 3T5; situated 17 miles from Cer- vantes. Banco. — ^Population, 37 ; situated 8 miles from Cervantes. Banguitau. — Population, 181. Besao. — Population, 660 ; situated 18 miles from Cervantes. Bonguen. — Population, 1,112; situated 11 miles from Cer- vantes. Cadananan. — Population, 488; situated 10 miles from Cervantes. Cagubatan. — Population, 114 ; situated 9 miles from Cer- vantes. Cayan. — Population, 650 ; situated 6 miles from Cervantes. There is a highway to Bontoc. Dagnian. — Population, 354. Dain. — Population, 500; situated 2 miles from Cervantes. Data.— Population, 471. Gayan. — Population, 181 ; situated 19 miles from Cer- -vantes. Guinzadan.— Population, 762 ; situated 8 miles from Cer- vantes. Ibanao. — Population, 318. Lenga. — Population, 200 ; situated 8 miles from Cervantes. Lessep. — Population, 263. Liubon. — Population, 700; situated 10 miles from Cer- vantes. It has a highroad to Bontoc. Liuyue. — Population, 750; situated 15 miles from Cer- vantes. 126 MORONG PROVINCE. Magneymey.— Population, 118. Malaya. — Population, 084; situated 8 miles from Cer- vantes. Mansiqui.— Population, 170; situated IT miles from Cer- vantes. Masla. — Population, 530; situated 11 miles from Cervantes, It lias a highroad to Bontoc. Maylec. — Population, 104. Namatec. — Population, 265; situated 10 miles from Cer- vantes. Namipil. — Population, 005; situated 9 miles from Cer- vantes. Navosen. — Population, 344; situated 5 miles from Cer- vantes. Otucan.— Population, 381. Pandaya. — Population, 369; situated 9 miles from Cer- vantes. Pilipil. — Population, 246 ; situated 7 miles from Cervantes. Pingat. — Population, 914; situated 15 miles from Cer- vantes. Quinali. — Population, 138; situated 13 miles from Cer- vantes. Sabangan. — Population, 700; situated 17 miles from Cer- vantes. Silipil. — Population, 633. Suinadell. — Population, 550; situated 13 miles from Cer- vantes. Suyoc. — Population, 750; situated 15 miles from Cervantes. Tacbac. — Population, 502; situated 14 miles from Cer- vantes. Tadian. — Population, 450. Tuboc. — Population, 1,107; situated 11 miles from Cer- vantes. XJlulin. — Population, 271 ; situated 4 miles from Cervantes. Vila. — Population, 241. PROVINCE OF MORONG. It is bounded on the north by Bulacan, on the south by the Lagima de Bay, on the east by La Infanta, and on the west by Manila. The area is 422 square miles and the population 42,800. The province is in a mountainous country abound- ing in stone quarries, banks of jasperated marble, and gold beds. Much rice and suffar cane is raised. NUEVA ECIJA PROVINCE. 127 The capital is Morong, witli a population of 9,430. It is situated 38 miles from Manila, lias a telegraph station, and was the residence of the politico-military commander. CITIES AND TOWNS. Angono. — Population, 1,955; situated 16 miles from Mo- rong-. Antipole. — Population, 3,500; situated 8 miles from Mo- rong. There are highways to Taytay and Cruz. Baras. — Population, 1,217; situated 2 miles from Morong. Binangonan. — Population, 7,624; situated 11 miles from Morong. Bosoboso, — Population, 855; situated 10 miles from Mo- rong. Cainta. — Population, 2,275; situated 9 miles from Morong. Car dona. — Population, 2,641 ; situated 3 miles from Morong. Jalajala. — Population, 1,735; situated 21 miles from Mo- rong. Pililla. — Population, 2,000; situated 6 miles from Morong. Tanay. — Population, 4,529; situated 4 miles from Morong. Taytay. — Population, 6,800; situated 13 miles from Morong. Teresa. — Population, 4,250; situated 3 miles from Morong. PROVINCE OF NUEVA ECIJA. Situated to the north of Manila, it is bounded on the north by Nueva Vizcaya, on the south by Bulacan, on the east by the Pacific Ocean, and on the west by Pampanga and Pan- gasinan. The area is 3,462 square miles, and the population 155,000. This province corresponds to the bishopric of Nueva Segovia ; it is swept by strong winds the greater part of the year, so that it is impossible to approach its coast without danger. It has a healthful and agreeable climate. The prin- cipal industry is cattle raising. Where the winds do not strike there are very thick woods, in which large and small game finds shelter ; rice, sugar, and much tobacco are raised in the plains. The province is divided into 22 pueblos, 87 barrios or visitas, and many rancherias of infieles (infidels), who for the most part neither pay tribute nor have any rela- tions with the Christian pueblos, so that their number is un- known. The capital is San Isidro, with a population of 7,056. It is situated some 69 miles from Manila. It has a telegraph 128 NUEVA ECU A PROVINCE. station and was the residence of tlie judge and a number of administration, treasury, and fomento officials. CITIES AND TOWNS. Aliaga. — Population, 17,000; situated 16 miles from San Isidro. Balung-ao. — Population, 0,848; situated 41 miles from San Isidro. Bongabon. — -Population, •■^,117; situated 32 miles from San Isidro. It lias a telegraph station. Cabanatuan.— Population, 12,000; situated 16 miles from San Isidro. It has a telegraph station, and there is a highway to the toAvns of Bongabong, Talavera, and Aliaga. Cabiao. — Population, 7,924; situated 5 miles from San Isidro. Carranglan. — Population, 937; situated 63 miles from San Isidro. Cuyapo. Population, 0,350; situated 36 miles from San Isidro. Gapan. — Population, 20,216; situated 4 miles from San Isidro. Jaen. — Population, 4,651; situated 1 mile from San Isidro. liupao. — Population, 608. Mampicuam. — Population, 3,241; situated 34 miles from San Isidro. Penaranda. — Population, 7,700; situated 2 miles from San Isidro. Pontabangan. — Population, 1,513; situated 41 miles from San Isidro. It has a telegraph station. Puncan. — Population, 501 ; situated 52 miles from San Isidro. Resales. — Population, 11,519; situated 38 miles from San Isidro. It has highroads to Manila and Ilocos and another transverse one through the province. San Antonio. — Population, 7,269; situated 3 miles from San Isidro. San Jose. — Population, 852; situated 42 miles from San Isidro. San Juan de Guimba. — Population, 2,904. San Q,uintin. — Population, 6,852; situated 55 miles from San Isidro. NUEVA VIZCAYA AND PAMPANGA. 129 Santa Rosa. — Popuhition, 4,324:; situated 59 miles from San Isidro. Santor. — Populati(jn, 2,921; situated 34 miles from San Isidrt). Talavera. — Population, 2,720; situated 44 miles from San Isidro. Umingan. — Population, 5,848; situated 53 miles from San Isidro. Zaragoza. — Poi)ulation, 5,250; situated 10 miles from San Isidro. PROVINCE OF NUEVA VIZCAYA. It is situated in the central part, nortli of Manila and Caba- lesian, between the beginning of three principal mountain ranges and the great Cagayan River, west of the District of Principe. Surrounded by high mountains, a large valley is formed where much rice and tobacco are grown; many domestic animals are raised in the mountains. The popula- tion is 23,511. There are good highways passing through all of the eight pueblos into which the province is divided. The capital is Bayombong, with a population of 3,691. It is situated 106 miles from Manila. CITIES AND TOWNS. Aritao. — Population, 700; situated 13 miles from Bayom- bong. Bagabag. — Population, 1,915; situated 13 miles from Bay- ombong. Bambang. — Population, -3, 387; situated 7 miles from Bay- ombong. Diadi. — Population, 109; situated 22 miles from Bayom- bong. Dupax. — Population,. 2,229; situated 17 miles from Bay- ombong. Ibung. — Population, 977; situated 11 miles from Bayom- bong. Solano. — Population,' 4, 190; situated 3 miles from Bayom- bong. PROVINCE OF PAMPANGA. Situated to the nortli of Manila, it is bounded on the north by Tarlac, on the south by the Bay of Manila, on the east by Nueva Ecija and Bulacan, and on the west by Zambales and 130 PAMPANGA PROVINCE. Bataau. The area is 787 square miles, and the popuhxtion 250,000, distributed among 22 pueblos and 329 barrios. It is divided into High and Low Pampanga, the former part being the more thickly populated, producing in abundance sugar cane, rice, indigo, tobacco, lentils, etc, ; there are many sugar mills, and the manufacture of hats is highly developed. There is a great abundance of buffalo, deer, and wild boars ; it has extensive and thick forests, inhabited by certain races of infieles. The capital is Bacolor, with a population of 10,«-12. It is situated 47 miles from Manila, and has a good wagon road to the capital of the island, although communication is generally by sea. The city has a telegraph and railway station, and was the residence of the mayor and judge and a number of jus- tice, treasury, and fomento officials. CITIES AND TOWNS. Angeles. — Population, 3,000, the township having 10,495; situated 11 miles from Bacolor. Apalit. — Population, 11, 753 ; situated 11 miles from Bacolor. Arayat. — Population, 14,014; situated 10 miles from Bacolor. Betis. — Population, 4,460; situated 2 miles from Bacolor. Candaba. — Population, 14,585; situated 20 miles from Bacolor. Florida Blanca. — Population, 7,; situated 28 miles from Lingayen. Urbistondo.— Population, 5,182; situated 10 miles from Lingayen. Urdaneta. — Population, 1G,58S; situated 27 miles from Lingayen. Villasis. — Population, 11,968; situated 28 miles from Lingayen. PROVINCE OF EL PRINCIPE. A military province depending in civil matters on Nueva Ecija, it is situated on tlie east coast of the island, between the eastern slopes to the south of the Sierra Madre, the Bay of Casiguran, and the Dibut Cove. The country -is covered ■with inaccessible mountains, grown over with luxuriant veg- etation and peopled by the race of Ilongotes, who, while ex- ceedingly cowardly, are fierce and bloody. The only things raised are abaca and palay, the inhabitants not cultivating this fertile soil owing to a lack of outlet for products. The area is 478 square miles and the population 5,000. The capital is Baler, with a population of 1,911. It is sit- uated at a distance of 112 miles from Manila^ and was the resi- dence of the governor and a number of the gendarmery. In order to communicate with Manila it is necessary to go to Bomgabong by horseback or in a hammock carriage, making a laborious journey of three days, during which neither shelter nor provisions can be found. From Bomgabong to Manila one can go in a carriage, crossing the territories of Nueva Ecija and Bulacan. CITIES AND TOWNS. Casignan. — Population, 207 ; situated 9 miles from Baler. Casiguran. — Population, 1,527; situated 9 miles from Baler. DISTRICT OF QUIANGAN. Situated in the northern part of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by Bontoc, on the south by Nueva Vizcaya, on the east by Nueva Vizcaya and Isabela, and on the west by Lepanto. The area is 303 square miles and the population 29,800. The capital is Q,uiangan, situated 155 miles from Manila. 134 TAKLAC AND TAYABAS. PROVINCE OF TARLAC. It is bounded on the west by the Province of Zambales, on the south by Pampanga, on the east by Nueva Ecija, and on the north by Pangasinan. Tlie area is 1,100 square miles, and the population is 115,000. The capital is Tarlac, with a population of 9,608. It is situated 73 miles from Manila, and has a telegraph station. CITIES AND TOWNS. Anao. — Population, 7,000; situated 17 miles from Tarlac. Banban.— Population, 3,196; situated 16 miles from Tarlac. Camilig.— Population, 23,410 ; situated 16 miles from Tarlac. Capas. — Population, 2,925; situated 11 miles from Tarlac. There is a railway from Manila to Tarlac. Concepcion. — Population, 13,499; situated 10 miles from Tarhic. Gerona. — Population, 9,261; situated 9 miles from Tarlac. Moncada. — Poj)ulation, 7,6()1; situated 18 miles from Tarlac. Moriones. — Popidation, 1,289; situated 3 miles from Tai-lac. Murcia. — Situated 6^ miles from Tarlac. O'Donnell. — Population, 1,988; situated 14 miles from Capas. It has a post office. Paniqui.— Population, 8,712 ; situated 14 miles from Tarlac. La Paz. — Population, 2,805; situated 9 miles from Tarlac. Pura. — Population, 5,255; situated 12 miles from Tarlac. San Clemente.-— Population, 1,875; situated 21 miles from Tarlac. Santa Ignacia. — Population, 1,374; sitimted 14 miles from Tarlac. There is a highroad to Manila. Victoria.— Population, 10,362; situated 7 miles from Tarlac. PROVINCE OF TAYABAS. Situated to the southeast of Manila, it is boiinded on the north by Laguna, on the south by the sea of Mindoro, on the east by Camarines Norte, and on the west by Batangas Prov- ince, The area is 1,919 square miles, and the population 105,576. It has easy communication with Manila by way of the coast of Batangas and Cavite, through the interior of TAYABAS PROVINCE. 135 Laguiia, and by the Pasig River. The country is very nioiin- taiaous, the principal base being Mount Ma jay jay, a strategic point of much importance. All the grains of the country are grown in its fields and valleys, and much stock is raised. Industry is quite advanced, cigar cases, hats, and various fabrics being made. The inhabitants occupy 22 pueblos and 373 visit as or barrios. The capital is Tayabas, with a population of 15,000. It is situated 91 miles from Manila, in a fiat country on the river of its name, and on the southern slopes of the Majayjay Moun- tains. There are dockyards in which good vessels are con- structed. It was the residence of the alcalde mayor, promotor fiscal, and a number of officials of the treasury, fomento, etc. CITIES AND TOWNS. Atimonan. — Population, 10,000; situated 194- miles from Tayabas. There is a highway to Gumaco and a telegraph station. Calauag. — Population, 2,813; situated 57 miles from Tay- abas. Candelaria. — Population, 3,234; situated 4 miles from Tayabas. Catanauan. — Population, 4,000; situated 60 miles from Tayabas. Dolores.— Population, 2,571; situated 8 miles from Tay- abas. There are highroads to Tiaon and San Pablo. Guinayangan.— Population, 2,000; situated 70 miles from Tayabas. It has a ward called Catimo, where there is a tele- graph station. Gumaca. — Population, 7,571; situated 90 miles from Tay- abas. Lopez. — Population, 0,412; situated 324- miles from Tay- abas. Lucban.— Population, 12,755; situated 8 miles from Tay- abas. There are highroads to Alfonso XII, Majayjay, and Mamban. Lucena. — Population, 7,000 ; situated 8 miles from Tayabas. Macalelon.— Population, 3,000; situated 70 miles from Tayabas. Mauban.— Population, 9,2<)8; situated 32 miles from Tay- abas. Mulauay.— Population, 325. 136 TIA(}AX AND LA UNION. Pagbilao. — Population, 5,750; situated (i| miles from Tay- abas. Pitogo. — Population, 3,011 ; situated i)3 miles from Tayabas. San Narciso. — Population, 1,087; situated 372 miles from Tayal)as. Sariava. — Pcjpulation, (i, iiGO ; situated G miles from Tayabas. Tiaon. — Population, 0,050 ; situated 20 miles from Tayabas. Unisan. — Population, 3,155; situated 24 miles from Tay- abas. DISTRICT OF TIAGAN. Situated in the northern part of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by Abra, on the south by Amburayan, on the east by Lepanto, and on the west by Ilocos Sur. The population is 3,041. The capital is San Emilio, with a population of 109. It is situated 323 miles from Manila. CITIES AND TOWNS. Amamasan. — Population, 283. Baan. — Population, 030. Buduy an. — Population, 2 70. Bug-ui. — Population, 282. Concepcion. — Population, 353. Lanenas. — Population, 285. Limpa. — Population, 556. Ligney. — Population, 509. Matbo. — Population, 472. Paltoc. — Population, 770; situated 5 miles from San Emilio. Paspasaqui. — Population, 312. Sanz.— Population, 400. Tobalina. — Population, 548. Vito. — Population, 258. PROVINCE OF LA UNION. Situated to the north of Manila, it is bounded on the north by the Province of Ilocos Sur, on the east by those of Abra and Lepanto, on the south by Pangasinan, and on the west by the China Sea. It is 52 miles long by 174- wide. The area is 741 square miles, and the population 119,421, distributed among 13 pueblos, 278 visitas, and 45 rancherias of subdued ZAMBALES PROVINCE. 137 infieles. Much rice, maize, tobacco, sugar cane, etc., is grown, and gold is gathered in the river sands, but it is of poor quality. The capital is San Fernando, with a population of 12,892. It is situated 171 miles from Manila, with which it comuni- cates by wagon road, and from thence to Loasang by a pike which traverses the provinces of Pangasinan, Pampanga, and Bulacan. It was the residence of the governor and of a number of public functionaries. There is a post office and telegraph station. CITIES AND TOWNS. Agoo.— Population, 10,150; situated 19 miles from San Fernando. Aringay. — Population, 3,044; situated 14 miles from San Fernando. It has a telegraph station. Bagnotan. — Population, 6,555; situated 9 miles from San Fernando. Balauang. — Population, 12,242 ; situated 22 miles from San Fernando. Bangar.— Population, 9,000; sitnated 24 miles from San Fernando. Bauang. — Poimlation, 7,701; situated G miles from San Fernando. Gaba. — Population, 4,1G4; situated 12 miles from San Fernando. Naguilian. — Population, 10,405; situated 11 miles from San Fernando. Namacpacan. — Population, 8,630; sitnated 19 miles from San Fernando. It has the following outlying towns : Cabalito, Oaqui, Cantoria, and Puerto de Darigayos. Rosario.— Population, 2,246; situated 29 miles from San Fernando San Juan. — Population, 10,211; situated 5 miles from San Fernando. Santo Tomas.— Population, 6,481; situated 26 miles from San Fernando. It has highroads to the neighboring towns. PROVINCE OF ZAMBALES. Situated in the southern part of the island of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by the Gulf of Lingayen and the Prov- ince of Pangasinan ; on the east by tlie Provinces of Tarlac, Pampanga, and Bataan ; on the south by Bataan, and on the 138 ZAMBALES PROVINCE. west by the China Sea. The area is l,G-i7 square miles, and the population 87,G41, distributed among 23 pueblos, 70 bar- rios, and 7 rancherias of subdued infieles. The mountains of this province are covered with timber forests, which are inhabited by various tribes of fierce savages and abound in game. Products of the mountains are wax and honey, while in the remainder of the territory cane, indigo, vegetables, cacao, and rice are grown. The capital is Iba, with a population of 3,512. It is situ- ated 122 miles from Manila, has a good casa real, casa de la comunidad, courthouse, church, meeting hall, and parish house, and was the residence of the mayor and judge and a number of functionaries. It has a post office and telegraph station. CITIES AND TOWNS. Agno. — Population, 5,002; situated 75 miles from Iba. Alaminos.— Population, 8,008; situated 82 miles from Iba. It has a telegraph station. Alos. — Population, 894 ; situated 64 miles from Iba. It has a highroad to Balincaguing and Alaminos. Anda. — Population, 3,761; situated 94 miles from Iba, on the island of Cabarroyan. It has highroads to Alaminos and Bolinceo. Balincaguing.— Population, 2,378; situated 52 miles from Iba. It has highroads in good condition. Bani. — Population, 4,295; situated 60 miles from Iba. Bolinao (ch. 3, p. 41).— Population, 4,075; situated 103 miles from Iba. The municipal district is formed of 13 islands. There is a meteorologic and semaphoric station, a submarine cable, and a dockyard for coast vessels. Botolan. — Population, 4,566; situated 4 miles from Iba. Cabangan. — Population, 2,798; situated 7 miles from Iba. Candelaria. — Population, 2,865 ; situated 22 miles from Iba. Castillejos. — Population, 3,357; situated 33 miles from Iba. Dasol. — Population, 2,404; situated 49 miles from Iba. Infanta. — Population, 3,445; situated 44 miles from Iba. Masinloc. — Population, 2,945; situated 19 miles from Iba. There are highroads to Candelaria and Palauig. Palauig. — Population, 2,584; situated 13 miles from Iba. San Antonio. — Population, 4,988; situated 22 miles from Iba. There are highroads to San Narciso, San Marcelino, and San Miiruel. ZAMBALES PROVINCE. 139 San Felipe. — Population, 4,205; situated 19 miles fromlba. San Isidro. — Population, 2,803; situated 38 miles from Iba, San Marcelino. — Population, 4,043; situated 29 miles from Iba. San Narciso. — Population, 7,255; situated 23 miles from Iba. There are three highroads — one to San Antonio, one to San Felipe, and one to San Marcelino. Santa Cruz. — Population, 4,594; situated 38 miles from Iba. Sarapsap. — Population, 7, 142 ; situated 82 miles from Iba. Subic. — Population, 3,016; situated 38 miles from Iba. DINAGAT I. F©KT GlEO 5,»vfv«/ u„rf»- Ik. ,Ur^,ium, at- CAPTAm CLAUDIO MONTERO Spanish Nmy 1864 UPCabaUeu-La . 9? 53: bS. L--^. * IB c;^* -> ' ?•"? 23 IB ^ V •\:.^ "):?; .If J. ^ ..,*' o_ .^^^ 5 _^_ lO "^"Cabk, u,' 1 Sea mfle ~^ ISLAND OF MINDANAO. By decree of July 30, ISr.O, tlie territorial division of this island was definitely established, and a civico-military gov- ernment, under the denomination of Mindanao and adjacent islands, was created. It is divided into 8 districts. The island is situated between Visayas on the north and Borneo on the south ; it is bounded on the east by the Pacific Ocean, and on the west by the island of Paragua, the Strait of Balabac, and Borneo. The area is 16,595 square miles, and the popu- lation 611,300, of which 211,000 are Christians and the rest Mohammedans and Pagans. It is very extensive and irregu- lar in form, possessing high and extended mountain chains which have not been entirely explored, and which are grown over with very rich woods. It is inhabited almost throughout the interior by savages. Its rivers, some of great volume, empty into the sea, as follows : On the north coast and Butuan Bay, the Jabonga and Butuan; on the Macajalar coast, the Cagayan; in Eligan Bay, the Malanao and others of minor importance ; in the cove of Dapitan, the Palaven ; and on the rest of the coast mentioned creeks and riA^ers of regular vol- ume abound, as well as on the remaining coasts, except the Rio Grande de Mindanao (ch. 11, p. 116), which empties to the east of the great Bay of Illana. ITINERARY OF COAST OF MINDANAO — NORTHEAST COAST. From the east point of Bilambilam Bay the coast trends almost SE. by E. for 30 miles, forming a slight indentation, to Point Tugus ; the shore is covered by mangroves and strewn with rocks. The Ginatuan Islands extend to about 9 miles from the coast in a northeasterly direction, leaving a deep channel 2-^ miles wide between them and the south coast of Dinagat (ch. 12, p. 141). Ginatuan Island, the largest of the group, is 3 miles long, NW. and SE., and has a small islet off its northern point ; both island and islet are clean and steep-to ; Bayalnan (Baya- tuan), the next island to the southeast, is 34- miles long, NW. and SE. ; a reef on its northern end extends 1 mile to the NE., (141) 1 Sea mile ISLAND OF MINDANAO. By decree of July 30, 1800, the territorial division of this island was definitely established, and a civico-military gov- ernment, under the denomination of Mindanao and adjacent islands, was created. It is divided into 8 districts. The island is situated between Visayas on the north and Borneo on the south ; it is bounded on the east by the Pacific Ocean, and on the west by the island of Paragua, the Strait of Balabac, and Borneo. The area is 16,595 square miles, and the popu- lation 611,300, of which 211,000 are Christians and the rest Mohammedans and Pagans. It is very extensive and irregu- lar in form, possessing high and extended mountain chains which have not been entirely explored, and which are grown over with very rich woods. It is inhabited almost throughout the interior by savages. Its rivers, some of great volume, empty into the sea, as follows : On the north coast and Butuan Bay, the Jabonga and Butuan; on the Macajalar coast, the Cagayan; in Eligan Bay, the Malanao and others of minor importance ; in the cove of Dapitan, the Palaven ; and on the rest of the coast mentioned creeks and rivers of regular vol- ume abound, as well as on the remaining coasts, except the Rio Grande de Mindanao (ch. 11, p. 110), which empties to the east of the great Bay of Illana. ITINERARY OP COAST OF MINDANAO — NORTHEAST COAST. From the east point of Bilambilam Bay the coast trends almost SE. by E. for 30 miles, forming a slight indentation, to Point Tugus ; the shore is covered by mangroves and strewn with rocks. The Ginatuan Islands, extend to about 9 miles from the coast in a northeasterly direction, leaving a deep channel 2^ miles wide between them and the south coast of Dinagat (ch. 12, p. 141). Ginatuan Island, the largest of the group, is 3 miles long, NW. and SE., and has a small islet off its northern point ; both island and islet are clean and steep-to ; Bayalnan (Baya- tnan), the next island to the southeast, is 3^ miles long, NW. and SE. ; a reef on its northern end extends 1 mile to the NE., (141) 1-1-2 MINDANAO — NOKTHEAST COAST. inclosing- several rocks under water. The channel between Ginatuan and Bayalnan is H miles wide; but some islets on the southern end reduce the available passage to a width of 4 cables. This channel is practicable for steamers, but the pas- sage between the western islands of the grouj) and the coast of Mindanao are not practicable. Kabsugan, the southernmost island, is 4| miles long, NW. and SE., and is united to the coast. Nagubat Islets are two rocks, clean and steep-to, lying 7 miles south of the summit of Ginatuan Island. Kabgan Island lies 24 miles south of Nagubat Islets, and 1 mile from the coast of Mindanao. A group of four rocks lies 2^ miles SE. of Kabagan. Nangaba Islands, close to Tagonito Point, form a chain of eight islets extending 4i miles WNW. and ESE. The south- ern islet, Amagadpagat, lies nearly in the middle of the chan- nel between the coast and the south point of Bukas Island (ch. 45, p. 254). Tugus Point is a narrow tongue of land stretching 2 miles to the NE. The channel between it and Bukas Island is 4^ miles wide, and has a depth of 41 fathoms in the middle. The land in the vicinity is commanded by Mount Legaspi, 3,889 feet high, at the northern end of the great range that runs parallel to the east coast of Mindanao. Ballena (Whale) Rock, 6f miles east of Tugus Point, when seen from the northward, appears like two rocks ; it is 5 yards in extent and 5 feet above water ; a reef extends -j mile S W. of the rock. General Island is the largest and highest of a group consist- ing of three islands and several rocks lying off Kapunuipugan Point, 5 miles SE. of Point Tugus. It is sei3arated from the point by a deep and narrow channel, and is surrounded by a reef which shows several rocks above water, and includes Triton Rocks and Anki Islet, 2 miles to the SE. There is anchorage SW. of the island near the shore in 17 fathoms, mud. Unamao, 2 miles south of the General, is united to the coast by a reef ; between the two islands is an isolated rocky shoal. Kantilan Reef, before the river and town of the same name, 5 miles south of Point Kapunuipugan, extends 2 miles from the shore ; the end of the reef is in line with Unamao Islet and Point Kapunuipugan. MINDANAO — NORTHEAST COAST. 143 Kauit Point, -^0 miles SE. by E. of Tugus Point, is clean and steep-to to the northward and westward, but bordered to the eastward by a reef that reaches out for 1| miles to seaward, and continues along the coast to the southward for 10 miles. The open bay between the General Islands and Kauit Point has not been sounded, but it appears to be clean and deep. Tides. — The ebb stream from Surigao Strait is said to fol- low round Kauit Point to the southward. BuKAS Islands are three islands so close together as almost to form one island, but they are separated by narrow open- ings in the reefs that surround them. The southern island, or Great Bukas, is irregular in outline, about 12 miles long, north and south, and traversed throughout its length by a range of hills. Its coast on all sides, except the northeastern, where it is joined to the middle island, is clean. A shoal of white coral lies east by north of the north point of this island. There are soundings of 11 to 18 fathoms about 1 mile from the southwest coast, in the channel between the island and Tugus Point. The middle Bukas island is 3 miles across from north to south, and 2 miles from east to west, and is surrounded by a coral reef. A conical hill, 984 feet high, rises on the south- east part. The eastern island is 3 miles long, east and west, and 1^ miles wide, north and south, and is surrounded by a reef which projects 2 miles to the SE., and incloses the islet Kasulian ; the reef is steep-to and shows several rocky heads above water. SibongaPort (ch. 45, p. 254), on the south side of the middle island at the foot of the conical hill, is divided into two narrow arms by an islet united to the south point of the island by a reef that borders the shore. The depth of water in the western arm is 9 to 18 fathoms, sand and rock; in the eastern arm it is 4-|- to 9 fathoms. This latter arm communi- cates with Port Castilla, on the north side of the island, by a channel 15 yards wide and 5 feet deep, which forms the sep- aration between the middle and eastern island. Port Castilla, between the reefs on the north sides of the middle and eastern Bukas islands, is open to the northward by a narrow passage between the reefs ; it is a little oval- shaped port of 6 cables greatest diameter and 3 cables across, with 8 fathoms depth. 144 .AlIXDAXAU — NORTHEAST COAST. Reef. — A narrow reef extending 8 miles NE. and SW., wliicli dries in places, lies 3 miles SE. of the eastern Bukas island. The northern extremity of it is separated from the southeast reef of Siargao Island by a passage \\ miles wide, and the southern extremity is separated from the east coast of the southern Bukas by a i^assage 2 miles wide. These pas- sages, as also that between the reef and Kasulian Islet, are safe and deep. Lajanosa and Anajauan islands are tw^o islands lying south of Siargao Island and east of the southern Bukas island. They are two miles apart, and surrounded by reefs ; some rocks lie H miles south of Lajanosa. The passage between Lajanosa and the reef SE. of Siargcio is 4 miles wide and 18 to 23 fathoms deep. Siargao Island is irregular in outline, 19 miles long, north and south, with 1 2 miles greatest width at the southern part, and is traversed throughout its length by a chain of mountains. The northern and northwestern coast is surrounded by an extensive reef to a distance of 3 miles from the shore, and from the southeast jDart of the island another reef projects to a distance of 4 miles, inclosing the islets Guiang (Guinjang) and Dako. On the coasts there are a few towns and little ports entered by channels through the reefs. On the western coast, between ports Sapao and Kakut, there is a grouj) of low islands on a reef, and several rocks show at various points on the edge of the reef. Port Pilar, on the east coast of Siargao, is a small circular port of G cables diameter, steep-sided, with a large rock on the southern side united to the coast by a reef; the anchorage is west of this rock in 8 to 14 fathoms. Dapa Channel, between Siargao and Bukas Island, is safe and deep ; its least width, between the island off Point Kam- basak, the south point of Siargao, and the north coast of East Bukas, is 1 cable ; the reefs on both sides are distinctly visible. Kiko and Barrabas shoals lie in the middle of the western entrance. The first is 1 cable and the other 1^ cables in diam- eter ; they are steep-to and can be passed on either side. The reef off the north point of Great Bukas Island has already been mentioned. Dapa Reef extends to 1^ miles east by south from Kambasak Point. On the reef and close to the point there is an island MINDANAO — NORTHEAST COAST. 145 G cables long; an opening in the reef, 3 to 5^ fathoms d(3ep, leads to the anchorage at Dapa. A detached bank surrounded by deep water lies 2h cables east of Dapa Reef. Dapa Anchorage is in a narrow channel between the north- ern edge of Dapa Reef and the shore reef of Siargao ; it has a depth of 31 fathoms before the town of Dapa. Neither pilots nor supplies are obtainable. The inlet NW. of Dapa is obstructed by reefs, and only fit for boat navigation. Port Kakub, on the southwest coast of Siargao, is only | cable wide at the entrance and 3i to 12 fathoms deep. There is anchorage before the entrance in 7 fathoms. The coast between Dapa Inlet and Kakub is a mass of rock, dry at low water. Port SajDao, on the northwest coast, is formed by an open- ing in the reef and is of no importance. Jalian Island, 5i miles N. 60° E. of Port Gabo (ch. 12, p. 141) in Dinagat Island, is surrounded by a reef which extends 2 miles to the ENE. ; the eastern edge of this reef is 2-j miles distant from the western edge of the northwestern reef of Siargao, Tides. — In Port Kakub there are two high tides and two low tides in each lunar day. The height of the tide is affected by diurnal inequality, which varies with the moon's declination. In the summer the day tide is the highest and in the winter the night tide. It is high water, full and change, at Oh. 22m. The greatest range is 7 feet and the least is 5 feet. Tidal streams. — In Surigao Strait the flood tide sets to the west, and the ebb to the east; the latter, following round Point Kauit, then runs to the southward. The velocity of the stream in the strait reaches 6 knots at springs. There is a difference of about two hours between the time of high water at Surigao and in Surigao Strait. Fishermen roughly estimate that when the moon rises the ebb tide commences to run in Surigao Strait. From January to June there is but one high water during the twenty-four h()urs in Surigao Strait, which occurs during the night. From July to December the same phenomenon takes place, but the time of high water is by day. From observations made by the Spanish surveyors, it appears that the highest tide on the west coasts of the islands of the strait takes place at the same' hour as the lowest tide on the east coasts. This phenomenon is especially marked at 146 .MINDANAO — NORTHEAST COAST. the little island Kal)sugaii, SE. of Ginatuaii, the inhabitants of which live by shell-fishing, and when the banks of the east coast begin to cover they pass to the west coast, where the tide begins to fall, and continue their fishing. Eddies. — Between points Surigao and Bilaa a countercur- rent prevails, contrary to the tidal stream in the strait, and between the coast of Mindanao and the islands Dinagat and Siargao a number of eddies prevail in different directions. The pilots of the locality avail themselves of these eddies in navigation. Winds in Surigao Strait. — At the mouth of the strait the northeast monsoon commences toward the end of September, and blows throughout October and November ; in December northeast winds alternate with northerly gales. In January winds blow from NE. and ENE., accompanied by heavy rain. In February and March easterly winds prevail. In April, May, and June the prevailing wind is southeast, with occasional gales called "collas" from the south. In July, August, and September collas from SW. are frequent. The northeast winds, though strong, cease during the night ; but winds from the SE., S., and SW. continue to blow. It generally rains with north-northeast and east-northeast winds ; the rain ceases and the weather clears with east winds, and more so with southeast winds. With southwest winds it remains clear unless a gale arises which sometimes brings rain. In general there is no very bad weather in this part of the archipelago, except when a typhoon occurs. The season of the year when typhoons mostly occur is from the end of Octo- ber to the beginning of January, principally at springs and at the quarterings of the moon, it is said. They begin to blow from NW., and finish from the SE., having passed through NE. or SW. ; when they veer through NE. they blow stronger, and more rain falls. According to Maqueda, in the year 1775 three typhoons occurred in Surigao Strait, and two in 1781, at the crescent and full moon. None have been observed since that time, whilst in the mouth of San Bernardino Strait and on the coast of Luzon several very severe typhoons have been recorded. Directions for the Eastern Passage. — The eastern i)assage between the northeast coast of Mindanao and the islands of Dinagat and Siargao is difficult, and should not be taken by MINDANAO— NORTHEAST COAST. 147 a sailing vessel unless she has the wind and tide in her favor. A pilot should be employed, and the route taken should be as follows: Having made Bilaa Point a vessel can either pass outside the 2f-fathoms shoal north of the point or between it and the point, and she should keep in mid-channel between Basol Island and the coast of Mindanao. When 1 mile south of Basol, she should steer S. 70° E. to pass 1 mile from the rocks that surround Rasa Islet off the south point of Nonok ; then steering ENE. she should pass between Ginatuan Island and Port Gabo, rather approaching the Dinagat shore, which is steep-to, and she will be less exposed to the tidal streams and eddies, which are very violent in this passage. Ginatuan Island should be rounded at a safe distance, and when 1 mile east of the eastern point of the island a course S. 38° E. should be steered for the middle of the channel between Bukas Island and Mindanao, leaving Amadgadpagat Islet 1 mile to star- board; having passed through the channel she can steer east into the Pacific. A steamer can pass between Ginatuan and Bayalnan islands, taking care to avoid the reef off the north point of the last-named island, and leaving to starboard the islet which lies i mile south of the southwest point of Ginatuan. A course S. 49° E. will then lead to the middle of the channel between Bukas and Mindanao. BuTUAN Bay. — The southern shore of this bay, between the river Butuan, which enters the eastern angle, and the town of Nasipit, 13 miles to the westward, is low, covered by mangroves, and bordered by shoal water to a very short dis- tance from it. From Nasipit to Point Diuata, 8 miles to the NNW., the shore is fringed by a reef which extends out ^ mile. Butuan River is one of the most important of Mindanao ; it is supposed to take its rise not far north of Davao Bay, on the southern coast; one of its arms near the mouth communicates with a lake that lies about 14 miles NNE. of the town of Butuan. The two points that form the entrance to the river may be recognized by the forts constructed on them. From the north point a great bank of sand extends more than 14 miles to the westward, and dries at low water. A.ii island with trees upon it, about 40 feet high, divides the mouth of the river into two channels. The navigable channel shifts according to the freshets, carrying from 2 to 2^ fathoms 148 MINDANAO^NORTHEAST COAST. at high- water spring tides ; the current is very strong, and dur- ing the rainy season frequently brings down trunks of trees. A pilot is necessary for entering the river, there heing no marks to denote the channel. Tides. — Only one high water generally occurs during the twenty-four hours, and this by day or night, according to the season. Butuan town is situated on the i-ight bank of the river Butuan, about 18 miles from the mouth, and contains some 2,000 inhabitants, chiefly engaged in working a gold mine in the vicinity. The anchorage is frequented by traders from Port Misamis, and from Cebii, and Mr. Looney remarks that he carried from 3 to 5 fathoms of water between the bar of the river and the town. The water of the river at Butuan is fresh and used for drinking. Supplies of cattle, Digs, poultry, rice, and sago are obtaina- ble. The town of Butuan is celebrated in history as being the place where Magellan landed after his anchorage near Lima- sana Island, and where he celebrated the first mass in the Philippines. Coast. — Diuata Point is low, sandy, and surrounded by a reef which commences about Nasipit, extends out ^ mile from the point, and continues round it to the southward. Sipaka Point can easily be recognized by a conical hill of good height, thinly wooded, and by a watchtower on it ; the shore is clean, steejj-to, with soundings of 55 fathoms close to. In the bay on the east side of the point there is anchorage in 2f and 3^ fathoms, sand and mud, before the mouth of two rivers ; the shores of the bay are low and covered by man- groves. Anchorage may also be had on the west side of the point in 2f fathoms, under the shelter of Kanauagor Islet. Bagakai Point is not very high, and is surrounded by a reef of 2 cables extent, with 5 fathoms near it. The coast between points Sipaka and Bagakai is formed by sandy beaches alter- nate with rocky bluffs and mangrove shores. Camiguin Island (ch. 13, p. 148), lying 5i miles to the north of Point Bagakai in Mindanao, is about 12 miles long, NE, and SW,, and more than 8 miles wide, east and west; it is extremely mountainous and steep, rising to. a central moun- tain of 5,338 feet above the sea, visible 60 miles off. On the northwest part, 2^ miles east of the town and anchorage of Noj:i Scale KAMICUIN I. Liei\t . John M^ Cluer Sea Mile 1 I 1791. HAy.K&C.Vl¥0?^y.r^^ e ft. No I4-. FONDEADERO DE CATARMAN ( IsUC atnicj^xin.. ) (/ XrcAXa dc furoi6Uyo. MS *i SiU.acion del (I-aUW.. .B'-jLU'lV Islole msjTjr 1 IxmyiluJ i-a8.3i E. £Kca]a en miUas MINDANAO — NORTH COAST. 153 edge. Tlie coast between tlie two points is bordered by man- groves, and south of Point Polo near the shore there are two islets surrounded by a reef which extends outward 1 mile. Point Bombon, 6 miles from Point Polo, is low, clean, and steep-to; an intermediate point forms with Point Polo a little bay into which flows the River Tabukan, and where anchor- age may be had sheltered from westerly and southerly winds, Murcielagos Bay, between Point Bombon (ch. 7, p. 07) and Point Silla, is surrounded by a reef which extends to a mile from the sandy shore ; on the west coast, south of Point Silla, there are three islets within the reef, named Murcielagos (ch. 18, p. 153). Point Bombon also has three rocky islets joined to its nortliAvest side, and the reef projects at this part to 1^ miles toward the middle of the bay. There is anchorage in 5-2- fath- oms, mud, near the river which enters the eastern angle of the bay ; everywhere else in the bay there is no bottom with 45 fathoms. Point Silla is of considerable height, and remarkable, as it takes the shape of a saddle ; rocks surround it at not more than a cable's distance. Point Tagolo is not very high, and is surrounded by a nar- row reef; but at 1 cable's distance from it no bottom was found with 36 fathoms. A patch of cogonal on it is visible 20 miles off. Between points Silla and Tagolo there is an intermediate point, Baloi, which is high, rocky, and very rug- ged, its peaks showing most fantastic outlines. The shore from Silla to this point is low and covered with mangroves, with rocks off it ; but from the point to Tagolo it is high and steep. Tides. — The tidal streams are very strong off this part of the coast. The flood makes to the east, and the ebb to the west. Silino Island, which lies N. by E. h, E. 74- miles from Point Tagolo, is about 1^ miles in extent, and low, flat, and wooded, with sandy shores bordered by reefs that do not project far. Alikai Island, lying W. .^ N. 8 miles from Point Tagolo, is more than 3 miles long from east to west, and 1 mile wide ; it is also low, flat, and wooded, with sandy shores, and bor- dered by reefs of no great extent. Dapitan Bay, contained between Point Tagolo to the north and Point Sikayak to the south, is sheltered from all winds but westerly ones. The depth at the entrance is 17 fathoms 154 MINDANAO — NORTHWEST COAST. and 4:^ fathoms at the anchorage before the town. The little port of Talaguilong is in the northern part of the bay. The northern coast of the bay is high; Point Tubud (Tugod), at 1^ miles south of Point Tagolo, is remarkable for having over it a remarkable, isolated, conical hill covered by cogan; a reef which uncovers at low water lies west 3 cables of the point, and the shore between it and Point Tagolo is foul. Light. — On Point Tubud a fixed red light is exhibited, raised 43 feet above the sea, and visible in clear weather from a distance of 11 miles through an arc of 2134-° between the bearings S. and N. 334-° W. The light-house, 23 feet high, is of iron, painted white. Port Talaguilong is nearly circular in form, 7 cables in diameter, completely shut in, and very convenient for vessels of all sizes; the depth of water is from 5^ to 8 fathoms, mud; a narrow steep reef lines the shores ; the entrance passage is li cables wide between the reefs, and 9 fathoms deep. Dapitan River and Town. — The bar of the river has very little water on it at low water ; lanchas can enter at high water. The town is on the left bank of the river, near the shore ; it exports good cacao, wax, and maize ; cattle are to be had in abundance. NORTHWEST COAST. Point Sikayak is surrounded by a reef which extends to 3 cables from the point and fringes the shore to the northeast- ward as far as Point Botogan, A great bay, clear and with good anchorage, stretches be- tween Point Sikayak and Point Blanca. Three rivers, their mouths defended by forts, enter the bay. The land behind is mountainous. Point Blanca, one of the most remarkable features of the coast, is a perpendicular cliff of white stone 26 feet high; it forms a horizontal table covered by grass, with no trees upon it. During the rainy season, a rivulet of good water falls from this table-land. The vicinity of the point is shoal; at 2 cables from it there are 1^ fathoms. Anchorage may be had eastward of the point in 4^ fathoms, and also in the bay be- tween Point Blanca and Point Dauit. Point Dauit is clear and steep-to, and can be recognized by a little hill that takes the form of an obelisk. MINDANAO — NORTHWEST COAST. 155 Point Tabonan is liigli, rocky, and very steep, with a tlat summit ; there is anchorage in the bay whicli this point forms with Point Dauit. Point Dauigan is also high and steep with a flat top ; on its southwest side there is a narrow reef with 9 fathoms near it. Anchorage may be had in the southern angle of the bay be- tween points Danigan and Tabonan in 11 fathoms; the other parts of the bay are foul. SiNDANGAN Bay.— The shores of this bay are exceedingly steep ; anchorage may be had south of Point Dauigan in 3 fathoms, and also east of Point Sandingan in 11 fathoms, very close to the shore ; everywhere else the bay is too deep near the shore for anchorage. Point Sandingan is a steep, rocky bluff, bordered by a nar- row shoal of rocks and sand, with breakers at a distance of 1 cable. KiPiT or Galera Point is low, fiat, and sandy, with shoal water off it; the bay to the eastward, into which the river Kipit flows, is shoal, with 6 fathoms at the distance of a mile from the coast ; the surrounding land is low. The Murci^lagos Islands (ch. 18, p. 153), which lie north 2^ miles from Point Kipit, are situated on an oval reef about a mile in length from WNW. to ESE., with soundings of 4^ to 8 fathoms around its edge. The islands are low, and the largest — the easternmost — is 3 cables in length. Anchorage may be had SE. of the island in 7 fathoms, sand. The chan- nel between the islands and Point Kipit is clear and safe, with a depth of 18 fathoms in the middle of it. Coast. — To the westward of Point Kipit the coast is low and bordered by sand beaches separated by rocky headlands, and cut into by several little rivers. Anchorage may be had at 1 mile from the shore in 7 fathoms, fine sand. The wood on the coast is that named agojos, a tree similar to the pine of Europe. High mountains can be seen inland, and also hills covered with cogonal. Gorda Head and Point Coronada are both high and steep, but Gorda Head, which lies 5 miles NE. of Point Coronada, is much the highest, and is liable, on coming from the south- ward, to be mistaken for the western extremity of the land. Currents. — Between the islands Panaon and Kamiguin there is a constant current to the west. South of Bohol the currents follow the direction of the prevailing monsoon. 156 MINDANAO — WEST COAST. Near the coasts and within the great bays the current is influ- enced by the discharge from tlie rivers. WEST COAST. From Point Coronada the coast is clean and steep-to as far as Point Balangonan, which lies 15 miles SW. by S. Coro- nada Bay, south of the i^oint of the same name, is sheltered from all winds but those of SW., and offers anchorage in 9 to 13 fathoms, sandy bottom. In the angle to the northward, where a little river enters, the depth is 2f to 4 fathoms. Balangonan Point is composed of dark ferruginous rock, low and very steep-to. The little bay to the east of it is more sheltered than that of Coronada, but its shores are very steep, so that to get 10 fathoms it is necessary to go very close in- shore. At a mile to the northward of the north point of this bay there is a small islet, clean and steep. Port Santa Maria. — This well-sheltered little port is situated immediately to the southward of Balangonan Point. It is about a mile deep to the SW. and contains two little basins of 13 fathoms depth, very convenient for vessels of good size. The entrance is 2 cables wide and 36 fathoms deep. In the middle of the port the depth is 15 fathoms, and little less near the shore. A narrow reef lines the coast and ex- tends to the distance of 1 cable from the entrance points of the western basin. The shores are low and covered by forests of good trees; among them teak is to be found. Water can be obtained from a little river in the eastern end of the port. Point Balanguin (Dulanguin), to the SW. of the port, is rocky and of no great height ; steep-to. It resembles Point Balangonan, and coming from the southward may be taken for it. At 3 cables from the coast, between this point and Port Santa Maria, there are four detached rocks, clean. Sikogon Bay, between points Balanguin and Sikogon, is clean, deep, and bordered by a beach of white sand where two rivers discharge; some rocks lie near the shore in the middle of the bay. The depth at 2 cables from the shore is 4^ to 5| fathoms, sand. Sikogon Point is rocky, clean, and steep-to. In the nortli- east angle of Panabutan Bay (ch. 19, p. 156), to the south of the point, there is anchorage in 7 to 22 fathoms, sand, between two rocky points. The rivers Sikogon and Siraguai are shal- low. The natives are numerous in this place; they grow E? fiLDJLbnrHJt w?^ € i^ MAR DE JOLO. COSTA OESTEDEMmUANAO. sz.No DE ev.\abi:ta.n Ng.2U MARDE JOLO. COSTA OESTE DE MIKDAIfAO. SEN Q T)E CA TIIT Situacion ( LatimJ Jcl punjo A I LoH^biJ . Kkcalai de moluk nilU ?^^ '■Xr"" .^s.fv|irf^v^ PLAirO KUEVO DEL FONDEADERO DE MASINGLOC ILon^ilkJ i.jL-M X. MINDANAO — WEST COAST. 157 maize and tobacco, aud carry ou trade with the Sulu Islands. Wood and water can be obtained. Canit Bay (ch. 20 and 21, x)- 157) is semicircular, of a diameter of 9 cables, with sandy shores and small, steep reefs on both sides of the entrance. Near the sonth shore there is an islet of 1 cable extent, clean and steep on the eastern side, with a narrow reef on the western side. In the bay there is good anchorage in 4^ to 9 fathoms, sand, under shelter of the islet. Point Cauit is high and steep ; the sea face is composed of red earth ; the summit is rounded and covered with wood. Coast. — From Point Cauit to Point Batu-Tandok, which lies 9 miles S. by W. | W., the coast is clear and steep, and forms little bays between the intermediate points Piakan and Nanga, which points are high, rugged, and steep. This part of the coast, like all the west coast of Mindanao, presents an agreeable aspect of hills, covered with verdure, and cultivated land, with a great number of houses. Point Batu-Tandok is high, clean, and steep, with a flat summit; at 130 yards from it is a small, pointed rock, from which the point appears to take its name — Horn Rock; between this point and Point Nanga there is anchorage near the shore in 2f to 8 fathoms. Sibuko Bay, which lies between Point Batu-Tandok and Point Buril, 4 miles to the southward, penetrates 2 miles to the eastward and is very safe, with steep shores, bordered by a long beach of sand, with a little river at each end of it, where boats can enter and obtain water, even at low tide. The depth in the bay is not less than 27 fathoms, except very close to the beach, where 11 fathoms can be obtained. The anchorage is good, but a sea sets in with westerly winds. The town of Sibuko is 2 miles inland. The j)eople are i3eace- ful, and the land cultivated. Provisions are procurable. Coast. — To the southward of Sibuko Bay the coast is high, clean, and steep, and bordered by sand beaches, interrujjted by rocky cliffs, as far as Point Batulampan, the western point of Mindanao. From Point Batulampan to Samboangan it is low, covered with trees, and bordered by steej^ sand beaches, with a depth of 14 fathoms at a cable's distance. Coasters going from Samboangan, when the wind and tide are against them, land their crews and thrack their vessels to Point Caldera. Point Batulampan is of even height and steep, with a flat crown; Point Alimpaya, about a mile to tlie northward of it. S 9 9 S y 1* » , 9 S t / 7 7 ' I ^ / 2* S. Z^Z" MmDANAO. MTO HUEVO DEL f-O DE MASII^GLOC ioa Bidretrrafica e» JI85. MINDANAO — WEST COAST. 157 maize and tobacco, aud carry on trade with the Sulu Islands. Wood and water can be obtained. Cauit Bay (cb. 20 and 21, p. 157) is semicircnlar, of a diameter of 9 cables, with sandy shores and small, steep reefs on both sides of the entrance. Near the south shore there is an islet of 1 cable extent, clean and steep on the eastern side, with a narrow reef on the western side. In the bay there is good anchorage in 4^ to 9 fathoms, sand, under shelter of the islet. Point Cauit is high and steep; the sea face is composed of red earth; the summit is rounded and covered with wood. Coast. — From Point Cauit to Point Batu-Tandok, which lies 9 miles S. by W. ^ W., the coast is clear and steep, and forms little bays between the intermediate points Piakan and Fanga, which points are high, rugged, and steep. This part of the coast, like all the west coast of Mindanao, presents an agreeable aspect of hills, covered with verdure, and cultivated land, with a great number of houses. Point Batu-Tandok is high, clean, and steep, with a flat summit; at 130 yards from it is a small, pointed rock, from which the point appears to take its name — Horn Rock; between this point and Point Nanga there is anchorage near the shore in 2f to 8 fathoms. Sibuko Bay, which lies between Point Batu-Tandok and Point Buril, 4 miles to the southward, penetrates 2 miles to the eastward and is very safe, with steep shores, bordered by a long beach of sand, with a little river at each end of it, where boats can enter and obtain water, even at low tide. The depth in the bay is not less than 27 fathoms, except very close to the beach, where 11 fathoms can be obtained. The anchorage is good, but a sea sets in with westerly winds. The town of Sibuko is 2 miles inland. The people are peace- ful, and the land cultivated. Provisions are procurable. Coast. — To the southward of Sibuko Bay the coast is high, clean, and steep, and bordered by sand beaches, interrupted by rocky cliffs, as far as Point Batulampan, the western point of Mindanao. From Point Batulampan to Samboangan it is low, covered with trees, and bordered by steep sand beaches, with a depth of 14 fathoms at a cable's distance. Coasters going from Samboangan, when the wind and tide are against them, land their crews and thrack their vessels to Point Caldera. Point Batulampan is of even height and steep, with a flat crown; Point Alimpaya, about a mile to the northward of it. 158 MINDANAO — SOUTH COAST. is flat and sandy; points Dnnialon and Caldera are sand beaches. All these points, as also the rounded coast they define, are clean and steep-to. The tidal streams, ^yhich at springs reach a velocity of 5 knots, strike Point Caldera with great force. SOUTH COAST. (Ch. 22, p. 158.) SiBUGUEi Bay. — From the northeast entrance of the Sakol Channel the coast of Mindanao trends NNE. for 53 miles, and then, curving round to the southward for 30 miles, forms the extensive bay of Sibuguei, terminated to the SE. by Olun- tanga Island. The coasts of this bay are bordered by islands and reefs, and have not yet been properly surveyed ; naviga- tion in it should therefore be conducted with caution. Panubigan Islands consist of 15 small islands and several little islets situated near the coast of Mindanao. They are wooded, and for the most part clean and steep-to. The northernmost of the group, Palma Brava, is surrounded by a reef which projects i of a mile to the NE, and almost joins the coast. Between this island and the reef off Point Koroan there is a small anchorage of 7 fathoms depth. There is also anchorage in 5 fathoms in the two little bays south of Panu- bigan Islands. Coast. — From the Panubigan Islands the coast runs NNE. for about 14 miles to Point Vitali, which is fronted by four islets, clean and steei)-to, and several rocks which extend out for 3 miles from the point ; they are named Tigbaon Islands. Port Banga (ch. 22, p. 158), situated (! miles to the north- ward of the Tigbaon Islands, is safe and well sheltered ; it is 2| miles long, NE. and SW., with a maximum width of 1 mile. An islet, with a reef extending 3 cables to the south, divides the entrance into two deep passages 1^ cables wide. In the eastern channel the depth is 13 fathoms, lessening gradually to 1^ fathoms inside the port ; the sides are steep-to. The best anchorage is in 9 fathoms, half-way between the eastern point of entrance and an island to the north. The reef off the east point of entrance extends 1^ miles to the eastward, and 2|- cables to the SW. The coast then trends NNE. ^ E. for 21 miles, forming several bays edged l)y islets and reefs, with soundings of 14 and 3G fathoms at 2 miles from the shore, as far as 2 miles No 2^ COSTA SUR BE MUrDAlfAO. SEJfo J>js siBvairrr. PUEKTO DE BA^GA lL»uuul ''-ioLKi"V. dc U Pum* iLonyinul i_j6-i5 E. -T^^T- Knoale en milla MINDANAO— SOUTH COAST. 159 north of Biiluan Island, wliidi is small and surronnded by rocks. From this position there is a line of soundings of from 12 to 23 fathoms across the head of the bay to Kabut Island; northward of this line there are said to be shoal banks. The village of Marasingan, near which layers of coal have been found, lies 4 miles inland to the SE. of Kabut Island. The east coast of Sibuguei Bay, from Kabut Island to the narrow channel separating Oluntanga from the mainland, is bordered by a reef of small extent, with detached shoals steep-to off it. Pandalusan Island, 5 miles off the coast, is of moderate height and surrounded by a narrow sand beach, steep-to. A rocky shoal of 1 mile extent lies -i^ miles N. by E. of Panda- lusan, and at 4 miles ENE. of this shoal there are two more smaller shoals, near the coast. Between Pandalusan and the first shoal, and between these and the other two shoals, there are soundings of 11 fathoms. Danger line. — The chart indicates by a line of points the edge of a dangerous reef starting from the two shoals above mentioned, and surrounding Olutanga. To avoid this reef, the island Pandalusan should not be brought to bear to the westward of N". -|- E. until 7 miles to the north of that island, when an east course may be steered, passing to the north of the shoals, which form the limit of the reef. Circe Bank, discovered by the French sloop of war Circe in 186-4, was reported to consist of sand and coral, of ^ cable's length, with 4 fathoms water over it, 6^ fathoms around it, and 27 fathoms at 1 cable's distance ; Pandalusan Island bear- ing from it N. 17° E., and the south point of Olutanga Island S. 86° E. In the Spanish Derrotero it is stated to be 1 mile in length, NNW. and SSE., to have only If fathoms water over it, and to be situated with Pandalusan Island bearing IST. 1° E., the easternmost islet of the Tigbaon group N. 67° W., and the south point M Olutanga Island S. 82° E., distant 9| miles. Olutanga Island is very low, covered by mangroves, and surrounded by reefs. The channel separating it from the mainland is only practicable for boats. Tantanang Bay.— The entrance to this bay is open to the southeast, and is 2 miles wide between the reefs that project from the coast of Olutanga and from the north point of 160 MINDANAO — SOUTH COAST. entrance ; and there is (J to .S fatlioms depth between the islands Letayen and Sibulan. In the middle of the mouth there are two shoals of 3| and 2f fathoms. In the center of the bay- there are some shoals of white sand awash at low water; between them and the western shore the bay is well sheltered, and has a depth of 13 fathoms, lessening gradually to the north- ward; a river enters on the western side. Tumalung Bay, on the north side of Olutanga, has a good depth of water, and is well sheltered in all weathers. There is anchorage in 9 fathoms west of Point Simangul, the northern extremity of Olutanga; an islet, fringed on the northward by a reef of 4 cables extent, lies near this point, and a little to the NNE. of the point there is a bank of sand. DuMANKiLAS Bay atfords good shelter and holding ground among the islands and bays that it incloses; the general depth is 8 to 16 fathoms, with 5 fathoms near the shore. The coast of Lax)irauan is foul, but on the edge of the reef that borders it there are 8 fathoms ; anchorage can only be had at a long distance from this coast. Acha Rock, a small circular patch of sand and coral, steep- to, and covered by 2| fathoms, least water, lies in the entrance of the bay, 6^ miles west of Point Dumankilas (ch. 23, p. 160). The islands Muda, Dakula, and Paya are clean and steep- to, with channels of 9 fathoms depth between them. To the west of Paya there is a rock. Piratas Rock lies 1 mile east of Dakula Island ; it is steep-to and uncovers at very low tides. Clierif Islands are three small islets, clean and steep-to, di- viding the channel into two passages. Dayana Island is also clean; to the WNW. of it lie the point and village of Silupa, with anchorage south of the point in 4 fathoms, with room to swing, near the shore; to the southward the coast is bordered by reefs and shoals, and a great reef extends ENE. of the point. Danger. — A shoal, covered by 1-j fathoms, lies l)etween Dayana Island and Point Igat; from it the western Cherif island is in line with the highest part of Dakula ; and Putili Island on with the second hill of Point Dayana. Fatimo Islands are clean and steep-to on the south side ; but on the north side the bank which fills the head of the bay nearly dries at low water. The entrance to Kumalarang Creek, practicable for light craft at high water, lies N. by E. of Fatimo Islands. , -^ -;•• %y ^ . . : ; ^^^_^^.> ' ^ ^^^«f?i^*W*^'*W ••--■- V m^J ^^'^^'^l"-- : Mi f y ~c *:..... € ^ ^ *' M'" - X^^ Seiro ie Mai . o a "" % * ' "'^■"■" -'1 ^*'^ \ «, \^ COSTA sun 1 >£ lUNDASAO. SENO DE MALIGAY Xonle P^j. il,<™y,„J ...1,^. . E. o ^ . , : 4 5 Ei^.1. c» .^^ A ^^m^^ SKjso nK .vi-U-inro No_24. / g y " ruui^n ■.By'o JUoj COSTA Sim DE MimJANAO. BAHIADE ILLASA. PUERTO DE SAMBULAUAN Siluacion drl ( L«UluJ 7taiLoo">-. M^ ^ambulauAji t Lonv-atud 3.31.00 K- [ Tn~rri i i i Escala en niiltas No:25 cos TA SUR DS MINDANAO. bahia.de ELLANA. SJ]>'0 Y PUERTO DE TIGUMA Sibuciou d*'la (l-atebiA. 7ii51S6"N. (lon^tu) J_i£_3o E. £cc4la eo ififlj^ MINDANAO— SOUTH COAST. 161 Igat Bay, to the north of Igat Ishiiid, is well sheltered and safe. The shores of the bay are clean and steep-to, except to the NE., where there is a shoal which projects 1^ miles to the SW. The river Dumankilas enters here by several months ; the locality is unhealthy. Pntili Islet, in the middle of the entrance, is steep-to. Igat Island is separated from the main- land by a narrow channel, near the eastern part of which there is a good watering place. Off the western end of Igat Island there is a narrow reef. Danger. — In the middle of the bay south of Igat Island there is a shoal of white sand which uncovers at low water springs. Coast. — From Point Karabuka to Point Dumankilas (ch. 23, p. IGO) the coast is clean and steep-to except north of Triton Island, which is a large rock surrounded by a narrow reef. Maligay Bay (ch. 23, p. 160) is bordered on the eastern side by a reef over which there is 3^ to If fathoms water, which reduces its available space by one-half ; in this half the depth is 37 to 27 fathoms, and it is deep close to the edge of the reef. The village of Banganga is situated in this bay. Banganian (Flecha) Peninsula is traversed throughout its length by a range of hills, the highest of which, Alto de Flecha, can be seen 34 miles in clear weather. The west coast of the j)eninsula is clean and steep-to ; the east coast is bor- dered by a reef and should not be approached within a mile. Panikian Island is low ; a shoal, covered by 7 fathoms, ex- tends 1 mile SSE. of the island and is very steep on its eastern side, no bottom having been obtained with 84 fathoms close to it. The channel between the islet and the coast is safe. Anchorage. — During the northeast monsoon vessels can anchor in the middle of the bay south of Alto de Flecha in 5|- to 9 fathoms ; water can be had at a rivulet about 1| miles east of the anchorage. There is also anchorage in the same depth off Point Flecha, but when the monsoon blows fresh a heavy sea sets round the point. Illana Bay (ch. 24 and 25, p. 161) is comprised between Point Flecha and Point Tapian, distant 40 miles. It is sepa- rated from Iligan Bay on the north side of Mindanao by an isthmus 13 miles wide. Rios Rock (Takut Masila), before the little port of Dinas, is a circular rock of ^ mile diameter. From its center Mount Baka- yuan bears W. | N., distant 4i miles. Takut Parido, a rock 162 MINDANAO— SOUTH COAST. smaller than Takut Masila, is said to exist outside that rock. Port Dinas is of little importance ; it is formed hy an open- ing in the reef that borders the coast south of Point Pisan (ch. 24, p. 161) ; this reef is said to extend as far as Point Dii- pulisan, and the coast here should be approached with caution. The entrance to Port Pisan is only 2 cables wide, and it should not be entered without a pilot except at low water, with the sun and weather favorable for seeing the reefs. There is 11 to 13 fathoms water in the passage, and the anchorage is in 4i to 5^ fathoms near the shore. The direction of the passage is with Mount Sambulauan bearing N. 50° W. The town of Pisan lies a little to the north of the anchorage, 2 miles from the inouth of the river of the same name. The country is marshy and unhealthy; during the rainy season the water rises to 5 feet above the surface of the soil. There is also anchorage in a corner of the reef west of Sagayaran, one of the Tikala Islands, in 9 fathoms. Pagadian Bay, in the NW. of Illana Bay (ch. 24, p. 161), in- cludes the anchorages of Dupulisanand Tiguma (ch. 25, p. 161). Before the entrance there are some coral banks, one of which is always uncovered, with passages between them and the shore to the northward and southward. The southern passage is preferable, being wider and more direct. Point Dux)ulisan is bordered to the SSE. and to the west by a reef of 3 cables extent. There is anchorage west of the point in about 9 fathoms, sheltered from south and southeast winds. Point Tiguma is fronted by a reef which extends along the coast to the ENE. The anchorage is near the coast in 3i fathoms. Coast. — From Tiguma, as far as Palak Harbor, the coast is bordered in many places by a reef which extends to 1 or 2 miles from the shore; it contains many little bays affording anchor- age ; generally very near the shore. Several rivers and lagoons open into the bay, the shores of which are lined with villages. The native inhabitants, with the exception of those of Tiguma, are in general hostile to strangers, and it is prudent to take precautions while dealing with them, without doing so ostensibly. Pinatayan Bank consists of two reefs, parallel to each other, extending 4 cables in a SSE, and NNW. direction; it is 1 cable wide, with a depth of 11 to 22 feet on it. From the eastern part of the bank the north point of Bongo Island bears S. i W., and Point Matimus of Tetian E. by S. i S. MINDANAO — SOUTH COAST. 163 Palak Harbor, between Point Panga to the north and Point Mariga-batu (Red Rock) to the south, 4 miles distant, is open to the westward, and protected from the winds of that quarter by Bongo Island before the entrance. The harbor is of good depth and safe. On the north side it contains the bays of Kidamak and Segut, and on the south side a wider bay in which are the anchorages of Palak and Parang Parang. A steep coral reef fringes the coast ; on the north side it is very close to the shore ; on the south side it extends to 2 to 3 cables from it; and south of Segut Bay it projects about l-^- miles to the S W. The depth at the entrance is over 40 fath- oms; within, it ranges from 25 to 15 fathoms; and alongside the fringing reef about 5^ fathoms. The entrance presents no difficulties ; a small detached hill at the bottom of Parang. Bay serves as a good mark. Palak town, deriving its name from the Moro word "palak" (separated), is situated on the island Palak, which forms the northern point of the bay, and is separated from the main- land by a narrow channel, Sampinitan, with only 1^ feet of water in it at low water. The town was the residence of the naval commandant. Anchorage. — Large vessels should anchor SE. of the buoy at the end of the reef which projects eastward of the mole, in 16 fathoms. Small craft can anchor at the entrance of the Sampinitan Creek in 9 fathoms; in that position they should moor in order to keep a clear anchor. The reef near the settlement is marked by beacons. Parang Parang River can be entered by boats with diffi- culty ; the water in it is good and abundant ; a Moro town is on the north bank. Segut Bay is half filled by a reef ; a village lies on the west coast. Kidamak Bay contains a small native population; the eastern point has a small reef off it ; there is anchorage on the eastern side of the bay in 8 fathoms. Winds. ^-In Palak Harbor, during the first months of the year, when the wind is well established from the NE., there are often squalls' in the afternoon from the north, accompa- nied with much lightning, wind, and rain; before the squall begins the wind blows from NW and W., and after it is over the land breeze sets in until in the morning. During the southwest monsoon the wind freshens after midday, and varies 164 MINDANAO— SOUTH COAST. from SW. to W. and NW. ; rain falls in abundance, and heavy thunderstorms occur. Tides. — There are always two tides in the bay, with rare exceptions, which take place in the quarter of the equinoxes when the moon is at her greatest declination. The mean "establishment " is 6h. 5m. ; springs rise 8 feet, neaps 4| feet. Tidal streams. — The stream turns at high and low water at Palak Harbor, and at all the ports on the coast between Zam- boanga and Palak. On the coast, with the rising tide, the stream sets to the north, northwest, and west, according to local configuration. At Palak Harbor, with the rising tide, the stream sets to the east on the north shore, and follows the bend of the coast to the southward and westward ; the ebb stream sets in the reverse direction. Bongo Island, at the entrance of Palak Harbor, is about 5 miles long, NNE. and SSW., by 1^ miles wide; it is some 300 feet high, and thickly wooded. The island is surrounded by a reef, which projects as much as 2 miles WNW. of the north .point of the island, while on the eastern side the reef is nar- row and very steep-to; there is no good anchorage off the island. The channel between Bongo Island and Panga Point is 4| miles wide, and 30 to 40 fathoms deep. Volcanoes. — The cordillera of Sugut (Bangaya) lies about 23 miles to the eastward of Palak Harbor; the highest moun- tain of the range is the volcano of Makaturin, the latest erup- tion of which occurred in 1872. This eruption was followed by an earthquake which partly destroj^ed Palak, Kota-batu, and the village on the banks of the river Mindanao. Mindanao Rivee (ch. 11, p. 116). — This great river disem- bogues 5 miles to the south of Palak Harbor by two wide arms, on the northernmost of which is the town of Kota-batil, about oi miles from the mouth. The river is navigable for 60 miles by vessels of 3i feet draught ; it flows through a beau- tiful valley 30 miles in width, which scarcely shows any change of level ; the valley is capable of producing tobacco, cacao, sugar, maize, and cotton; but this is only known at present by specimens produced. The course of the river lies SE. for 45 miles from its mouth to the lake Ligauasan, out of which it is seen to flow ; from the other side of the lake the direction of the river is NNE. to its source in the Sugut Mountains. At 21 miles from the northern mouth the river divides into two arms, which enter the sea 4^ miles apart, MINDANAO — SOUTH COAST. 165 and hetween tliem form a great delta. These branches comuuuiicate with each other by four small channels. The northern arm is the widest, deepest, and most navigable ; the southern one is narrow, and has only 5 feet of water. The river banks are peopled by Moros. Entrance. — Point Panalisan (cli. 11, p. IIG), the northern point of entrance, is surrounded by a shoal extending half a mile to the westward. The entrance channel, which is south of this shoal, is 1(3 feet deep, and very narrow. Off the south entrance point a sand spit extends 2 cables to the NW., and is steep-to. The bar, which is in front of Painan village, has 5 feet over it at low water. After passing the village the depth increases, and 16 to 20 feet can be carried as far up as Kota-batu. A bank, covered by 2f fathoms, with 9 to 16 fathoms near its outer edge, extends SW. from the northern entrance to a distance of 1^ miles from the coast, and joins the shore again near the wooded hill of Timako. The southern entrance of the river is divided into two arms by an islet which cannot be passed on the south side; the northern arm has only 5 feet of water in it ; at 3 cables to the west of this entrance the depth is 14 fathoms. Beacons. — A red beacon or buoy marks the extremity of the north sand bank of the entrance ; a white beacon or buoy marks the extremity of the south sand bank of the entrance. A white and red beacon or buoy marks the head of the shoal between the islets. A great tripod and white cage stands on Bulusan Point, and serves to distinguish the mouth of the river from other entrances on the coast. Kota-batu town (Stone-fort) is now the capital of the island, and was the residence of the Governor-General of Mindanao ; it is connected with Palak harbor by a causeway of stone. The river is 16 feet deep off the town, and vessels can anchor in it, taking precautions to avoid the snags carried down by the cur- rent. Steamers call fortnightly. Coast marks. — Timako Island, between the two mouths of the river, is wooded to the water's edge. The hill upon it. Mount Timako, is a good mark for marking the river. An elevated range of volcanic mountains, dominated by the central peak Dikalungan, extends some 70 miles to the south- ward, nearly parallel to the river Mindanao. The peak 166 MINDANAO — SOUTH COAST. Kabalala, on wliicli is a cogonal, Si- miles from the soutliern entrance of the river, and higlier than the neighboring hills, is another good mark for the river. Coast. — From the south entrance of the river Mindanao the coast trends about SW. for 23 miles to Kidipil Point, the most salient point of this part, and is clean and steep-to. Point Tapian, midway, is low and surrounded by a reef reaching out 3 cables. From Kidij^il to Tinaka Point, the southern extremity of Mindanao, the coast is generally clean and steep- to, with good depths off it, and includes several little bays ; it, however, has not been surveyed, and should therefore be ap- proached with caution. Linao Bay is 14- miles wide, and sheltered from all winds but those from the southwest. Its shores are bordered by a narrow, steep reef. Huidobro Shoal, called Linao Shoal by the Moros, is placed on the chart 3 miles WS W. of Point Linao ; it is said to be covered by h\ fathoms of water. Port Lebak, between points Lebak and Nara, offers good shelter in all weathers, but a sea sets in with westerly winds. The shores are covered by mangroves and bordered by a reef which extends to about 1 cable from them. The best anchor- age is in 11 to 13 fathoms to the eastward of the islet and reef Tubotubo, in the southern part of the bay. Water can be obtained in the river Lebak, east of the anchorage, and also from the other rivers in the port. The natives are said to be in the habit of using poisoned arrows on the smallest pretext ; it is therefore well to be careful, and not to trust them too far. Basiauang Bay affords two anchorages ; that to the north- ward of the bay and east of Point Basiauang, afford - good shelter in all weathers, but it is necessary to secure to the shore, as there is not sufficient room for a vessel to swing. The southern anchorage is at the mouth of a small ore 3k on the northern side of a remarkable hill, connected witn the mainland only by a low mangrove-covered neck. The anchor- age can be dropped in 10 to 13 fathoms, and the stern secured to the reef. The reef at the point, and the neighboring island of Donauang break the sea, and these anchorages of Basiau- ang, after Port Lebak, are the best shelters which this coast offers in all weather. The island Donauang has a reef which reaches 2 cables out to the NNW. The passage between Donauang and the coast MINDANAO — SOUTH COAST. 167 is safe ; a vessel sliould keep nearer to the island reef than that off the coasi , which is more extensive. Douauang- Shoals are two shoals situated resijectively 3 miles N. 9° W. and 2 miles N. 3° W. of the north of the island ; they pre each about ^ mile across and covered by 3| least water. Tuna Bay is semicircular, steep-sided, and bordered by a reef like all the bays of this coast. There is anchorage in 15 fathoms in the northwest part, before coming to a point covered by mangroves from which a reef projects; a small anchor should be laid out on the reef, as is well to be done in all these bays with steep sides. Danger. — A reef which uncovers in places and is covered by 5 fathoms in other places, lies 2 miles off the coast and 5 miles SE. of Point Malatuna. Vessels should not approach this part of the coast within G miles. Coast. — Point Pola, 18 miles SE. of Point Malatuna, is low, with a sand beach and small reef. At 5 miles to the east of Point Polo lie the village and river of Kraan (Kanaren), near which layers of coal have been found. As far as Sarangani Bay the coast is generally low, and offers no good shelter. Point Bukud, formed by the hill of the same name, lies 16 miles SE. of Point Pola, and terminates in an islet united to it by a narrow reef. The hill may be easily recognized, being isolated in low land ; seen from the west it suggests the form of a table. Point Bui, 20 miles ESE. of Point Bukud, is surrounded by a reef which is said to extend 1 mile out. A reef, 2 miles long and 1 mile wide, covered by 5 fathoms water, lies off the coast east of Point Bui, and 2,^ miles SW. by W. i W. of Point Bulaluan, the western point of Sarangani Bay. Sarangani Bay has a width of 7 miles at its entrance between points Bulaluan and Sumban ; its sides are very steep and its depth considerable; anchorage may be found in the bights of its coast line, but close to the shore, and with a haw- ser out to the shore to prevent the anchor slipping into deep water. A coral reef extending 1 mile out surrounds Point Bulaluan, and borders the western and northern shores of the bay. The west coast is and; the plains to the northwest and north are covered with cogon and abound in deer. 168 MINDANAO — SOUTH COAST. The volcano Matutung, wliicli lies 19 miles N. by E. of the town of Mint, in the northwest angle of the bay, is very high and can be seen from a great distance. Mint Anchorage is in the angle of the bay north of the town, in 15 fatlioms. Good water can be obtained from the river. Communication between Mint and Lake Buluan, across the mountains, occupies two or three days. Glan Masila, or Kanalasan Anchorage, though steep, is the best anchorage in Sarangani Bay during the southwest mon- soon; it is in Kanalasan Cove, east of Sumban Point, before the village of Glan. Anchorage may be had in 11 to 13 fath- oms, with a hawser to the shore, but it is advisable not to anchor before the mouth of the river Glan Masila, which flows into the northern part of the cove, on account of the freshets. The town of Glan Masila (Great Glan) stands on the bank of the river, 2 miles from the mouth. Light. — A fixed white light is exhibited on the mole on the south side of the entrance of the river ; it is elevated 33 feet above the sea, and should be seen in clear weather at a dis- tance of 6 miles. Point Sumban is high and steep, with but little vegetation on it ; it is surrounded by a reef extending 2^ cables to the west and north. The Southern Peninsula of Mindanao is high, and pre- sents several remarkable peaks on it; the southern hill, 1,670 feet high, and in reality round, looks somewhat like a pyra- mid when seen on an ESE. or WNW, bearing. Seven miles to the NNE. of this round-topped hill is a saddle peak 3,600 feet above the level of the sea, and 8 miles NE. of this saddle mountain there is a high range, the highest peak of which — •4,530 feet — has a conical top when viewed from the southward. The west coast from Point Sumban to Point Tinaka is gen- erally clean except near Bluff Point, or Talayan Point, where the reef extends nearly a mile out. Point Tukapanga is rocky, high, and steep; a reef follows the coast to the SE. from it to Batulaki. Point Tinaka, or Caj^e Sarangani, is a hill united to the coast by low land ; it presents a bluff point to the south, with a little sand beach, and may be passed at i cable's distance ; to the eastward of the point there is a large shoal of sand and rock, covered by 5^ fathoms. MINDANAO — EAST COAST. 169 Anchorage. — On the ^vestern side of Tiiiakn Point there is a little bay, Batulaki, open to the SW. and fringed by shoals, which reduce the available space to a width of G cables, with a depth of 9 fathoms, lessening gradually to 2^, over a clean, sandy bottom. Safe anchorage may be found in this bay, sheltered from the northeast monsoon. The roadstead of Balangunan and Malavinan, to the eastward of Tinaka Point, are exposed to the sea and afford very indifferent anchorage. The coast. — Gual Point is low and sloping, with a little reef off it. Points Kamalian and Silakai are foul. Butulan offers temporary anchorage out of the swell of the sea, but exposed to the sea that sets in from cross tides. The depth is great, with 14 fathoms almost touching the shore, and 10 fathoms before the mouth of the river. The coast continues clean and sloping, and almost straight to Point Banos, which is about 72 feet high and peaked. From here it runs N. by E., with a series of high points, to Point Kalian, which is broad and rather remarkable. There is good anchorage off Kalian. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Sarangani Point at 7 hours. Springs rise 6 feet. The flood stream sets to the west between Tinaka Point and Sarangani Islands, and the ebb to the east. On the coast to the northward and east- ward it is said that the flood stream sets to the -north, and the ebb to the south, the latter being less violent than the flood ; also that to the northward of Point Kalian the tide streams are weaker. Strong tide races and violent eddies are preva- lent, especially off Banos Point. Sarangani Islands consist of two islands and a sand cay, situated 7 miles from the south point of Mindanao. The two islands are separated by a deep channel If miles wide, reduced by a reef on the east side of Balut Island to a navigable pas- sage 8 cables wide. In this channel the tide streams are very strong, the flood stream setting to the nortlr and the ebb to the south. A shoal covered by 7 fathoms lies nearly in mid- channel, f of a mile from the coast of Sarangani. EAST COAST. The east coast of Mindanao runs nearly north and south for a length of 195 miles from Kauit Point to Cape San Augustin, and forms several bays open to the NE. A great chain of mountains runs parallel to the coast and near to it. The coast is imperfectly known, and too great reliance must not be placed on the charts. 170 MINDANAO — EAST COAST. KcUiit Point is a spur of the eastern cordillera of Mindanao; when seen from the northward it appears bluff, l)ut viewed from the southeastward it makes like two islands. It is clean and steep to the northward and westward, but a reef projects from it to the eastward for 1^ miles, and borders the coast to the southward for a distance of 10 miles. Tanda Point, shown on the chart as lying 14 miles S. i W. from Kauit Point, is bordered by a reef to a distance of 2 cables. Two islets lie close to the northward of the point. Makangani Island, 4 miles NW. by N. of Tanda Point, is clean; two rocky islets lie off its northern end. Arangasa Island. — From Tanda Island the coast trends SE. by S. for 19 miles, as far as Umanum Point. North of this point is the Island Arangasa, separated from the main coast by a narrow channel closed by reefs, which extend 3 miles out, E. and SE. of the island. Liangan Bay, betweeen points Umanum and Bankulin, is foul, especially along the northern shore, from which a reef runs 2 miles out, inclosing the islet Ayninam. Liangan town is at the bottom of the bay ; the chart shows a shoal in the fair- way leading to the town, but gives no soundings whatever. Mr. Looney, Lloyd's agent at Iloilo in 1878, says of Liangan Bay : "The best anchorage is off the convent in 15 fathoms of water. A heavy anchorage should be used, as the land winds are strong. The river marked on the chart as flowing at the head of Liangan Bay is only a shallow creek. The coast here is rocky, and landing after dark is difficult. Supplies of fresh water, buffaloes, and rice can be had, but no vegetables." The coast, which trends south for 15 miles from Bankulin Point to Bislig Bay, is very foul and bordered by dangerous sand banks Avhich uncover at low water. The town of Kina- tuan is situated on the right bank of a river- about 12 miles south of Bankulin Point, fronted by Tigdos Islet, which is surrounded by a reef. SupjDlies of buffaloes and rice can be obtained at Kinatuan, but very little fresh water. Bislig Bay and Town. — Masahuron Island, in the mid- dle of the entrance to the bay, is surrounded by shoals which extend i mile east and west of the island. In the passage south of the islet there are two rocky shoals very steep-to, having depths of 47 and 65 fathoms very near them. The southern shore of Bislig Bay is clean; the northern shore, on the contrary, is foul, and should not be approached within G cables' length. MINDANAO — EAST COAST. 171 Bislig town, a military residence, is at the bottom of tlie bay on the right bank of the river ; the bar at the mouth of the river has 2 feet of water over it at low water, and 8 feet at high water. The anchorage is before the town in 3^ fathoms, bottom sand and mud, and is completely sheltered from all winds. Fresh water, buffaloes, and rice can be obtained at Bislig, but no vegetables. Caution. — If without a pilot in approaching the coast of Bislig Bay, do not come into less than 6 fathoms, as the water shoals rapidly. The channel for boats and lanclias is gener- ally marked by bushes or stakes. The coast. — A reef extends 3 miles out to the east and 6 miles out to the SE. from Sanko Point, the southern point of Bislig Bay. The coast, from this point for 6 miles to the southward, as far as Tambog Point, is bordered by reefs. South of Tambog Point, between that point and Katarman Point, there is a great reef which forms with the main coast a small but safe port ; the narrow channel leading to it should not be taken without a pilot. South of Katarman Point there is a great bank which dries ; at the edge of this bank is a depth of 3f fathoms, and to the south of it there are two islets surrounded by rocks. A shoal of sand projects ^ mile NW. of Point Tonkil. From the Katel River, south of Tonkil Point, the coast trends south for 13 miles, as far as Kinablagan Point, and is clean. Kinablagan Point is high and wooded ; when seen at a dis- tance it appears like an island. The river and town of the same name lie on the south side of the point. There is anchorage off Kinablagan near the shore in 8 fathoms, but it scarcely merits the name of anchorage, as it is quite open and exposed. The river can be entered by boats only. Baganga Bay, between points Lambajon and Daguet, offers good anchorage during the southwest monsoon in 5 fathoms, a reef which i^rojects from Daguet Point giving shelter from the east and southeast ; but during the northeast monsoon the anchorage is quite untenable on account of the heavy sea which sets in. Daguet Point is detached from the coast, and consists of white sand covered by low wood. A shoal of 4i f athoms water lies off it. From Daguet Point the coast trends south for 15 miles as far as Karaga Bay, and presents low points and some small 172 MINDANAO — EAST COAST. rivers. A few villages of slight importance staiicl on the shore. Karaga Bay, between j)oints Sankol and Pusan, is semi- circular in form, open to the eastward, and penetrates about 2 miles inland. The village of Sankol stands on the shore near the point, and near a cocoanut plantation. There is anchorage in 4^ fathoms WNW. of Point Pusan, off some rocks at the commencement of a beach, but it is exj^osed to the swell ; there is also anchorage off Tubu on the south side, sheltered from the southerly winds ; it is the only place on the south coast where there is a sand beach. Sankol Point is low; a rocky shoal coA^ered by 1-J- fathoms water 2:)rojects a mile out from it. Pusan Point is low, and formed of cavernous rocks ; it is clean, and may be rounded at a cable's distance. The current begins to be strongly felt off this point, and at spring tides violent eddies are j)roduced, raising a high sea. Bunga Point, 9 miles south of Pusan Point, is the first point which is not mountainous met on coming northward from Cape San Augustin. There is a bay south of the point, on the shore of which stands the village of Manai, with a little fort surrounded by cogonals of a red color. Buan Point, 6 miles south of Bunga Point, is sandy, with a narrow reef off it, and may be recognized by a cogonal on it. A little river, which can be entered by boats only, passes through the cogonal. Fresh water can be obtained from it. Maglubun Point, 4 miles S. by W. of the last point, is clean and projecting and easy to recognize. Several villages stand on this part of the coast, which is clean and wooded, but beaten by the sea. The village and fort of Mamponon are near a small river, but there is too much sea on the coast for anchorage. Mayo Bay, between Tugubun Point, 8 miles south of Mag- lubun, and Lamigan, is a large bay, over 5 miles wide at the entrance between these two points, and penetrating 7 miles to the westward; it is but little known. Tugubun Point is hilly and wooded; a shoal of sand rock projects 1 cable from it. Yukatan Anchorage is on the north shore, 2 miles west of Tugubun Point. Points Flaca and Gorda, west again of Yukatan, are formed by hills which terminate in low points; a reef extends 2 miles out from Gorda Point. t# :MINDAXA() — EAST COAST. 173 PUJADA Bay (ell. -^r., p. ITo), separated from Mayo Bay by tlie long peniusula of Guauguan, wliicli terminates in Lami- gan Point, would be the best in Mindanao were it not for the A'ery great depth of water in it. It penetrates some 10 miles from the entrance, and has an extreme width of o or 6 miles about the middle of it. Pujada Island, 200 feet high, divides tlie entrance into two channels ; of these, the southern, although the narrowest, is the safest on account of the reefs on both sides of the northern channel; the reef of Pujada Island ex- tends 2 miles eastward, and ends in a flat-topped islet or rock; the sea breaks on this reef even at high water. Lamigan Point, the northern point of the bay, is said to be clean to seaward, but fringed on the side of the bay by a wide reef as far as Batiano Point, and should not be approached within i mile. Velasco Shoal, awash at low water, is reported to lie SE. by E. of Piedra, with a depth of 18 fathoms between it and the point; neither Velasco Shoal nor points Batiano and Piedra are given on the chart. The shore continues foul as far as the town of Mati ; a small creek, 3 miles ESE. of Mati, leads to an isthmus 40 yards wide, separating the bays of Pujada and Mayo. The natives haul their canoes across this neck of land and launch them in Mayo Bay. Mati is a small town, standing in a wide prairie land, sur- rounded by picturesque scenery ; the shore near it is steep-to, and there is a depth of 11 to 13 fathoms close in. Good water is obtainable, but provisions are scarce. The coast at the head of Pujada Bay makes several indentations, the principal of which is called Balete Port. Kamainsi Point, in this locality, is foul. Makambol Point, on the south side of Pujada Bay, ends in a reef, to the westward of which there is anchorage in 8 fathoms near the shore. A shoal of 2| fathoms water lies oft' the point. There are plantations of cocoanut and plantains on this part of the coast. Off Magun (not marked on the chart), east of Makambol, there is indifferent anchorage exposed to the sea. Tumadgo Point, the southern point of Pujada Bay, and also Alo Point, a little to the southward, are peaked and clean. Tides. — In Pujada Bay it is high water, full and change, at 7h. Springs rise feet. Steamers from Zamboanga and Palak trade to Mati. The shores of the bay abound in good timber, such as Alintalo, idon-PutJished althe-/ MINDANAO — EAST COAST. 173 PujADA Bay (cli. 2(j, p. 173), separated from Mayo Bay Ly tlie long peninsula of Guanguan, wliicli terminates in Lami- gan Point, would be the best in Mindanao were it not for the very great depth of water in it. It penetrates some 10 miles from the entrance, and has an extreme width of 5 or (J miles about the middle of it. Pujada Island, 200 feet high, divides the entrance into two channels ; of these, the southern, although the narrowest, is the safest on account of the reefs on both sides of the northern channel; the reef of Pujada Island ex- tends 2 miles eastward, and ends in a flat-topped islet or rock; the sea breaks on this reef even at high water. Lamigan Point, the northern point of the bay, is said to be clean to seaward, but fringed on the side of the bay by a wide reef as far as Batiano Point, and should not be approached within -J- mile. Velasco Shoal, awash at low water, is rex)orted to lie SE. by E. of Piedra, with a depth of 18 fathoms between it and the point ; neither Velasco Shoal nor points Batiano and Piedra are given on the chart. The shore continues foul as far as the town of Mati ; a small creek, 3 miles ESE. of Mati, leads to an isthmus 40 yards wide, separating the bays of Pujada and Mayo. The natives haul their canoes across this neck of land and launch them in Mayo Bay. Mati is a small town, standing in a wide prairie land, sur- rounded by picturesque scenery ; the shore near it is steep-to, and there is a depth of 11 to 13 fathoms close in. Good water is obtainable, but provisions are scarce. The coast at the head of Pujada Bay makes several indentations, the principal of which is called Balete Port. Kamainsi Point, in this locality, is foul. Makambol Point, on the south side of Pujada Bay, ends in a reef, to the westward of which there is anchorage in 8 fathoms near the shore. A shoal of 2f fathoms water lies ofl: the j)oint. There are plantations of cocoanut and plantains on this part of the coast. Off Magun (not marked on the chart), east of Makambol, there is indifferent anchorage exposed to the sea. Tumadgo Point, the southern point of Pujada Bay, and also Alo Point, a little to the southward, are peaked and clean. Tides. — In Pujada Bay it is high water, full and change, at 7h. Springs rise 6 feet. Steamers from Zamboanga and Palak trade to Mati. The shores of the bay abound in good timber, such as Alintato, 174 BASIL AN DISTRICT. an ebony; Molavi, a teak; Caniunu, Counarus santaloides, useful as a cabinetmaker's wood ; and cedar. Cacao, coffee, and tapioca are cultivated ; mastic of good quality, wax, and honey are plentiful; deer and mountain hogs abound. Coast. — Luban Point, off which there is a small round islet, is clean and bold ; in a small bay to the northward of the point vessels can find shelter in 5i fathoms during the southwest monsoon, while waiting for favorable weather to round Cape San Augustin. The coast between Point Luban and Pujada Bay is clean, and presents several scarped points with patches of red cogonal on them. The coast between Point Luban and Cape San Augustin is high and clean, with little points of sand and rock. Currents on the east coast of Mindanao. — A constant current to the south has been observed on this coast, especially at a distance beyond 4 miles from the shore ; within this distance the tides preserve their influence in some places, but near the projecting points the current remains constant. To the north- ward of Mayo Bay (ch. 26, p. 173) this current shows itself in strong races, which increase on approaching Pusan Point, where they attain their greatest force. They are very vio- lent off Daguet Point, and also off points Lambajon and Kinablagan. In order to lessen the effect of the current, a vessel should keep at a good distance from shore. Near the coast the sea is always very rough and choppy, and vessels suffer a good deal from it. DISTRICT OF BASILAN. It is situated on an island to the south of Mindanao and opposite the District of Zamboanga, and is 21 miles long by 14 wide. The island is crossed in all directions by a mountain chain covered with luxuriant vegetation and abounding in streams of potable water. Three of its mountains have an altitude of from 3,300 to 3,000 yards. The products are rice and sugar cane. Starting from Mindanao it is connected with Borneo by a long chain of islets extending in a southwesterly direction. The population is 1'2,000. The capital is Isabela de Basilan, with a population of 1,300. It is situated about GOO miles from Manila, and is de- fended by a fort. ""^. m^ #%-^ ^t /I fe PI » \- o DFL PIKRTO DE POLLOK Ix.,,, ,^ J^ >^- f/^w^^^^f^i^ COTTABATO, DAPITAN, DAVAO. 175 DISTRICT OF COTTABATO. It is bounded on the north by the districts of Misamis and Surigao, on the east by Davao, and on the south and south- west by the Celebes Sea and the Bay of Illana. It is a mili- tary establishment. The capital is Cottabato, with a poi)ulation of 3,000. It is situated 138 miles from Manila. CITIES AND TOWNS. PoUok (ch. -2?, p. 1T5). — Population, 2'.)o; situated 10 miles from Cottabato. Tamontaco. — Population, 1,900; situated 3 miles from Cottabato. DISTRICT OF DAPITAX. Situated in the northern part of the island of Mindanao, it is bounded on the north by the Visayas Sea, on the east by Misamis, on the south by Zamboanga, and on the west by the Yisayas Sea. The area is 4 square miles and the population 12,615. The capital is Dapitan, with a population of 3,955. It is situated 190 miles from Zamboanga. CITIES AND TOWNS. Dipolo. — Population, 4,G11 ; situated miles from Dapitan. Hay a.— Population, 1,099. Lubungan. — Population, 5,157; situated 'iO miles from Dapitan. DISTRICT OF DAVAO. It is bounded on the north by the District of Surigao, on the west by that of Cottabato, and on the south and east by the Pacific. The country is very mountainous and covered with forests ; all vegetables grown in the rest of the archipel- ago are raised here. The population is 8,000. The capital is Davao. It is situated at the head of Davao Bay and opposite the island of Samar. CITIES AND TOWNS. Baganga. — Population, 2,700; situated 160 miles by water from Davao. Bago. — Population, 7,000; situated 15 miles from Davao. COTTABATO, DAPITAN, DAVAO. 175 DISTRICT OF COTTABATO. It is bounded on the north by the districts of Misamis and Surigao, on the east by Davao, and on the south and south- west by the Celebes Sea and the Bay of Illana. It is a mili- tary establishment. The capital is Cottabato, with a population of 3,000. It is situated 138 miles from Manila. CITIES AND TOWNS. Pollok (ch. 27, p. 175). — Population, 3U5; situated 10 miles from Cottabato. Tamontaco. — Population, 1,900; situated 3 miles from Cottabato. DISTRICT OF DAPITAN. Situated in the northern part of the island of Mindanao, it is bounded on the north by the Visayas Sea, on the east by Misamis, on the south by Zamboanga, and on the west by the Visayas Sea. The area is -4 square miles and the population 12,615. The capital is Dapitan, with a population of 3,955. It is situated 190 miles from Zamboanga. CITIES AND TOWNS. Dipolo. — Population, 4,611 ; situated 9 miles from Dapitan. Hay a. — Population, 1,099. Liubungan. — Population, 5,157; situated 20 miles from Dapitan. DISTRICT OF DAVAO. It is bounded on the north by the District of Surigao, on the west by that of Cottabato, and on the south and east by the Pacific. The country is very mountainous and covered with forests ; all vegetables grown in the rest of the archipel- ago are raised here. The population is 8,000. The capital is Davao. It is situated at the head of Davao Bay and opposite the island of Samar. CITIES AND TOWNS. Baganga. — Population, 2,700; situated 160 miles by water from Davao. Bago.— Population, 7,000; situated 15 miles from Davao. 176 MATTI AND MISAMIS. Caraga.— ^Population, 4,000; situated 175 miles Ijv water from Davao. Luzon. — Population, 7,477; situated 45 miles from Davao. Quinablagan. — Pojmlation, 500. DISTRICT OF MATTI. Situated in the northern j^art of the island of Mindanao, it is bounded on the north by Surigao, on the east and south by the Pacific, and on the west by Davao. The population is 9,764. The capital is Matti, with a jjopulation of 600. It is sit- uated 375 miles from Zamboanga. CITIES AND TOWNS. Baganga. — Population, 1,114; situated 50 miles from Matti. Caraga. — Population, 8,690; situated 65 miles from Matti. Cateel. — Population, 3,500; situated 115 miles from Matti. Dapuan. — Pojralation, 500. Quinablangan. — Population, 290. Sig-uboy. — Population, 900; situated 45 miles from Matti. DISTRICT OF MISAMIS. It is bounded on the north by that part of the sea which separates Mindanao from the Visayas, on the east and south by the District of Cottabato, and on the west by the District of Zamboanga, This district includes the island of Camiguin, situated to the northwest of Point Divata. Much rice and cacao is raised. The country comprised in the District of Misamis is mountainous, covered with thick forests, and very fertile. There are some gold mines, but they are not worked. The district is divided into 27 pueblos, 18 barrios, and 34 rancherias of subdued infieles. The population is 113,695. The capital is Cagayan, with a population of 9,405, CITIES AND TOWNS. Agusam. — Population, 934 ; situated 15 miles from Cagayan. Alorang. — Population, 2,700; situated 4 miles from Ca- gayan. Alubijit (ch. 17, p, 150).— Population, 6,716. Balingasac (ch. 15, p. 149). — Population, 3,948; situated 8 miles from Cagayan. misa:\iis district. 177 Catasman.— Population, 4,874; situated 50 miles from Cagavihi. Guim Liban. — Population, 1,875. Guingoog. — Population, 1,433; situated G5 miles from Cag-ayan. Guza. — Population, 790. Iligan.— Population, 6,020; situated G5 miles from Cagaj'an. Initao. — Population, 3,412, the township having 3,402; situated 45 miles from Cagayan. Iponan. — Population, 5,58G; situated 10 miles from Ca- gayan. Jasaau. — Population, 0,444; situated 22 miles from Ca- gayan. Jimenez. — Population, 8,707; situated 75 miles from Ca- gayan. Ijangarang. — Population, 11,779; situated 138 miles from Cagayan. Layonlong:. — Population, 1,834; situated 30 miles from Cagayan. Loculan. — Population, 2,110; situated 80 miles from Ca- gayan. Maguinog. — Population, 4, G87. Mambajao. — Population, 18,000; situated 53 miles from Cagayan. Maria Cristina. — Population, 140. Misamis. — Population, C,075; situated 85 miles from Ca- gayan. Mulugan.^Population, 1,044; situated 15 miles from Ca- gayan. Naanan. — Population, 890; situated 23 miles from Cagayan. Orbquieta. — Population, 9,000; situated G2 miles from Ca- gayan. Pigtao.- -Population, 354; situated 8 miles from Cagayan. Quiniquitam. — Population, 1,320; situated 50 miles from Caga^'cin. Sagay.— Population, 5,06G; situated 48 miles from Cagayan. Salay.— Population, 1,81G; situated 27 miles from Cagayan. Salvador. — Population, 2,845; situated 20 miles from Ca- gayan. Santa Ana. — Population, 881 ; situated 20 miles from Ca- gayan. Tagoloan. — Population, 3,378, the township having G,927. It is situated 12 miles from Cagavan. 178 SURIGAO DISTRICT. Talisayan.— Population, 1,G84; situated 55 miles from Ca- gayau. DISTRICT OF SURIGAO. Situated in the northern part of Mindanao, it is bounded on the north by the Sarigao Sea, on the east by the Pacific, on the south by the District of Davao, and on the west by the territory of the infieles. It is mountainous, but the Christian population resides on the coasts and in the northern point of the territory. The population is 95,775, distributed among 45 pueblos, 10 barrios, and 30 rancherias of subdued infieles. Abaca and palay are raised, and in the gold wash- ings considerable gold of good quality is found. The capital is Surigao (ch. 28, p. 178), with a population of 6,285. It is situated in the extreme north of the island, and is the residence of the governor, judge, and a number of officials. CITIES AND TOWNS. Anao-Aon. — Population, G02 ; situated 10 miles from Suri- gao. Bacnag.— Population, 569. Bislig. — Population, 7,583 ; situated 62 miles from Surigao. Butuan. — Population, 10,543; situated 75 miles from Suri- gao. Cabuntog. — Population, 4,175; situated 78 miles from Suri- gao. Cantilan. — Population, 10,026; situated 27 miles from Surigao. Carrascal. — Population unknown ; situated 45 miles from Surigao. Catel.— Population, 1,861. Dapa. — Population, 1,900. Dapuan. — Population, 407. Dinagat. — Population, 5,264; situated 12 miles from Suri- gao. Fabonga. — Population, 1 , 644. Gigaquit. — Population, 7,116. Ginatuan.— Population, 2,277. Lianga. — Population, 6,340. Mainit. — Population, 4,550; situated 70 miles from Suri- gao. Nonoc. — Population, 541. No. 28 PUERTO DE SURIGAO. ,ur^«?^ ij 90 «>,ti I^et-"^^ xff c/^'-f cmUttA. ZAMBOANOA DISTRICT. 179 Numancia. — Population, 4,111; situated 50 miles from Siirigao. Reunion.— Population, 2,272. San Juan. — Population, 335 ; situated 75 miles from Surigao. Sapao. — Population, 1,300. Taganaan. — Population, 1,562. Tago.— Population, 1,909. Tandag. — Population, 5,210; situated 85 miles from Suiigao. Tubay. — Population, 505 ; situated 70 miles from Surigao. DISTRICT OF ZAMBOANGA. Situated in the extreme southwestern part of Mindanao, it is bounded on the north and west by the Sea of Mindanao, on the south by the Strait of Basilan, and on the east by the dis- tricts of Misamis and Cottabato. All vegetables peculiar to the archipelago are grown, but there is no especial industry. The capital is Zamboanga, with a population of 21,300. It is a fortified place and a naval station, and has a fine bar- racks and the castle of San Felipe, which dominates the town and harbor. CITIES AND TOWNS. Ayala. — Population, 1,900; situated 9 miles from Zam- boanga, with which it is connected by highroads. Mercedes. — Population, 2,372 ; situated 10 miles from Zam- boanga. Santa Maria. — Population, 2,200; situated 1 mile from Zamboanga. Tetuan. — Population, 5,643; situated 1 mile from Zam- boanga, with which it is connected by highroads. -wmr M^^^lsi* sp ^r / -^x /^ -*. ■■~ - _ _^' ^- ^^ V ""■^.../..... ..>>^ OF THE IVERSIT^ PLAN O KSTRECHO IBUCHJSoBASHlv SAPXANG w ESCA3LA PARA Ul« PLAN08. -Ol Pt-ANO J>KL PUKRTO SANTO DOMINGO it ' ^^ DE BASCO. * z V No Jl, ■?^^ 7* ___«*"„ ./^ icmnB „*"''' »i J? u i .t Cfu^finr A-^j, Mu.ijcd del rOJVDSADRR O S^JOSEDEIBANA. „ « -t.- y ^^^ '.^3^'^ .-"l^ ^f ^ ^» «■ .a 73 ^ > ^ / P^^'MaJhuji; ADJACENT ISLANDS. ISLAND OF BALABAC. (Ch. 29, p. 181). A military establishment formed in 1857. Tlie island is situated in the strait of its name to the southwest of Paragua. It is 22 miles long, from north to south, and 14 miles from east to west, and has a population of 1,100. The ground is very irregular, the maximum altitude being 1,899 feet; tim- ber abounds and there is plenty of good arable land. The cajntal is Balabac, with a population of 200. It is situated on the Bay of Calandoran, and is surrounded by mountains of from 900 to 1,300 feet in height. It has a bar- racks, hospital, warehouse, armed fort, and pretty houses along the seashore. PROVINCE OF THE BATANES ISLANDS. This group of islands is situated in the Japan Sea, north of Manila and a few miles to the north of the Babuyanes Islands. The principal ones are Itbayal, Basay, Saptaii (ch. 30, p. 181), and Hugos. The area is 125 square miles and the population 9,4:5. The capital is Santo Domingo de Basco (ch. 31, p. 181), with a population of 2, 981. It was the residence of the politico- military governor, a judge, and an attorney-general (promo- tor fiscal). It is situated 504 miles from Manila. CITIES AND TOWNS. San Bartolome de Calayan. — Population, 1,722. San Carlos de Marigatao. — Population, 1,229. San Jose de Ibana (ch. 32, p. 181).— Population, 1,951; situated 13 miles from Santo Domingo de Basco. Santa Maria de Mayan. — PojDulation, 1,855. San Vicente de Sap tang.— Population, 1,753. (181) 182 BURIAS, CALAMIANES, CORREGIDOR. DISTRICT OF BURIAS. Situated on an island in tlie Strait of San Bernardino be- tween Luzon and Masbate, it is bounded on the north by Camarines Sur, on the east by the Strait of San Bernardino, on the south by Masbate, and on the west by Tayabas. It is 34 miles long by 13 wide, and the population is 1,601, dis- tributed among one pueblo and five barrios. The country is mountainous, with much timber, but the latter is hard to cut and bring to harbor; aome stock is kept. The capital is San Pascual, situated 214 miles from Manila. PROVINCE OF CALAMIANES. The Calamianes Islands are situated to the southeast of Ma- nila, and are composed of the islands of Busungan, Calamianes, Linapocan, Cuyo, Dumaran, Agutaya, and the northern part of Paragua, ceded by the Sultan of Borneo to Spain at the end of the past century. They are bounded on the north and west by the China Sea, on the east by the Visayas Sea, and on the south by the island of Paragua. They have an area of 340 square miles and a population of 10,500. The island of Cuyo, 10 miles long by 4 wide, is surrounded by islets. It is thickly X3opulated, and has a small but safe harbor, defended by an armed battery. In Agutaya is another small fortress; the inhabitants of this island receive arms and ammunition from the government. Calamianes is 24 miles long by 11 wide, and has one fortress. Coron is sterile, but has a source of wealth in its edible birds' nests, for which the Chinese pay double their weight in silver. In Paragua reside the governor, the judge, the promotor, and a disciplinary company. Spanish authority is recognized only by the inhabitants who live within 62 miles of the coast, the remainder living miserably in a savage state. The capital is Cuyo, with a population of 8,258. It is sit- uated on the island of Paragua. CITIES AND TOWNS. Agutaya. — Population, 2,046; situated 12 miles from Cuyo. Culion (ch. 33, p. 182).— Population, 3,500. Taytay.— Population, 2,331. PROVINCE OF CORREGIDOR. It is situated to the west, south, and east of Manila, at the very mouth of Manila Bay, and between the provinces of >;■ V^V t .:..., 1 e «0 '<% i« ""'"■>-'■> ; A r >\ i~- r~ «j r " r - \_^ ^ » ^o' 'V \..'' «^-^'-.. ...u. , i>- ""X. CALAMIOir OB CULION I FORTCULION f^ Fort Lat.U? SS.'&S'K.Lon^.LSOro'. 63' B. N3,h4. -y' X/ / \ v> \ ^s>;^4. :>. ^'^ PORT K^AINGAM 4./' ? '■■** *"*— ^J , FC^ETlq Froza a. Spanish. >Tm H H si a- MASBATE AND TICAO, AND MINDOKO. 183 Cavite and Bataaii, and is about 'i miles long by 1 mile, wide. The ground, tliougli high and broken, holds good veg- etation, and game is abundant. There is a semaphore station and a lighthouse, the employees of which constitute the greater part of the inhabitants, although there was a small military and naval garrison. There was a politico-military governor. The area is 16 square miles and the population 5(i9. The capital is San Jose, with a population of 514. It is situated 27 miles from Manila. PROVINCE OF MASBATE (clis. U, 35, and 86, p. 188) AND TICAO. It is composed of the two above-named islands, situated to the south of Luzon and north of Visayas. The former is 62 miles long by 20 wide and the latter 27 miles long by 13 wide; both are mountainous and very fertile, good tobacco and other products being raised. There are gold mines, abundant tim- ber, resins, gums, rattan, etc. There is considerable gold in the river sands. The area is 123 square miles and the popula- tion 26,497, divided among 10 pueblos and 15 visitas. The capital is Masbate, with a population of 2,345. CITIES AND TOWNS. Baleno.— Population, 923 ; situated 10 miles from Masbate. Lauang.— Population, 1,294; situated 9 miles from Mas- bate. Milagros.— Population, 1,789; situated 13 miles from Mas- bate. Mobo. — Population, 1,896; situated ^ mile from Masbate. Mogpoc. — Population, 5,214; situated 10 miles from Mas- bate. Palanas.— Population, 2,749. San Agustin.— Population, 1,129. San Fernando.— Population, 2,367. San Jacinto. — Population, 2,459; situated 11 miles from Masbate. Uson.— Population, 2,105; situated 56 miles from Masbate. ISLAND AND PROVINCE OF MINDORO. The island and ^jrovince of Mindoro lies in the strait of its name and south of Luzon. It has in the center an elevated plain from which many sierras extend in different directions MASBATE AND TICAO, AND MINDOKO. 183 Cavite and Bataan, and is about 'Z miles long hy 1 niih) wide. The ground, tliougli high and broken, holds goc^d veg- etation, and game is abundant. There is a semaphore station and a lighthouse, the employees of which constitute the greater part of tlie inhabitants, although there was a small military and naval garrison. There was a politico-military governor. The area is IG square miles and the population 5(i!). The capital is San Jose, with a population of 514. It is situated 27 miles from Manila. PROVINCE OF MASBATE (clis. 84, 35, and 86, p. 188) AND TICAO. It is composed of the two above-named islands, situated to the south of Lnzon and north of Visayas. The former is G2 miles long by 20 wide and the latter 27 miles long by 13 wide; both are mountainous and very fertile, good tobacco and other products being raised. There are gold mines, abundant tim- ber, resins, gums, rattan, etc. There is considerable gold in the river sands. The area is 123 square miles and the popula- tion 26,497, divided among 10 pueblos and 15 visitas. The capital is Masbate, with a population of 2,345. CITIES AND TOWNS. Baleno. — ^Population, 923 ; situated 10 miles from Masbate. Lauang.— Population, 1,294; situated 9 miles from Mas- bate. Milagros. — Population, 1,789; situated 13 miles from Mas- bate. Mobo.— Population, 1,896; situated i mile from Masbate. Mogpoc— Population, 5,214; situated 10 miles from Mas- bate. Palanas.— Population, 2,749. San Agustin.-- -Population, 1,129. San Fernando.— Population, 2,367. San Jacinto.— P()pulation, 2,459; situated 11 miles from Masbate. Uson. — -Population, 2,105; situated 50 miles from Masbate. ISLAND AND PROVINCE OF MINDORO. The island and province of Mindoro lies in the strait of its name and south of Luzon. It has in the center an elevated plain from which many sierras extend in different directions 184 MINDORO — NORTH COAST. to the coast, making the latter rugged and dangerous. The island is of an oval form, with a prolongation of the northern portion toward the west. Though an easy day's sail from Manila, it is one of the least populous islands of the archi- pelago, being extremely mountainous, covered with dense forests, and in the more level parts near the coast full of marshes, and very unhealthful. The inhabitants of the coast are Tagals, but in the interior there is a low tribe of the Malayan race, probably the indigenes of the island, and called Mangui- anos, speaking a peculiar language and living in a very mis- erable manner on the products of a rude agriculture. There are also said to be some Negritos, but of these very little is known. There are many short streams. The island is 110 miles long and has an area of 3,087 square miles. The popu- lation is 106,170. There is little known of the mountains of the interior, as the inhabitants dwell mainly on the coasts. Mindoro constitutes one of the provinces of the Philippines under an alcalde. The capital is Calapan, with a jDopulation of 5,585. It is situated to the north, on the harbor of its name, defended by a fort of regular construction ; it has about 500 houses, among the notable stone ones being the parish, courthouse and jail, and casa real. It is the residence of the alcalde mayor and several public functionaries. The city is situated 9(3 miles from Manila. ITINERARY OF COAST OF MINDORO — NORTH COAST. Mount Kalavite is a long-backed promontory, the western slope of which forms Cape Kalavite, and the northern slope Point del Monte; the summit, about 2,000 feet high, appears dome-shaped when seen from the west, but from the north or south it shows a long ridge fairly level; the western end of this ridge is the highest part. Binuangan Point, 3 miles NNE. of Cape Kalavite, resem- bles it in appearance, and is bold to approach, the few rocks interspersed along this part of the coast lying close in. Anchorage. — South of Binuangan Point there is a small bight with a sand beach, in front of which there is anchorage during the northeast monsoon in 5^ fathoms, sand, at 1| cables from the beach. A rivulet of good water enters here. There MINDORO — NORTH COAST. 185 is another anchorage immediately north of Cape Kalavite, bnt it is not so good. Point del Monte, or Santo Tomas, is of sand, with a small bank of 1 fathom water off it ; between it and Abra de Ilo, 15 miles to the eastward, the coast is high, thickly wooded, and bordered by sand beaches. Point Bagalayag is girt with rocks which extend a mile along the coast. Abra de Ilo is a cove between two coast hills; the shore is very low and sandy, semicircular in form, of 3 miles across, but of little depth. Toward the middle there flows a river of fresh water, which can only be entered by small coasters and bancos at high water. The bottom is of sand, and the anchor- age gives shelter to vessels of all sizes in southwest winds, in 3 to 12 fathoms; but good ground tackle is required, as the squalls offshore are very violent. Coast. — From Abra de Ilo to Port Galera the coast can be approached in safety to \ mile ; the coast is of moderate height, and shows a few points separated by beaches. The high land approaches the coast, and two water courses descend from the ravine. Point Minolo, 2 miles west of Port Galera, is covered with trees ; on its eastern side is a beach, before which anchorage can be had on sand and gravel. The shore is steep, and there are 25 to 30 fathoms at 3 cables from it. Port Galera is formed by a promontory from the coast of Mindoro and the islets Medio and Panikian. These islets, situated at the entrance of the bay, close it to the westward, forming the port, which is a sort of canal, or silanga, with two passages, one to the northward and the other to the north- west, the opening between Panikian and the coast being a blind lead (Boca falsa). The flood stream passes into the port by the northwest chan- nel and out by the north channel, and then follows to the east- ward, the reverse taking jjlace with the ebb stream. This fact must be remembered in making the port. From Point Escarceo, the eastern point of the promontory, to the north point of Medio, the shore presents a uniform appearance, and the north channel is difficult to discover, biit a signal post over the northeast point of entrance and a remarkable white patch like a sail on the fall of the point are marks which indicate it. The beaches are small, and the land above covered with trees. 186 MINDORO — NORTH COAST. Medio is about 8 cables in extent, NNW. and SSE., clean; and the soundings round it show i fathoms at less than a cable's distance in general ; the reef that fringes the northern shore grows out but a very little way. The north point, where there is a great tide race, is worn away and shows bare rocks; from it to the SSW. the coast is high and jagged. Panikian is a little over a mile long, north and south ; there is a reef on its east side, and the soundings off it are 4 fath- oms at less than a cable; the northwest shore is high and rugged to the south ; it ends in a sandy point, forming with Mindoro a channel ^ cable wide, closed by sand ; this is called "Boca Falsa." Directions — NortJi Channel. — After clearing the north j)oint of Mindoro, keep in the middle of the channel, where the depth is 6| fathoms, coarse -sand and rock ; it is a cable wide at the entrance, biit lessens to ^ cable abreast of the east point of Medio, which is low and bordered with a sand bank. The tidal streams are strong enough to expose a vessel, badly equipped, to being thrown on the rocks that terminate the points. Northwest Channel. — This must not be confounded with Boca Falsa, south of Panikian. A vessel coming from the westward should steer for the middle of Medio, and on nearing it a clump of mangroves on the southwest point will be made out ; she should then steer in that direction until the entrance is opened, and then keep in the middle of the channel to the anchorage. This channel is narrowed at the entrance to | cable's width by the rocks off' the southwest jjoint of Medio, but it widens inside to 2 cables ; the least depth is 6y fathoms at the entrance, increasing inside to 15 fathoms. During the northeast monsoon the north channel is the best, but with sailing ships even that channel is dangerous, as calms or baffling winds may be met, and then the vessel would be at the mercy of the tide. During that monsoon the anchorage at Varadero is prefer- able, although for sailing vessels going out it would be diffi- cult at that time. Anchorage. — The available space inside the islands is con- siderably reduced by projections from the promontory of Mindoro of low land with shoal water between them, and by a shoal that advances from the southern part, having on its northeastern end rocks that wash at very low water. The MINDORO — NORTH COAST. 187 anchorage is iu a confined creek in the southwest part ; at tlie entrance, which is 1^ cables wide, the depth is 6^ fathoms, shoaling toward the town at the bottom. At 1^ cables north of the mouth there is another shoal with rocks awash at low water on its southern part. Between this shoal and Boca Falsa there is a space of 1^ cables width, and 7 to 10 fathoms depth, which would appear to afford better anchorage. Point Escarceo, so named from the tide rips off it, is of jagged rock, covered with trees ; the shore between it and Point Boaga, 1| miles to the SE., is clear, with deep water off it. The currents run here with great velocity, causing strong eddies. Varadero Bay is open to the SE. ; it is 4:| cables across at the mouth, ^ mile in depth, and affords an excellent anchor- age for all classes of vessels in both monsoons, especially during the southwest season, when the heavy squalls pass to the northward of it. It is decidedly preferable to Port Galera, especially in bad weather. The best anchorage for large vessels is in 7 to 10 fathoms, SE. by E. of Port Galera, at 3 cables' distance from the sand beach, between two points of rock at the bottom of the bay. Point Boaga, the northern point, is clear, but the southern point, Varadero, sends out rocks to a cable's distance, which wash at low water. This point, therefore, must be given a wide berth. Suban is a little town on the summit of a hill, at a distance of G miles SSE. of Point Escarceo. Near the town is a bay, with anchorage sheltered from the SW. in 7 fathoms, sand. Shoal. — The Spanish Derrotero describes a shoal growing- out to the NE. for i of a mile from the western point of this bay. This is not shown on the Spanish chart, but there is on the chart a shoal of 3^ fathoms at 1^ miles east of the town. The Derrotero remarks that this reef is dangerous, as the water over it is of the same color as that surrounding it. The French "Instructions Nautiques" note that to the east of the town, at ^ mile from the shore, is the farthest point of a bank of sand and rock, on the edge of which is 3^ fathoms. Coast. — From the Bay of Suban the coast curves gently round to the eastward, and at the distance of 3 miles a delta commences, formed by the washings of the river Bako and others, producing 4 miles of confused coast line, cut into by bars and passages as far as Point Baliti, the western point of the Bay of Calapan. 188 MINDORO— NORTH COAST. Soundings. — From tlie mouth of the river Bake toward the islets Bakos the soiiiidiiigs are 4^ fathoms at f of a cable's distance, 75 at 2 cables, and no bottom at 109 fathoms at 3 cables' distance off Point Baliti. Tlie reef of sand and rocks extends to 3^ cables' distance. Calapan. — This is the capital of the Province of Mindoro. The inhabitants are occupied in hunting, fishing, and ordi- nary weaving. The commerce is insignificant. Sand banks extend in front of the town to a distance of \ mile. To clear these, the northern Silonai islet should not be shut out by Point Calapan. On this line, near the north edge of the banks, the soundings are 36 to 4G fathoms. This depth rapidly lessens toward the shore, and the anchor should be let go when the lead shows 25 fathoms, to avoid shooting onto the bank. Directions. — The safest course for entering or leaving this bay is to keep in the middle of the passage between the Bakos Islets and the coast of Calapan, and when the southernmost of these islets bears north to steer for the anchorage. Point Calapan, or Tibao, is low and wooded and has on its summit a cogonal or reed plantation ; the point is clear, but a fringe of rocks close to the beach continues to the SE. with 40 fathoms close to it. Silonai Islets. — The small southern islet of that name is 1 mile ESE. of Point Calaj^an; it is shaped like a sugar loaf and surrounded by rocks. The channel between it and the coast is only fit for coasters, having a depth of less than 5 fathoms. At ^ mile from it, and 1 mile NE. by E. of Point Calapan, is the larger Silonai islet; it is fringed with rocks which advance on the northern side to 1^ cables' distance. Between the islets the passage is 3 cables wide and 20 fathoms deep. Vessels should be careful to keep in the middle of it. Bakos Islets. — This is a group of three rocky islets ex- tending 2 miles NE. and SW., situated NNW. 2^ miles from Point Calapan. The vicinity is foul, and the chart shows a danger on the northern side of the northern islet. A shoal of 1^ fathoms lies 1 mile SW. of South Bakos. In the middle of the passage between the northern and middle Bakos there are rocks which uncover ; in the other channels the depth is suffi- cient, but the rapid currents that prevail here should prevent a vessel from taking them. MINDORO — NORTHEAST COAST. 189 NORTHEAST COAST. From Point Calapaii (Tibao) to Naujan, 13 miles to the SE., the coast is low, with beaches of sand and thick wood, cut into by various rivulets and estuaries which can only be en- tered by boats at high water. At a distance of 1 cable from the shore the soundings are 4^ to 7 fathoms, sand and mud, and at ^ mile from Naujan 5^ to 8 fathoms, fine sand. The rivers to the JMW. of Naujan send out sand banks with only ^ of a fathom on them to 2 cables' distance. The cliart shows a shoal at f of a mile from the shore. Naujan River and Bar. — The river Naujan can be entered only by boats, the width at the mouth being only 1 cable, and fronted by an extensive bar with 12 to 3 feet of water on it. There is anchorage 1 mile SE. of the river in 9 fathoms, sand and mud, shoaling gradually toward the coast. From Naujan to Polak Bay the coast is steep, and 37 fathoms depth will be found at a distance of 1 mile. Point Tujud has a large, isolated rock or cliff off its east side, joined to the coast by a rocky spit. Point Taguvan, 1 mile SE. of Point Tujud, has detached rocks off it, with 10 fathoms of water near them. Polak Bay, open to the NE., is clear of dangers; the depth at the mouth is 35 fathoms, lessening to 9 fathoms at 2 cables from the beach at the bottom of the bay. Point Anahauan, the northeast point, is fringed with a reef to a distance of 3 cables from it, with 2^ to 5 fathoms at its edge. The bottom of the bay is a sand beach, 2 miles long, between two rivers. Fresh water can be obtained in boats from the eastern river. Point Dumali, the eastern extreme of Mindoro Island, and formed by the termination of the shoulder of Mount Dumali, is high, peaked, and easily recognized by a great white patch 400 feet above the sea. The soundings are 49 fathoms oft" the point and 37 fathoms at less than a mile from the rounded coast to the southward. Directions for Verde Island Passage. — After rounding Cape Santiago at the distance of a mile, SE. by E. \ E. is a good course until abreast the south point of Marikaban Island, and thence to pass between Verde Island and Point Makoto, in Luzon. Verde Island can also be passed on the south side, as the ledge of rock on the southeast point of Verde does not project more than a cable's length, and the northern Bako is 100 MINDORO— EAST COAST. clear at a short distance; but the lun'tli channel is generally preferred . When the northeast point of Verde Island is passed, a course SE. ^ E. will lead 1 mile east of the northern Bako islet and, if continued for 40 miles, will pass 4 miles XE. of Dumali Point; thence a course S. 8° E. may be steered to pass down, the west coast of Panay. EAST COAST. From Point Dumali south, as far as Pinamalayan River, the shore is steep-to; from there on to Point Dayagan the coast is clean and consists of sand beaches which may be approached without danger to within a mile, and vessels can anchor anywhere along it, sheltered from westerly winds, in 4 fathoms at a distance of 2 miles and in 3 fathoms at 1 mile. In the elbow of the coast NW. of Point Abongabon, off the river Masi, there is excellent anchorage for all vessels in southwest gales, in 4 to 7 fathoms, sand. A reef of rocks awash at low water extends 2 cables out from the river. The charts do not show many soundings about this coast. Point Dayagan is flat and sandy, steep-to and clean, with 4 and 5 fathoms depth at li cables from it. Point Tiklin, or Lagaoin, 4^ miles SW. of Point Dayagan, is flat and sandy ; at less than ^ mile ESE. of it there is a bank of rocks of 1 cable extent, uncovered at low water, with 3f fathoms at its edge. One mile farther out to the SE. there is another bank, of 3 cables extent, awash at low water, with 4 to 8 fathoms at its edge. The channel between these shoals has 15 fathoms in the middle. Mansalai Bay is small but well sheltered, with good hold- ing ground. Vessels of all sizes can anchor in it, sheltered Crom all winds except the SE. The best anchorage in the north- oast monsoon is in the north of the bay, in 7 fathoms, mud, at 2 or 3 cables from the shore. The town of Mansalai is small, of 300 persons. Water can be had from a rivulet, but with dif- ficulty, as boats can not enter. Direct ions. — In coming to this anchorage from the north, do not bring Point Dayagan to eastward of north until the entrance of the bay is made out to the west, in order to clear the Lagaoin Banks, which partly uncover at low water. In entering the port, care must be taken not to approach the north shore, which is bordered by a reef. There is a depth MINDORO — EAST COAST. 191 of 5 fathoms in the middle of the port, and in the southern part 1 to 3 fathoms, sand, at 3 cables from the shore. On the north coast of the bay there is a hill of some height with two remarkable peaks, which serve to mark the port on coming from the south. Point Mansiol is wooded, and can be distinguished by the two islets near it to the ENE., both surrounded by rocks. South of the point is a little bay in which coasters can anchor in 5^ fathoms. Buyallao Island is 1^ miles in extent, NW. and SE., of regular height, densely wooded, and fringed with rocks on its northwest side to 1 cable distance; two sharp-pointed rocks are at its northeast end. Point Buyallao is of peaked rocks, covered with trees, with little hills in the interior by which it may be easily dis- tinguished. It is clear, and has a depth of 8 fathoms at its sides. Soguikai Bay is bordered with steep beaches, near which are rocks; the depth is 7 to 18 fathoms at 1 cable from the shore ; small vessels can anchor, in case of necessity, in one of the creeks in the bay. Soguikai Island is low and surrounded with a reef; the passage between this island and the coast has 15 fathoms. There are rocks to the NW. of the island. Point Pandan is rounded and of middling height; a reef advances 1| cables from it, Avith 54- to 7 fathoms, rock, at its edge. Tambaron Island is safe and steep, and separated from Pandan Peninsula by a channel ^ cable wide and 8 fathoms deep, rocky bottom. Masin Island is also safe and steep, except on the south side, off which there is a reef. On the west side there is a little bay where coasters can anchor. Bulalakao Bay offers shelter from all but southerly winds ; it has 23 fathoms at the entrance, and 12 fathoms in the mid- dle, shoaling to 4 fathoms, sand, near the sand beach at the head, where three rivers enter, near the village of Bulalakao. The east coast of the bay is covered with trees, and on that side there is a little cove named Laurigau, sheltered from all winds, with a depth of 13 to 16 fathoms, mud. No supplies can be obtained at Bulalakao. The islets Alibatan, Silat, and Aslom are surrounded with rocks. The passages formed between them, and with the coast 192 MINDORO — EAST COAST. of Mindoro, are clear and deep. There is a little anchorage for coasters between Aslom and the coast of Mindoro. Point Burankan is free from danger, and can be passed close- to. The Semirara Islands fc^rni a group of eight islands, all surrounded by reefs. Semirara, the largest of the group, is hilly, about 512 feet high at the highest part. The west coast includes several little bays almost entirely obstructed by reefs, on the edge of which are depths of 4f to 13 fathoms; and off the town of Semirara, which stands on the top of the hill facing the largest bay, the anchorage is very bad, even for coasters. The east coast is bordered by a reef, which extends about a mile from the northeast part of the island; on coming from the north this coast of the island must not be approached within 3 miles until the town of Semirara bears full west. There is anchor- age at the south of the island in 5 to 8 fathoms, sand, during the northeast monsoon. Good coal for steaming purposes was found on the island by Captain Yillavicencio of the Spanish navy. Libagao Island is small, 410 feet high at its northern part, while the southern jDart is low and sandy, terminating in a reef which grows out more than a mile. Nagubat is small and flat ; at 1^ miles to the eastward is a shoal of 4:^ fathoms which appears to unite with the island. The channel between Nagubat and Libagao is deep, as well as that between Nagubat and Semirara ; vessels can pass at 1 cable from the south part of Nagubat. Kaluya is 623 feet high at the south part ; there is a bay on the west of the island with low shore and sandy beach, on the northeast part of which there is anchorage in 5^ fathoms, with the north part of the bay bearing N. 27° W. and the south point S. 6° W. Sibaton is separated from Kaluya by a channel of 3 fathoms, which appears practicable for very small craft. It is 111 feet high and unsafe to approach. Sibolon, 1-48 feet high, is also unsafe to approach. Sibai is 213 feet high; its northwest point rises to a peak and is clean, and its north coast can be passed at ^ mile dis- tance, but the west side is unsafe. Islands East of Mindoro. — Maestre de Campo Island, lying SE. 11 miles from the southeast shore of the lofty prom- ontory formed by Mount Dumali in Mindoro, is of circular MINDORO — EAST COAST. 19o form 3i miles in diameter, higli, mountainous, and thickly wooded, with very steep shores, only affording anchorage to small craft. The summit of Maestre de Campo, when seen from the eastward, appears like a ridge with three distinct hillocks, estimated to be 700 feet high. Port Concepcion, on the southeast side, is the principal anchorage ; it is very small but deep and easy of access, of 5^ cables width at the mouth between Point San Martin and Point Fernandez, and of the same extent NNW. ; a tongue of land advancing 4 cables SSE. from the head of the port divides it into two bays ; in the westernmost of these there is anchorage for very small vessels in 8 to 10 fathoms, sand and mud, in front of the town of Concepcion. The interior of the port is lined by a rocky steep reef. Dos Hermanas are two flat islets of rock, 138 feet high, sep- arated by a deep channel li miles in width ; the shores are clear and steep. Banton Island is 1,918 feet high, peaked and rugged, and steep on all sides except the SE., Avhich is bordered by a reef of small extent. It presents some shallow bays, and on the northeast part is a village of some size, near which is anchor- age for coasters in 5 fathoms, with a hawser to the shore to prevent swinging. On the west coast there is good anchorage in the northeast monsoon in 7 fathoms, sand, between the northwest point of the island and a tiny islet south of it. Good scope of chain would be required, as the anchor is liable to slip off the steep bank. Bantoncillo Islet, 256 feet high, lies SW. 3 miles from Banton. It is f of a mile long, north and south, and very narrow ; off its southern end is a pinnacle rock. There are 73 fathoms off the northwest end, and off the southeast end 45 fathoms, almost touching the extremities of the islaiid. Simara Island is 870 feet high, flat-topped and well culti- vated, and can be approached with safety. There are 40-f athom soundings at 4- mile from the northern end ; on the south side there is a village with a church and fort, but there is no anchorage off the island. Tablas Island is mountainous, and on its northern ex- tremity is the peak Cabezo de Tablas, 2,405 feet high; gen- erally the coasts are clear and steep-to. Off the north end are two rocky islets, distant 1 cable from the coast ; the larger one is clear and steep, the smaller one has rocks around it. 10-i MINDORO — EAST COAST, close to. On the west coast there are anchorages for small craft in the northeast monsoon, and on that side is the sheltered port of Loog. From Point Bagulayan, the south- west point of a wide bay on the west coast, a reef projects a mile to tlie northward ; the chart shows 10 fathoms near its end. Port Loog (ch. 37, p. 194) is the only shelter on the west coast of Tablas during the southwest monsoon. The port is about 4 miles in extent, north and south, and three miles east and west. The shores are steep, and the depth of water is from 11 to 20 fathoms, mud. The entrance points are more than a mile apart, but the channel is reduced to the width of I mile by a reef that projects to a distance of 6 cables from the northern point. Within and before the mouth there is a shoal of rock 4 cables long, NE. and SW., and 2 cables wide, steep-to, with depths of 5^ to 9 fathoms on the south side. The town of Loog is on the north shore. Anchorage. — During the northeast monsoon vessels of all sizes can anchor on the north side of the harbor, before the town, in 9 fathoms ; and during the southwest monsoon, on the south side at 3 or 4 cables from the shore in 15 fathoms, mud. In entering Port Loog the southern point of the entrance should be made for, and sailing vessels working in should be conned by sight. Water. — Near the northern side of the town of Loog there is a river of good water in which light boats can enter. Point Kabalian, the south point of the island, ends in a sand beach, with 11 fathoms at the edge and no bottom, with 100 fathoms at a short distance. Point Kalaton, on the southeast coast, is formed by a high bluff, which advances 1^ niiles from the coast, with sound- ings of 5^ to 12 fathoms alongside it. In the bay formed by the point and the islet Kabahan to the southward there is anchorage in 5i to 11 fathoms, with Point Kalaton bearing NE. Shoal. — At 5 miles north of Point Kalaton and 2| miles from the coast near the town Lanan, there is a shoal of sand and rock 1^ miles in diameter, with 5^ fathoms on the shal- lowest part, and no bottom with 100 fathoms near the eastern edge. Tambolon Bay is the name of the wide bay to the south- ward, of the Cabezo or northeast point of Tablas. In this bay /\ V "^^ vt ^^^^.14. ■■•'"<.>-..^ TABLAS ISLAND PORT LOOG ~. 1853 i-„^. i^z, j„V -"' • ■ ">^ ^ " v X/ V ,, "- "-"!/■ -'^ \ / :l X. ~- \ ^ .-. H ^ "T^^aLmS^^ CtJtita'ated in mar0' puuw #' V>' 3S 39 37 .^1. MINDORO if PALUAN BAT SnrveyBd by COMMANDER W T lATE. R J[ 1854 RUf of TUU about 5 frrt. MINDORO — WEST COAST. l')5 vessels can find shelter in the southwest monsoon, but the water is very deep. There are 8 fathoms very near the coast, bottom fine sand, with the western entrance to Port Romblon bearing E. by S. The shore is steep, bordered by rocks very close to it. From the southern part of the bay, 4 miles from the northeast point, a ledge of rocks juts out to a dis- tance of f of a mile. The channel between the northeast point of Tablas and the islands Romblon and Cobrador is 3^ miles wide and free from danger. It is the passage usually taken from Verde Island Passage to Jintotolo Channel. Karabao Island is hilly, and rises to a peak 718 feet high. Its shores are clear j^d steep; the rocks that fringe it are very close ; on the east side there is a sand beach where, in need, vessels can anchor in 5 fathoms. The channel between Karabao and Borakai is clear, but the tide streams are very strong. The flood makes to the east and the ebb to the west. Borokai Island lies 1 mile to the northward and westward of Point Potol in Panay, and extends -i miles NNW. ; the summit is 436 feet high ; the shores are safe. On the west side there is 5^ fathoms, where anchorage can be had if re- quired ; the channel between it and Potol is clear, but there are rocks on both sides of it, and the tide streams rush through it with great force. WEST COAST. The west coast of Mindoro Island has no soundings off it excepting in the bays, or within 1 or 2 miles of the shore in some places. In the interior double and treble chains of mountains extend through the island, and some low points of land project from them into the sea. Cape Kalavite, the northwestern extremity of Mindoro, is in latitude 13° 26' north, longitude 120° 18' E. Between it and Paluan Bay there are soundings near the shore, which is bold to approach ; for the few rocks interspersed along this part of the coast, adjacent to the cape, lie close in, and one of them, just above the water, has a sandy beach adjoining, upon the projecting part of the coast that forms the cape. Over this point stands Mount Kalavite, which is of regular sloping form, and visible at a great distance in clear weather. Paluan Bay (ch. 38, p. 195) affords excellent shelter in the northeast monsoon, and is also a convenient place for vessels r i -. ■ - ^ '""^^ t^^i^^^^^ii^t'^^ ^\^_jif--" •-o*'^^' ^^*^'»''K^M'M O I? \ BAT St BATE. KJf. -:.29i\6-z. out 5 lift. and, %X. atones. 'ATMOtrtS ^x'ooo MINDORO — WEST COAST. Itt5 vessels can find shelter in the southwest monsoon, but the water is very deep. There are 8 fathoms very near the coast, bottom fine sand, with the western entrance to Port Romblon bearing E. by S. The shore is steep, bordered by rocks very close to it. From the southern part of the bay, 4 miles from the northeast point, a ledge of rocks juts out to a dis- tance of f of a mile. The channel between the northeast point of Tablas and the islands Romblon and Cobrador is 3^ miles wide and free from danger. It is the passage usually taken from Verde Island Passage to Jintotolo Channel. Karabao Island is hilly, and rises to a peak 718 feet high. Its shores are clear j^d steep ; the rocks that fringe it are very close ; on the east side there is a sand beach where, in need, vessels can anchor in 5 fathoms. The channel between Karabao and Borakai is clear, but the tide streams are very strong. The flood makes to the east and the ebb to the west. Borokai Island lies 1 mile to the northward and westward of Point Potol in Panay, and extends 4 miles NNW. ; the summit is 436 feet high ; the shores are safe. On the west side there is 5^ fathoms, where anchorage can be had if re- quired ; the channel between it and Potol is clear, but there are rocks on both sides of it, and the tide streams rush through it with great force. WEST COAST. The west coast of Mindoro Island has no soundings off it excepting in the bays, or within 1 or 2 miles of the shore in some places. In the interior double and treble chains of mountains extend through the island, and some low points of land project from them into the sea. Cape Kalavite, the northwestern extremity of Mindoro, is in latitude 13° 26' north, longitude 120° 18' E. Between it and Paluan Bay there are soundings near the shore, which is bold to approach; for the few rocks interspersed along this part of the coast, adjacent to the cape, lie close in, and one of them, just above the water, has a sandy beach adjoining, upon the projecting part of the coast that forms the cape. Over this point stands Mount Kalavite, which is of regular sloping form, and visible at a great distance in clear weather. Paluan Bay (ch. 38, p. 195) affords excellent shelter in the northeast monsoon, and is also a convenient place for vessels 190 MINDORO — WEST COAST. to obtain supplies wlien passing through Mindoro Strait. The bay is 5 miles wide at entrance, of a semicircular form, running back 3 miles in a northerly direction. There are no dangers in it. Reefs, dry at low water, extend i of a mile from either point of entrance, having deep water close to them. The. soundings at the entrance are from 45 to 50 fathoms, ^ mile to the southward of which they increase to 200 fathoms. The best anchorage is in the northeastern extremity of the bay, in 14 fathoms (to which the water suddenly shoals from 20 fathoms), less than a mile from the beach, and west from a small isolated head, upon which a hut is erected. There is a black rock close to it, standing a few yards in front of a sandy beach, which shows in good reli^ef. The bottom con- sists of a black tenacious mud, from which it is difficult to extricate the anchor after it has been down a few days. Water. — A small river disembogues immediately on the north side of the cliff, where good water can be obtained with facility; and on the beach there is plenty of driftwood. The coral projects i mile from the entrance of the river, and has 10 and 12 fathoms close to its edge. Caution. — Care must be taken when working into Paluan Bay, for the squalls come violently off the high land, are very sudden, and at night do not give the least warning. Tubile Point has on its southern side two islets, which, as well as the point, are very steep-to, with 32 and 40 fathoms outside them and very close to them. From the point the coast trends eastward, forming a bay full of rocks. Mamburao Reef extends about 3 miles to the southward, and has a depth of 1 fathom over it at low water. Anchor- age can be obtained opposite the mouth of the Mamburao River, to the westward of the reef, in 4i fathoms, mud and sand, with shelter from north and east winds. The coast from Mamburao Reef trends southeastward to Talabasi Point, and is low, with sandy shores. From this point, which is surrounded by a rocky shore, the coast con- tinues to the southeast to Sablayan Point. The two islands of Pandan are situated to the north of Sab- layan Point. Protection may be obtained during the south- west monsoon by anchoring close to the eastward of the southern island, in 7 to 14 fathoms, mud. In order to reach this anchorage, pass to the northward or between the islands. Sablayan Anchorage (ch. 39, p. 196) has a total width of 8 DFX Pi /esmafat/o ado dWTimiim Jr^ ^ in-f..^ !, ,,r,>UaJu TabUdcr I(.«-l~_ K_ ^.. I MIXDORO — WEST COAST. 1!)7 cables between Sablayan Point and the coast to the eastward, but the available space is reduced one-half by reefs on both sides, and the northern part is filled by a reef inclosing a lagoon 4 to 5 fathoms deep, to which there is a nari-ow entrance. Anchorage may be obtained in 12 fathoms, with the vantay on Sablayan Point bearing west, at a distance of ^ of a mile from the beach under the vantay, and in 9 fath- oms, farther in, with the vantay bearing W. by S. ; but great caution is necessary, as the reefs do not show well. The inner lagoon is only fit for the native coasters. Sablayan town, on the western side of the anchorage, has a church and school, but the padre is the only person in the town who can sj)eak Spanish. Fowls, fish, and cocoanuts are obtainable in small quantities. "Water can be obtained from wells dug through in the coral. The coast from Sablayan Anchorage trends in a SE. by S. direction for 35 miles to Mangarin, and is generally low, with sandy shores. There are high lands a considerable distance in the interior, and extensive plains to seaward. Dongon Bay, situated 7 miles to the southward of Sablayan Anchorage, lies to the eastward of a low, sandy point of the same name. Vessels can anchor here in front of the low, sandy shore, protected from northerly winds. Iriron Bay, about 8 miles SE. of Dongon Bay, affords good anchorage during the northeast monsoon ; a village is situated on the north side of a small river, but no supplies could be obtained. Lumintau Point lies 6 miles south of Iriron Bay ; a shoal only 2 or 3 yards in extent is reported to lie ^ mile NW. of the point. Mangarix Bay, 13 miles SE. of Lumintau Point, and north of Ilin Island, is sheltered from all winds by Ilin Island and the long peninsula Mangarin Point, which terminates in a sandy spit. At the entrance to the bay, off the spit, the depth of water is 4 or 5 fathoms, but the interior is very shoal, and the town of Mangarin, 1^ miles NE. of the spit, is only acces- sible to boats. Few supplies are obtainable, and those are very dear; good water is not obtainable; the climate is unhealthful, because of the marshy surroundings. Donjon Bank, which lies 4|- miles W. by S. of Mangarin Point, is a coral bank, rather more than -J- mile in length ; the center part uncovers at low water ; the remainder is covered MINDORO — WEST COAST. 11»7 cables between Sablayan Point and tlie coast to the eastward, but the available space is reduced one-half by reefs on both sides, and the northern part is filled by a reef inclosing a lagoon 4 to 5 fathoms deep, to which there is a narrow entrance. Anchorage may be obtained in 12 fathoms, with the vantay on Sablayan Point bearing west, at a distance of :j- of a mile from the beach under tlie vantay, and in 9 fath- oms, farther in, with the vantay bearing W. by S. ; but great caution is necessary, as the reefs do not show well. The inner lagoon is only fit for the native coasters. Sablayan town, on the western side of the anchorage, has a church and school, but the padre is the only person in the town who can speak Spanish. Fowls, fish, and cocoanuts are obtainable in small quantities. Water can be obtained from wells dug through in the coral. The coast from Sablayan Anchorage trends in a SE. by S. direction for 35 miles to Mangarin, and is generally low, with sandy shores. There are high lands a considerable distance in the interior, and extensive plains to seaward. Dongon Bay, situated 7 miles to the southward of Sablayan Anchorage, lies to the eastward of a low, sandy point of the same name. Vessels can anchor here in front of the low, sandy shore, protected from northerly winds. Iriron Bay, about 8 miles SE. of Dongon Bay, affords good anchorage during the northeast monsoon ; a village is situated on the north side of a small river, but no supplies could be obtained. Lumintau Point lies G miles south of Iriron Bay ; a shoal only 2 or 3 yards in extent is reported to lie ^ mile JSTW. of the point. Mangarin Bay, 13 miles SE. of Lumintau Point, and north of Ilin Island, is sheltered from all winds by Ilin Island and the long peninsula Mangarin Point, which terminates in a sandy spit. At the entrance to the bay, off' the spit, the depth of water is 4 or 5 fathoms, but the interior is very shoal, and the town of Mangarin, 1^ miles NE. of the spit, is only acces- sible to boats. Few supplies are obtainable, and those are very dear; good water is not obtainable; the climate is unhealthful, because of the marshy surroundings. Donjon Bank, which lies 4^ miles W. by S. of Mangarin Point, is a coral bank, rather more than | mile in length ; the center part uncovers at low water ; the remainder is covered 198 MINDORO — WEST COAST. by 2 fathoms water. At ^ of a mile SSW. of the southern edge of Donjon Bank the chart shows the northern head of another bank, the extent of which to the southward and west- ward is not known. The lead gives no indication of api^roach to these banks, there being no bottom with 15 fathoms at ^ of a mile to the westward. Manadi Bank lies 2^ miles E. by N. of Donjon Bank, and is similar to it. Between Manadi and Mangarin Point there is a third bank not named on the chart. If proceeding to Mangarin Bay from the NW., a safe chan- nel will be found by passing to the north of Donjon Bank and south of Manadi Bank, anchoring the moment the channel between Ilin and Mindoro is fairly open. Ilin Island, fronting the southwest part of Mindoro, is 10 miles long, NNW. and SSE., with 4 miles greatest width; it is wooded and hilly, the highest summit on the northern part of the island being about 850 feet above the sea. The northern, eastern, and southern shores are clean and steep-to, but from the northwestern part a reef projects- more than a mile out, and ojff the end of this reef there is a detached patch with 2 fathoms on it. Clearing marks. — To clear the reef off Ilin to the westward, the west coast of Ambolon Island must not be brought to bear west of south; and to clear it to the SW. the southwest point of Ilin should not be shut out by the western point. Anchorage. — The town of Ilin is in latitude 12° 15' N., 1 mile to the northward of Ambolon Island. Good anchorage will be found in 10 fathoms off the reef that borders the coast, with the southern large house of the town bearing east, about i mile from the shore. A channel, staked by the natives, leads up to the settlement, where a stream delivers itself into the sea; but much sweeter water was found trickling over a cliff' just round the town point, to the southward, to which the boats had easier access, and from which the Samarang was readily completed with water. Of the other source, a most excellent run of water was found, but it is used for all pur- poses by the people, and difficult to embark, excepting at high tide, owing to the shore being dry at least a cable from the mouth of the stream. Fowls, eggs, grain, and vegetables were procured at reasonable prices. Ambolon island is 3 miles long, north and south, and 2 miles wide ; it is about 550 feet high at the northern part, MINDOKO — EAST COAST. 199 and surrounded by a very narrow fringe reef always visible, and easily avoided. It is almost, if not quite, divided by a swampy lagoon wliicli forms a small harbor to the SW., with Kukurrayan islet at the entrance. Bank. — A circular, rocky bank, f of a mile in diameter, cov- ered by 2 fathoms water, lies f of a mile SSW, of the south point of Ilin, having a rock above water at its southern part. The southwestern side of this shoal has not been sounded; care must therefore be taken in rounding it. Belcher gives the following marks for the southern part of the shoal: "The tail of the shoal is exactly on the line of contact of Ilin and Ambolon extremes at the moment that Ambolon outer point shows clear of the smaller semidetached island (to the southward)." The strait between Ilin and Mindoro is free from danger, and the Saviarang passed through it; but owing to the j)rev- alence of light airs, the passage should not be attempted with- out a fair wind. Caution must be used when entering Pan- darochan Bay from the northward by this strait, for the spit off Mindoro shoals suddenly from 10 to 3 fathoms. The chan- nel should therefore be kept well open, borrowing rather on Ilin until Garza Island is nearly locked in by the eastern point; then haul easterly, anchoring in 13 fathoms. Lalauigan or Gomez Bay, on the Mindoro coast about the middle of the strait, is only fit for coasters, to whom it affords anchorage in 1^ fathoms. Pandarochan Bay, formed between points Burankan and Ilin, the south extremes of Mindoro and Ilin islands, is safe throughout, affording excellent anchorage and shelter from the northerly winds at the mouth of the strait in 10 or 13 fathoms. Garza Island and its extensive shoal also offers shelter from strong easterly gusts. No inhabitants were noticed in Pandarochan Bay. Garza Island, which lies 2|- miles from Buraiikan Point (the eastern point of Pandarochan Bay), is low and sandy and covered with trees ; it is surrounded by a rocky reef which extends 2 miles to the southward, covered in places by only 2^ fathoms of water. There is a small sandy beach on the north ]jart of the island, near which anchorage can be had in 8 to 5 fathoms depth at a distance of ^ cable from the beach. Dominga Shoal, consisting of sand and rock, on which the Dommga sounded on the 22d of May, 1888, while on a voyage 200 MTNDOKO — EAST COAST. from Pakian to Lalauigan, and obtained depths of 8 to 9 fathoms, is reported Ijy the natives of Ilin to have a least depth of 3f fathoms. It is stated to be 2 miles in extent and to be situated with the summit of Ambolon Island bearing NW. ^ N., and the northern point of Semirara E. by N. -j N. MiNDORO Strait. — This wide strait, separating the Cala- mianes from Mindoro Island, is one of the most frequented channels for vessels which leave the ports of China for India toward the end of April and in May, and at all times of the year from the ports of China to Australia. It is divided into two passes by Apo Reef. Apo Reef was examined by the surveying ships Discovery and Investigator. The j^osition of the islands to the westward was determined by the Samarang, and the extent of the bank was verified in 1872 by the Mindoro. From the northern ex- tremity the shoal extends SE. by S. 7^ miles, where it forms a very narrow spit or east point ; from the east j)oint the southern extreme bears S. 35° W., distant Similes, and be- tween the two points there are several gaps in the shoal hav- ing 9 feet water. On the western side there are two islands ; the western one is the larger, being about \ mile in diameter and covered with trees; white beaches line its northern and east- ern side, and a surrounding reef x^rojects about -j mile. This island does not appear to be connected with the Apo Shoal, but about 1\ miles ENE. of it there is a small island formed of barren black rocks on the soTithwest part of the shoal. From the center of the large island the north point of the shoal bears N. 24° E., distant 7 miles; the eastern x>oint N. 81° E., 8 miles, and the south point S. 56° E., Hf miles. The whole extent of the shoal is 10 miles from its north to the south j)oint, and nine miles from its east jjoint to the western j)art of the large island. There are two high black rocks NE. of the small island, which may be seen about (> miles off, and the islands in clear weather are visible from an elevation of 20 feet, about 10 miles. At low water many small rocks are dry on the shoal, particularly along its north side. If intending to pass between the coast of Mindoro and the Apo Shoal in the night, keep about G miles off Pandan Island, as the eastern point of the shoal is narrow, and should the wind be westerly it would not readily be perceived, nor would there be breakers to make known the approach to danger. MIXDORO — EAST COAST. 201 While examining the Apo Shoal, tlie Discovery and Investi- gator were frequently near it without ol)taining soundings, and the boats found it very steep-to in all j)arts. Land and sea breezes were exi^erienced here in March, the latter from W. and SW., with the tide or current setting northward; land and sea breezes jn-evailed also to the westward of the Calamianes. Apo East Pass is 14 miles wide between Apo Reef and the nearest part of the coast of Mindoro ; with the exception of Discovery Bank the pass is quite clear. Discovery Bank is 1^ miles long, north and south, and very narrow ; the least water on it is 9 fathoms. The sea does not break on the bank, nor is it marked by any discoloration of the water. From the center of the bank the northernmost of the two small Pandan Islands off Mindoro bears NNE. ^ E. ; Mount Kalavite N. by W. i W. ; and Apo Islet E. .^- S. Saraceno Bank appears to be If miles in extent from north to south, and the same from east to west, with a least depth of 14 fathoms. The shallowest part is of red coral, but as the depth increases the character of the bottom alters, and at 50 fathoms it consists of coarse sand and gravel. From a position in IG fathoms. Mount Ilin bears IST. 61° E., Mount Ambolon, IST. 70° E., and the south point of Ilin E. Leonidas Shoal appears to be 3-| miles long, north and south, and 2| miles wide from east to west, and to be com- posed of coarse sand, with shells and coral. From the posi- tion of least depth in 8 fathoms, Mount Ambolon and Mount Ilin are nearly in the same line, N. 36° E., the south point of Ilin N. 67° E., and Mount Tundalara S. 88° W. Apo West Pass, between Apo Bank and Calamianes Island, is 19 miles wide between Apo Shoal and Tara Island — the northernmost of the Calamianes ; but Hunter and Meroj^e shoals lie in the middle of the northern entrance. Hunter Shoal, on which the sea breaks, consists of a rocky ledge, about 2 cables in extent, with 13 fathoms on it, and a patch of 8 feet on its south extremity. The shoal is sur- rounded by a bank, the depth over which varies between 24 and 65 fathoms. From the shoal, Mount Kalavite bears N. 15° E., and Apo Islet E. Merope Shoal, on which the sea breaks, lies 5^ miles NE. of Hunter Shoal, and consists of a ridge 1^ miles in extent north and south, and 4- mile wide. It is covered bv 2f to 9 202 MINDOKO — EAST COAST. fathoms, and no bottom with 90 fathoms within ^ of a mile. From the shoal, Mount Kalavite bears N. 11° E., Apo Islet S. 67° E., and Mount Tundalara, in Busuanga, S. Current. — During the Spanish survey of these shoals, 1872, a current to the SE. of 0.6 miles an hour was observed. The Calamianes are a group of high islands lying between the northeast end of Palawan and Mindoro, and extending between the parallels of 11° 39' and 12° 20' N., and the merid- ians of 119° 47' and 120° 23' E. Busuanga (ch. 40, p. 202), the largest island of the group, is about 34 miles in extent NW. by W. and SE. by E., and 18 miles broad. It is very irregu- lar in form, being indented with numerous deep bays. The islands and reefs which front its northeast side form the west- ern side of Northumberland Strait. These islands form, with the northern part of Palawan and the Cuyos Islands, a province, the capital of w^liich is at Port Tai Tai. The climate of these islands is in general hot and unhealthful. Intermittent fevers and cutaneous diseases pre- A'ail, attributable, in all probability, to the great moisture and the insalubrious quality of the drinking water. All these islands are, generally speaking, hilly and broken. The industry of the locality is in collecting Salanganes (edible birds' nests), honey, and wax; but cultivation is not practiced to any great extent. The forests produce good timber for building or cabinet work. The west coast of the Calamianes, Linapakan, and its sur- rounding islands, and the coasts of Palawan, are described in the China Sea Directory, Vol. II. Islarids and dangers northivard and eastward of the Cala- mianes. — The following description is from the Spanish Der- rotero, 1879, and from Captain Maclear, H. M. S. Flying Fish, 1885. Kolokoto, or North Rock, is the northwestern and highest of four large black rocks, which appear as one w^ien seen S. 'A' E. It was estimated to be 100 feet high, and the next largest to it 60 feet high. Kolokoto is the northernmost of the islands which lie on the north side of Busuanga, and may be seen 13 or 14 miles from the deck. Soundings. — The charts exhibit no soundings within 20 miles of the west side of Kalamion (ch. 33, p. 182), but beyond that distance are irregular soundings, 19 to 54 fathoms. In latitude 11° 52' N., longitude 119° 26' E., is a patch of 9 fathoms, m- I -"■'^^ 1. AN D /-^ ; _^./^N_^.-.. - ^ ^ . „."'-". I ^"^ "\ HARBOURS ^^ li*** *^ ^-t^r, ^^ 801T111 SIOB OF " ^"i / ■>": '{ BUSUANGA ISLAND ^ '1 ^ •i t/,-.. - ... ■- .1 o<'^i MINDORO— EAST COAST. 203 • with otlier patches, 12 to 15 fathoms, within a few miles of it. The soundings near the islands westward and north- eastward of the Calamianes have been given with the descrip- tion of those islands ; they are also very irregular, 17 to 30 fathoms, with patches of 5 and 8 fathoms, and it would appear necessary to be on the lookout for shoal water when navi- gating in this locality. Near North Rock the soundings to the northward are 40 and 50 fathoms, and the same depths between it and Busuanga, on a muddy bottom. A patch of 5 fathoms is shown on the chart 14 or 15 miles to the northward of the north point of Busuanga, in about latitude 12° 35' N., longitude 119° 52' E. The Flyiiig Fish anchored on this bank, which is of small extent, and sounded over it with boats, but found nothing less than 10 fathoms, with 25 to 30 fathoms around ; and no bottom with 250 fathoms close to the north wai'd, which would indicate that the patch is on the northern edge of the bank on which the Calamianes are situated. Dimipak, or High Island, lies about 2 miles to the north- ward of the north point of Busuanga. It is a small island, not quite 2 miles in extent, and the channel between it and Busuanga does not appear to be free of danger, as some rocks were seen above water eastward of the island. About a mile northwestward of Dimipak Island are rocks above water, one of which, named Sail Rock, 140 feet high, is very remarkable ; and If miles northwestward of this lies a large black rock, named Northwest Rock or Dichilem. When passing between these the Discovery had 38 fathoms, and about 2 miles NNE. of Northwest Rock passed over a coral spot in 8 fathoms. Dumunpalit (Turret) Island, bearing S. 50° E,, 7^ miles from North Rock, is 816 feet high, small and rocky, having several detached rocks about it, and a remarkable hummock on its southwest point, somewhat like a turret. Islands Northeast of Busuanga.— Nanga Islands, lying 15 miles ESE. of North Rock, are two small wooded islands which have sandy beaches, and about l^ miles to the NNE. of them there is a black rock above water. The largest of these islands is 344 feet high. The chart shows them to be surrounded by a reef extending nearly a mile from them. MINDORO— EAST COAST. 203 • ■witli otlier patches, 12 to 15 fathoms, %vithin a few miles of it. The soundings near the islands westward and north- eastward of the Calamianes have been given with the descrip- tion of those islands ; they are also very irregular, 1 7 to 30 fathoms, with patches of 5 and 8 fathoms, and it would appear necessary to be on the lookout for shoal water when navi- gating in this locality. Near North Rock the soundings to the northward are 40 and 50 fathoms, and the same depths between it and Busuanga, on a muddy bottom. A patch of 5 fathoms is shown on the chart 14 or 15 miles to the northward of the north point of Busuanga, in about latitude 12° 35' N., longitude 119° 52' E. The Flying Fish anchored on this bank, which is of small extent, and sounded over it with boats, but found nothing less than 10 fathoms, with 25 to 30 fathoms around ; and no bottom with 250 fathoms close to the northwai'd, which would indicate that the patch is on the northern edge of the bank on which the Calamianes are situated. Dimipak, or High Island, lies about 2 miles to the north- ward of the north point of Busuanga. It is a small island, not quite 2 miles in extent, and the channel between it and Busuanga does not appear to be free of danger, as some rocks were seen above water eastward of the island. About a mile northwestward of Dimipak Island are rocks above water, one of which, named Sail Rock, 140 feet high, is very remarkable ; and If miles northwestward of this lies a large black rock, named Northwest Rock or Dichilem. When passing between these the Discovery had 38 fathoms, and about 2 miles NNE. of Northwest Rock passed over a coral spot in 8 fathoms. Dumunpalit (Turret) Island, bearing S. 50° E., 1\ miles from North Rock, is 816 feet high, small and rocky, having several detached rocks about it, and a remarkable hummock on its southwest point, somewhat like a turret. Islands Northeast of Busuanga.— Nanga Islands, lying 15 miles ESE. of North Rock, are two small wooded islands which have sandy beaches, and about 1^ miles to the NNE, of them there is a black rock above water. The largest of these islands is 344 feet high. The chart shows them to be surrounded by a reef extending nearly a mile from them. 204 MINDORO — EAST COAST. Kamanga Islands, soutli of Nanga, are ab(jut 400 feet high, small and steep-sided ; the chart shows them to be surrounded by a reef. Tara Island, when seen from the northward, shows a triple summit to its northwest end ; while its southern part looks like a separate island, saddle-shaped. From the eastward the island appears of uniform height. The southern summit is 730 feet high, and the northern one 560 feet. On the south- west side there is good anchorage in 10 fathoms in a gap in the reefs which extend westward from the island, in some places to a distance of ^ mile. From the anchorage the fol- lowing bearings were taken : Kokonongon Hill S. 69° W. ; Kamanga Island N. 80° W. ; and the western point of Lagat Island S. 7° W. The island does not appear to be perma- nently inhabited; in March, 1885, it was occupied by parties from Busuanga, burning the grass and digging cassava. Lagat is a small island 334 feet high, surrounded by a reef with a narrow passage between it and the reef off the south end of Tara. Soundings. — A patch of 3 fathoms lies west l^- miles from the south end of Tara; the soundings about the northern end are irregular; a patch of 6 fathoms lies between Tara and Nanga; and a patch of 9 fathoms lies N. \ W. 8 miles from the northern ena of Tara. Botak Island, 800 feet high, is fairly well cultivated. Off its northern end there is a queer pin-shaped rock, and off its southern end are some sharp-pointed rocks. The vicinity has not been sounded. Kalanhayuan Island, flat-topped, 500 feet high, is connected with Botak by a reef. Lubutglubut Island, 600 feet high, is very bold to the south- ward, and appears inaccessible; north of it a reef extends to the distance of 1 mile, with large rocks above water. A group of rocks without name on the Spanish chart, lies south 1^^ miles off Lubutglubut. The highest of the group is about 380 feet above the sea. The vicinity has not been sounded. The East Coast of Busuanga is formed by a range of hills running in a NNW. and SSE. direction, having an aver- age height of 1,200 feet. The most conspicuous among them, seen from the northward, is a three-headed peak, 1,880 feet high, in latitude 12° 6' N"., longitude 120° 16' E. Mount Tun- dalara has a smooth summit with a small knob on it, and is in MINDORO — EAST COAST. 205 latitude Vi"^ O'i' N., longitude 120"' 13' E. ; it can not be distin- guislied from the nortliward. Over Kokonongon Point there is a conspicuous cone, 1,300 feet high. Minanga Bay is almost filled up by islands and shoals. From Point Alonon a bank of coral extends 3 miles to the NE., with soundings of 5^ to 12 fathoms over it, shoaling toward the coast. Port Borak has not been surveyed ; it is reported to be very narrow, but sheltered by the islands Dinaran and Matayan ; and to afford anchorage in 2i to 9 fathoms. Dinaran Island is saddle-shaped ; tlie two summits are about the same height, 580 feet above the sea; it is surrounded by a reef, which extends to ^ mile on all sides, except the western, which is steep-to and clear ; a rocky shoal lies l-j miles to the SE., with the island Matayan in the middle of it; this shoal is 2^ miles in extent, north and south, and almost joins the reef that borders Dinaran Island. Dibitak Island is about 300 feet high. Koron Island is rocky and precipitous, about 1,200 feet high, and nearly the same height from north to south. The south end terminates in a sharp, steep point, named Point Kalis, which can be passed close to. About the middle of the east- ern coast there is a shoal of sand and coral, covered by 5tV fathoms ; and another shoal, of 3^ fathoms, lies midway be- tween Koron and Dibitak. Koron Strait and Koron 'Bay are described in China Sea Directory, Vol. II. Delian Island, situated 3^ miles to the NE. of Point Kalis, is 450 feet high. The shores are steep-to and clean, with the exception of a few rocks close to its southern end, and a reef, of about a cable's extent, on its northeast side. On the west side there is a white sand beach, with a short spit. Shoals East and Southeast of Calamianes. — Framjee Bank extends about 3 miles in a SW. by W. and NE. by E. direction, and has a general depth over it of 8 to 1 3 fathoms, and is surrounded by 40 to 50 fathoms. The northwest side is steep. Magallanes Bank, the southern end of which "is 1^ miles N. by E. of Narvaez, is nearly 3 miles long, NE. and SW. From the position of least water, 1^ fathoms, on the northern end, Matayan Island bears N. 28° W., and Point Kalis S. 73° W. Narvaez Bank, with 4| fathoms least water, lies with Mata- yan Island bearing N. 20° W., Point Kalis W. 206 MINDOKO— EAST COAST. Aguirre Bank (cli. 41, p. 20G), SE. 17 miles off Delian Island, is 1^ miles in extent NNW. and SSE., and 1 mile wide; the least water on it is 4^ fathoms. Beta Slioal lies 7 miles S. by E. of the sonth end of Delian, and is covered by 6 fathoms, with 20 fathoms close around it. Kabulauan Islands are a little group to the eastward of Linapakan, composed of two larger islands and several smaller ones. Kabulauan, or Sombrero, is 2i miles long from NW. to SE., with a hill of moderate height on its northeast point. On the southwest side there is a small bay bordered by a reef, with 4 to 11 fathoms depth. The north side of the island is foul. On the south side there is a rock which appears to be connected with the island by a shoal of 2^ fathoms ; at 2 miles west of the island there is a patch of 44- fathoms. Nangalao, 4^ miles to the NE. of Kabulauan, is about 2 miles long, NE. and SW., and rises to a central hill about 500 feet high. Two small islets, joined to the south point by a reef, form a bay with 5 to 11 fathoms depth. The channel between Nangalao and Kabulauan has not been sounded ; there is an islet in the middle of it. Kanaron Island, lying SE. by E. 12 miles from Kabulauan, is small, about 300 feet high, and bordered on the north side by reefs and rocks to the distance of 1 mile. Solitario, 40 feet high, lies 5 miles NE. of Kanaron; and Salimbubug, 100 feet high, lies 5 miles NW. by N. of Kanaron. SuLU Sea. — The space included between the Sulu Archi- pelago to the south and Mindoro to the north, and having the Philippine Islands on the east and Palawan on the west, is distinguished by the name of the Sulu Sea. Although of great depth, 2,550 fathoms, this sea, which is in connection with the China and Celebes seas, and also with the Paciiic by San Bernardino and Surigao straits, has a minimum deep- sea temperature of 50.5°, reached invariably at 400 fathoms. As this temperature in the China Sea is at the depth of 200 fathoms, and in the Celebes Sea at 180 fathoms, and in the Pacific at 230 fathoms, it may be inferred that the Sulu Sea is prevented from freely interchanging its waters with those seas by ridges which do not exceed those depths. Winds. — In the Sulu Sea easterly winds with fine weather prevail in October, and the northeast monsoon is not estab- lished until November. In January and February it blows hardest, but not with the force of the China seas, and it is s= " Ul 1, " " ' ,e ) ».? .<« J? y 1} V ,P\" ).. '^1 " .. II 't 30 -;- V •'- ■■" •7 V /» '* ^ ^ - ' :; ,, ,< tS ,j i> " "^ xJ '7 '7 la " J. '•» jj 1- * '^^ " '^ . "" ^u. %--- /* ^ -» » ^ ^ jS " I « " «' r '^ ^7 - '•' xl^ 'J Si ^ " }'~"^^' V ^ >» " ■ ■-, 'S J " . ^ ' ,, ... ^^'^-'2 ''' 3^ '» ,y „ V " 'S .9 '' „ ,5 ,s an " " »» -) RE C ONOCIMffiNTO '' •# DEL BANCO KABABAWAN O AGUlRRj: f) -a SO. de la. Isla Cabucan. "9 )lt " E.ciU de . mill*. MINDORO — EAST COAST. 307 felt strongest before tlie openings between Panay and Negros, and Negros and Mindanao. At the end of May sontliwest winds begin to blow, and in a month become established, to terminate in October, bringing with them a season made njj of rain squalls and tempests, which take place principally in July and August. In September a heavy mist hangs about the coast of Mindanao. In the Sulu Sea the east or northeast monsoon is not a steady, fresh breeze, but often variable. Near Mindanao the northerly winds never blow fresh, and light changeable winds often displace them for several days. This often occurs at the end of January, and it is considered that the same winds jDrevail from the Sulu Archipelago to Manila. Cyclones occur occasionally, chiefly at the changes of mon- soon, and appear to pass chiefly over the northern part of 1^ :e sea. Currents. — During the northeast monsoon the surface drift is with the wind, about f of a mile an hour. In the southern part of the sea there is generally a northwesterly or westerly current in the neaps between Sulu and Basilan, and in the tracks thence to Balabac Strait. In March and April the current sets mostly to the eastward among the Sulu Islands, but it sets to the westward at the same time in the openings of the Philippine Islands to the north of Mindanao. Observations of currents during the southwest monsoon are t(jo scanty to afford reliable information. Tidal streams. — Two tidal waves enter the Sulu Sea and passages between the Philippine Archipelago from opposite directions ; one from the China Sea through the western ojDen- ings, the other from the Pacific through the eastern straits, viz., San Bernardino, Surigao, and Basilan. These waves meet in the many channels between the southern islands. The wave from the China Sea enters that sea from the Pacific by the wide opening between Formosa and Luzon, and passes from north to south along the western shores of Luzon and Palawan, and through the Verde Island Passage, Mindoro Strait, Linapakan, and Balabac Straits. The Verde Island stream, after passing south along the coast of Luzon, and deflecting from its waters into the Bay of Manila, continues along the coast to the southward and eastward as far as Point Punas, where it branches, one stream running to tlie northeast, round Tayabas Bay, and north and MINDORO — EAST COAST. 207 felt strongest before the openings between Panay and Negros, and Negros and Mindanao. At the end of May southwest winds begin to blow, and in a month become established, to terminate in October, bringing with them a season made up of rain squalls and tempests, which take x>lace principally in July and August. In September a heavy mist hangs about the coast of Mindanao. In the Sulu Sea the east or northeast monsoon is not a steady, fresh breeze, but often variable. Near Mindanao the northerly winds never blow fresh, and light changeable winds often displace them for several days. This often occurs at the end of January, and it is considered that the same winds prevail from the Sulu Archipelago to Manila. Cyclones occur occasionally, chiefly at the changes of mon- soon, and appear to pass chiefly over the northern part of 1 '' .e sea. Currents. — During the northeast monsoon the surface drift is with the wind, about f of a mile an hour. In the southern part of the sea there is generally a northwesterly or westerly current in the neaps between Sulu and Basilan, and in the tracks thence to Balabac Strait. In March and April the current sets mostly to the eastward among the Sulu Islands, but it sets to the westward at the same time in the openings of the Philipi^ine Islands to the north of Mindanao. Observations of currents during the southwest monsoon are tts live on Gui- maras Island, and come oft" on a vessel approachmg- Point Kabalik. GuiMARAS Island, in front of Iloilo, is 2di miles long, NNE. and SSW., and 10^ miles wide, and forms with Panay Island the Strait of Iloilo. It is high and hilly, especially on the eastern side, where the hills Jaljat, Pandan, and Akdan rise; in clear weather these hills can be seen from Point Sojo- ton on the west coast of Negros. The southeast coast is bordered by a number of islets, which render the navigation very difficult. The island is fertile. Point Kubugao, at 1^ miles from the mouth of the river Dumangas in Panay, forms the north end of the island ; it is rounded, and has detached rocks oft" it; from it the coast trends about SW. for 7i miles, forming capes and bays up to Point Bondulan, opposite Iloilo, which is high and steep. A bank of 14- to 2^ fathoms depth stretches out 3 cables oft' the town of Tilat or Buena Vista ; from Point Bondulan a large bank of 1 to 44- fathoms extends SW. for 1| miles. Point Bondulan, in line with Iloilo Fort, clears this bank. Point Kabalik, which is clean and bold, lies 34- miles SW. by S. of Point Bondulan; this point should be passed close-to in taking the channel south of Oton Bank, which is here (> cables wide, but looking from the westward Kabalik is not easily distinguished, being no higher than the rest of the coast, and, in fact, is not so conspicuous as the j3oint 150 feet high without a name, which is 1 mile SW. by S. of it, and also clean and steep-to. From the south, or Sta. Ana, Kabalik Point is, however, easily recognized. From this point the coast turns south for 4J- miles to Port Sta. Ana, and is bold, with several little islets close to it. Port Sta. Ana is a little port, clear and deep, open to the west, and easy to make; the entrance is ^ mile wide. Inside, to the northward, is a point, with an islet to the westward of it, and a rock awash at low water f of a cable to the SW. of the islet. The plan shows a shoal of 1 fathom extending 1 cable south of the point. The anchorage is in the middle of the port in 6|- fathoms. Water can be obtained from a rivu- let at the bottom of the port. It is high water, full and change, at 12 hours; springs rise 5^ feet. 216 PANAY — SOUTH COAST. Igan Bay, immediately south of Santa Ana, is clear, with, a depth of 11 to 13 fathoms in the middle and 2^ to 5^ fath- oms at the edge of the bank that borders the shore. Point Lusaran, the southwest extremity of Guimaras, is safe and bold to the south and east of it ; to the NW. there are several rocks, and an islet surrounded by reefs, and at 2^ miles N. 60° W. of the point there is a rocky shoal. The southeast coast of Guimaras is foul, and skirted by islets and rocks which form narrow channels that can only be navigated by experienced pilots. Guimaras Strait, between this island and Negros, is 6^ miles wide, but the passage is reduced to 1| miles by the islets and banks at the southern entrance. Ilampulugan Island is the most remarkable in the strait; between this island and Guimaras there are six steej) rocks with flat sum- mits, on some of which are trees ; to the northward of it are two little islets connected with it on the SE. by a bank having If fathoms water on it ; between this bank and the reef off Pandan (on the coast of Negros) is a channel of l^ miles wide and 4^ to 8 fathoms deep ; it is the least dangerous passage to take, but care must be taken to avoid a bank not sounded out, shown on the chart between Pandan and the islet of Nadulao ; as also a bank of sand with 1^ fathoms over it, of 4 miles extent, which lies 3 miles SE. to SSE. of Ilampulugan. The east coast of Guimaras is clear, and a depth of 6i fathoms will be found at a distance of 1 mile from it. Unisan Islets are a group of rocks that lie about 8 miles SE. of Point Lusaran. They are surrounded by reefs, and at 1 mile NW, of them is a little rocky patch; the islets and the patch occupy an extent of 2^ miles. The soundings in the neighborhood show 6^ to 8 fathoms to the northward, 20 fathoms at less than a mile to the eastward, and 4 to 6^ fathoms in the channel between them and the islet Guiuanon. Iloilo. — The town of Iloilo stands on a low sandy flat on the right bank of a river ; at the end of this flat is a spit on which a fort is built, and close to which there is deep water. Vessels of moderate draft (15 feet) can ascend the river a short distance and lie alongside wharves which communicate with the merchant houses, but large vessels must anchor out- side near the spit. It is a town of great commercial impor- tance, and a brisk coasting trade is carried on from it. The better class of houses in Iloilo are built on strong wooden PANAY — SOUTH COAST. 217 posts, 2 or 3 feet in diameter, that reach to the roof; stone walls to the first floor, with wooden windows above, and an iron roof. The poorer class of dwellings are flimsy erections of nipa, built on fonr strong posts. The roads and bridges are in a deplorable condition and almost impassable in the rainy season. The chief imports are Australian coal, and general mer- chandise from Europe, but most sailing ships arrive in ballast. The exports are sugar, tobacco, rice, cofi^ee, hides, and hemp ; it is also the principal place of manufacture of piiia, juse, and sinamoya, a tissue greatly in use among the Philippines. In 1883 93,750 tons of sugar were exported, principally to America. Typhoons do not occur regularly, but in most years the tail of one passes over the place, which sufl^ers also from the visitations of locusts. Siq^pUes. — Provisions of all kinds can be obtained, but the prices are higher than at Manila. In 1886 beef was 12^ cents per pound, bread 11 cents, vegetables 11 cents, fowls $2 per dozen. Water is scarce and is brought across from Guimaras in tank boats; it is supplied to the shipping at the rate of $1 per ton; the Europeans depend mainly upon rain water. There are no docks, nor means for effecting repairs ; marine stores are not procurable. Coal. — There are generally about 500 tons in store, chiefly Australian ; it is kept for the supx)ly of local steamers that take in what they require alongside the wharves. Vessels in the roads can have it brought off in bulk in lighters or schooners at a cost of 50 cents a ton. Coolies can be hired at 75 cents per ton, but they will not coal vessels if they can get other work. Notice is required the day before coaling, as men are not kept in readiness. Price of coal in 1886 was $11 per ton. Mails. — There is regular weekly communication with Manila, which is 250 miles distant; the steamers generally arrive on Monday, and leave on the same or the following day; there are, besides, casual steamers, and other small steamers carrying on the local trade to Antiki and Negros ; but most of the small coasting traffic is conducted in schooners. Tugs are generally procurable from amongst the small steamers, and sailing vessels are generally towed out past the Oton Bank. 218 PANAY — SOUTH COAST. River Iloilo. — From the town to the sea the river makes two sharp bends, and, flowing with great force to the east- ward, forms (between two banks consisting of its own deposits) an entrance channel, running NW. and SE., of | of a cable width, and 1^ fathoms depth at low water. The mouth of this channel is ordinarily marked by two stakes on the edges of the banks ; near tJie southernmost is the house of the port pilots. In entering, the southern shore must be kept, as it is the deepest, and as the bank projects from the north side; within the bar the channel widens and the depth increases to 16 and 22 feet. Anchorage. — The best anchorage for vessels drawing under 13 feet is within the river, ofP the wooden jetty near the ware- houses. Vessels of more than 13 feet draft must anchor out- side; there the best anchorage is with the fort bearing SW. ^ W., and the lighthouse at the entrance NW. ^ W. The Challenger anchored south of the spit, with the fort bearing S. 75° W. and the right extreme of the spit N. 2° W., in 10 fathoms at a cable's length from the shore, as it is convenient for landing and walking up to the town ; but the captain of the ship Panay, who has been trading here for many years, reports that in southwest winds a heavy sea sets in which prevents landing. Abreast of the fort the eddies are strong and irreg- ular on the flood. The anchorage recommended is ofl^ the entrance of the river, with the north end of the fort spit bearing nothing northward of west. Abreast of the fort the eddies are strong and irreg- ular'on the flood; it is necessary to moor. Tides. — The tidal streams reach a strength of 3 knots an hour, and they turn at high and low water by the shore. It is high water, full and change, at 12 hours ; springs rise nearly 6 feet. Lights.— A fixed red light is exhibited on the southern side ( )f the entrance of the river Iloilo ; it is elevated 20 feet above the shore and 24 feet above the sea, and is visible Q-j miles, through an arc of 240°, between the bearings of N. 7° E. and S. 53° E. The light-house is painted gray and the lantern is of a copper yellow. Directions. — Approaching Iloilo from the southwest ward, steer in with Point Bondulan bearing NE. f N., until the remarkable clump of trees on the north side of the river Iloilo is half its width open of the point; this clears Oton Bank; PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. 219 and when abreast the sandy beach, which is one-third tlie distance from Point Kabalik to Point Bondulan — keeping the point south of Point Kabalik open — edge to the west- ward until the fort is open of Point Bondulan, and round this point with the soutlieast angle of the fort in line with Point Dapdap. NORTH AND EAST COASTS. Point Potol is flat and sandy, with a few trees on it. To the east of the point, at less than a mile distance, are seven rocky islets. Small craft can pass between them and the coast at high water. Coast. — From Point Potol the general trend of the coast is approximately ESE. for 73 miles to Point Bulakau, the north- east point of the island Panay. The shore is for the most part sandy, and the coast in its neighborhood low. Point Sabonkogon, 3^ miles east of Point Potol, with which it forms a small bay, is high and clear, and can be aj)proached to within a short distance. From it to Point Ibahai, 11^ miles S. 02° E., the shore is clear and steep. Point Ibahai is sandy and flat. On it is the town of the same name. NE. of the town there is good anchorage, shel- tered from southerly winds; but, as during the southwest monsoon the wind often veers suddenly to NW., and Pontud Bank would then be to leeward, a large vessel could not remain here with safety. Point Sigat, 2^ miles E. by S. of Point Ibahai, and Agpa, 2i miles farther on, are both high and surrounded by reefs a cable wide, with 8 fathoms at the edge. Between them is a little bay, open to the north, and fronted by Pontud Bank. The soundings in it range 11 fathoms, coarse sand, between the points, to 2 fathoms, sand, near the beach at the end. Pontud Bank, the southeast extremity of which is 1^ miles N. by E. of Point Agpa, extends 2i miles to the NW., with a width of 1 mile. It has three heads; the center one is the shallowest, having ^ fathom, sand and stones, on it ; that to the SE. has If fathoms, coral, and that to the NW. 3i fath- oms, sand and stones. The northern part of the shoal bears NE. 3 miles from Point Sigat, and has 8 to 23 fathoms at its edge, and no bottom with 100 fathoms line at the distance of 2 miles. The channel between the bank and the coast is good and deep. 220 PAXAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. Akdan Point and River are Ti miles SE. of Point Agpa. The point, wliicli is fiat, is formed by deposits from the river, which flows out to the west of it. On the bar there is ordi- narily 5 feet water, and with fresh northeast breezes the sea breaks heavily on it. Port Batan (ch. 44, p. 220), 10 miles SE. of Akdan Bar, is a deep bay surrounded by low land cut into by several creeks. The entrance is open to the NNE. and can easily be recog- nized by Okbok Hill, an isolated cliff with a flat top, sit- uated 2 miles to the east of it in low land near the beach. On each of the points that form the entrance there is a vantay, and both points send out banks ; the one from the east point extends 1^ miles NNE. and has f of a fathom on it, and 2 fathoms at the end ; the one from the west point extends i mile to the north and has 1 fathom on it. Between these two banks is a channel 3 cables wide and 6 fathoms deep, running approx- imately N. IT'-' E. and S. 17° W., that leads to the interior of the port, which is completely sheltered from wind and sea. The bar fronting the channel has ordinarily 3 fathoms on it, but it is liable, as well as the banks from the entrance points, to shift with the freshets. There are no other dangers than these banks ; they are not marked by stakes, but are indicated by the color of the water over them. Anclwrage. — The best anchorage inside is in 5^ fathoms, mud, before the town of Batan. Sapian Bay is 3 miles wide, and the same in depth ; it is safe, with 4 fathoms at the entrance, and 3 fathoms in the center of the bay. It is sheltered from all winds but those from the northward. Mobai and Tuat are small rocky islets, with trees upon them. Mobai is clean, with soundings of 3 fathoms off it ; but Tuat has rocks on its northern and southern sides. Between these islets and the point south of them the depth is 4i fathoms; but the point is fringed with rocky islets and shoals of 2 fathoms. Point Nipa (Kolasi) is high and very steep ; there are two flat rocks f of a mile north of it ; the northern one covers only at very high tides; between the two the depth is 3 to 4 fath- oms, and between the south one and the point 3 fathoms; outside the rocks there are 5^ to 7 fathoms. Kapis Roads, open to the NW., offers an anchor c^ge in 6 fathoms, sheltered from the NE. between the bai of the river Kapis and Point Nipa. FORT BATAN Spot » Lat.n'tusHcrs.-Um^.usraa.WK. PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. 221 River Kapis, or Panay, one of the most important in the island of Panay, is protected by a bar of sand, on which there are 4 or 5 feet at low water and sometimes as much as 13 feet at high water. Within the bar the depth increases to 3 fath- oms and continues that depth for 3 miles, as far as the town of Kapis, which carries on a brisk native trade, principally in export of rice. Steamers from Manila call weekly. Olutaya Island is 1 mile in length, NE. and SW., and very narrow ; two rocks above water lie off its northeastern part, and another off its southwestern end. The coast of the island forms little bays, in which coasters Und anchorage in 3 to 4 fathoms. Around the island there is 7 fathoms water, but the passage between it and the main is blocked. Between Olutaya Island and Bulakau Point there is a great bay, with no good anchorage in it. Kasamayan Bank, 3 miles NW. of the town Sanayon, on the southeastern shore of the bay, is f of a mile long, west and east, and ^ mile wide ; it consists of sand and rock. The middle part uncovers at very low tides; the remainder has less than 6 feet water over it. From the center Sharp Peak bears S. i W. and Olutaya Island WNW. Bulakau Point, the northeastern extremity of Panay Island, is a spur from the mountains Sibala and Sharp Peak ; the point is low and terminates in a sand spit, with rocks at the end, which extends out rather less than i of a mile, and uncovers at low water. Tidal streams. — In the sea north of Panay, sometimes called the Sea of Kapis, the flood stream enters from the westward by the passage between Panay, Karabao, and Tablas, and also by the passage between Tablas Romblon and Sibuyan. This last stream passes along the southwest coast of Sibuyan and between Kauit Point and Cresta de Gallo with great force, but on the east coast of Sibuyan it meets the flood stream from the eastward by the Strait of San Bernardino and loses all its force. The ebb stream moves in the reverse direction and by the same passages, and is not felt on the southwest coast of Sibuyan. The strength of the stream at full and change of moon is 3^ miles an hour between Panay and Tablas, and 'I miles an hour between Tablas and Sibuyan. PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. 221 River Kapis, or Panay, one of the most important in the island of Panay, is protected by a bar of sand, on whicli there are 4 or 5 feet at low water and sometimes as much as i:} feet at high water. Within the bar tlie depth increases to 3 fath- oms and continues that depth for 3 miles, as far as the town of Kapis, which carries on a brisk native trade, principally in export of rice. Steamers from Manila call weekly. Olutaya Island is 1 mile in length, NE. and SW., and very narrow ; two rocks above water lie off its northeastern part, and another off its southwestern end. The coast of the island forms little bays, in which coasters find anchorage in 3 to 4 fathoms. Around the island there is 7 fathoms water, but the passage between it and the main is blocked. Between Olutaya Island and Bulakau Point there is a great bay, with no good anchorage in it. Kasamayan Bank, 3 miles NW. of the town Sanayon, on the southeastern shore of the bay, is f of a mile long, west and east, and ^ mile wide ; it consists of sand and rock. The middle part uncovers at very low tides; the remainder has less than 6 feet waiter over it. From the center Sharp Peak bears S. i W. and Olutaya Island WNW. Bulakau Point, the northeastern extremity of Panay Island, is a spur from the mountains Sibala and Sharj^ Peak ; the point is low and terminates in a sand spit, with rocks at the end, which extends out rather less than ^ of a mile, and uncovers at low water. Tidal streams. — In the sea north of Panay, sometimes called the Sea of Kapis, the flood stream enters from the westward by the passage between Panay, Karabao, and Tablas, and also by the passage between Tablas Romblon and Sibuyan. This last stream passes along the southwest coast of Sibuyan and between Kauit Point and Cresta de Gallo with great force, but on the east coast of Sibuyan it meets the flood stream from the eastward by the Strait of San Bernardino and loses all its force. The ebb stream moves in the reverse direction and by the same passages, and is not felt on the southwest coast of Sibuyan. The strength of the stream at full and change of moon is 3^ miles an hour between Panay and Tablas, and 2 miles an hour between Tablas and Sibuyan. 222 l^\NAV — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. JiNTOToLO Channel is ilie name given to the passage between tlu' sontliwest point of Masbate and the northeast l>oint of Panay. Jintotolo Island, already described, and the Zapatos, three islets on a bank lying 6 miles SW. of Jintotolo Island, divide the channel into three passages; that between Jintotolo Island and the Zapatos is generally used. Zapato Mayor is 260 feet high, wooded, and cultivated ; a shoal extends 1 mile to the westward from the island, and has 3i fathoms water over it, and 5^ to 7 fathoms at its edge. Zapato Menor is 270 feet high, bare, and clean on all sides except the western, from which there projects a narrow ledge. The little islet Chinela, between the two Zapatos, is sur- rounded by a reef 3 to 4 cables wide. The depth of water on the bank and between the islets is 5^ to 8 fathoms. Elcano Shoal. — In August, 1865, the Spanish gun vessel Elcano struck soundings on a bank of sand and rock, 13 to 5^ fathoms. From the position in 5^ fathoms Zapato Mayor bore S. 33° E., Pulanduta Point N. 85° E., and Kamasusu Island N. 43° E. ; the extent of the bank was estimated at 3 miles WNW. and ESE. This bank is not shown on the Spanish chart corrected to 1873, but its position is close to the eastward of a sounding of 10 fathoms, obtained by H. M. S. Nassau in 1871. It lies close to one of the most frequented routes of the archipelago, but as yet no other notice of any danger has been reported. Cucaracha Shoal, 6 miles N. 30° E. of Bulakau Point, and 11 miles S. 79° E. of Zapato Mayor, is a small cir^cular bank, 1^ miles in diameter, covered by 2i fathoms, with one rock iiearly awash on its northern part. Off the northern edge of the shoal the depth is 4 fathoms, and off the southern edge 6 fathoms. Islands off the East Coast of Panay. — Manigonigo, 1| miles N. 10° E. of Point Bulakau, is a conical islet, small and sandy, 90 feet high, surrounded by rocks to the distance of 1 cable on all sides but the south, where they extend to 2 cables. The channel between the islet and the point has a depth of 2f to 4 fathoms, and is only fit for small craft; the greater depth is near the islet. Danger. — A dangerous rock covered by If fathoms water, with 2^ fathoms beside it, lies 1 mile S. 26° W. of Manigonigo, and less than 1\ miles from the coast. Currents. — The tidal streams are strong here; the flood tide sets to the east, and the ebb to the west. PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. 223 Lulughan, or Nabunat, 3^ miles W. by S. of Point Bulakau, is 1 mile in extent and 100 feet high ; it is surrounded l)y rocks which extend 4 cables from it to the SW. A patch of 2 fathoms lies 1^ miles SW. of the isle. Tulunanaun, If miles SW. of Lulugban, has a hill 200 feet high; on its northern part it is 1^ miles long, NE. and SW., and is surrounded by rocks to the distance of 2 cables, with soundings of 2^ to 4 fathoms at the edge ; on its northwest coast are three steep rocks. The channel which separates it from Lulugban has 2^ to 4 fathoms water. At 1 mile SE. of Tulunanaun is a patch of 34- fathoms, surrounded by G4- to 74 fathoms. Balbagan is about a mile long, north and south, narrow, and about 100 feet high, with a little sand hill on its southeast extremity. It is surrounded by rocks and by a shoal which extends from it 8 cables to the north, a mile to the NE., and 2 miles to the south, where on the end of the shoal there is 3^ fathoms water and 5^ off it. The west coast of the isle is clear at 2 cables from it. At 1^ miles S. 75° E. of Balbagan, be- tween it and South Gig ante, are rocks awash at low water, and at the northern entrance of the channel, between it and North Gigante, a patch of 5| fathoms. The channel between Balbagan and Tulunanaun, with the exception of the rock above-mentioned, S. 45° E. of Balbagan, is clear, with 7 to 16 fathoms depth, but midway between Balbagan and Lulugban is a patch of 2f fathoms, and the soundings on the western side of this channel are irregular from 3i to 6 fathoms. Vessels of large draft will do well to take the passage north of the Gigantes, rather than that be- tween Balbagan and Tulunanaun islets. Gigantes Islands, or Sibuluak, are a group of two islands of moderate height, together with several islets, and sharp, detached rocks. The group is clear on its northern side, and the shoals on the other sides do not project more than f of a mile. North Gigante, or Sibuluak Babai, is 2 miles long, north and south, and 1 mile wide, with a wooded hill on either ex- tremity ; it is surrounded by a shoal which extends to i mile to the east and west of it. At 7 cables to the east of the northeast extremity lies the islet Uaidajan, clear and steep, with 51- to 9 fathoms between it and North Gigante. On the southeast edge of the bank there are three detached rocks, with no channel between them and the island. 224 PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. South Gigante, or Sibuliiak Lalaki, ^ mile south of tlie northern island, is of irregular form, about 2 miles long from east to west, and | mile wide on the western side, which is the highest. On its northern side is a reef which dries, and forms, with the reef of the northern island, a channel with 1^ fathoms at the eastern end and fathoms at the western ; the other sides are clear. At 8 cables SE. of South Gigantes are three small islands ; the southernmost, named Antonia, is clear on the outside. Between these islets and South Gigantes there is a channel of 6 to 8 fathoms depth. Anchorage. — In the northeast monsoon vessels of all sizes can anchor off the southwest coast of South Gigante in 7 fathoms, mud and sand. In the southwest monsoon very small vessels can anchor in the channel between the islands. Bank. — About 5 miles N. 61° E. of the northeast point of North Gigante, is the shallowest part (3:^ fathoms) of a bank, which extends approximately 9 miles ESE. and WNW., with a mean width of 3^ miles. The depth on it is irregular, from 3i to 9 fathoms. The bank is included between the bearings NE. by N. and E. i N., from the northeast point of North Gigante. The channel between the shallow part of the bank and North Gigante, is the most open and direct for going through Jintotolo Channel. Isolated shoals. — Within a radius of 12 miles from NW. by W, to SE. by E. of North Gigante, there are a certain number of isolated patches covered by 4 to 7 fathoms water. The northernmost of these, of 4 fathoms, has not been examined; and the position of another, of 6 fathoms, near the edge of the last described bank, is doubtful. Coast. — From Point Bulakau the coast trends SSE. for 2-j miles up to a bluff, Kamboloton, and thence forms a wide but shallow bay, fronted by the island Baliu, and terminated by Point Kago, 4|- miles south of the bluff. This bay, which is named Bankul, has only 1^ fathoms depth at high water, and at low water several sand banks appear, which block the passage to the three rivers that fall into it. Balin or Binuluangan Island is 3^ miles long, low and of irregular shape ; it has a surrounding reef with several rocky islets on it; the channel between the south point of Balin and Point Kago is 1^ fathoms deep. Kalagnan Island is separated from Balin by a channel 7 cables wide at the northeast end, but almost closed at the PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. 225 southwest; it is 3|- miles long, NE. and SW., and 3 miles wide, and of regular height. The east coast is clear and steep, but the northeast point has several rocks around it; the western side contains several bays of no importance, because of the little depth of water in them. Three and one-half miles east of the north point of the island there is a patch of 6 fathoms, surrounded by 14 to 17 fathoms. Cauas is a little island off the east coast of Kalagnan ; it is -f mile long, east and west, of middling height, and clean, with 7 to 11 fathoms at 1 cable from its east side, and 2f to 3| at the same distance from its west side. The soundings in the channel between it and Kalagnan are 7 to 11 fathoms, and in the channel between it and the northwest point of Sikogon, 11 fathoms. Sikogon, 6 cables SE. of Kalagnan, is high and of 2^ miles length, NE. and SW. The northeastern part has a reef of 2 cables width, on which is a little islet, steep on the outside ; this reef fringes the island on its northern and western sides ; the east coast is clean and steep. At 2^ miles east of the little islet on the north side is a patch of -If fathoms, surrounded by 9 to 20 fathoms. Carmencita Shoal is small, of sand and rock, with 5 feet least water on it, and 4 to 6 fathoms at the edges. It bears S. 42° E. 1 mile from the east point of Caiias, and is 9 cables from the north coast of Sikogon. Sikogon Channel, between Sikogon and Kalagnan, is ^ mile wide and 7 to 12 fathoms deep; it is clear and safe, and is the channel recommended for vessels making for Iloilo Strait. Coast. — South of Point Kago the coast forms a little shoal bay and then the anchorage of Estancia, of 2^ to 5^ fathoms, between the little island Luginut (SW. of Kalagnan) and the Bayas Isles. The town of Estancia is a mile inland, and there is a good road to it from the coast. From there the coast is foul, and should be avoided till off the island Raga- lumbi, which is high ; it then forms two bays, clear and deep, giving fair shelter and anchorage in westerly winds to the strait between Tagil Island and the coast of Panay. Bayas Isles are a group of four islets, of little height, near the coast, 3f miles SE. of Point Kago. They extend If miles from east to west and are surrounded by sand banks and rocks, with no passage between them. At 1 mile west of the south point of the largest isle is a shoal awash at low water, 226 PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. and between Bayas and tlie island to the northward, Luginut, is another x)atch of ^ fathom. Anchorage. — Small craft can find anchorage, sheltered from all winds, between Bayas and Lnginut, in 2^ to 7 fathoms. H. M. S. Nassau anchored in December, 1871, in 13 fathoms, mud, with Culebra Island S. by E. ^ E. and the right tangent of Sikogon E. -^ S., the weather being thick and dirty, and night coming on. Culebra. — Midway between Sikogon and Pan de Azucar is a small island about 200 feet high, surrounded by a reef of sand and rock, which extends 6 cables to the westward, with 1-^ fathoms at its extreme western edge, and 11 fathoms at a short distance from the island and from the reef. Shoals. — There are three shoals northward and eastward of Culebra. The northernmost is 2i miles N. 42° E. of Culebra, of 1 mile extent, and 2 fathoms least water on its east side, and 3| and 6 fathoms on the rest of the shoal. The eastern- most is 4 miles ENE. of Culebra, and has If fathoms water over it, and the southernmost is 2^ miles E. by N. of Culebra, with 1^ least water. These three shoals all have 8 to 20 fath- oms around them, which are the general soundings off the northeast coast of Panay. Nearly 5^ miles SE. of Culebra, and at the same distance to the east of Pan de Azucar, there are two patches of 2f and 3f fathoms, surrounded by 14 and 15 fathoms. Pan de Azucar (sugar loaf) is near the coast of Panay, and is the largest of a group of five islands at the northern entrance of Iloilo Strait. Its base is 4 miles in extent, and it has two remarkable peaks; the highest is 2,037 feet. The north coast sends out a reef to the northward, which terminates in a rock at ^ mile from the island. The east coast is clear. Between this island and Tagil, to the SW., is a narrow channel of 1 to l-j fathoms. Bagaisi, 1 mile north of Pan de Azucar, is clear and deep in its surroundings. Naburut, 4 cables off the northwest coast of Pan de Azucar, is clean. Buglug, on the southeast coast of Pan de Azucar, is united to that island by a stretch of land ; it is clear and steep on the east side. Midway between Pan de Azucar and the coast of Panay is a small shoal, of 1 cable extent, awash at low water, there are 2^- fathoms between it and Pan de Azucar, and 1| fathoms between it and Tagii. PANAY — NORTH AND EAST COASTS. 227 Malaiigaban, 1^ miles soiitlieast of Pan de Azucar, is nearly round; high, clear and deep off its western j)art. The little islet close to its southwest part is also clear. The channel between Malangaban and Pan de Azucar is 1|^ miles wide, and 9 to 12 fathoms deep. Danao, between Malangaban and Bulubadiangan, is small and surrounded by a reef; the chan- nel l)etween it and Bulubadiangan has 3^ to 4 fathoms. Bulubadiangan, 2 miles SSE. of the south point of Pan de Azucar, is of triangular shape, of middling height, clear and deep ; off its south point are two islets joined to the point by a reef. Baliguian, 9 miles east of Bulubadiangan, is a small islet, 150 feet high, surrounded by a narrow reef very steep-to, around which there are 1 5 to 20 fathoms. This islet is a good natural mark for vessels making Iloilo Strait from the north- ward and from the eastward, to clear the numerous shoals about the route. Shoals. — The three nearest shoals are: One of 2^ fathoms, lying south li miles of Baliguian; another of 2f fathoms, lying NE. 3i miles; and another of 3f fathoms, NNE. i E. 4^ miles from Baliguian. The French charts show another shoal 4 miles north of Baliguian. A written description of all the other shoals which en- cumber the channel north of Negros Island, between the northeast part of Panay and the island Bantayan, would be needless ; they can best be understood from the chart. Tagil Island, between Pan de Azucar and the headland of Bakahuan, is 3i miles in length from north to south and of moderate height. The eastern shore is clear and steep, with the exception of a small shoal that projects from the middle of it. The western shore and the south point send out reefs, and off the southwest point is a rocky shoal, awash at low water. The passages which these reefs and shoal form with the coast of Panay, have a depth of l^ to 24 fathoms. Sombrero, i mile NW. of the northwest point of Bulubadi- angan, is round, high, clean, and steep-to. At its southeast part there is anchorage in 9 fathoms, mud, sheltered from southwest winds. The channels between it and Pan de ' Azucar and Bulubadiangan are safe ; in the last the depth is 6i fathoms. Bagabu is very near the south point of Tagil ; on its south part a point of sand and rocks projects to a very short dis- tance. The channel between this islet and Bulubadiangan is 14- miles wide and 7 fathoms deep. 228 PANAY — SOUTHEAST COAST. Tugubanhan is a little more than a mile SE. oi Bakalian lieadland on the coast of Panay, with which it forms the strait named Apiton. It is 4 miles long, NNE. and SSW., and 2 miles wide ; high, clear, and steep-to. Apiton Strait is the southern termination of the inner route to Iloilo Strait from the northward ; it is clear, with a depth of 9 to 11 fathoms, and the coasts on either side are steep, Anajuayan, 2 miles SE. of Tugubanhan, is 336 feet high, and visible from a shij)'s deck 15 miles off. Between it and Tugubanhan the depth is 12 fathoms. Turia Rock is a dangerous rock 4 miles S. 44° W. of Ana- juayan; it is about 100 feet in extent, with 5i feet water on it, and 8 fathoms close to. From a position in 4^ fathoms, 220 feet north of the rock, the following bearings were taken : Tangent of southeast part of Anajuayan N. 47° E., north part of Calabazas islands N. 63° W. Anchorages. — The Challenger, in October, 1874, anchored for the night north of Anajuayan in 10 fathoms, with the right tangent of Tugubanhan bearing N. and the left tangent S. 53° W. There is also anchorage off the northwest side of Tugubanhan, and off Bakahan bluff. SOUTHEAST COAST. The north side of Apiton Strait is formed by a rocky head- land (Bakahan Bluff), high, clear, and steep-to, with a little islet joined to its southern jjart. On the south side of the bluff is Abra de Apiton, a creek with an entrance channel 1 fathom deep, close to the north shore and between that shore and a bank in the mouth of the creek. Inside there is a depth of 3 fathoms, and anchorage for small craft near some rocks off the beach. TFaier.— There is a watering place on the north shore near the first beach at the entrance ; water can also be obtained on the south side, but not so good. West of Abra de Apiton the coast forms a bay, Ajui, 3|- miles wide, in which there is shelter from northeast winds. The river Ajui, leading to the town of the same name, enters on the north shore; it has a depth of 1 to 1^ fathoms at high water. Binanan Islets are two small islets in the middle of the bay, near the coast ; between them, and about them, the depth is 4| fathoms. PANAY — SOUTHEAST (^X)AST. 229 On the western shore are the towns Mangurukurn and Pili, the last standing on a little heiglit on the western point of tlie bay. Sal Islets are united to the coast off Pili hy a reef having f of a fathom on it at low water. Calabazas Isles are two islets of little height and extent to the southward of Sal Islets, and f of a mile from the coast of Panay; the southernmost has a steep beach of sand on its northern side, where there is anchorage sheltered from the southwest. The soundings on the outside of these islets are 44- to 8 fathoms ; between them S-i- fathoms, and between them again and the coast of Panay, 5^ to 7 fathoms. Pepitas Rocks, 1|- miles to the southward of the Calabazas, are some black rocks 7 feet high, about 1 cable in extent; vessels can pass between them and the coast, and also between them and the Calabazas. Coast. — Kulasi Bay and Canas Gulf offer no shelter. Baro- tak Bay has a depth of 3 fathoms ; a river of the same name enters it, in which boats can ascend at high water to the town of Barotak. The point which separates this bay from the next, Banate, is surrounded by rocks, steep-to, which continue round the shore in front of the town, Banate. From here the coast trends to the southward for 13 miles to Point Dumangas, and then west 5 miles to the river Dumangas ; it is low and covered by mangroves, and is unai^proachable on account of shoal water, there being a depth of 1^ fathoms at a distance of 3 miles in places. The rivers Anilao and Dumangas are shallow, and boats can enter them at high water only. Mounts Orok and Saligit are about equal in height, but Mount Orok has a small sharp peak, and Mount Saligit a long flat summit. When in line they serve as marks for the east- ern end of Iguana Shoal. Mount Kolan, or Kolait, is low, and not conspicuous until bearing west. Tomonton Shoal, off Point Tomonton in Negros, stretches 2i miles to the NW., and must be given a wide berth; it has 1^ fathoms at its end, and is said to be extending. Iguana Bank is a long spit of sand in the middle of the eastern entrance of Iloilo Strait, between Point Dumangas and the island Guimaras. The shallowest part of the bank, on which the least water is 1^ fathoms, is i mile in length, ENE, and WSW., and 3 cables wide. From it Dumangas Vantay bears N. by E., and the largest of the Siete Pecados NW. by W. i W. A patch of 2 fathoms lies 8 cables NW. 230 PANAY — SOUTHEAST COAST. of this ])usitio]i, and the part of tlie bank covered with less than 4 fathoms water lies between the bearings S. 20° E., and S. 53° W. from Dumangas Vantay, and S. 53° E. ami S. ?3° E. from the largest of the Siete Pecados. On this arc of 20° the light on Siete Pecados shows a red sector. Mounts Orok and Saligit in line over Dumangas Vantay, bearing NNW. f W., clear the eastern end of this shoal. The channels between this limit of 4 fathoms round the bank, and the same depth off the coast, are about a mile wide. In the northern channel the least depth is 4^ fathoms, and in the southern 6^ fathoms at their eastern entrance. The tidal streams set with great force over Iguana Bank. Siete Pecados is a cluster of rocks lying in mid-channel off the north of Guimaras. The highest, from which a light is exhibited, is 25 feet above the sea, and all of them are steep ; but on the ends of the shelf on which they stand, and which measures about ^ mile, NE. and SW., there are rocks with very little water on them. A rock with 4 feet of water over it, on which the Marquis de Victoria struck, lies 270 feet from the northwest islet of the group ; it is a pinnacle with 8 and 9 fathoms all round it, and lies out of the usual track. The channel between the Siete Pecados and the coast of Panay is i mile wide and 9^ to 20 fathoms deep ; the channel between them and Guimaras is of the same Avidth, and 7 to 10 fathoms deep. Both are clear, but the northern is preferable. Vessels should keep nearer the islands than to the coast of Panay. From this to the port of Iloilo the course is clear. Light on Siete Pecados.- — An iron light-house, 29 feet high, colored bluish gray, is erected on the southern cliffs of the largest islet of this group, in the northern part of Iloilo Strait, exhibiting a fixed white light showing a red sector through an arc of 20°, or between the bearings of N. 74° W. and N. 54° W. (covering Iguana Bank) ; it is raised 98 feet above the sea, and should be visible in clear weather from a distance of 11 miles. Currents. — The flood tide in Iloilo Strait passes to the north as far as Pan de Azucar, approximately, where it meets the other branch of the flood tide coming from the northward. The ebb stream runs in the opposite direction, /. e., to the southward in Iloilo Strait, and to the northward north of Pan de Azucar. The velocity in the strait reaches 4 to 5 miles an hour. PANAY — SOUTHEAST COAST. 231 General directions from Verde Island Passage to Iloilo, eastern route. — The directions for Verde Island Passage as far as Dumali Point have been given in the last chapter. From a position 4 miles NE. of Dumali Point a southeast course will lead between Dos Hermanas and Maestro de Campo Islands and south of Simara ; then Cobrador Island should be steered for until the channel opens between Romblon and Tablas Islands. After rounding the northeast point of Tablas a south course takes a ship in mid-channel and clear of all danger. The light of Port Romblon is badly placed, and scarcely discernible ; it is not an official light. By night this south course should be kept for 14 miles, then a SE. | E. course leads 2 miles south of the southern end of Cresta de Gallo Reef and midway between Jintotolo Island and Zapato Mayor. If the weather is misty, the first land seen will probably be the high and conical hill of Olutaya, on the northern coast of Panay. From 2 miles south of Jintotolo Island a course SE. by E. Y E. should be steered for 9 miles until the peak of Pan de Azucar bears S. by W. ^ W., and then a south course toward the highest hill of Sikogon Island. This will lead between Balbagan and Tulunanauan Islets, in depths of 7 and 8 fathoms, and ^ mile east of the 2f-fathom patch between Balbagan and Lulugban islets. The east point of Canas Islet in line with same highest hill of Sikogon will clear that 2f patch. When east of the north point of Kalagnan Islet steer for the middle of the channel between Kalagnan and Sikogon, south of Cailas. This channel passed, steer S. by W. ^ W. to clear the reef of the island Culebra ; when west of that island steer to pass between Bug- lug on the southeast coast of Pan de Azucar and Malangaban, then between Bulubadiangan and Sombrero, which is I mile to the NW. of it, then through Apiton Channel between the coast bluff and Tugubanhan, and enter the Strait of Iloilo. All these channels are clear, and the least depth is 7 fathoms. After Apiton Channel the Calabazas Islands and Pepitas Rocks, which are safe, will be passed at 1 to 2 miles distance. Vessels drawing less than 13 feet can pass between Point Bulakau and Manigonigo Islet, but this channel is not recom- mended. If it is proposed to pass outside the island, after passing be- tween Balbagan and Lulugban when abreast of Tulunanauan 232 PANAY — SOUTHEAST COAST. steer S. 27"^ E. until Baliguian Islet bears south ; a course south for that islet will then lead half way between the patches of 2f and 3f fathoms. From Baliguian a course SW. ^ W. will lead between Anauayan and Ilakaon on the north coast of Negros, taking care to avoid Turia Rock. To clear this rock a vessel should not pass west of the south point of Tugubanhan until the southern extremity of Calabazas bears WNW. ; she can then steer WSW. If it is preferred to pass northward and eastward of the Gigantes, North Gigante should be passed at the distance of 1^ miles, and either the Sikogon and Apiton passage may be taken, or the Anauayan Channel. From Apiton Pass or Anauayan Channel, whichever has been taken, a course should be steered to pass 3 miles from Tomonton Point in Negros, and then a SW. by S. course should be shaped for 12 miles, keeping a lookout for the reefs off the coast of Panay. When the highest of the Siete Peca- dos bears W. i N., a course should be steered for it, gradu- ally approaching the fishing stakes on the Panay side ; this will lead clear of the shoal water off Point Dumangas and that extending WNW. of Iguana Bank. These fishing stakes are generally in 2 fathoms water, and at 1 or 2 cables from them the depth is 9 to 11 fathoms. Directions for Iloilo Strait. — Coming from the eastward and passing north of Siete Pecados, vessels should round Dumangas Point at a distance of 1 mile, and keep within the white light of Siete Pecados, avoiding the red sector. From abreast the light, a mid-channel course should be maintained to Kabugao Point, when the red light at Iloilo may be steered for, keeping rather to the Guimaras shore. To pass southward of Siete Pecados, the light should be approached bearing about NW., avoiding the red sector and the bank extending about 1 mile northeastward of Nabalus village. A small shoal lies in the mid-channel about south from the light, which will be avoided by keeping more toward the light when it approaches the bearing of north. When westward of the light, proceed as directed before. Northward from Port Iloilo, leaving Iloilo by the eastern channel, the Pecados Rocks, in line with a fall of the hills in the back range of Panay Island, bearing W. \ N., will lead between Iguana Bank and the shoal water off the northern shore; and when mounts Saligit and Orok are in line, bearing ANTIQUE PROVINCE. 233 NXW. f W. and Point Tomonton NE. i E., a NNE. course may be taken. PROVINCE OF ANTIQUE. Situated south of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by Cai^iz, on the south by Mindanao Sea, on the east by Iloilo and Capiz. and on the west by the Sea of Calamianes. The coun- try is mountainous and covered with forests, which afford good timber, resins, pitch, wax, etc. The principal industries are stock raising and the manufacture of fabrics. In the mountains are mines of various metals and hard coal, and (|uarries of marble. The area is 839 square miles, and the population 9,356, divided among 20 pueblos, 51 visitas, and 74: rancherias of infieles. The capital is San Jose de Buenavista, with a population of 5,621. It is situated 262 miles from Manila, and communi- cates with the other provinces of the island by means of regular highways in dry weather, but these are impassable in rainy weather. In general, traveling is done by sea. CITIES AND TOWNS. Anini. — Population, 4,802. Antique. — Population, 1,236; situated 4: miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Barbasa. — Population, 3,231. Bugason. — Population, 14,104; situated 24 miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Cagayancillo.— Population, 3,000; situated 95 miles from San Jos^ de Buenavista. Cavitan. — Population, 1,240; situated 30 miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Culasi. — Population, 10,553; situated 52 miles from San Jost' de Buenavista. Dao. — Population, T,948; situated 25 miles from San Jos^ de Buenavista. It has a highroad to Carabao. Egana. — Population, 1,995, the township having 3,807; situated 13 miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Guisijan. — Population, 6,247; situated 26 miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Lunisijan. — Population, 2,962; situated 25 miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Nalupa Nuevo. — Population, 2,972. 234 CAPIZ PROVINCE. Pandan. — Population, 13,737; situated 103 miles from San Jose de Biienavista. It lias a liighroad to Patnongon, Patnongon.— Poi)nlation, 5,011; situated 3 miles from San Jose de Buenavista. San Pedro.— Population, 7,3G6; situated 3 miles by wagon road from San Jos^ de Buenavista, San Remigio. — Population, 2,503; situated 11 miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Sebaste.— Population, 3,G76; situated 6G miles from San Jose de Buenavista. Sibalom. — Population, 11,675; situated G miles from San Jose de Buenavista. It lias liigliroads to the latter place as well as to San Pedro, San Remigio, and Egaiia. Tibiao. — Population, 5,4:02; situated 44 miles from San Josd de Buenavista. Valderrama. — Poimlation, 4,372; situated 25 miles from San Jos^ de Buenavista. PROVINCE OF CAPIZ. It is bounded on the north by the Archipelago Sea, on the east by the District of Concepcidn, on the south by the ridge separating it from Iloilo, and on the southwest by the moun- tains separating it from the Province of Antique. Its very high mountains are covered with luxuriant vegetation, and give rise to many rivers which water the valleys of the prov- ince. There are gold and copper mines, and much tobacco, sugar, rice, and abaca is raised. During the year three fairs are held, in which articles of the country are bartered. The province is divided into two parts, called Ilaya and Aclan, which aie irrigated by the rivers Panay and Adan, respec- tively. The area is 1,543 square miles and the population 189,171, distributed among 36 pueblos and 287 barrios. The capital is Capiz, with a population of 13,676. It is situated 290 miles from Manila. It has a harbor for vessels of ordinary draft, and highroads to Iloilo, Antique, and the District of Concepcidn. There is a steamer kept by the state, stopping at the harbor every 28 days and keeping up commu- nication with Manila, Romblon, Iloilo, and Cebii. CITIES AND TOWNS. Balate. — Population, 5,065; situated 40 miles from Capiz. Banga.— Population, 9,127. Batan. — Population, 12,908; situated 31 miles from Capiz. ILOILO PROVINCE. 235 Buruanga. — Population, 3,9G7; situated 80 miles from Capiz. Calibo. — Population, 10,815; situated -10 miles from Capiz. Cuartero. — Population, 5, 175. Dao. — Population, 8,785; situated 17 miles from Capiz, Dumalag. — Population, 8,000 ; situated 26 miles from Capiz. It has a road to Tapaz and one to Cuartero. Dumarao. — Population, 5,085; situated 28 miles from Capiz. It lias a telegraph station. Ibajay. — Population, 11,351 ; situated 62 miles from Capiz. Ibisan. — Population, 5,000; situated 6 miles from Capiz. Jaguaya. — Population, 2,500; situated 31 miles from Capiz. Jamindan. — Population, 5,000; situated 6 miles from Capiz. Jimeno. — Population, 3,278; situated 25 miles from Capiz. Lezo. — Population, 5,500. Libacao. — Population, 3,914; situated 47 miles from Cai)iz. Loctugan. — Population, 3,475 ; situated 5 miles from Capiz. Macato. — Population, 10,136 ; situated 45 miles from Capiz. Madalag. — Population, 2,684; situated 48 miles from Capiz. Malinao. — Population, 7,571 ; situated 22 miles from Capiz. Mambusao. — Population, 11,000; situated 20 miles from Capiz. Navas. — Population, 5,257; situated 75 miles from Capiz. Numancia. — Population, 6,123. Panay. — Population, 15,484; situated 4 miles from Capiz. Panitan.— Population, 10,020. Pilar. — PoiDulation, 2,895, the township having 8,905; situ- ated 30 miles from Capiz. Pontevedra. — Population, 9,512; situated 32 miles from Capiz. Sapian. — Population, 4,803. Segui. — Population, 3,802; situated 17 miles from Capiz. There are highroads to Dao, Mambusao, and Ibisan. Sigma. — Population, 1,000; situated 14 miles from Capiz. Tangalan. — Population, 2,982; situated 51 miles from Ca- piz. Tapaz. — Population, 2,892; situated 22 miles from Capiz. PROVIXCE OF ILOILO. It is situated to the southeast of the Province of Capiz and ■west of Antique. The ground is generally level, and, being irrigated bv numerous rivers, is fertile, so that tobacco, cacao. 236 ILOILO PROVINCE. sugar cane, abacji, rice, and maize are grown; besides, tliere is good pasturage for raising herds of cattle and horses, and gold and other mines are known. The principal industry is the manufacture of fabrics of sinamay, piila, jusi, etc., reciuir- ing over 30,000 looms. The dimensions are 99 miles in length by 27 miles in width, and the population is 472,728. The capital is Iloilo, with a population of 10,380. It is situated 355 miles from Manila, and is the residence of the governor, captain of port, and a number of treasury, justice, and foment© officials. It has a pretty cathedral, a seminary, casa real, and court-house. It is one of the most mercantile towns of the Visaya group, and has some industries, among which are a machine shop and foundry, a carriage factory, and a hat factory. CITIES AXD TOWNS. Alimodian.— Population, 11,837; situated 12 miles from Iloilo. Anilao. — Population, 2,099; situated 12 miles from Iloilo. Arevalo. — Population, 3,594; situated 4 miles from Iloilo. Banate. — Population, 6,764; situated 31 miles from Iloilo. Barotac Nuevo. — Population, 11,805. Barotac Viejo. — Population, 5,590; situated 32 miles from Iloilo. Buenavista. — Population, 3,497; situated 1 mile from Iloil... Cabatuan. — Population, 18,177; situated 13 miles from Iloilo. It has highroads to Maasin, Janinay, Santa Barbara, and San Miguel. Calinog'. — Population, 8,800; situated 23 miles from Iloilo. It lias a highroad. Cordoba. — Population, 2,744; situated 2 miles from Iloilo. Dingle.— Population, 11,000; situated 21 miles from Iloilo. Dueiias. — Population, 7,130; situated 28 miles from Iloilo. Dumangas. — Population, 14,114; situated -24 miles from Iloilo. Guimbal.— Population, 10,958; situated 18 miles from Iloilo. Igbaras.— Population, 12,140; situated 24 miles from Iloilo. Janinay. — Population, 28,738; situated 3 miles from Iloilo. Jarc— Population, 9,482. Lambunao. — Population, 7,989; situated 21 miles from Iloilo. It has a highroad. BOHOL PROVINCE. 237 Leganes. — Population, 2,875; situated 6 miles from Iloilo. It has a highroad to Iloilo to the south and to Zarraga to the north. Leon. — Population, 13,950; situated Ki miles from Iloilo. It has liighroads to Cordoba and San Miguel. Liucena, — Population, 0,511; situated 7 miles from Iloilo. Maasin. — Population, 9,074. Manduriao. — -Population, 0,749; situated 4 miles from Ilo- ilo Miagas. — Population, 22,100; situated 24 miles from Iloilo. Mina. — Population, 4,357. Molo. — Population, 9,547. Nagaba. — Population, 8,000; situated 5 miles from Iloilo. Oton. — Population, 13,303; situated 7 miles from Iloilo. Passi.— Population, 13,802. Pavia. — Population, 10,221; situated miles from Iloilo. Paz (La). — Population, 3,041; situated i mile from Iloilo. There are two highroads, one to Iloilo and one to Jaro, and a post office. Pototan, — Population, 14,512 ; situated 18 miles from Iloilo. San Dionisio. — Population, 1,782. San Enrique.^Population, 3,015; situated 27 miles from Iloilo. San Joaquin. — Population, 13,918; situated 34 miles from Iloilo. It has a telegraph station. San Miguel. — Population, 7,300; situated 9 miles from Iloilo. Santa Barbara. — Population, 13,000; situated 10 miles from Iloilo. It has highroads leading to Cabatuan, Pavia, San Miguel, Zarraga, and Lucena. Sara. — Population, 10,950; situated 75 miles from Iloilo. Tigbauan. — Population, 9,109 ; situated 7 miles from Iloilo. Tubugan. — Population, 4,368 ; situated 31 miles from Iloilo. Zarraga. — Population, 5,208; situated 8 miles from Iloilo. PROVINCE OF BOHOL. It is bounded on the north by the sea between Cebil and Leyte, on the east by the Surigao Sea, on the south by the Sea of Mindanao, and on the west by the channel separating it from Cebii. The province is composed of the islands of Bohol and Dauis. They are somewhat mountainous and well wooded, and coffee, abaca, sugar cane, and tobacco are raised. 238 BOHOL — SOUTHWEST COAST. In the mountains of Boliol game is plenty, and many coal and phosphate of iron mines are supposed to exist. Manufactures consist in fabrics of sinamay and other materials. The area is 1,G17 square miles and the population 247,745. The capital is Tagbilaran, with a population of 8,638. It is situated 3G5 miles from Manila. ITIN3RARY OF COAST OP BOHOL — SOUTHWEST COAST. Kalape Island, lying near the coast, is of no great height ; it is foul and surrounded by a steep reef. The little port of Kalape, the entrance to which is very difficult and very dan- gerous, is between the island and the coast. Kabilao Island, separated from the coast islands Kalape and Sandingan by a wide and deep channel, is 2-2- miles long, east and west, and 1^ miles wide. On the southwest side it has a small reef ; the western side is rocky, rugged, and steep ; the northern and eastern sides present sand beaches and rocky bluffs. Tides. — The flood stream makes to the northward and the ebb to the southward with great force. Laon point and town, or the point of the mole, is termi- nated by a sand beach, on which is a rampart ; it is foul and surrounded by great detached rocks. The mole is 328 yards long, and the town is reached by steps cut in the rock. Be- tween this mole and Sandingan Island is a little bay, where shelter may be had from N. to SE., through E., in 3^ to 9 fathoms, mud. The town is situated on the western slope of the Kanmanok Hills at a good height, and presents from the sea a very picturesque aspect ; it is defended by a fort with bastions at the angles. Point Cruz, 4^ miles south of Point Laon, is of no great height, rocky and underworn, and presents the appearance of a wall. A ledge extends to 2 cables from it, with 11 fathoms at the edge, offering bad anchorage. Maribojo Bay, in the elbow which the coast forms east of Point Cruz, is foul, and lined by a steep reef extending f of a mile before the river Abalan, and, continuing along the coast, joins the reef of Panglao Island. The town of Mari- bojo, in the center of the bay, is on ground of slight elevation. Slwal. — At 3 miles SE. of Point Cruz and at 1 mile from the coast there is a small shoal of 33 yards extent, surrounded by 9 fathoms, and with 27 to 3G fathoms at a cable's distance. BOHOL — SOUTH COAST. 239 River Abalan. — The moutli of this river is of good width and there are 5^ feet on tlie bar at low water ; the bar is gen- erally marked by stakes. The north point is flat and covered by mangroves, and has a reef off it ; the south point has a little rocky islet off it, covered by mangroves. The town of Paminuitan is on a little hill near the sea. Panglao Island is low and flat, having only one little hill on it; it is almost joined to Bohol Island, as the channel that separates them dries at low water ; a reef extends off it 4 miles to the SW. There is no anchorage off the island. Point Duljo is sandy and flat, and may be recognized at a distance by a group of cocoanut palms on it; it is clean and steep. The reef on the north side is also steep. Point Bolud is flat and sandy, with a fort upon it. Point Bikin is steej), with a flat crown. Balikasai Island, bearing SSW. 3i miles from Point Duljo, is small, flat, clean, and steep-to. The channel between it and Panglao Island is deep, no bottom being found in it with 110 fathoms. In keeping this channel it is better to keep near Balikasai. Cervera Rock is 2 cables long, NE. and SW., and has 13 feet, coral and sand, on its shallowest part. It can be dis- tinguished in daylight by the color of the water. From the rock, Point Tahuruk (Panglao Island) bears N. 60° W. ; the mount NE. of Panglao, N. 4° E. ; and the south extreme of Pamilakan Island, N. 82° E. Pamilakan Island, lying S. 80° E. of the south point of Panglao, is of no great height, and its coast is foul. The natives of Bohol resort to it to fish beche de mer and turtle. Tagbilaran Strait is of little importance, as it can only be navigated by vessels drawing less than 6 feet. The entrance is from westward, and is generally marked by stakes. The town of Tagbilaran is engaged in agriculture and turtle fishing. SOUTH COAST. The south coast of Bohol is very steep, and may be ap- proached with safety, as the reef that fringes it is very narrow and very steep, but the little bays at the mouth of the rivers on this coast afford no good anchorage. The reef that borders the south coast continues round the Bay of Guindulman, and is very steep ; to the westward of some islets and rocks at the head of the bay there are 3 fathoms water, and 23 at a 240 BOHOL — EAST COAST. very little distance from the shore. From Point Naj^akao to the point off Mount Pugatin the coast appears clear and steep. EAST COAST. Kobton Bay, to the northward of Mount Pugatin, is filled by a reef, which leaves only a narrow opening 5 cables wide between the islets Lumittis and Tabon. This reef, which begins a mile to the southward of Point Namanuko, con- tinues to the northward as far as Lapinin Island, bordering the coast at a short distance from it. The edge is steep, with soundings of 5^ to 9 fathoms near it. Shoals. — A circular shoal of sand and rock, little more than a mile in diameter, and covered by If fathoms water, lies 7 miles north of Namanuko; close to its eastern edge there are 37 fathoms. A small circular shoal, with 11 fath- oms on its eastern edge, also lies SE. of Tintimin Islet, and N. 30° !&., distant l^ miles from the point between Tintimin Islet and Point Libal. A third small, steep shoal is situated in the little bay south of Tintimin. SiKiJOR Island is not very high. Its surface is very broken, and rises to a central peak. Mount Kudtingun, which is NE. of the central peak, is 1,394 feet high. The island is 14^ miles long and 11 miles wide. The productions are tobacco of a superior quality, rice and maize (though hardly sufficient for consumption), manila hemp, and good cacao, which are bartered for wax. Point Sandugan. — The northern part of the island is very low, and surrounded by a reef of 1 cable Avidth. A con- spicuous little hill lies to the south of it and serves to mark it. The coast from Point Sandugan to Port Kanoan, 3 miles to the south, is very foul and steep near the shoals. Port Kanoan is very small, and is the only port of refuge in the island. The total depth of the port is 6 cables, but a sand flat at the head, which dries at low water, reduces the available part of it to 4 cables. From the northern point of entrance a reef extends 1^ cables to the westward, with 4^ fathoms at its edge, and skirts the north side of the port; the southern entrance point and south side of the bay are bor- dered by a reef ^ of a cable wide. The soundings at the entrance are 14 fathoms, lessening to 3-5- fathoms off the mole. Tides. — Off Point Sandugan the tidal streams are very strong. The flood tide runs to the west and the ebb to the BOHOL — CITIES AND TOWNS. 241 east; but on the northwest coast of Sikijor there is an eddy tide ill the contrary direction, which does not extend to 2 miles offshore. Points Tongo and Pasigajon are low and surrounded by a reef, which advances in some places as much as a mile from the shore. This reef is difficult to see, and is dangerous to approach, for soundings show no bottom with 110 fathoms at a cable's distance. The coast should not be closed within 2 or 3 miles. Point Makapilai is clean and peaked. With the exception of this reef on the west coast, the shores are clean and steep-to. On the south side the w^ater is reported to be very deep near the shore, but no soundings are shown on the chart, Lasi Bay is clear, but deep. Minalunan Bay is almost closed by a reef. Shoal. — Off the northeast coast, 2 miles north of Point Dakit, there is a small bank of rock, covered by 3^ fathoms, with very deep water around it. From this shoal Mount Kudtingun bears S. 66° W., and Point Lumango N. 58° W. CITIES AND TOWNS. Albuquerque.— Population, 6, 604. Anda. — Population, 4,036; situated 56 miles from Tagbi- laran. It has highroads to Candabong. An tequera.— Population, 5,842; situated 10 miles from Tagbilaran. Badayon.— Population, 8,048. Balilij an.— Population, 1,860; situated 16 miles from Tag- bilaran. Batuanan. — Population, 1,270. Calape.— Population, 10,025; situated 26 miles from Tag- bilaran. Candijay.— P()pulation, 7,872; situated 54 miles from Tag- bilaran. Canoan.— Population, 9,380; situated 31 miles from Tag- bilaran. Carmen.— Population, 3,300; situated 35 miles from Tag- bilaran. Catigbian.— Population, 2,141; situated 16^ miles from Tagbilaran, Corella.— Population, 4,215. Cortes en BohoL— Population, 6,018 ; situated 6 miles from Tagbilaran. 242 BOHOL — CITIES AND TOWNS. Dauis. — Poi)ulation, 8,992 ; situated 1 mile from Tagbilaraii. Dimiao.— Population, 8,014; situated 22 miles from Tag- bilaraii. Duero.— Population, 7,143; situated 42 miles from Tag- bilaran. Garcia Hernandez. — Population, 5,004; situated 34 miles from Tagbilaran. Getafe.— Population, 3,397; situated 65 miles from Tag- bilaran. Guindulman. — Population, 8,003; situated 51 miles from Tagl)ilaran. Inabanga. — Population, 9,957 ; situated 41 miles from Tag- bilaran, Ipil. — Population, 1,745 ; situated 47 miles from Tagbilaran. Jagna. — Population, 1,162, the township having 13,491; situated 39 miles from Tagbilaran. There is a highroad to the towns of Duero and Garcia Hernandez. Lacy. — Population, 6,448; situated 25 miles from Tagbi- laran. Liila, — Population, 4,470 ; situated 18 miles from Tagbilaran. Loay. — Population, 7,169; situated 11 miles from Tagbi- laran. LiOboc. — Population, 10,174; situated 15 miles from Tag- bilaran. Lioon. — Population, 15,365; situated 16^ miles from Tag- bilaran. Maria. — Population, 5,415 ; situated on the island of Siquijor at a distance of 26 miles by sea from Tagbilaran. Maribojoc. — Population, 10,852; situated 8^ miles from Tagbilaran. There are highroads to Loon, Paminuitan, and Ante([uera. Panglao. — Population, 6,795; situated 10 miles from Tag- bilaran. San Juan. — Population, 5,979. Sevilla.— Population, 5,920; situated 47 miles from Tag- bilaran. Sierra Bullones. — Population, 2,119; situated 44^ miles from Tagl)ilaraii. Signipi. — Population, 11,788. Siquijor.— Population, 11,788. Talibon. — Population, 7,321; situated 50 miles from Tag- bilaran, CEBU ISLAND AND PROVINCE. 343 Tubigon.— Population, 15,855; situated 28 miles from Tag- bilaran. Ubay.— Population, 3,552; situated 48 miles from Taghi- laran. Valencia.— Population, 6,904; situated 20 miles from Tag- bilaran. Vilar.— Population, G,G65. ISLAND AND PROVINCE OF CEBU. This is the most important province of the Visayas, on account of its central position, the nature of its ground, and the industry of its numerous inhabitants. It is bounded on the north by the sea separating it from Masbate and Leyte, on the east by the sea separating it from. Leyte and Bohol, on the south by the Mindanao Sea, and on the west by the Taiion Channel and the island of Negros, The area is 2,092 square miles and the population 504,076. Great mountain chains cross the island ; the chief of these starts at the extreme north between Point Marab on the west and Baluarte on the east, and, continuing south between the two coasts, ends almost in the center of the island. Two other chains run along the coast, and one starts near Carcas, to the southwest of the city of Gebu, terminating on the south in Taiion Point. The coasts are rather high and the rivers of little importance. The capital is Cebu, with a population of 35,243. It is the mercantile center of the islands, and is situated 460 miles from Manila. It is an Episcopal see, and has a good cathedral. Episcopal palace, casa real, court-house, and private edifices, simple but tasty; there is also a post office and telegraph station. On the south, and at the entrance of the channel, is the castle of Point Cauit, and north of this the tower of Man- daui ; both these fortifications communicate with the capital by means of a wagon road, the city being midway between them. At the capital reside the politico-military governor, a secretary, judge and attorney-general, a number of public functionaries, a captain of engineers, and the captain of the port. ITINERARY OF COAST OF CEBU — WEST COAST. Bulalaki Point is low, rather steep, with a flat summit cov- ered by trees and presenting to the north and south some yel- low patches. Vessels of all sizes can anchor in the channel 244 CEBU — WEST COAST. between this point and Chocolate Islet in 8 fathoms, mud, near the islet, and 2| fathoms, sand, almost touching the point. Bantiki Point (Kandaga), the northwestern point of the island, about 4^ miles from Point Bulalaki, is very low; a shoal of sand projects i mile from it, with f of a fathom on it ; the coast between it and Point Bulalaki shows sand beaches and has good holding ground off it. The town of Kandaga lies S. by E. of the point. The coast from Point Kandaga is very clear, with a depth of 4-^ fathoms off it to the town of Paibai, or old Bantayan, but thence to Point Kauit a bank of 3g- fathoms extends to ^ mile from the shore. Point Kauit, 6 miles SSW. f W. of Point Kandaga, is very low and sandy, and is surrounded by a shoal of sand and rocks 2 cables wide, covered by 14- fathoms. Abundant fresh water is obtained here from wells. Jibitnil Island, less than a mile from Kauit, is 2 miles long, north and south, and clear, ending to the south in a point of sand. The passage between it and Point Kauit is less than a mile wide, and 4|- to 25 fathoms deep. Daijagon Bay is very foul ; the reefs reduce the available space to a Avidth of 1 mile, in which there is anchorage in 8 fathoms. The shores are low and covered by mangroves. From the interior of the bay a narrow, tortuous estuary com- municates with Bogo Bay on the eastern coast, reducing the isthmus here approximately | mile wide to a neck of land 1 cable in width. The natives pass their baratos across from one coast to the other in both monsoons to avoid going round to Point Bulalaki. The canal is said to be filling up, and had a depth of only 4 feet of water in 1880. Point Magtulinok is a narrow tongue of sand on which are several little, steep, flat-crowned rocks, with a shoal of 2 cables' extent at its end. Point Makao is low, and clear on its north part, but from its south part a reef extends from before the shallow river Lambusan to |- mile from the shore, with 7 fathoms at its edge. Jaliki River can be entered by small coasters through a passage of 3^ fathoms between the reefs ; the depth on the bar is 3 feet at low water. The northern point is of black rock, nnderworn by the currents. The coast from Jaliki River to Tubukan River is bordered by a reef ^ of a mile wide. CEBU — WEST COAST. 245 Batauan Bay is very small, and the greatest depth inside is only 3 fathoms ; the entrance points are higher than the rest of the coast in sight about this part. Point Langugon is low, clear, and steep-to, and offers an- chorage on its southern side. Tubukan River is of no im- portance, and the bay is filled by a reef which extends round the western point to a distance of | a mile. Buenabrigo Point is low, sandy, and very steep-to; on the northern side is a rivulet of good water, and on the south side there is anchorage sheltered from the NE. Between Buena- brigo Point and Balamban Bay the shore is fringed by a reef which advances in one place as much as 1^ miles. Balamban Bay is foul and affords no accommodation. Point Tajao is low, clear, and steep-to, with 23 fathoms off it ; vessels can anchor south of the point in If to 7 fathoms, sand. The tidal streams that enter Tahon Strait from the north and from the south meet about off this i)oint. Tajao Bank, l^ miles SSW. ^ W. of the point, is 1 mile long, NE. and SW., and ^ mile wide; it is a bank of rock, and uncovers at low water ; the channel between it and the coast is unsafe. From Tajao Point to Point Gorda the coast is fringed by a reef which extends in some places to 1 mile from it. Point Gorda, the highest on the coast, is steep, with a flat crown ; there is a vantay on it. Barili is a town of 17,000 inhabitants, but the river has only 2 feet on the bar, and the creek at the entrance, which is ^ of a mile wide between the points, is considerably reduced by reefs from both sides ; the depth in the creek is 9 to 2^ fathoms. Point Dumanjok is high, with mangroves at the base, where a ledge extends 2 cables to the NE. At a distance of 2 cables from the ledge the soundings show no bottom with 110 fathoms. The bay to the eastward has a depth of 17 iathoms at the entrance, lessening to 5 fathoms near the shore. A town of 600 inhabitants is at the bottom of the bay, near a small river of good water. Point Kopton is low, of dark rock much underworn; it is surrounded by a reef i mile in width, which quite fills up the bay to the eastward. The islet Pescador, 3^ miles SSW. of Point Kopton, is surrounded by dark rock, with no vegetation on it; its sides are steep-to. Badian is a town that can only be approached in boats at high water, as the wide bay in which it is situaled is lined 24G CEBU — WEST COAST. with salient reefs. There is no passage between these reefs and Badian Island. From Badian to the southern end of Cebii Island the coast is clear, of moderate height, and so steep that anchorage can be had only very close to the shore in various places where there are towns. The town of Kinatilan is in an angle of the coast, near the hill Tuburan. Before the town the depth is 7 fathoms at 1 cable distance from the shore. Point Kolasi is low, rather craggy, and white, with a tele- graph on it. From here to Point Liloan, 24 miles to the southward, the coast is sandy and very steep, with rocks close to the shore. The tidal streams are very strong off this point. Point Liloan, 2^ miles south of Point Kolasi, is sandy and steep, with some rocks, covered by l-^- fathoms, at i of a cable from it. On the point is a stone fort, and a signal station which communicates with Kolasi. Vessels can anchor near the point in 7 to 14 fathoms, but the bottom is very steep and the tide streams very strong. Between Point Liloan and Point Tanon, in flood tide, an eddy current in the opposite direction passes very close to the coast. South entrance of Tanon Strait. — From Point Liloan the coast trends E. by S. for 2^ miles to Point Tafion, and con- sists of sand beaches, with a depth of water 5^ fathoms very close to and 17 fathoms at a distance of 1 mile. Point Tanon is low and sandy, with a narrow ledge of rock projecting to 1 cable from it. Tides. — The flood stream from the Strait of Surigao, pass- , ing westward between the islands Bohol and Sikijor, strikes the coast of Cebu at the Point Dalaguete, and divides into two branches. One turns NW., and the other arm, turning to SSW., meets with another part of the stream that was deflected from ISTegros Island about Point Damaguete. The two reunited enter Tanon Strait by the southern entrance, with a velocity that reaches 5 to 6 knots in springs and 2 to 3 at neaps, with violent races and tide whirls. The stream here flows northward, lessening in force as the strait widens, until it reaches the parallel of Point Tajao, where it meets the flood stream from the northward. At the northern en- trance of Tanon Strait the tide, even at spring, does not reach a speed of 3 knots. The ebb stream is directed the reverse way from the parallel of Point Tajao. As a resultant CEBU — EAST COAST. 247 of the tides there is always, on the southeast coast of Negros, between the points Damaguete and Bombonon, a constant current to the south, with varying velocity. EAST COAST, FROM NORTH TO SOUTH. Point Bulalaki and Chocolate Islet have been described above. From Point Bulalaki to Bogo Bay, 13 miles SSW., a reef of sand and rocks fringes the shore, and extends as much as li miles from it, at one place, about 3 miles south of Bulalakr; the depth over this reef is f to If fathoms, and at its edge from 4^ to 14 fathoms, fine sand. Bogo Bay is nearly filled by shoals that advance from its sides, leaving only a narrow channel to the head of the bay, where the town of Bogo is situated. The shoals are reported to show clearly, and to be marked by bushes. A narrow neck of land separates Bogo Bay from an estuary on the west coast of Cebii, and the natives pass their baratos across in preference to going round Point Bulalaki. Anchorage may be obtained in Bogo Bay in bad weather, but it is recommended not to go into less than 4 fathoms, as the water shoals rapidly, and the bottom consists of sand and rock. Nailon (or Mailon) Point is low and surrounded by a narrow reef; the coast between it and Point Saak, which lies S. by E. 4|- miles, is clear and steep-to, and consists of sand beaches interrupted by rocks and mangroves. Point Saak is low and wooded, clear, and steep-to. A low range of hills lies 2 or 3 miles inland, and shows a hill 1,122 feet above the sea, WSW. of Point Saak. Capitancillo Islet, which lies east 2^ miles from Point Saak, is low and circular in form, about a cable in diameter, with a few trees on it, and a sand beach on its western side ; this side is clear, but on the northern side there is a narrow reef, and on the eastern and southern sides shoals extend to a distance of ^ mile, with 18 fathoms close to the edge. At a distance of 1 mile N. by E. of Capitancillo Islet is the southern end of a shoal of sand and rock that stretches H miles NNE. ; this shoal is covered by 1^ fathoms on the shal- lowest part, with a depth of 18 to 37 fathoms round its edges, and 32 fathoms in the channel that separates the shoal from Capitancillo Islet. Between these dangers and the coast of Cebii there is a clear channel with no bottom at 55 fathoms. 248 CEBU — EAST COAST. Kalangaman Islet lies 2 miles IST. 71° E. of Point Nailon ; it is small and low ; on its east and west sides are shoals which dry at low water; and about a mile to the SW. of the islet there is a shoal i mile long, NE. and SW., and -^ of a mile wide; the depth over it is If fathoms, and round its edges 14 to 18 fathoms. Danger. — The Spanish steamer Ocmoc struck soundings in 12 feet in the channel between Kalangaman and Capitancillo islets. It being night, no bearings were taken ; it is shown on chart 2578 as lying 7 miles E. i S. of Point Nailon; -position doubtful. The channel between Capitancillo and Cebii is generally used by steamers. Point Bantulin, bearing S. i E. 5 miles from Point Saak, is of uniform height, rocky, clear, and steep-to. To the NW. of the point is Tabagon Bay, in which there is anchorage in 3f to 9 fathoms, sand and mud, before the town of Tabagon. The shores of the bay are covered with mangroves, and must not be approached within 1 cable. Coast. — From Point Bantulin the coast trends S. 20° W. for o-k miles to Point Bugod ; it is low and steep-to and of no great height, consisting of sand beaches separated by rocky bluffs which are surrounded by rocks to the distance of ^ cable. The river Jamuguit enters the sea about 2 miles north of Point Bugod; at the mouth of the river, verj^ close to the shore, there are soundings of 6 fathoms, sand. Point Bugod is low, rocky, and steep-to ; the coast between it and Point Pinulakan, 7^ miles to the southward, is of medium height, and consists of sand beach with good depth and anchorage off it. On this coast there are three towns : Bugod is on a rising ground surrounded by hills; Bacio is very small; Catman contains 6,098 persons; the depth of water off this town is 6 to 22 fathoms, sand. Point Pinulakan is of no great height, clear, and steep-to. Luyan, to the south of it, is a town of 500 people occupied in cutting wood, which is sent to Cebil. Point Katadman, which lies S. i W. 21 miles from Point Bantulin, is very flat and covered by mangroves; there is a signal station on it, and a shoal surrounds the point, extend- ing from Danao River on the southern side, as far as the little port of Bugut on the northern side ; on the outer edge of this reef there are 8 to 17 fathoms, sand and mud. CEBU — EAST COAST. 249 Port Bugut, or Carmen, is a small nook situated 3 miles N". by W. i W. of Point Katadman, sheltered by the low islet Pupil. The eastern side of this island is foul, and there is no passage between the northern side and the shore. The channel leading to the port is on the south side of the islet, and is reduced by shoals on both sides to a width of 5^ fathoms ; these shoals wash at low water, and are marked by bushes. Within the port the depth is 4^ fathoms, lessening toward the beach, which is low and covered by mangroves. The town is on the south side, and consists of about 20 houses. In December, 1879, two Spanish gunboats rode out a typhoon in this port. Directions. — In order to enter the ]3ort the land should be closed to about a mile from the shore, care being taken to clear the reef that borders the coast, and when the fort at the bottom of the port bears WNW. a course should be steered for it on that bearing, which will lead clear of the shoals on either side. Without a pilot it would not be safe to attempt to enter at night. Coast. — From Point Katadman to Danao the coast is foul, and the anchorage off Danao, which is a large town, can not be recommended. From Danao to Point Bagakai the shore is sandy; and, except about Point Dapdap, where the water is shoal, offers anchorage in good depths to vessels of all sizes during the southwest monsoon. Liloan, situated on the left bank of the river of the same name, is small, and with the town of Dapdap numbers only 8,380 inhabitants. The river can be entered by lanchas at high water. Point Bagakai, bearing south 9 miles from Point Katadman, is low, ragged, and surrounded by rocks. Steering for Cebu from the northward, Point Bagakai when first seen looks like an island, as there is a roimd-backed hill upon it about 150 feet high. Maktan and Olango are both low. Lights. — On Bagakai Point a fixed white light is exhibited on a circular tower, 46 feet above the sea and 21 feet above the ground, visible at a distance of 9 miles. The light-keeper's house is of nipa, and separated from the tower. The light is very difficult to distinguish, the fishing lights in the vicinity being very numerous and much brighter. A harbor light is exhibited from a light-house on Third Van- tay Point, northern extreme of Maktan Island, It is a fixed red light, elevated 39 feet above the sea, and should be visible 250 CEBU— EAST COAST. in clear weather from a distance of 7 miles. The liglit-house, 25 feet high, consists of an iron tower, painted gray; the keeper's dwelling is near it. Coast. — From Point Bagakai the coast trends SSW. for 3^ miles to the northern j^oint of a shallow bay at the entrance of the strait leading to Cehii. Near this point is the north- ernmost buoy marking the entrance to Port Cebil, shown on the plan of the port as lying NW. by N". 1| miles from the north point of Maktan Island. On both sides of the entrance there are fishing stakes which serve to mark it. Cebu Port is formed by the channel which separates Mak- tan Island from Cebil. The practicable channel is 2 cables wide in the narrowest part, which is abreast of Mandani tower, and 3 cables wide before the town of Cebii ; the least depth in it is 4-^ fathoms, increasing in many places to 9 fath- oms. It is marked along its whole course by a series of buoys, painted in vertical stripes ; those on the Cebu shore are black and white, and those on the Maktan shore are red and white. The presence of these buoys must not be relied upon, as in 1881 a number of them had disai3peared, but in their absence the tide rips on the edges of the shoals and the color of the water will indicate the passage. In daylight the navigation presents no difficulties, but on a dark night, when the edges of the reefs can not be seen, it is not safe. The towers of Mandani on the Cebu coast, and of Opon, on Maktan Island, are white. The bank which extends NE. of Mandani tower is covered with grass and is generally dry. The town of Mandani lies near the beach, in the bight of the coast westward of the tower. Maktan Island consists of an old coral reef, raised a few feet (8 or 10 at most) above the present sea level. At the northern i3art of the island, where a convent stands, a low cliff fringes the shore, being an upper stratum of the upheaved reef. The raised reef is here preserved, but over the portion of the island immediately fronting Cebii it has been removed by denudation, with the exception of a few pillar-like blocks which remain, and which are conspicuous from the anchorage. The surface is scooped out into irregular basins and sharp projecting pinnacles and covered in all directions with mud, resulting from the denudation. Nearly all the island is cov- ered by mangroves, but on the part left dry there are planta- ticns of cocoanuts. CEBU— EAST COAST. 251 From the northern point of the isl.uul, near tlio entrance to Port Cebn, a ledge extends G cables to the NE. by E., the edge of which is generally marked by fishing stakes ; the north- west shore is fringed by a narrow reef, but on the south side the reef stretches out to 2 miles from the island, with oi to 8 fathoms at the edge. The northeast side is clear and steep-to ; the channel between Maktan and Olango islands is 1^ miles wide, clear and deep. The only town on the island is Opon, on the west coast, SW. of Mandaui Point in Cebil. It was here that Magellan was killed in 1521, after making the first passage across the Pacific. The town of Cebu is the most ancient in the Philippines ; it is the seat of government of the Visayan Islands, which include Cebu, Bohol, Panay, Negros, and Leyte, and it is the residence of a bishop. It is built on a large plain at the foot of the chain of hills that traverse the island throughout its length, and is a well-constructed, thriving place ; the merchants' quarter is situated along the port, and includes some well-built stone houses, though many are of old construction. The huts of the Malays, for the most part fishermen, are on the beach, and form the west part of the city. The fort is a triangular edifice of stone, painted red, with an open square in front of it. Coal. — The supply is very small, chiefly Australian; price, $16 per ton. The coal station is at Kauit Point, If miles SW. of the town ; the coal is brought off in bulk, and the process of coaling is slow. There are beds of coal in the island, but only the surface coal is worked. Anchorage. — The best anchorage is SSW. of the fort in 5 to 7 fathoms, mud ; nearer the southern reef there is more water, but the bottom is hard. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at noon ; springs rise 7 feet. The strength of the stream is 2 to 3 knots at springs; vessels should moor, as the Challenger, at single anchor, surged very much at the night tides. Southern entrance. — Kauit Point is a tongue of sand which juts out about 9 cables to the NE. from the coast, with rocks at its sides, and trees and a ruined castle on it. At high water it appears as a low islet, and is not distinguishable until close-to. The castle lies SW. If miles from Cebu fort. Between Point Kauit and Point Lipata, which lies SW. |- W. 3 miles from Point Kauit, the shore is sand}^ with good hold- ing ground at 3 cables from it, in G fathoms. 252 CEBU — EAST COAST. Campanario Shoal, covered by 5 feet of water, lies halfway between Kauit castle and the eastern edge of Lipata Bank ; it is marked by a buoy. From it San Nicholas church bears N. 13° E., and Kauit castle N. 6° E., distant 9^ cables. Lipata Bank lies in the middle of the southern entrance to Port Cebu, between the coast of Cebu and the reef off the southwest point of Maktan Island. It is of oval form, 3 cables in extent, and uncovers at low water. A bank covered by 8 feet of water extends north and northeast, the outer edge of which is marked by buoys. Narvaez Bank, between Lipata Bank and the coast of Cebu, is of coral, 2 cables long, covered by 5 feet of water and marked by a black buoy with a ball. Both Lipata and Nar vaez banks, as also the edge of the reef olf Maktan Island, are marked by fishing stakes, but as the stakes are being con- stantly shifted, too much confidence must not be placed in them as marks for the edge of the banks. Lights. — On Lipata Bank a fixed red light is exhibited on a tripod elevated 26 feet above the sea, and visible in clear weather to a distance of 6 miles. On Lanis Point, the southwest point of Maktan Island, a fixed green light is exhibited on a tripod elevated 26 feet above the sea, and visible to a distance of 6 miles. Leading mark. — The dome of San Nicholas church bearing N. i E. will lead in mid-channel between Lipata Bank and the reef off Maktan. On this bearing the church is in line with the central apex of a triple-peaked hill 10 or 12 miles to the northward of the town. Lipata Point is flat and sandy; not far from it is a stone fort, and the town of Talisai. A reef projects about 6 cables south of the point, with 4^ fathoms at its end. This is about the position assigned to Lagundi West Shoal, bearing SW. by W. f W. lyV miles from the center of Lipata Bank, and it is probably the same; but the name Lagundi does not appear on the Spanish chart. The shoal is covered by 2f fathoms and is marked by a buoy with staff and ball. Lagundi Shoal, having over it 2f fathoms, bears SSW. 1^ miles from the center of Lipata Bank, and is marked by a buoy with staff and ball. Another small shoal of sand covered by 2f fathoms lies SW. 1^ miles from Lipata Point. Tambon Shoal, having over it 4 fathoms, bears SE. by E. i E. 2-=^ miles from the center of Lipata Bank; it is marked by a b\ioy with staff and ball. CEBU — SOUTHEAST COAST. 253 Directions for navigating from Jinioiolo Channel to Cehu. — From a position 2 miles south of Jintotolo a course of S. 62° W. will lead 1-J- miles clear of North Gigante and north of Tanguingui Islet to midway between Malapascua and Choco- late islets, but allowance must be made for the set of the currents, which varies according to the strength of the mon- soon. In the daytime Malapascua can be passed on either side, but at night it is advisable to pass to the eastward, giving a berth to the dangerous rock which extends about f of a mile off its south point. From Malapascua a course should be steered to pass between Capitancillo and Kalanga- man islets; a S. f W. course then leads to within 2 miles of Bagakai light, at the northern entrance to Port Cebu; or, from Malapascua steer to pass between Capitancillo and the coast of Cebu, as the channel that separates them is clear and deep. The narrowest part of the entrance to Port Cebii is between Mandani Point and the mole of Opon town in Maktan, and there the depth will lessen to 4^ fathoms. A vessel should keep on the Opon side to avoid the bank on the coast of Cebu. When the Challenger entered the port in 1875 the edges of the shoal were by no means readily distinguished, for muddy water extended right across the narrowest part of the channel. Having passed the mole of Opon a vessel should steer, in daylight, for the point of the fort of Cebii ; but at night, if obscure, on a course S. 64° W. This course will clear the shoals of the north coast, keeping at the same time a distance of 2 miles from the shore of Maktan Island, to the anchorage off Cebii. To go out from the anchorage hj the southern channel a SW. course should be steered until the dome of the church of San Nicholas bears N. i E,, when a course S. i W. leads through the fairway between Lipata Bank and the reef of Maktan Island. Having cleared the reef and Lipata Bank a course SSW. ^ W. can be steered to pass 4 miles west of Kalibao Island. SOUTHEAST COAST. From Point Lipata to Point Tinaan, WSW. 6 miles, the coast forms a bay, in the center of which is the town of Min- glanilla ; the entire bay is obstructed by shoals which extend to li miles from the shore ; the channels between these shoals, and between them and the coast, are less than 3 fathoms deep. 254 CEBU — SOUTHEAST COAST. Naga is a large town with a handsome church. Steam vessels and coasting craft using the south entrance to or from the port of Cebii make Naga the point of entrance and departure. Anchorage, but of small extent, may be obtained off Naga in 4 to 7 fathoms, but care must be taken to avoid a small sunken rock having over it 2f fathoms, with 9 fathoms within a boat's length. Tinaan or Tuiaan Anchorage, about 1-^ miles SW. of Naga, in front of a small village without a church, is difficult to distinguish from seaward. It is formed by the coast and a shoal I mile SE. of the village. This shoal is 6 cables long, ENE. and WSW., and 2 cables wide; its extremities and the points of the bay are marked by stakes. In the middle of the bay there is a depth of 11 fathoms, sand, lessening gradually to 2f fathoms at 1 cable from the wharf. The north entrance is easier and cleaner than the south entrance, in the middle of which there is a patch of 5i fathoms. Tuiaan is the port of shipment of coal from the mines of Uling and Alpako, Coast. — From Tuaian to the salient point of Argao, the coast is fringed by a narrow reef which extends from it more than 2 cables at the most ; it is very steep, with more than 50 fathoms depth at a short distance from it. In passing along this part of the coast of Cebu it is advisable not to keep too near the land. San Fernando is a town situated some distance inland from the coast, and about 3 miles SW. of Tinaan. Karkat Point is low and fringed by the coast reef of 2 cables' width, with 20 to 40 fathoms near it. Karkat Bay has an islet in the middle of it, which, with the shoals projecting from the shore, forms a little sheltered port. The church at Karkat is situated conspicuously on a hill NNW. of the islet. The entrance channel to the port runs NW. and SE., and has a depth of 4^ to 6^ fathoms. Within the port there are 7 fathoms. The best anchorage is near the north part of the islet. An acquaintance with the locality is necessary to enter, as the sides of the entrance are not marked by bushes. The shores are very low and covered by mangroves. Sibonga (ch. 45, p. 254), 4 miles to the south of Karkat Bay, offers good anchorage sheltered from westerly winds, and may be known by a church lately constructed. The anchorage No 45. I pf \ v\- ^ax^ Tr>r, CAPTAE East P* L< ■J--Lu .47X ai.>^'^ Inttr r Port vot trveyed ^^^ \ \^ POET SIBOlfCyA Surveyed^ umirr the direction of CAPTAIN CLAUDIO MONTERO SpanishNmy 1864 East P? Lat.9?41'.15"N._LU1^^^ \y CEBU — SOUTHEAST COAST. 255 is ill 4: fathoms, sand, at equal distance from tlie coiirt-lioiise and the church ; northward of this position the bottom becomes rocky, as also the coast as far as Karkat Bay. Argao Point, 8 miles south of Sibonga, offers anchorage in from 4 to ? fathoms, sand, sheltered from north and northeast' winds. Small vessels load here in both monsoons, choosing their anchorage north or south of the point, as most conven- ient. The church at Argao is a most conspicuous building. Supplies may be obtained at Argao by applying to the local authorities. Point Dalaguete, 9 miles SW, f W. of Point Argao, is flat and sandy, clear and steep-to. Anchorage may be ob- tained north and south of the j)oiiit in 3|- or 18 fathoms, sand. The town of Dalaguete may be known by a conspicuous church, visible at a great distance both from the north and from the south. The coast between Points Argao and Dalaguete con- sists in some places of clean and steep sand beaches, and in others of mangrove patches with shoals extending to a dis- tance of one cable from the shore. Tides. — The flood stream from the eastward strikes the coast about this part of Cebil and is divided into two streams which follow the coast, one to the NNE. through the channels on either side of Maktan Island, the other to the SSW. passes round to the south end of Cebti and enters Tanon Strait. The coast from Dalaguete Point to Boljon is low, with steep sand beaches interrupted by rocky bluffs ; at mid-distance are the town and shoal of Mambagi ; the shore before the town is clean and a depth of 12 fathoms off it. Mambagi Shoal is a shoal of sand and rock -J of a mile long and a little more than a cable wide, with 3^ to 11 fathoms round its edges. It lies 2 miles off the coast and 2^ miles NE. by N. of Boljon Bluff. Boljon Bay is small and very steep; there are 12 fathoms within 100 yards of the shore ; a little to the north of the bay is a white peaked rock of a good height (Boljon Bluff), on which is a little stone tower used as a signal station. The town of Boljon is surrounded by a wall and fortifications. Point Yuisan, 4^ miles south of Boljon, is low, and ends in sand and rocks close to the shore; the village contains only 350 persons. Yuisan Shoal, of sand and rock, awash at low water, Avith 2i to bh fathoms round its edge, is 2 cables long, NE. and SW., CEBU — SOUTHEAST COAST. 255 is iu 4 fathoms, sand, at equal distance from tlie court-liouse and the church ; northward of this position the bottom becomes rocky, as also the coast as far as Karkat Bay, Argao Point, 8 miles south of Sibonga, offers anchorage in from 4 to 7 fathoms, sand, sheltered from north and northeast' winds. Small vessels load here in both monsoons, choosing their anchorage north or south of the point, as most conven- ient. The church at Argao is a most conspicuous building. Supplies may be obtained at Argao by applying to the local authorities. Point Dalaguete, 9 miles SW. f W. of Point Argao, is flat and sandy, clear and steep-to. Anchorage may be ob- tained north and south of the laoint in 3^ or 18 fathoms, sand. The town of Dalaguete may be known by a conspicuous church, visible at a great distance both from the north and from the south. The coast between Points Argao and Dalaguete con- sists in some places of clean and steep sand beaches, and in others of mangrove patches with shoals extending to a dis- tance of one cable from the shore. Tides. — The flood stream from the eastward strikes the coast about this part of Cebu and is divided into two streams which follow the coast, one to the NNE. through the channels on either side of Maktan Island, the other to the SSW. passes round to the south end of Cebri and enters Taiion Strait. The coast from Dalaguete Point to Boljon is low, with steep sand beaches interrupted by rocky bluffs ; at mid-distance are the town and shoal of Mambagi ; the shore before the town is clean and a depth of 12 fathoms off it. Mambagi Slioal is a shoal of sand and rock -g- of a mile long and a little more than a cable wide, with S^ to 11 fathoms round its edges. It lies 2 miles off the coast and 2^ miles NE. by N. of Boljon Bluff. Boljon Bay is small and very steep; there are 12 fathoms within 100 yards of the shore ; a little to the north of the bay is a white peaked rock of a good height (Boljon Bluff), on which is a little stone tower used as a signal station. The town of Boljon is surrounded by a wall and fortifications. Point Yuisan, ^\ miles south of Boljon, is low, and ends in sand and rocks close to the shore ; the village contains only 350 persons. Yuisan Shoal, of sand and rock, awash at low water, with 2^ to bh fathoms round its edge, is 2 cables long, NE. and SW., 256 CEBU— SOUTHEAST COAST. and 1^ cables wide. It lies 1^ miles offshore. From it Yui- san church bears N. 21° E., and the north point of Sikijor Point S. 33° E. Point Oslob, bearing SW. by S. 4 miles from Point Yuisan, is sandy and low, and has on it a fort of white stone, visible a great distance. It is surrounded by a narrow reef of only a cable's width. On the south side there is anchorage in 3i to 9 fathoms. The coast between points Yuisan and Oslob is sand beach fringed by a reef i of a mile wide, steep-to. From Point Oslob to Point Taiion, which lies SW. 8^ miles from it, the coast land is high, with sandy beaches and rugged bluffs of white rock, and is very steep. Point Tailon, the southern point of Cebu Island, is low, sandy, and surrounded by a narrow reef, little more than a cable wide. There is anchorage south of the point in 5^ to 7 fathoms, sand ; but it is exposed to the force of the tide streams that enter and leave the Strait of Taiion. The church and town of Tanon are on high ground near the point. Sumilon Island lies ENE. 3 miles from Point Tanon, and li miles off the coast. It is | of a mile long and 177 feet high; its shores are clean and steep. BoHOL Island is of oval figure, 47 miles in length, NE. and SW., and 34 miles wide, N. and S. ; the southern part is hilly and rocky, but the northern part has good tracts of level ground. The height is about the same as that of Cebu, the culminating point being Mount Kopton, near the northeast extremity; its height, 10,150 feet in the Derrotero, but 2,870 on the chart. The coasts of the island are bordered by reefs, which on the northern side extend from the NE. to the SW. of the island at a distance of 12 miles. The productions of the island are cacao, tobacco, cotton, manila hemp, rice, maize, and sugar cane, and its forests furnish excellent wood. The district of Bohol includes the island of Sikijor and Pangias; the seat of government is Tagbilaran, on the southwest coast. Lapinin Island, on the northeast extremity of Bohol Island, is separated from it by a narrow channel 3i to 7 fathoms deep. It is 8 miles long, fiat, and covered by brambles. A narrow, steep coral reef surrounds it. The islet Tinuibo, lying SE. l)y S., 2i miles from the northern point of Lapinin Island, is small, clean, and steep-to. Between the islands there are 12 fathoms water. CEBU — CITIES AND TOWNS, 257 Danajon Bank forms the outer limit of tlie coral reef that borders the north coast of Bohol, which is composed of a great number of shoals and islands, between which only small vessels with a good local pilot can navigate, and a description of which would be long and diffuse. The eastern end of the bank, sometimes called Adam and Eve Bank, lies 10 miles NE. ^ E. from the north point of Lapinin Island, and 3 miles from the coast of Leyte.. The bank has two openings through it; the northern one is in a line between Mount Kopton in Bohol and Mount Three Peaks in Poro Island (Kamotes) ; and the northwestern one lies N. G0° W. of Mount Corte; both of these openings have a width of about a mile and a depth of S fathoms. On the bank, at great intervals, there are small islands covered by bushes and mangroves. CITIES AND TOWNS. Alcantara. — Population, 4,080. Alcoy. — Population, 5,040; situated 44 miles from Cebi'i. Alegria. — Population, 11,460; situated 90 miles from Cebii. Aloguinsan. — Population, 3, 993. Argao.— Population, 34,050; situated 33 miles from Cebii. Asturias. — Population, C,000; situated 109 miles from Cebu. Badian. — Population, 9,409 ; situated 51 miles from Cebu. Balamban. — Population, 9,610; situated 43 miles from Cebu. There are highroads to Joledo on the south and Astu- rias on the north. Bantayan. — Population, 10,016; situated 62 miles from Cebii. Barili. — Population, 20,914; situated 52 miles from Cebu. Bogo. — Population, 16,350; situated 69 miles from Cebu. It has a good harbor, the only one in the province. Boljoon. — Population, 7,413; situated 57 miles from Cebu. Borbon. — Population, 2,805; situated 51 miles from Cebu. Carcar. — Population, 30,300; situated 23 miles from Cebu. Carmen. — Population, 6,673; situated 25 miles from Cebu. Catman. — Population, 6,098. Compostela. — Population, 4,393. Consolacion. — Population, 4,616; situated 7 miles from Cebu. There are highroads to the neighboring cities. Cordoba. — Population, 5,009. 258 C'EBb' — CITIES AND TOWNS. Daan Bantayan. — Population, 8,530; situated 103 miles from Cebn. Dalaguete. — Population, 21,323; situated 49 miles from Cebu. Danao. — Population, 15,483 ; situated 4 miles from Cebii. Dumanjug. — Population, 13,171; situated 42 miles from Cebu. There are three highroads. Ginatilan. — Population, 12,144. Liiloan.— Population, 8,380. Malabuyoc. — Population, 13,113; situated 83 miles from Cebu. Mandaue. — Population, 15,307; situated 41 miles from Cebu. Medellin.— Population, 8,221. Minglanilla. — Population, 0,310; situated 5 miles from Cebu. Moalboal. — Poj^ulation, 9,509. Naga. — Population, 10,926; situated 11 miles from Cebu. Nueva Cdceres.— Population, 3,339; situated 42 miles from Cebu. Opon. — Population, 11,506; situated 9 miles from Cebu. Oslob. — Population, 6,013; situated 78 miles from Cebii. Pardo (El).— Population, 10,647. Pilar. — Population, 4,268; situated 38 miles from Cebi'i. Pinamungajan. — Population, 5,378. Poro.— Population, 7,000. . Ronda. — Population, 4,394; situated 434 miles from Cebu. There are highroads to the neighboring cities. Samboan. — Population, 10,422; situated 68 miles from Cebu. San Fernando. — Population, 12,155; situated 9 miles from Cebvi. San Francisco. — Population, 6,567. San Nicolas. — Population, 17,800. San Remigio. — Population, 6,192; situated 69 miles from Cebu. Santa Fe.— Population, 3,102. Santander. — Population, 4,686; situated 88 miles from Cebu. Sibonga. — Population, 23,455; situated 31 miles from Cebu. Sogod. — Population, 6,719. Tabogon. — Population, 8,631, CONCEPCIOX, LEYTE ISLAND AND PROVINCE. 25'J Talambang.— Population, G,22C; situated 1 mile from Cebii. Talisay.— Population, 19,000; situated (J miles from Cebu, to whicli there is a liigliroad. Toledo. — Population, 10,922; situated 39 miles from Cebii. Tuburan.— Population, 10,7G0; situated 511 miles from Cebu. DISTRICT OF CONCEPCION. Situated on the island of Panay, it is bounded on the north by the Sea of Masbate, on the south by Iloilo, on the east by the Sea of Negros Island, and on the west by Capiz. The area is 683 square miles and the population 19,342. The capital is Concepcion, with a poj)ulation of 5,736. It is situated 104 miles from Iloilo and has a post ofiice and tele- graph station. CITIES AND TOWNS. Ajuy. — Population, 1,000; situated 6 miles from Concep- cion. Carles. — Population, 10,300. Lemery. — Population, 3,G77; situated 30 miles from Con- cepcion. ISLAND AND PROVINCE OF LEYTE. The island of Leyte is bounded on the north by the canal separating it from Samar, on the east by the Pacific Ocean, on the west by the sea separating it from Bohol and Cebu, and on the south by the one separating it from Mindanao. It is extensive and irregular, having an area of 3,087 square miles and a population of 270,491. A high and abrupt moun- tain chain crosses the island nearly parallel to the west coast ; the coasts are high, but with good natural harbors. In the northern part and on the western slopes of the great sierras, streams of potable water and also many lagoons aljound. This is different from the eastern part, where the latter are scarce. The principal product of the island is abaca, but rice is also raised and cocoanut oil is extracted. There are un- worked mines of gold, magnetite, and sulphur. The capital is Tacloban, with a population of 5,226. It is situated 338 miles from Manila. ITINERARY OP COAST OF LEYTE — WEST COAST. The west coast of Leyte is in general safe and steei^-to. The fringing reefs do not extend more than a mile from the 260 LEYTE — WEST COAST. shore. A chain of higli mountains runs parallel to the coast, at a distance of 4 to 5 miles inland. The highest peak of the range appears to be Mount Sacripante (3,911 feet), in the southwestern part of the island. Gigantangan Island, off the northwest point of Leyte, is 2 miles long, NNE. and SSW., and 1 mile wide, and is clean on all sides except the south point, where there is a small reef. The channel that separates it from Leyte is 1 mile wide and 11 to 16 fathoms deep. Tabin Chico and Tabin Grande are two small bays sepa- rated by a tongue of land. Their depth is 7 to 11 fathoms. Tabango and Kampopo bays, separated by Point Ligiio, are larger than the Tabines, and appear to be deeper. The narrow reef that fringes this part of the coast follows the contour of these four bays. Port Palompon is formed by a narrow channel between the coast south of Point Kanaguayan and the reef on which is situated the island Tabok. The only entrance is to the north- ward, between the point and the island, the southern end of the channel being closed by low reefs covered by mangroves. Point Kanaguayan is bordered by a reef to the distance of 1^ cables, and the reef of Tai^ok Island extends 1^ miles WNW,, reducing between them the width of the passage to 2 cables, with a depth of 19 fathoms. Proceeding inwards, the passage becomes narrower and shoals gradually, so that in front of the church, where is the best anchorage, it is hardly a cable wide, with a depth of 7 fathoms. Anchorage can also be had close to the sandy point, alongside which vessels of any size can lie secured to the shore. From this point the depth diminishes gradually to the southward, and off Gumalak Island is only 2f fathoms. The reefs show at low water, and the edges are marked by poles with bushes on them ; but these must not be relied on. The town of Palompon is on the shore of the port. Sup- plies of beef and vegetables may be obtained; also fresh water. In the town of Palompon, as in other towns of the Philippine Islands, a tariff of prices is hung up in the Casa Real for the guidance of strangers, who can claim to be sup- plied for ten days at the prices quoted. Directions. — To make the port of Palompon the island Kalangaman should be brought to bear N. 64:° W., when a course S. 64° E. will lead for the entrance. LEYTE— WEST COAST. 2G1 Coast. — The reef that surrounds Tabok and Gumalak ishxnds and fringes the shore to a distance of 1^ miles, continues to the southward, round Point Duljugan, where it is ^ mile wide, to Port Dupon, which lies 2 miles to the eastward of the point. Point Duljugan is low and thinly wooded ; the southwestern point of Port Dupon is somewhat higher and has a little fort on it. Port Dupon has a depth of 38 fathoms in the center; the best anchorage is on the western side of the port, where the shore is less steep than on the east side and there is more shelter ; on the east side of the port the bottom consists of coral, and anchorage is considered very unsafe. The little bay of Siapon, 1| miles to the eastward, is sheltered from all winds but those from south to southeast ; the depth at the entrance is 15 'fathoms, lessening gradually inwards. The low point between the two bays can be dis- tinguished by a patch of cogonal on it. Water can be obtained in both bays. Kalunangan Point is low, flat, and bordered by a narrow reef. Anchorage can be had on the coast between Point Kalunangan and Point Biason in 9 fathoms, coarse sand. Okmok Bay. — To the eastward of Point Kalunangan the coast forms the great bay of Okmok, in the northwest part of which is Port Bello, with anchorage in 2f to 9 fathoms, mud. This is the only safe anchorage on the south coast of Leyte Island during the generality of typhoons. Jaloban River is a good-sized river with 5 feet water on the bar at low water and deeper water within. From the eastern bank of the river a clean, sandy beach, with good depth off it, stretches 1^ miles to the SE. as far as the town of Okmok. Okmok is situated near the shore and on the slope of Mount Aslum ; it is surrounded by a breastwork of stone with three ruined forts. Mount Aslum rises to a high and remarkable peak, NE. by E. -4^ miles from Okmok town. Kampukan peak, 2 miles NE. of Aslum peak, is much higher and more conical than that of Aslum. Both mountains abound in sulphur and copperas. Coast. — From Okmok to Baybay, a town lying about 23 miles to the southeastward of Okmok, the shore is low and consists of steep sand beach with generally soundings of 14 to 18 fathoms very close to it. From Baybay to Ilongos, 19 miles to the southward, the coast forms rocky headlands alternately with small, clean, and steep bays. 2G^ LEYTE — WEST COAST. Kamotes Islands. — This group consists of three ishmds connected by a reef, and one small detached islet, Tulang. The westernmost island, Pasijan, is 8^ miles long, north and south, and nearly 5 miles wide, and is clean and steep-to all round except that part of the eastern side where a reef that nearly dries at low water joins it to Poro Island. Tulang Island, off the northwest jDart, appears clean and steep. Poro Island is surrounded on all sides except the north- western by a reef of less than ^ mile in width ; the channel between Poro and Poson has a depth of 5 to 7 fathoms, and is practicable for navigation. The town of Poro is on the south side of the island, and anchorage may be had off the town at the distance of ^ mile ; but caution must be observed in approaching, as shallows that dry at low water run out a long distance. Poson, the northernmost of the group, lies 5^ miles SSE. of Point Kalunangan ; the channel between is clear and deep, but care must be taken not to approach the shore off Poson, as a reef extends to the northward of it about 1 mile. Tides. — The flood stream from the northward jDasses from west to east in the channel between Poson Island and Kalu- nangan Point and curves round the island to the southward. The flood stream from the southward, which has entered by Surigao Strait, meets the flood stream from the northward about 5 miles south of Kamotes. Cuatro Islas (four islands) is the name given to a group of four islets lying 3 miles off the coast of Leyte ; the southern- most of them, Jimukitan, bears WNW. about 4 miles from a little steep hill with a flat crown on the coast 6 miles north of Ilongos; this islet and the one 3 miles NW. of it (Majabas) are clear and steep-to ; the two others are surrounded by reefs. The passages between these islets and between them and the coast are safe. Coast. — From Ilongos the coast forms an elbow which measures 2^ miles across the town of Bato and then continues to the southward for 11| miles to the Point Green Hill, oppo- site Lapinin Isle, near Bohol. Shoal. — Off the village of Makalon, 2^ miles south of Bato, is a shoal, having over it from 2^ to 5 fathoms ; it is gener- ally marked by bushes. From Green Hill the coast trends eastward for nearly 6 miles, to the town of Masin, and then turns SE. ^ E. for 13 LEYTE — WEST COAST. '^G3 miles to Point Tuaiikaii (or Ninipo), the south extremity of the island of Leyte. All this part of the coast is formed of rocky points and small sand beaches, and is clean and steep- to, except before the town of Masin, and also around Point Tuankan. Masin is a town situated on a sand beach from which a ledge projects some 2 or 3 cables and dries at low water; a channel of 2f fathoms leads to the town. There is anchorage on a bank of small extent in 7 to 14 fathoms, sand, with the church bearing NW. Point Tuankan is low, and is formed of rock underworn by currents, giving it the appearance of a rampart. It is sur- rounded by a narrow steep reef with 4| to 9 fathoms at the edges and no bottom, with 92 fathoms line at 1 cable distance. Limasana Island, situated 2 miles to the SE. of the south- ern point of Leyte, is 4^ miles north and soutli and 1 wide, and has a remarkable hill on its northern part. The island is clean, and on its southeast part there is a sandy beach, where anchorage can be had in 2f fathoms at 1 cable from the shore. The channel between Limasana Island and Point Tuankan is safe. Tides. — The tidal streams run with great force here, the flood stream to the NW. and the ebb to the SE. Panaon Island, separated from the southeast point of Leyte by a narrow channel, is 17i miles loiig, NNW. and SSE., and 5 miles wide at its northern part. The island is mountainous and is divided throughout its length by a range of hills terminating to the south in a mountain 2,313 feet high, the slope of which forms the southern point of the island. The eastern coast is high and rugged, and shows several cascades of excellent water. The western coast, though steep, presents several sand beaches, where anchorage may be had in 7 to 9 fathoms, sand, but it is better to anchor in the shel- tered port of Liloan. Port Liloan has two entrances. The eastern entrance is very narrow ; the least depth in it is 2f fathoms, increasing to 4i and o^ fathoms in Panaon Strait. The water in it is so clear that the bottom can be seen readily. In order to enter the port from the eastward, steer for the narrow opening be- tween Leyte and Panaon Island, which runs S. 73° W, ; while a good distance off a group of cocoanut palms on Point Liloan 264 LEYTE — SOUTHEAST COAST. will be seen ; the soundings increase on approaching the en- trance; when 15 fathoms is obtained take the middle of the channel which leads to the anchorage coasting the reef that ranges along the shore of the port until in front of the town, then anchor in 5^ to 7 fathoms, sand. To enter by the western passage, the best mark to steer for is a little hill near Point Liloan, with cocoanut palms and some houses on it, taking care to clear a little reef NW. of the entrance point, near which the depth is 26 fathoms, and clos- ing as much as possible the sandy point of Panaon, and avoid- ing the coast of Leyte, from which a reef projects 3| miles to the SW, Between the southern edge of this reef and the sandy point of Liloan, which form the western entrance of the port, and which is 3A^ cables wide, the depth is 7 to 9 fathoms, shells. The shores of the port are sandy, and the town of Liloan is situated on a little plain. SuRiGAO Strait. — Surigao Strait is famous for having been traversed by Magellan when he crossed the Pacific Ocean and discovered the Philippine Islands. The strait is now less frequented than that of San Bernardino, which is more to windward in the northeast monsoon. It is, however, more direct and safer than that strait, but it obliges vessels that take it, if they are making for Manila, to work up the west coast of Negros and Panay and the east coast of Min- doro. It is of advantage to vessels going to the southern Philippines or to the Sulu Sea. The main strait is safe and deep throughout its length, and the shores of the islands that border it are steep-to. Steamers from the Cebu Sea making for ports on the east coast of Min- danao may find it advantageous to take the eastern passage between Dinagat and Bukas islands and the main coast of Mindanao. This channel will be described after the main strait. SOUTHEAST COAST. From Panaon Strait the coast trends north for 5^ miles, then turns abruptly to the west for another 5| miles to Mara- gusa Point, a rounded headland formed by the western slope of Mount Kabalian, which is 3,130 feet high; the coast line then continues north again for 8^ miles, to Ginungagan Bay. Throughout this entire length the coast is high and clean, LEYTE — NORTH COAST. 265 with deep water in tlie vicinity, but it is exposed to tlie open sea. Hinondayan Bay is very small ; an islet surrounded by rocks lies at the mouth ; tlie depth of water in the passages on either side of the islet is 11 fathoms, and within it is 3^ fathoms. Ginungagan Bay has a depth of 15 fathoms in the middle and 5i oflf the town of the same name, which stands on the left bank of the River Malaga at the head of the bay. The two islands Kabugan lie in the northern part of the bay, sep- arated from the main coast, which is sandy, by a channel 1 mile wide and 15 to 25 fathoms deep. Jinatungan Point lies 11 miles north of Ginungagan Bay, and is bordered by a reef which extends i mile out. A rocky islet and several rocks lie immediately south of the point at | of a mile's distance from the shore. Tai Tai Point, 10 miles NW. of Jinatungan Point, is also surrounded by a reef to a distance of ^ mile. From the point the coast trends north for 30 miles to the southern entrance of San Juanico Strait. All this tract of coast consists of sandy beaches with a good depth of water off them; there are many rivers, and several towns stand along the shore. The country inland is level and covered with dense wood, in- terrupted by cocoanut plantations and rice fields. NORTH COAST. The north coast of Leyte is imperfectly known ; Carigara must be a place of some trade, for steamers from Manila touch there about once a fortnight, but there is no information about it to hand. CITIES AND TOWNS. Abuyog.— Population, 9,112; situated 40 miles from Ta- cloban. Alang-Alang. — Population, 8,602; situated 18 miles from Tacloban. Albuera. — Population, 4,555; situated 18 miles from Ta- cloban. Almeria. — Population, 3,210; situated 63 miles from Ta- cloban. Babatugon. — Population, 2,213. Baliran.— Population, 6,201. 266 LEYTE— CITIES AND TOWNS. Baru. — Population, 12,322 ; situated 31 miles from Taclobau. Bate— Population, 3,651. Baybay.— Population, 17,367; situated 87 miles from Taeloban. Borauen. — Population, 21,290; situated 26 miles from Taeloban. Cabalian. — Population, 4,785; situated 130 miles from Taeloban. Caibiran. — Population, 4,153; situated 260 miles from Taeloban. Cajaganaan. — Population, 260. Capoocan. — Population, 1,622; situated 33 miles from Taeloban. Carigara. — Population, 13,732; situated 32 miles from Taeloban. Dagami. — Population, 25,000; situated 20 miles from Ta- eloban. Dulag.— Population, 10,113; situated 22 miles from Ta- eloban. Hilongos. — Population, 13,813; situated Ui; miles from Taeloban. Hindang. — Population, 5,314; situated 9 miles from Ta- eloban. Hinunangan. — Population, 7,899; situated 02 miles from Taeloban. Hinundayan. — Population, 3,890; situated 79 miles from Taeloban. Inopacan. — Population, 4,239. It is situated 92 miles from Taeloban and lias public liigliroads. Jaro. — Population, 12,475; situated 22 miles from Taelo- l)an. Leyte. — Population, 6,719. Liloan. — Population, 3,982. Maasin. — Population, 18,499, the township having 144,208; situatt'(l 150 miles from Taeloban. Mac-Crohon.— Population, 5, 780. Malibago.— Population, 1,119 ; situated 5 miles from Taelo- ban. Malitbog.— Population, 7,900. Maripipi.- -Population, 1,998; situated 1 mile from Leyte. Matalon. — Population, 0,140. Merida. — Population, 897. NEGROS — NORTH AND NORTHWEST COASTS. 267 Naval. — Population', 3,183; situated 59 miles from Taclo- baii. Ormoc— Population, 8,107. Palo. — Population, 17,736; situated 6 miles from Tacloban. It lias highroads to neighboring towns. Palompon. — Population, 7,858; situated 115 miles from Tacloban. Quiot. — Population, 2,422; situated 137 miles from Taclo- ban. San Isidro de Campo. — Population, 3,352; situated 56 miles from Tacloban. San Miguel. — Population, 4,126. Sogod. — Population, 4,722; situated 52 miles from Taclo- ban. Tanauan.— Population, 18,509; situated 10 miles from Tacloban. Tolosa. — Population, 5,587; situated 14 miles from Taclo- ban. Villaba. — Population, 3,257; situated 97 miles from Taclo- ban. ISLAND OF NEGROS. This island is mountainous and wild ; its coasts are difficult of access, and the breakers strong, except on the west coast from Point Bulucabo on the north to Palompon on the west, where it is marshy. A high mountain chain crosses it from Point Doong on the north to the harbor and point of Bom- bonon on the south ; from the last third extend several rami- fications of high mountains, terminating at the coast on the extreme south and in the Sierra Dumaguete. Its streams are not imi3ortant, being short and of little volume. The ground is uneven but fertile. The natives irrigate their estates, and produce tobacco, coffee, sugar cane, and wheat. Manufactures consist in fabrics of abaca and canonegro, of which boat cables are made. The interior of the island, covered with thick forests, is almost unexplored, being inhabited by a few savages. There are in the island 49 pueblos, 41 barrios, and 40 rancherias of subdued infieles. ITINERARY OF COAST OF NEGROS— NORTH AND NORTHWEST COASTS. Point Sagai, or Carey (Bito on English chart), the north- east extremity of the island, is of no great height, rocky and 268 NEGROS — NORTH AND NORTHWEST COASTS. surrounded by a slioal of ^ mile extent, wliicli dries in places at low water. The space between this point and the Dun Islets has not yet been surveyed. Bokabok Island, 2f miles NE. of Point Bito, is of 4- mile extent, and stands, along with several islets and rocks at the west of it, on a shoal which extends 4 miles NW. and SE. and 2 1 miles NE. and SW. Coast. — From Point Bito or Sagai to the north point of the island 15| miles W. by N., the shore is foul and rocky, with soundings of 3|- to 5 fathoms at a distance of 11 miles from it. Three sandy shoals, which uncover at low water, lie NNE. I E. of Point Guimugahan; the southernmost being 34^ miles, and the northern one 10 miles from the point. The north point of the island is an extensive, rounded, sandy cape, on which is a vantay ; it is surrounded by a shoal extending 4' to the northward, including Ilakaon Islet. From the north point to Point Tomonton 15 miles WSW., the shore is a long sandy beach, with a depth of 3 fathoms at about a mile from it. From Point Tomonton, a shoal extends 2| miles to the NW., and has 1^ fathoms at its end. Vessels navigating Iloilo Strait must give this point a berth of 3 miles. From Point Tomonton to Pandan, 24 miles S. 20° W., the coast is low, and bordered by a long sand beach, with sound- ings of 5|- fathoms at | a mile from it. Point Pandan, which, with Guimaras Island forms the narrow straits of Guimaras, has rocks on its northwest side, projecting to ^ mile, with 7 fathoms near them. Point Pandan to Sojoton. — From Point Pandan the coast continues low for 38 miles to the southward as far as the town of Suai, near the river Jimamailan; the l|-fathom shoal which borders Point Pandan grows out between that point and Makikili, to 4 miles from the land, almost joining the bank SE. of Ilampulugan, but to the southward of the latter point it closes the coast and a depth of 34^ fathoms is generally found at 1 mile from the coast. River Jimamailan. — Of the several small rivers that enter the sea on this coast, this river, near the town of the same name in the angle that the coast makes to the westward, is the most important. The entrance is indicated by stakes, placed by the natives in 1^ to 2 fathoms depth ; within the river the best anchorage is near a copse on the left bank, NEGROS— WEST COAST. '>G'.) wliere the water is deepest. Xeur Siuii the coast curves to the westward and increases in height ; about Point Sojoton it is high. Shoal. — A patch of 5^ fathoms lies If miles north of the town and hill of Tantanaian, with 50 fathoms at the distance of If miles north of it. WEST COAST. Point Sojoton is surrounded by reefs to the distance of 4 mile, with 7 fathoms at the edge and 2T fathoms at If miles to the west of the point. Makiliguian Point, a wooded bluff, is also surrounded by rocks. Linaon Bay, between these two points, affords anchorage in case of necessity in 7 to 9 fathoms, fine sand. Shoals. — A small rocky shoaJ, with 3^ fathoms on its outer edge, lies SS W. i mile from Point Makiliguian ; and another, with 8 fathoms on its outer edge, lies 1| miles from the j^oint, on the same bearing. Danjugan Island, 2 miles north of Point Binigsian, is 1 mile long, north and south, and is surrounded by a narrow, steep reef ; between it and the coast is another little islet, the chan- nel between which and the coast has a de^Dth of 8 fathoms. Half a mile southwest of Point Binigsian are Anajaugan Island and four other little islets close to it. South of the point there is anchorage in 9 to 17 fathoms, where good water may be obtained ; still farther south are the bays of Cartagena and Sipalai. Point Matatindok is steejj with a ffat crown, and is sur- rounded by rocks, one of which has, the appearance of a ves- sel under sail. Campomanes Bay, south of Point Matatindok, is clear, and of great depth, with very steep shores, there being 17 to 28 fathoms almost touching the shore. Nabulao Bay, south of Campomanes, is obstructed by an islet, and by a reef which extends from both sides ; before it is a shoal, surrounded by deep water, situated f of a mile soutli of the point between the two bays. SOUTHW^EST AND SOUTHEAST COASTS. From Campomanes Bay to Point Kauitan the shore is rocky ; but it is safe and steep-to, soundings showing no bottom with 37 fathoms at ^ cable distance in many places. From Point 270 nk(;k()s — southwest and southeast coasts. Kauitau to Point Siaton, tlie south point of Negros, it is also safe and steep-to, and presents several beaches including the mouths of small unimportant rivers. During the northeast monsoon vessels can anchor off the town of Tolon, but boats only can enter the river at high water. From Point Siaton to Point Dumaguete the shore is sandy and clear, with soimdings of 2f to (J fathoms at 1 cable from it, falling then abrupth' to 32 fathoms. Port Bombonon, 1 mile NW. of the point of the same name, is 2 miles wide and 54- fathoms deep, and completelj^ sheltered ; but the entrance is reduced to a width of 75 yards and a depth of 2f fathoms by a ridge of rocks extending from the south shore. Port Siit is small but clear, with good holding ground, and sheltered ; the depth within is from 3f to 8 fathoms, and there is a rivulet with good water. Point Zamboanguita is flat and sandy ; a shoal of 2 fathoms extends 2 cables from it. South of the point there is good anchorage in 7 fathoms. The town of Zamboanguita is a mile inland of the point. Point Dauin is sandy and flat, with trees on it rather higher than those that grow on the other point of the coast ; it can be passed close- to, as it is clear and steep, as is also the entire coast between points Zamboanguita and Dumaguete, being sandy, clear, and steep, with 12 fathoms at a short distance. Apo Island is 300 feet high, visible 24 miles; it is clear and steep-to, except on its western side, which is rocky; it is 1 mile long, north and south, and of medium height. Current. — In the channel between Apo and the coast of Negros, the current passes constantly from north to south Avith variable velocity. Point Dumaguete is a flat, salient point of sand, to the north of which is the town of Dumaguete, the largest in the province, of 13,584 inhabitants, chiefly engaged in collecting turtle shell. Anchorage can be had off the town in 7 fathoms but it is bad, as vessels are liable to drag off into deep water. Tanon Strait, between Negros and Cebu, is 90 miles long and 14 miles wide at the northern part, and 3 miles wide at the southern entrance. The shores are steep and little frequented . NEGROS— EAST COAST. 271 EAST COAST. From Point Bito the coast trends SE. for 7 miles to Point Mokabok, and is bordered by a reef, which extends more than a mile from it. Bagunbanua Islet is situated on the southwest part of a reef, which extends 2| miles NW. and SE., with a detached rocky patch to the north ; the channel between the islet and the coast reef is 4^ fathoms deep, and is only fit for small coasters. Danao River. — Between points Mokabok and Okre, which are both of yellow clay and steep, is the mouth of the great river Danao, with a depth of 2f fathoms on the bar at low water, and 5^ fathoms up the stream. Point Tiklin, 19 miles SW. by S. of Point Okre, is flat and covered by mangroves. The Spanish chart shows an islet on its northeast part, with a shoal projecting f of a mile to the eastward. On the northern and western sides of an islet, in a bay 1^ miles north of Point Tiklin, there is anchorage in 4^ fathoms ; there is no passage between this islet and the point to the southward. Point Tabon, 3 miles south of Point Tiklin, is low and sandy ; the sandy beach between the two points must not be approached closely, as the water is shoal. Refugio Island is about 1^ miles long, north and south, and 1 mile wide ; the north part is high ; off the south part is a little shoal. The channel between Refugio Island and the coast is about a mile wide, and affords good anchorage in 12 fathoms, mud. The channel can be entered from either end, but a wide berth must be given to the shoal off Point Tiklin and the western point of Refugio. Tides. — North of Refugio the flood stream sets to the SW. and the ebb to the NW. ; but south of Refugio they set in the opposite direction. Coal. — Layers of coal have recently (1879) been discovered in this part of Negros, and outcrops of coal have been found in the rivers which enter the sea near the towns of Calatrava and Talabe. Coast. — From Point Tabon to Point Panay the coast is steep, clear, and covered by mangroves. Point Jilaitan is steep-to. Point Panay is flat and sandy, with rocks on its northern side ; there is anchorage in 3 fathoms to the south- ward of it before the little town and river Guijolgan. 272 WESTERN NEGROS PROVINCE. Between Guijolgan and Kateal a slioal extends to a short distance. Point San Jose is low, very steep, and surrounded by bowl- ders ; from this point to the Bais Islands the coast is steep and clear. Bais Islands are two liigh islands surrounded by sand banks, which extend 2 miles to the northeast, and appear almost to fill the bight of the coast in which they are situated, between points Teka and Kanamai; both these points are foul. Point Amblan is flat, steep, and clear ; not far from it is the town of Amblan, of 5,500 inhabitants, engaged in the cultivation of cacao. There is anchorage before tlie town in 4 to 13 fathoms, sand. The southern entrance of the strait of Taiion is very nar- row; the shores are steep, and the tidal streams at spring reach a velocity of 5 to 6 knots, with strong races and eddies ; at neaps the velocity is 2 to 3 knots. A fuller account of these tide streams will be given after the description of the eastern side of the strait. PROVINCE OF WESTERN NEGROS. Situated on Negros Island, it is bounded on the north by the Visayas Sea, on the west by the Paragua Sea, and on the south and east by the Province of Eastern Negros. The area is 1,929 square miles, and the population 226,995. The capital is Bacolod, with a population of 6,268. It is the residence of the politico-military governor, the secretary, judge, attorney general, and several public functionaries. It is situated 379 miles from Manila. CITIES AND TOWNS. Arguelles.— Population, 2, 390. Bag-o. — Population, 7,092; situated 16 miles from Bacolod. Binalbalgan.— Population, 5,135; situated 16 miles from Bacolod. Cabangcalan. — Population, 7,636; situated 54 miles from Bacolod. Cadiz Nuevo.— Population, 7,046; situated 34 miles from Bacolod. Calatrava. — Population, 2,720; situated 75 miles from Bacolod. The barrios of San Carlos, San Isidore, and Guad- alupe increase the population to 4,702. EASTERN XEGR08 PROVINCE. 273 Carlota (La). — Population, 12,384; situated 29 miles from Bacolod. Cauayan. — Population, 4,644. Dancalan. — Population, 1,445; situated 41 miles from Bacolod. Escalante. — Population, 3, 000 ; situated 1 mile from Bacolod. Granada. — Population, 2,804 ; situated 8 miles from Bacolod. Hog:. — Population, 0,070. Isabela. — Population, 11,104. Isiu. — Population, 1,590. Jimamaylan. — Population, 0,758; situated 50 miles from Bacolod. Jinigaran.— Population, 13,020; situated 28 miles from Bacolod. Minuluan. — Population, 11,338; situated 5 miles from Bacolod. Murcia.— Population, 8,000 ; situated 8 miles from Bacolod. Pontevedra. — Population, 12,000. San Enrique. — Population, 3,007. Sara via. — Population, 15,304; situated 8 miles from Baco- lod. Silay. — Population, 14,537; situated 8 miles from Bacolod. Suay. — Population, 2,972; situated 41 miles from Bacolod. Sumag. — Population, 4,332. Valladolid.— Population, 14,000; situated 15 miles from Bacolod. PROVINCE OF EASTERN NEGROS. It is bounded on tlie north and west by Western Negros, on the south by Mindanao, and on the east by Cebu and Bohol. The population is 94^782. The capital is Dumaguete, with a population of 13,584, the township having 13,013. It is situated 130 miles from Bacolod. CITIES AND TOWNS. Amblan. — Population, 5,500; situated 13 miles from Duma- guete. Ayungon. — Population, 1,107. Ayuquitan.— Population, 3,171; situated 9 miles from Dumaguete. Bacon. — Population, 8,370. Bais. — Population, 9,304; situated 27 miles from Duma- guete. 274 ROMBLOX PROVINCE. Dauin. — Population, 8,000; situated 8 miles from Duma- guete. There are roads leading to neighboring towns. Guijulungan. — Population, 7,000; situated 73 miles from Dumaguete. Jimalaud. — Population, 5,550; situated 59 miles from Dumagut^e. Manjuyod. — Population, 7,480; situated 35 miles from Dumaguete. Nuestra Senora de la Victoria. — Population, 2,030. Nueva Valencia. — Population, 0,310. Siaton. — Population, 8,142; situated 203 miles from Duma- guete. Sibulan. — Population, 0,340; situated 4 miles from Duma- guete. Tanjay. — Population, 12,408 ; situated 19 miles from Duma- guete. Tayasan. — Population, 1,509 ; situated 55 miles from Dama- guete. Tolon.— Population, 1,514. Zamboanguita. — Population, 5,003; situated 10 miles from Dumaguete. PROVINCE OF ROMBLON. This province consists of the following six islands : Rom- blon (the principal one), Tablas, Sibuyan, Banton, Simara, and Maestre Campo. It is bounded on the north by the Tayabas Sea, on the south by the Visayas Sea, on the east by the Sea of Masbate, and on the west by the Sea of Mindoro. The area is 813 square miles and the population 38,033, dis- tributed among 13 barrios and 3 rancherias of infieles. The capital is Romblon, with a population of 0,704. It is situated on the harbor of the same name at the north of the island, 204 miles from Manila. It is the residence of the politico-military commander. CITIES AND TOWNS. Azagra.— Population, 3,980; situated 19 miles from Rom- blon. Badajoz. — Population, 3,234; situated 9 miles from Rom- bl(.n. Banton. — Population, 3,449; situated 151 miles from Rom- l)lon. Cagidiocan.— Population, 3,036. SAMAR — EAST COAST. 275 Corcuera. — Population, 1,995; situated 4 miles from Rom- blon. Liooc. — Population, -4,500 ; situated 38 miles from Romblon. Magallanes. — Population, 1,055. Odiongan. — Population, 5,924; situated 34 miles from Romblon. ISLAND AND PROVINCE OF SAMAR. Situated to the southeast of Luzon, it is bounded on the north by the Strait of San Bernardino, on the south by the Jalianetes Canal, separating it from Leyte Island, on the east by the Pacific Ocean, and on the west by the Visayas Sea. It is very mountainous, with high, steep coasts. A number of sierras and mountains extend in various directions, forming valleys and glens fertilized by numerous rivers, which, how- ever, have little current and volume. The length of the island is 155 miles. The chief products are abaca, rice, and cocoanuts, oil being extracted from the latter. Among the medicinal plants the most highly valued is the catbalonga seed. Commerce is quite active in spite of the few means of communication and the dangerous coasts. The island is vis- ited yearly by tornadoes which devastate crops and cause much damage to agriculture. The high mountains and thick forests of the interior are inhabited by a great number of savages who have sought refuge here. The area is 4,699 square miles and the population 200,753, distributed among 43 pueblos, 208 visitas, and 3 rancherias of subdued infieles. The capital is Catbalogan, with a population of 6,459. It is situated on the harbor and bay of like name on the west of the island and opposite Buad, and at a distance of 338 miles from Manila. It is the residence of the politico-military governor. ITINERARY OF COAST OF SAMAR — EAST COAST. The east coast of Samar has not been sufficiently explored to afford an exact description. It is, however, known that the coast is irregular and hilly, bordered by little islets and rocks, and fringed by a narrow reef which is clean and steep-to ; that there is no good port on the coast, and that the several bays which ox)en along it offer neither good anchorage nor shelter from the winds and seas of the Pacific Ocean. Cape Espiritu Santo, the northeastern extremity of Samar, lies 11 miles ESE. of Palapa Port, and is formed of high land 276 SAMAR — EAST COAST. scarped and steep, visible in clear weather at a distance of 40 miles, serving as an excellent mark for working tlie Strait of San Bernardino. The mountain Mesa de Palapa, which rises 10 miles SW. of Cape Espiritu Santo, is always visible to a distance of 42 miles. Borongan, in latitude 11° 41' N"., is the only place on the coast where supplies can be obtained. The town stands at the bottom of a little bay about a mile wide and G cables deep, with a sandy beach at the head of it. The river Burumhan discharges itself into this bay, the entrance to which is between the islands Ando and Divinubo, both moderately high. The depth of water is 37 fathoms between these islands, 26 between them and the bay, and 5^ fathoms very close to the shore of the bay. Ando Island is united by a reef to Anitaguipan Point on the main coast to the north- ward ; and there are islets and reefs between Divinubo Island and the i^oint of the coast south of Borongan. A small steep rocky shoal lies in the middle of the bay, with the south point of Ando Island bearing N. 70° E. Anchorage. — During the northeast monsoon the best anchorage is about 4 cables SW. of the middle of Ando Island ; during the southwest monsoon there is good anchor- age in the Bay of Borongan, and also in another bay imme- diately to the south, in 9 fathoms at 6 cables from the shore. The Suribao, or Saru River, enters the sea about 2i miles south of Borongan, with a wide estuary closed by a narrow bar. This river takes its rise to the SW., not far from the source of the Vasey River, which flows into San Pedro Bay. The coast. — From Borongan to the southward the coast is less elevated than it is to the northward. There are extensive cocoanut plantations between Borongan and Lanang, chiefly utilized for the production of cocoanut oil. An extensive, but little known bay opens between the north part of the Peninsula of Guiuan and Nagos Point. In the entrance of this bay and to the northward of it there are several islets united together by a reef. The Peninsula of Guiuan is fringed by a reef which extends at farthest to 1 mile from the shore. Near the edge of the reef several sulphur springs gush forth, which are covered at high water, but are never- theless not brackish. SAMAR — SOUTH COAST. 277 SOUTH COAST. South coast of Samar (cli. 4G, p. 277) is formed by a tongue of land of moderate height, terminated by a little island. The town of Guiuan stands on the western shore 10^ miles from the south point. The land between this point and the town is higher than the rest, and is fronted by a wide reef extend- ing 7 miles to the west of the point and 6 miles SW. of the town. Between the town of Guiuan and Point Gigoso, which lies 13 miles WNW. and has a little hill on it, there is a bay of irregular outline and full of danger ; the shores are completely hidden by mangroves and fronted by a reef, an opening in which, however, leads to anchorage in 3f to 6 fathoms oppo- site the town of Guiuan. Manikani Island, 4:^ miles SW. of Guiuan, is nearly circu- lar, 2j miles in diameter, with a central hill of moderate height. It is surrounded by a reef which reaches 5 miles to the NW., with a width of 2^ miles, and having on its end the islets Baul and Binabasalan. Between the island and reef of Manikani and the main coast reef, there is a deep channel running 8 miles SE. and NW. This channel is 2 miles wide and 11 to 20 fathoms deej), with several little islets in it. Vessels of all sizes can find anchorage in this channel under the shelter of the islets. The southern entrance to this channel, between the south- east point of Manikani and the western edge of the reef off the south point of Samar, is l^ miles wide and 15 fathoms deep in the middle. At 7 cables NE. of Manikani there is a rock which dries at low water, and which can be passed on either side ; but the best course to follow is to leave this dry rock and the islets Kambasingan and Kabalarian to the west, and Kaninoan Islet to the northward. The northern entrance, between the islet Balinalto, on the shore of the bay (with a vantay on its southern end), and the islets Baul and Binabasalan on the end of the Manikani Reef, is I of a mile wide and 17 to 20 fathoms deep. Anchorage may be found in the opening of the reef leading to the town of Guiuan, with the church bearing NE., care being taken to avoid the edges of the reef on both sides, as well as a small shoal patch in mid-channel and a large shoal near the anchorage. The depth of water at the entrance of this opening is 14 fathoms, lessening gradually to 6 and 3f ,<-c\ V X A/